NC 2014 Eng

blank page
Terms and conditions ■ Terms & conditions
Terms and conditions
Disclaimer
This Scheme Document is the property of BRE Global Limited and is made publicly available for information purposes only. Any
testing, assessment, certification or approval activity related to this Scheme Document must be conducted in accordance with
BRE Global Limited’s approved processes, and such activity may only be undertaken by authorised employees, agents, and
associates of the Building Research Establishment Limited and BRE Global Limited, or Approved Party(ies). Any party wishing
to use or reproduce this Scheme Document to offer testing, assessment, certification or approval must apply to BRE Global
Limited for training, assessment and an associated licence, in order to qualify as an Approved Party; a fee will normally be
charged. BRE Global Limited will not unreasonably refuse such applications. BRE Global Limited accepts no responsibility for
any unauthorised use or distribution by others of this Scheme Document and may take legal action to prevent such
unauthorised use or distribution.
Copyright
The information and images contained in this document are the property of BRE Global Limited unless explicitly stated to the
contrary, and are protected by copyright laws. The information and images contained in this document may be downloaded
and printed without requiring specific permission but remains the intellectual property, technical know-how and copyrighted
material of BRE Global Limited. Such material is not to be used in a derogatory manner, in a misleading context or for
commercial purposes. Where such material is being issued to others, the source including the web address and copyright
status must be acknowledged. We may require you to register your details before downloading certain information or
documents.
Trade Marks
BRE, BRE Global, BREEAM, Smartwaste and the Green Guide are all trademarks owned by either BRE or BRE Global Limited and
may not be used without written permission from BRE or BRE Global Limited.
Acknowledgements
BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out 2014 has been made possible through the continued efforts of many dedicated BRE
Group staff members, the BRE Global Limited Governing Body, the BRE Global Limited Standing Panel of Experts, BREEAM
assessors and those who have responded to our consultation calls and meetings or provided feedback in other ways.
BRE Global Limited also extends its gratitude to those who support BREEAM by continuing to specify and apply the method
and contribute toward a sustainable built environment.
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2014
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 5.0 – Issue Date: 23/08/2016 i

Contents BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Table of contents
Terms and conditions i
Table of contents ii
List of tables v
List of figures vii
About BRE Global Limited 1
About this Scheme Document 2
Introduction to BREEAM 4
Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version 13
Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings 21
The BREEAM evidential requirements 29
Management 36
Man 01 Project brief and design 38
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning 44
Man 03 Responsible construction practices 49
Man 04 Commissioning and handover 56
Man 05 Aftercare 62
Health and Wellbeing 68
Hea 01 Visual comfort 70
Hea 02 Indoor air quality 87
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories 101
Hea 04 Thermal comfort 104
Hea 05 Acoustic performance 111
Hea 06 Safety and security 125
Energy 131
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions 133
Ene 02 Energy monitoring 145
Ene 03 External lighting 152
Ene 04 Low carbon design 155
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage 164
Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems 168
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems 172
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment 178
Ene 09 Drying space 185
ii Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 5.0 – Issue Date: 23/08/2016

Table of contents ■ Contents
Transport 188
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility 189
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities 196
Tra 03 Cyclist facilities 200
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity 209
Tra 05 Travel plan 216
Water 219
Wat 01 Water consumption 220
Wat 02 Water monitoring 231
Wat 03 Water leak detection 235
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment 239
Materials 242
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts 243
Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection 259
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials 262
Mat 04 Insulation 273
Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience 277
Mat 06 Material efficiency 281
Waste 285
Wst 01 Construction waste management 286
Wst 02 Recycled aggregates 294
Wst 03 Operational waste 299
Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes 304
Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change 306
Wst 06 Functional adaptability 310
Land Use and Ecology 313
LE 01 Site selection 314
LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features 318
LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology 324
LE 04 Enhancing site ecology 332
LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity 337
Pollution 342
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants 343
Pol 02 NOx emissions 351
Pol 03 Surface water run-off 358
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 5.0 – Issue Date: 23/08/2016 iii
Contents BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution 375
Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution 378
Innovation 381
Inn 01 Innovation 382
Appendices 385
Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types 386
Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings 388
Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings 390
Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments 391
Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction Simple Building Assessments 397
Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates 402
BREEAM New Construction 2014 Technical Manual - Schedule of Changes to the Scheme Document 404
iv Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 5.0 – Issue Date: 23/08/2016

List of tables ■ List of Tables
List of tables
Table 1 BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 environmental sections and assessment issues 7
Table 2 List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 13
Table 3 BREEAM rating benchmarks 22
Table 4 Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level 23
Table 5 BREEAM Environmental section weightings 25
Table 6 Example BREEAM score and rating calculation 27
Table 7 Minimum standards for a BREEAM Very Good rating 28
Table 8 BREEAM Evidence principles 31
Table 9 General evidence types 33
Table 10 Minimum values of average daylight factor required 70
Table 11 Daylighting uniformity criteria 72
Table 12 Space type and illuminance requirements - both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance)
should be met. 72
Table 13 View out building specific requirements. 74
Table 14 Internal and external lighting building specific requirements. 75
Table 15 Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required. 76
Table 16 Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point
illuminance) should be met. 77
Table 17 Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights 79
Table 18 : VOC criteria by product type 89
Table 19 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Education buildings 111
Table 20 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Healthcare buildings 113
Table 21 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings 113
Table 22 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Law courts buildings 114
Table 23 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types 115
Table 24 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions 117
Table 25 Ene 01 EPR NC benchmark scale 133
Table 26 Innovation credits 134
Table 27 Best practice energy efficient measures in laboratories 173
Table 28 Examples of solutions deemed to comply with the criteria for the reduction of unregulated energy load
from significantly contributing systems 178
Table 29 .Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) score. 189
Table 30 Default hours of operation by building type for a typical day 194
Table 31 Credits available for Tra02 for different building types 196
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 5.0 – Issue Date: 23/08/2016 v

List of Tables BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Table 32 Cycle storage criteria for each building type 200
Table 33 Credits available in Tra04 Maximum car parking capacity for different building types 209
Table 34 Default occupancy rates by building type 212
Table 35 BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building water consumption 220
Table 36 Water efficient consumption levels by component type 224
Table 37 defines for each component type the appropriate data that will need to be collected from manufacturers’
product information to complete the assessment 225
Table 38 Elements assessed by building type 243
Table 39 Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points 244
Table 40 The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking 250
Table 41 Green Guide points uplift by EPD type 252
Table 42 Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings 255
Table 43 The number of BREEAM credits achieved is determined as follows 262
Table 44 Location and use and material categories. 265
Table 45 Example calculation for route 1 266
Table 46 Example point allocation and award of credits 267
Table 47 Example calculation for single material category 268
Table 48 Example credit calculation for where a combination of routes are used 269
Table 49 Green Guide rating points/element 274
Table 50 Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradation effects to consider 277
Table 51 Construction waste resource efficiency benchmarks 286
Table 52 Diversion from landfill benchmarks 287
Table 53 Construction waste groups 291
Table 54 Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high grade aggregate specified per application (where present)
that is recycled or secondary aggregate 295
Table 55 BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value 319
Table 56 Broad habitat types (Source: Countryside Survey 2007) 324
Table 57 Inclusive analysis of average total taxon richness by broad habitat in Fields and Other Main Land Cover
Parcels plots in Great Britain. 326
Table 58 Additional measures for the improvement of long term biodiversity 338
Table 59 Default system operational design life values 346
Table 60 Average annual leakage rates for the UK 346
Table 61 List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP 349
Table 62 Excess oxygen conversion factors 354
Table 63 Definition of flood zones by country 371
vi Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 5.0 – Issue Date: 23/08/2016

List of figures ■ List of Figures
List of figures
Figure 1 The BREEAM Certification mark 5
Figure 2 BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan of
Work 2013 10
Figure 3 UK New Construction and the UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes and the assessment options 393
Figure 4 Example of Interim Certificate at Design Stage 402
Figure 5 Example of Final Certificate at Post Construction Stage 403
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 5.0 – Issue Date: 23/08/2016 vii
blank page
About BRE Global Limited ■ About
About BRE Global Limited

BRE Global Limited (part of the BRE (Building Research Establishment) Group) is an independent third party approvals body
offering certification of fire, security and sustainability products and services to an international market.
BRE Global Limited’s mission is to 'Protect People, Property and the Planet'.
We aim to achieve this by:
1. Researching and writing standards

2. Testing and certification in the areas of fire, electronics, security and sustainability
3. Developing world-leading sustainability assessment methods
4. Undertaking research and consultancy for clients and regulators
5. Promulgating standards and knowledge throughout the industry through publications and events
6. Developing and delivering training
BRE Global Limited’s product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world renowned testing
laboratories.
BRE Global Limited is custodian of a number of world-leading brands including:
1. Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) - the world’s leading environmental
assessment method for buildings
2. Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) for approval of fire and security products and services.
BRE Global Limited is a trading subsidiary of the BRE Trust, the registered research and education charity which owns the BRE
Group.
BRE Global Limited

Bucknalls Lane
Watford
Hertfordshire
WD25 9XX
T +44 (0)333 321 8811

F +44 (0)1923 664 910
E enquiries@breglobal.com
www.breglobal.com
www.greenbooklive.com
Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 5.0 – Issue Date: 23/08/2016 1

This document BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
About this Scheme Document

This document is the technical manual for the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 Scheme. It describes an environmental
performance standard against which new, non-domestic buildings in the UK can be assessed and achieve a BREEAM New
Construction rating.
The Scheme Document and the information detailed within is intended for use by trained, qualified and licensed BREEAM UK
Assessors in accordance with the procedural and operational requirements of BREEAM (as described in the BREEAM and CSH:
Operational Guidance, SD5070) under the terms and conditions of a BREEAM UK licence. This document should be used by
non-BREEAM UK Assessors for reference purposes only.
Application of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme in

Wales, Scotland, England and Northern Ireland
Standalone versions of the technical manual of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme are available for the
assessment of buildings in Scotland, Northern Ireland, England and Wales. These technical manuals detail the country-specific
criteria and benchmarks applicable to BREEAM assessments of new buildings in their respective territory.
The online version of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 technical manual contains all applicable criteria and benchmarks
for all countries of the UK. Both the UK online and downloadable country-specific manuals for Scotland, Wales, Northern
Ireland and England are available from www.breeam.com
This document is the England technical manual for the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 Scheme. It describes an
environmental performance standard against which new, non-domestic buildings in this territory can be assessed and achieve
a BREEAM New Construction rating.
The Scheme Document and the information detailed within is intended for use by trained, qualified and licensed BREEAM UK
Assessors in accordance with the procedural and operational requirements of BREEAM (as described in the BREEAM and CSH:
Operational Guidance, SD5070) under the terms and conditions of a BREEAM UK licence. This document should be used by
non-BREEAM UK Assessors for reference purposes only.
The full online version of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 technical manual contains the criteria and benchmarks for all
territories of the UK. Both the UK online and downloadable country-specific manuals for Scotland, Wales, Northern Ireland and
England are available from www.breeam.com
Changes to this BREEAM Scheme Document

This Scheme Document is subject to revision and can be re-issued from time-to-time by BRE Global Limited. A schedule of the
publication date for each issue of this document is provided below.
Any additions to this document that necessitates its re-issue will be highlighted throughout the text (note: deletions are not
identified in the updated issue). A detailed list of all additions and deletions made to each issue is available separately. BREEAM
assessors can download this list of changes from the BREEAM assessor's Extranet. The list of changes is also available to other
parties on request; please email breeam@bre.co.uk.
Scheme Doc. Issue no. Date of issue

SD5076 5.0 (current) 23/08/2016
SD5076 4.1 09/03/2016
SD5076 4.0 15/10/2015
2 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 5.0 – Issue Date: 23/08/2016

About this Scheme Document ■ This document

SD5076 3.0 26/01/2015
SD5076 2.0 07/08/2014
SD5076 1.0 27/05/2014

Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Introduction to BREEAM
BREEAM (Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method) is the world’s first sustainability rating scheme
for the built environment and has contributed much to the strong focus in the UK on sustainability in building design,
construction and use. BREEAM is now an international standard that is locally adapted, operated and applied through a
network of international operators, assessors and industry professionals. Through its application and use BREEAM helps
clients measure and reduce the environmental impacts of their buildings and in doing so create higher value, lower risk assets.
To date, BREEAM has been used to certify over 260,000 building assessments across the building life cycle and it is being
applied in over 50 countries.
Aims of BREEAM
To mitigate the life cycle impacts of buildings on the environment
To enable buildings to be recognised according to their environmental benefits
To provide a credible, environmental label for buildings
To stimulate demand and create value for sustainable buildings, building products and supply chains.
Objectives of BREEAM
To provide market recognition of buildings with a low environmental impact
To ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in the planning, design, construction and operation of
buildings and the wider built environment.
To define a robust, cost effective performance standard surpassing that required by regulations.
To challenge the market to provide innovative, cost effective solutions that minimise the environmental impact of
buildings.
To raise awareness amongst owners, occupants, designers and operators of the benefits and value of buildings with
a reduced life cycle impact on the environment.
To allow organisations to demonstrate progress towards corporate environmental objectives.
BREEAM is developed and operated to meet the following underlying principles:
Ensure environmental quality through an accessible, holistic and balanced measure of environmental impacts.
Use quantified measures for determining environmental quality.
Adopt a flexible approach that encourages and rewards positive outcomes, avoiding prescribed solutions.
Use robust science and best practice as the basis for quantifying and calibrating a cost effective and rigorous
performance standard for defining environmental quality.
Reflect the social and economic benefits of meeting the environmental objectives covered.
Provide a common international framework of assessment that is tailored to meet the ‘local’ context including
regulation, climate and sector.
Integrate building professionals in the development and operational processes to ensure wide understanding and
accessibility.
Adopt third party certification to ensure independence, credibility and consistency of the label.
Adopt existing industry tools, practices and other standards wherever possible to support developments in policy
and technology, build on existing skills and understanding and minimise costs.
Align technically and operationally with relevant international standards, including the suite of standards on the
‘Sustainability of Construction Works’ prepared by the European Committee for Standardisation Technical Committee
CEN/TC 350.
Engage with a representative range of stakeholders to inform ongoing development in accordance with the
underlying principles and the pace of change in performance standards (accounting for policy, regulation and market
capability).

Introduction to BREEAM ■ Introduction
The aims, objectives and principles of BREEAM are embodied within a Core Technical Standard owned and managed by BRE
Global Limited. This is applied through a suite of BREEAM Schemes covering aspects of the built environment life cycle. These
schemes are locally developed and operated by a number of different organisations, called National Scheme Operators
(NSOs), across a range of countries.
For a full list of BREEAM National Scheme Operators and Schemes visit www.breeam.com.
The UK BREEAM Schemes

BRE Global Limited is the National Scheme Operator of BREEAM in the UK. We develop and operate a number of BREEAM
schemes, each designed to assess the environmental performance of buildings at various stages in the life cycle, and these
include:
BREEAM Communities for the master-planning of a larger community of buildings

BREEAM New Construction for new build, domestic and non-domestic buildings
BREEAM In-Use for existing non-domestic buildings in-use
BREEAM Refurbishment for domestic and, from summer 2014, non-domestic building fit-outs and refurbishments
Independent BREEAM assessors, trained, qualified and licensed by BRE Global Limited can undertake a BREEAM assessment
using this Scheme Document and associated reporting and calculation tools.
Once an assessment is complete and quality assured BRE Global Limited will issue a BREEAM certificate. The BREEAM certificate
provides formal verification that the Assessor has completed an assessment of a building in accordance with the
requirements of the scheme and its quality standards and procedures.
A BREEAM certificate provides assurance to any interested party that a building’s BREEAM rating, at the time of certification,
accurately reflects its performance against the BREEAM standard.
Anyone wishing to verify the BREEAM rating of a building can do so by either checking its BREEAM certificate, which will contain
the certification mark, (see below) or by searching the BREEAM buildings listings on www.greenbooklive.com. Examples of a
BREEAM UK New Construction certificate can be found in Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates.
Figure 1 The BREEAM Certification mark
Ensuring quality and consistency

All BREEAM Schemes are developed and operated by National Scheme Operators in accordance with the Code for a
Sustainable Built Environment. The Code for a Sustainable Built Environment is a set of strategic principles and requirements
which define an integrated approach to the design, management, evaluation and certification of the environmental, social
and economic impacts of the built environment.

The Code is interpreted through the BREEAM Core Process and Technical Standards. These linked documents set out the
requirements that a compliant scheme must meet in order to be affiliated with the Code. The Standards ensure that a
common scientific and performance basis is used by all compliant schemes operated by National Scheme Operators, while
ensuring that these are relevant to local demands, standards and practices.
The Code and associated standards are developed and maintained by BRE Global Limited with direction from the BREEAM
Strategy Board, under the auspices of the BRE Global Governing Board.
To ensure competence, impartiality and performance capability, all National Scheme Operators are required to maintain
scheme operations to internationally agreed standards and seek accreditation from a national accreditation body.
BRE Global Limited is a United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) accredited certification body (No. 0007). The scope of
our accreditation to ISO/IEC 17065 ‘Conformity assessment - Requirements for bodies certifying products, processes and
services’ can be verified on the UKAS website, and includes BREEAM Scheme SD123 ‘Environmental assessments of the built
environment – certification of the process’.
BRE Global Ltd is also certified to ISO 9001 ‘Quality management systems – Requirements’ for all its BREEAM related activities.
As an accredited certification body, BRE Global Limited maintains an open and accountable governance structure. The
operation of BREEAM is overseen by an independent Governing Body and a Standing Panel for Peer & Market Review.
The Governing Body represents stakeholder interests to ensure, amongst other things, that we at BRE Global Limited are
acting independently and impartially, operating our processes correctly, and treating our customers fairly.
The Standing Panel provides BRE Global Limited with access to a range of experts that can review BRE Global Limited’s
standards and schemes to ensure their robustness from a scientific, technical and market perspective as well as ensuring the
development of the standards and schemes is open to greater external and independent scrutiny.

■ Introduction
BREEAM UK New Construction

The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is a performance based assessment method and certification scheme for new
buildings.
The primary aim of BREEAM UK New Construction is to mitigate the life cycle impacts of new buildings on the environment in a
robust and cost effective manner. This is achieved through integration and use of the scheme by clients and their project
teams at key stages in the design and construction process.
This enables the client, through the BREEAM assessor and the BRE Global certification process, to measure, evaluate and reflect
the performance of their new building against best practice in an independent and robust manner.
This performance is quantified by a number of individual measures and associated criteria stretching across a range of
environmental issues see Table 1 , which is ultimately expressed as a single certified BREEAM rating, i.e. the label (section 3
describes how a BREEAM rating is calculated).
Table 1 BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 environmental sections and assessment issues
Management Health and Wellbeing
Project brief and design Visual comfort

Life cycle cost and service life planning Indoor air quality
Responsible construction practices Safe containment in laboratories
Commissioning and handover Thermal comfort
Aftercare Acoustic performance
Safety and security
Energy Transport
Reduction of energy use and carbon Public transport accessibility

emissions Proximity to amenities
Energy monitoring Cyclist facilities
External lighting Maximum car parking capacity
Low carbon design Travel plan
Energy efficient cold storage
Energy efficient transportation systems
Energy efficient laboratory systems
Energy efficient equipment
Drying space
Water Materials
Water consumption Life cycle impacts

Water monitoring Hard landscaping and boundary protection
Water leak detection Responsible sourcing of materials
Water efficient equipment Insulation
Designing for durability and resilience
Material efficiency
Waste Land Use and Ecology

Construction waste management Site selection

Recycled aggregates Ecological value of site and protection of ecological
Operational waste features
Speculative floor and ceiling finishes Minimising impact on existing site ecology
Adaptation to climate change Enhancing site ecology
Functional adaptability Long term impact on biodiversity
Pollution Innovation
Impact of refrigerants Innovation

NOx emissions
Surface water run-off
Reduction of night time light pollution
Reduction of noise pollution

■ Introduction
When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction

scheme
Timing the engagement with and use of the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme via the BREEAM assessor is essential for
ensuring seamless integration of the methodology in the new build procurement process. Without this, the ability to optimise
cost effectively the building’s environmental performance and achieve the desired BREEAM rating will be compromised.
Appointing a BREEAM assessor or Sustainability Champion early in the project will help in achieving the target rating without
undue impacts on the flexibility of design decisions, budgets and potential solutions.
Figure 2 serves to highlight the link between the BREEAM UK New Construction assessment and certification stages and the
RIBA Outline Plan of Work 2013.
This figure can assist clients in timing their engagement with BREEAM and the appointment of a BREEAM assessor.
Clients can view up to date listings of licensed BREEAM UK New Construction Assessors and BREEAM Accredited Professionals
at Green Book Live www.greenbooklive.com.
It is important to recognise that BREEAM primarily reflects the overall performance of the building rather than just the
opportunities or limitations placed on specific stakeholders involved in the procurement process. This means that the client,
design team, principal contractor and BREEAM assessor, as well as other specialist disciplines, have an important role to play
throughout the procurement process, if the desired performance level is to be achieved and reflected through the certified
BREEAM rating.
The onus of orientating the brief towards sustainability needs to come first and foremost from the client. To facilitate this, BRE
Global recommends that clients and their project teams engage with a BREEAM assessor and/or BREEAM Sustainability
Champion no later than the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) and ideally sooner where practical. This
will ensure that realistic targets are set and can be met, appropriate responsibilities can be defined and understood and low
or no cost solutions to environmental impacts can be sought and applied wherever possible.

Figure 2 BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan of Work
2013

■ Introduction
How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme

This BREEAM Scheme Document is a technical document which has been created to:
1. Enable qualified and licensed BREEAM assessors to complete BREEAM assessments and determine a rating
2. Enable BRE global Ltd to complete quality assurance reviews of a BREEAM assessors assessment report, in accordance
with the standards to which BRE Global Ltd is accredited
3. Aid BREEAM Accredited Professionals (AP) to undertake project team facilitation, in terms of defining, monitoring and
successfully achieving the desired BREEAM rating
4. Act as a reference for clients and members of the project team whose proposed building is being BREEAM-assessed.
The scheme document is split into six parts:
1. Introduction to BREEAM
2. Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version
3. Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings, including minimum standards
4. The BREEAM evidential requirements
5. Assessment criteria
6. Appendices (A - F).
The Scope section describes the types of buildings and stages of assessment that this version of the BREEAM UK New
Construction Scheme can be applied to. Appendices A to F provide additional scoping guidance for specific building and
project types. The Scope section can be used by clients and BREEAM assessors to check whether this is the correct BREEAM
Scheme to use for their project.
The Scoring and rating section illustrates how a building’s assessed performance is measured and rated. It outlines the
BREEAM rating level benchmarks, the minimum BREEAM standards for each rating level and the BREEAM environmental section
weightings. It also includes a description of the BREEAM assessment issues and ‘credits’, including BREEAM ‘Innovation credits’,
and how performance against these is calculated and expressed as a BREEAM rating.
Please note that, for the purpose of formal assessment and certification, the buildings actual BREEAM performance must be
determined by the BREEAM assessor using the relevant BREEAM reporting and calculation tools.
The BREEAM evidential requirements section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the various types and
forms of evidence required by the BREEAM assessor to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM criteria. This includes a
description of why BREEAM requires an auditable trail of evidence, a table of general types of building information produced
during a building project, and therefore typically required and used as evidence of compliance, and guidance on the differing
forms of evidence that can be used and at what stages of the assessment, such as letters of commitment.
The Assessment criteria section includes the 51 BREEAM assessment issues, categorised in 10 environmental sections. Each
issue defines a level of performance (the assessment criteria) against which the assessed building demonstrates compliance
(using appropriate project information, i.e. evidence) in order to achieve a corresponding number of available BREEAM credits.
The majority of BREEAM issues and credits are tradable, meaning that a client and their project team can pick and choose
which to target in order to build their BREEAM performance score and achieve the desired BREEAM rating. Several BREEAM
issues have minimum standards, meaning that to achieve a particular BREEAM rating specific credits or criteria must be
achieved (BREEAM’s minimum standards are outlined in the Scoring and rating BREEAM-assessed buildings section).
Each BREEAM issue is structured as follows:
1. Issue information: This contains the assessment issue reference, title, number of credits available1 and whether the issue
forms part of BREEAM’s minimum standards.
2. Aim: This outlines the broad objective of the issue and the impact it measures/mitigates.
3. Assessment criteria: This outlines the good/best practice performance level benchmark(s) and criteria. Where the
building complies with the assessment criteria, as determined by the BREEAM assessor, the relevant number of BREEAM
credits can be awarded. Some issues have Exemplary Level Criteria; where a building demonstrates that it meets
Exemplary Level Criteria, a BREEAM Innovation credit can be awarded (refer to the Innovation section for more details).
Up to a maximum of 10 Innovation credits are available.

4. Checklists and tables: This section contains any checklists and tables referenced in the assessment criteria section. This
can include tables of benchmarks or building type specific performance criteria.
5. Compliance notes: These notes provide additional guidance that supports the application and interpretation of the
main assessment criteria, including how to assess compliance in a particular location or for a particular building or
project type, e.g. shell only.
6. Methodology: This section includes a description of any methodology used to determine the number of BREEAM credits
achieved for a given level of building performance. It includes, for example, calculation procedures or guidance on how
non-BREEAM schemes, standards or qualifications referenced in the assessment criteria relate to those criteria.
7. Evidence: This section describes the type(s) of project information that must be provided by the design team/client and
given to the BREEAM assessor to enable verification of the building’s performance against the assessment criteria and
so justify the award of the relevant number of BREEAM credits. The BREEAM evidential requirements section provides
further guidance on evidential requirements.
8. Additional information: This section contains any further information relevant to the application of the assessment
criteria, including any definition of terms used in the assessment issue or sources of additional information that may be
of use in addressing the issue.
The Appendices provide supporting information relevant to either the scope of the BREEAM UK NC 2014 scheme or its
assessment criteria.
1For some assessment issues the number of credits available will vary by building type. Furthermore, some issues may not be
applicable to certain building types or buildings which do not contain a particular function or area, e.g. a laboratory.

Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version ■ Scope
Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014
scheme version
The BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme can be used to assess the environmental life cycle impacts of new non-
domestic buildings at the design and construction stages. ‘New Construction’ is defined as development that results in a new
standalone structure, or new extension to an existing structure, which will come into operation or use for the first time upon
completion of the works.
This BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version is applicable to new non-domestic buildings in the United Kingdom
only.
Type of buildings that can be assessed using the BREEAM UK New

Construction 2014 scheme version
The non-domestic building types which can be assessed and rated using this scheme version are outlined in Table 2 .
Additional guidance for some of the building types listed is also provided in the appendices (refer to the footnotes).
Table 2 List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014
Sector Building type Description
Commercial Offices General office buildings

Offices with research and development areas (i.e. category 1 labs
only)
Industrial Industrial unit – warehouse storage/distribution

Industrial unit – process/manufacturing/vehicle servicing
Retail Shop/shopping centre

Retail park/warehouse
‘Over the counter’ service provider e.g. financial, estate and
employment agencies and betting offices
Showroom
Restaurant, café and drinking establishment
Hot food takeaway

Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Public (non-housing) Education1 Pre-school

Schools and sixth form colleges
Further education/vocational colleges
Higher education institutions
Healthcare2 Teaching/specialist hospitals

General acute hospitals
Community and mental health hospitals
GP surgeries
Health centres and clinics
Prisons3 High security prison

Standard secured prison
Young offender institution and juvenile prisons
Local prison
Holding centre
Law Courts Law courts

Crown and criminal courts
County courts
Magistrates' courts
Civil justice centres
Family courts
Youth courts
Combined courts
Multi-residential Residential Residential care home

accommodation/ institutions (long Sheltered accommodation
Supported living term stay) Residential college/school (halls of residence)
facility4 Local authority secure residential accommodation
Military barracks

Other Residential Hotel, hostel, boarding and guest house

institutions (short Secure training centre
term stay) Residential training centre
Non residential Art gallery, museum

institutions Library
Day centre, hall/civic/community centre
Place of worship
Assembly and Cinema

leisure Theatre/music/concert hall
Exhibition/conference hall
Indoor or outdoor sports, fitness and recreation centre
(with/without pool)
Other Transport hub (coach/bus station and above ground rail station)
Research and development (category 2 or 3 laboratories - non-
higher education)
Crèche
Fire Stations
Visitor Centres
Bespoke Building types that are not listed in this table must undergo a scoping and
tailoring exercise to facilitate a BREEAM assessment and rating. For an
individual project this involves BRE Global selecting appropriate BREEAM
issues from the existing pool of assessment issues to provide criteria
against which the building can be assessed. This is sometimes known as a
‘bespoke’ or ‘tailored’ assessment.
Further guidance on the ‘bespoke’ or ‘tailoring’ process can be found in
BREEAM Bespoke Process Guidance Note GN23.
Mixed use developments and building types

Developments which consist of a number of separate buildings of differing functional types, or a single building containing a
number of different functions e.g. office and retail or retail and GP surgery, will typically require an assessment and therefore
BREEAM rating and certificate for each individual building or functional use within a single building.
This is necessary as BREEAM defines differing criteria and benchmarks for some assessment issues according to building type,
function and use. Therefore to maintain comparability and consistency of the assessment and BREEAM rating, a separate
assessment score and rating are required for each building type function or use in the development.
Further guidance on how to define mixed use developments for the purpose of a BREEAM assessment can be found on the
BREEAM Extranet in Guidance Note GN10 – Mixed use developments and similar buildings (or units).
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment types

Within the UK New Construction scheme a number of assessment types are defined and can be used to assess and rate a
new buildings performance. These are:
Fully fitted (all buildings except those defined as a 'simple' building)

Fully fitted – 'simple' building (see Appendix E)
Shell and Core (see Appendix D)
Shell only (see Appendix D)

The assessment criteria for these options are clearly identified in this technical manual. The assessor in collaboration with the
client and design team as necessary should determine which BREEAM assessment type is relevant for their project.
Similar building types (or units) on the same site

It is possible to assess and rate a number of separate but similar buildings, or individual units within a larger building
development, within one BREEAM assessment report. Further guidance on this type of assessment can be found on the
BREEAM extranet in Guidance Note GN10 – Mixed use developments and similar buildings (or units).
Shell and core/speculative buildings

Non fitted out ‘speculative’ new buildings, often referred to as shell and core buildings, can be assessed using the BREEAM UK
New Construction scheme. Further details on the application of the scheme to these types of new building can be found in
Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments.
Simple building developments

Less complex building types can be assessed using a set of ‘simple buildings’ criteria, defined within this BREEAM UK New
Construction Scheme.
Further details on the application of this scheme to ’simple buildings’ can be found in Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK
New Construction Simple Building Assessments For each individual assessment issue, guidance on ‘simple buildings’
compliance is provided in the Compliance Notes section.
Part new-build, part refurbishment projects

For developments that are a mixture of new-build and refurbished areas the choice of scheme depends on the scope of the
new build and refurbishment works.
For smaller projects, where the total development area is less than 1000m², a single BREEAM assessment can be undertaken
to cover both the new-build and refurbished areas. The BREEAM New Construction or BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-out
scheme choice will be based on whichever (new-build or refurbishment) constitutes the majority of the assessed floor area.
For larger projects a single New Construction assessment can be undertaken, as the refurbished areas would then have to
reach the more challenging New Construction criteria. If the development is predominantly a refurbishment with new-build
extension then the BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme contains thresholds under which a single Refurbishment and
Fit-out assessment can be completed.
Where a single assessment for a part new-build part refurbishment development is not appropriate, there are two options as
described below:
Option 1: Separate BREEAM New Construction and BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-out assessments
Under option 1, two separate BREEAM assessments would be conducted with a BREEAM New Construction assessment
undertaken on the new extension and a BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-out assessment undertaken on the existing building
refurbishment or fit-out. Two separate certificates and ratings can be obtained to indicate the performance of both the new
extension and existing building refurbishment or fit-out.
Option 2: Bespoke BREEAM combined New Construction and Refurbishment and Fit-out assessment
Under option 2, BRE Global will produce a Bespoke criteria appendix document which will determine, for specific BREEAM
issues, which issues and assessment criteria are applicable to the part new build-part refurbishment project. It will refer to
both the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit Out manual and the BREEAM UK New Construction manuals. A bespoke Scoring
and Reporting tool will also be produced for the project.
As part of the bespoke criteria development for issue Ene 01 we allow the new build to be assessed against the New
Construction scheme and the refurbishment against the RFO scheme. The tool performs an area-weighted average score. It is
also possible for the extension to be included under the RFO criteria where following CN6 'Extensions to existing buildings and
new constructed thermal elements'. The tool also creates area-weighted construction resource benchmarks for the Resource
efficiency credit in issue Wst 01 Project waste management.

In determining the appropriate option for a part new build part-refurbishment project, the BREEAM assessor should review
the scope of the proposed works and consider in particular the scope of the refurbished elements, i.e. is it major
refurbishment, will there be a significant change of use and will the building's thermal and structural elements remain ‘as
existing’? Using this information the assessor should advise the client on the most suitable option in terms of which BREEAM
version/scheme is most appropriate for maximising the building's environmental performance.
1For schools, further and higher educational building types, see also Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and
Education buildings.
2For healthcare building types, see also Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types.
3The Prisons category includes any building type that is part of a prison establishment, including residential blocks or a hybrid
of building types.
4For multi-residential building types, see also Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential
buildings for further detail of scope

Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction

2014 scheme version
Building types not listed in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version: Table 2 will fall into one of two
categories, those where a current but separate BREEAM UK New Construction scheme technical manual exists and those
which currently do not have an existing and current technical manual.
Other current BREEAM New Construction schemes
Data centres: 2010 version

There is a separate and current BREEAM UK New Construction scheme 2010 version and technical manual for Data Centres
(SD5068); the 2010 version should be used for the assessment and certification of data centres in the UK.
Other building types not defined

If a particular building type requiring assessment is not listed above or in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014
scheme version: Table 2 , it can still be assessed using BREEAM UK New Construction. Such building types will require the
development of a set of tailored assessment criteria, i.e. a BREEAM Bespoke assessment. In such instances BREEAM assessors
and clients should contact BRE Global for advice and information on how to proceed.

■ Scope
Building life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM UK New

This BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme can be used to assess and rate the environmental impacts arising from a newly
constructed building development (including external site areas), at the following life cycle stages:
1. New Build Design Stage (DS) - leading to an Interim BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment
2. New Build Post Construction Stage (PCS) – leading to a Final BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment
Design Stage
The DS assessment and interim BREEAM rating confirms the proposed new building’s performance at the design stage of the
life cycle. Assessment and ideally certification will occur prior to the beginning of operations on-site. The BREEAM rating at this
stage is labelled as ‘interim’ because it does not represent the building’s final, new construction BREEAM performance.
To complete an assessment at this stage the design must be advanced to a point where the relevant design information is
available to enable the BREEAM assessor to evaluate and verify the building’s performance against the criteria defined in this
Scheme Document. The interim DS assessment will therefore be completed and certified at the scheme design or detailed
design stages.
Post Construction Stage (PCS)

The PCS assessment and BREEAM rating confirms the final ‘as built’ performance of the building at the new construction stage
of the life cycle. A final PCS assessment is completed and certified after practical completion of the building works.
There are two approaches to assessment at the post construction stage:
1. A post construction review (PCR) based on a completed interim design stage assessment
2. A post construction assessment (PCA)
A PCR serves to confirm that the building’s ‘as built’ performance and rating is in accordance with the assessment certified at
the interim design stage. Where an interim DS assessment has not been carried out i.e. certified, and a BREEAM assessment
and rating is required, a full post construction stage assessment can be conducted.

Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New

The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is not designed for, and therefore not appropriate to assess the environmental
impacts of buildings at the following life cycle stages:
1. Existing building refurbishment and fit-out (Companion BREEAM scheme under development at the time of writing).
2. Existing building in operation or existing unoccupied building (refer to the BREEAM In-Use scheme)
3. Existing building de-construction (no BREEAM scheme for this life cycle stage at present)
4. Infrastructure projects (At the time of writing, development work is underway to develop BREEAM to assess
infrastructure works.)

Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings ■ Scoring and rating
Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings

Scoring and rating BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
BREEAM rating benchmarks

There are a number of elements that determine the overall performance of a new construction project assessed using
BREEAM, these are as follows:
1. The BREEAM rating level benchmarks

2. The minimum BREEAM standards
3. The environmental section weightings
4. The BREEAM assessment issues and credits
How these elements combine to produce a BREEAM rating for a new building is summarised on the following pages. This is
followed by a description and example describing the methodology for calculating a rating.
The BREEAM rating benchmarks for projects assessed using the 2014 version of BREEAM UK New Construction are as follows:
Table 3 BREEAM rating benchmarks
BREEAM Rating % score
Outstanding ≥ 85
Excellent ≥ 70
Very good ≥ 55
Good ≥ 45
Pass ≥ 30
Unclassified < 30
The BREEAM rating benchmarks enable a client and all other stakeholders to compare the performance of a newly
constructed building with other BREEAM rated buildings, and the typical sustainability performance of a stock of new non-
domestic buildings in the UK.
In this respect each BREEAM rating broadly represents performance equivalent to:
1. Outstanding: Less than top 1% of UK new non-domestic buildings (innovator)

2. Excellent: Top 10% of UK new non-domestic buildings (best practice)
3. Very Good: Top 25% of UK new non-domestic buildings (advanced good practice)
4. Good: Top 50% of UK new non-domestic buildings (intermediate good practice)
5. Pass: Top 75% of UK new non-domestic buildings (standard good practice)
An unclassified BREEAM rating represents performance that is non-compliant with BREEAM, in terms of failing to meet either
the BREEAM minimum standards of performance for key environmental issues or the overall threshold score required to
achieve at least a Pass rating.

■ Scoring and rating
Minimum standards
To maintain a flexible system BREEAM adopts a ‘balanced score-card’ approach to the assessment and rating of building
performance. This means that, to achieve a particular level of performance the majority of BREEAM credits can be traded, i.e.
non-compliance in one area can be off-set through compliance in another to achieve the target BREEAM rating.
However, to ensure that performance against fundamental environmental issues is not overlooked in pursuit of a particular
rating, BREEAM sets minimum standards of performance in key areas e.g. energy, water, waste etc. It is important to bear in
mind that these are minimum acceptable levels of performance and, in that respect they should not necessarily be viewed as
levels that are representative of best practice for a BREEAM rating level.
To achieve a particular BREEAM rating, the minimum overall percentage score must be achieved and the minimum standards,
detailed in Table 4 , applicable to that rating level complied with.
Table 4 Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level
Minimum standards by BREEAM rating level
BREEAM issue Pass Good Very Good Excellent Outstanding
Man 03: Responsible None None None One credit Two credits
construction practices (Considerate (Considerate
construction) construction)
Man 04: Commissioning None None None Criterion 10 Criterion 10

and handover (Building User (Building User
Guide) Guide)
Man 5: Aftercare None None None One credit One credit

(Seasonal (Seasonal
commissioning commissioning)
Ene 01: Reduction of None None None Five credits Eight credits
energy use and carbon
emissions
Ene 02: Energy None None One credit One credit One credit
monitoring (First sub- (First sub- (First sub-
metering metering credit) metering credit)
credit)
Wat 01: Water None One credit One credit One credit Two credits
consumption
Wat 02: Water None Criterion 1 Criterion 1 Criterion 1 only Criterion 1 only
monitoring only only
Mat 03: Responsible Criterion 1 Criterion 1 Criterion 1 Criterion 1 only Criterion 1 only
sourcing of materials only only only

Minimum standards by BREEAM rating level
BREEAM issue Pass Good Very Good Excellent Outstanding
Wst 01: Construction None None None None One credit

waste management
Wst 03: Operational None None None One credit One credit
waste
LE 03: Minimising impact None None One credit One credit One credit
on existing site ecology

Environmental section weightings

Environmental weightings are fundamental to any building environmental assessment method as they provide a means of
defining, and therefore ranking, the relative impact of environmental issues. BREEAM uses an explicit weighting system derived
from a combination of consensus based weightings and ranking by a panel of experts. The outputs from this exercise are
then used to determine the relative value of the environmental sections used in BREEAM and their contribution to the overall
BREEAM score.
This weighting system is defined in greater detail within the BRE Global Core Process Standard (BES 5301) and it’s supporting
procedural documents. These form part of the over-arching BREEAM Standard and the Code for a Sustainable Built
Environment. The same ranking of impacts used in BREEAM underpins the scoring mechanisms in the BRE Green Guide to
Specification and the BRE Environmental Profiling Method for construction materials.
Table 5 outlines the weightings for each of the nine environmental sections included in the BREEAM UK New Construction
Scheme.
Table 5 BREEAM Environmental section weightings
Environmental section Weighting
Fully fitted out Shell only Shell and core only
Management 12% 12.5% 11%
Health and Wellbeing 15% 10% 10.5%
Energy 15% 14.5% 15%
Transport 9% 11.5% 10%
Water 7% 4% 7.5%
Materials 13.5% 17.5% 14.5%
Waste 8.5% 11% 9.5%
Land Use and Ecology 10% 13% 11%
Pollution 10% 6% 11%
Total 100% 100% 100%
Innovation (additional) 10% 10% 10%
Each of the above environmental sections consists of a differing number of assessment issues and BREEAM credits (as
described below and defined in detail in the technical sections of this Scheme Document).

BREEAM assessment issues and credits

BREEAM UK New Construction consists of 51 individual assessment issues spanning the nine environmental categories, plus a
tenth category called ‘innovation’ (described below). Each issue addresses a specific building related environmental impact or
issue and has a number of ‘credits’ assigned to it.
‘BREEAM credits’ are awarded where a building demonstrates that it meets the best practice performance levels defined for
that issue, i.e. it has mitigated an impact or, in the case of the health and wellbeing section, addressed a specific building
occupant-related issue, e.g. good thermal comfort, daylight or acoustics.
The number of ‘credits’ available for an individual assessment issue will vary and generally the higher the number there are for
a given issue, the more important that issue is in terms of mitigating its impact. In most cases, where there are multiple ‘credits’
available, the number awarded is based on a sliding scale or benchmark, where progressively higher standards of building
performance are rewarded with a higher number of ‘credits’.
It is worth noting that, in addition to the environmental section and overall score and BREEAM rating, verified performance
against individual assessment issues also provides users with a credible set of key building performance indicators for a range
of embodied, operational and construction phase building impacts. In this respect, in addition to using BREEAM to define
overall targets, it is possible to use the method to define performance levels in support of specific organisational policy
objectives for individual environmental issues. Care should be taken when setting design targets using individual issues and
credit levels in this way as it can limit design flexibility and have an impact on project costs.
Awarding ‘credits’ for innovation

It is one of the aims of BREEAM to support innovation within the construction industry and its supply chain. BREEAM does this
by making additional ‘credits’ available for the recognition of sustainability related benefits or performance levels which are
currently not recognised by standard BREEAM assessment issues and criteria. By doing this BREEAM is rewarding buildings that
go beyond best practice in terms of a particular aspect of sustainability i.e. where the building or its procurement has
demonstrated innovation.
Awarding ‘credits’ for innovation enables clients and design teams to boost their building’s BREEAM performance and, in
addition, helps to support the market for new innovative technologies, and design or construction practices.
There are two ways in which BREEAM awards ‘innovation credits’ to recognise innovation in building design and procurement.
The first is by meeting exemplary performance criteria defined within an existing BREEAM issue i.e. going beyond the standard
BREEAM assessment criteria and therefore best practice. Note, not all assessment issues have exemplary performance criteria.
The second route is where an application is made to BRE Global by the registered project’s BREEAM assessor to have a
particular building technology or feature, design or construction method or process recognised as ‘innovative’. If the
application is successful and subsequently compliance is verified, an ‘innovation credit’ can be awarded.
An additional 1% can be added to a building’s overall score for each ‘innovation credit’ achieved. The maximum number of
’innovation credits’ that can be awarded for any one building is 10; therefore the maximum available additional score for
‘innovation’ is 10%. Innovation credits can be awarded regardless of the building’s final BREEAM rating, i.e. they can be
awarded at any BREEAM rating level. Refer to the Inn 01 Innovation section for more detail.

Calculating a building's BREEAM rating

A BREEAM assessor must determine the BREEAM rating using the appropriate assessment tools and calculators. An indication
of performance against the BREEAM scheme can also be determined using a BREEAM Pre-Assessment Estimator. The Pre-
Assessment Estimator is available from the BREEAM website www.breeam.com.
The process of determining a BREEAM rating is outlined below and an example calculation included in Table 6
1. For each of BREEAM’s nine environmental sections the number of ‘credits’ awarded must be determined by the BREEAM
assessor in accordance with the criteria of each assessment issue (as detailed in the technical sections of this document).
2. The percentage of ‘credits’ achieved is then calculated for each section.
3. The percentage of ‘credits’ achieved in each section is then multiplied by the corresponding section weighting. This gives
the overall environmental section score.
4. The section scores are then added together to give the overall BREEAM score.
5. The overall score is then compared to the BREEAM rating benchmark levels and, provided all minimum standards have
been met, the relevant BREEAM rating is achieved.
6. An additional 1% can be added to the final BREEAM score for each ‘innovation credit’ achieved (up to a maximum of
10% and with the total BREEAM score capped at 100%).
Table 6 Example BREEAM score and rating calculation
BREEAM Section Credits Credits % of Credits Section Section

Achieved Available Achieved Weighting (fully Score
fitted)
Management 10 21 47.62% 0.12 5.71%
Health and 17 21 80.95% 0.15 12.14%

Wellbeing
Energy 16 31 51.61% 0.15 7.74%
Transport 5 12 41.67% 0.09 3.75%
Water 5 9 55.56% 0.07 3.88%
Materials 10 14 71.43% 0.135 9.64%
Waste 3 9 33.33% 0.085 2.83%
Land Use and 5 10 50.00% 0.10 5.00%

Ecology
Pollution 5 13 38.46% 0.10 3.84%
Innovation 2 10 20.00% 0.10 2.00%
Final BREEAM score 56.5%
BREEAM Rating VERY GOOD

Table 7 Minimum standards for a BREEAM Very Good rating
Minimum standards for Achieved?

BREEAM ‘Very Good’ rating
Ene 02: Energy monitoring Y
Wat 01: Water consumption Y
Wat 02: Water monitoring Y
Mat 03: Responsible sourcing of materials Y
LE 03: Minimising impact on existing site ecology Y

The BREEAM evidential requirements ■ Evidence
The BREEAM evidential requirements

This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the types of evidence required to demonstrate compliance
with BREEAM issues.
Why does BREEAM require evidence?

BREEAM is a third party assessment and certification scheme operated in accordance with international standards. Operating
to international standards ensures that certification schemes such as BREEAM are run in a consistent and reliable manner. The
BREEAM assessor's assessment report and the BRE Global Quality Assurance process are the fundamental tenets of BREEAM,
ensuring consistency of, and confidence in, the BREEAM rating awarded by the assessor.
To maintain this consistency and credibility, all certification decisions must be based on verified and credible project
information that is traceable, i.e. evidence based. This is not only important for ensuring compliance with the international
standards to which BREEAM operates, but also in terms of managing risk to clients and BREEAM assessors in the event that a
certification outcome is challenged.
The assessment report and the BREEAM assessor role

It is the BREEAM assessor who determines the BREEAM rating and the assessment report is the formal record of an assessor’s
audit against the criteria defined in the Technical Manual for a BREEAM scheme. The BREEAM certificate issued by BRE Global
provides assurance that the service provided by the assessor (that is, the process of producing the assessment report) has
been conducted in accordance with the requirements of the scheme. The purpose of the certificate is therefore to give
confidence to the client in the assessor’s performance and processes in determining a BREEAM rating.
It is the role of the assessor to gather project information and use it to assess performance against the BREEAM scheme in a
competent and impartial manner. To award a BREEAM credit, the assessor must be satisfied beyond reasonable doubt that
the evidence gathered demonstrates unambiguous compliance with all relevant criteria defined in the BREEAM scheme. All
evidence must be appropriately referenced in the formal report produced by the assessor and made available on request
from BRE Global Ltd for quality assurance checks.
Clear, ordered and well referenced evidence for each BREEAM issue and criterion facilitates efficient quality assurance and
certification. BREEAM assessors can access further guidance on assessment report referencing in Assessor Guidance Note 01,
and the 'Reporting process' webinar, both available from the BREEAM assessor Guidance section of the BREEAM assessor
Extranet.
Evidence types
Evidence should not necessarily need to be prepared specifically for the purpose of the BREEAM assessment. In many
instances, the assessor should be able to source readily available and prepared project information for the purpose of
demonstrating compliance. For this reason, BREEAM aims to avoid being prescriptive on the type of evidence required,
although some issues do require specific documents to be provided.
The assessor and project team will find that many assessment issues require more than one piece or type of information to
demonstrate compliance with one criterion, or alternatively, one piece of information may be sufficient to demonstrate
compliance with multiple criteria.
To assist project teams and the BREEAM assessor in their collation of building information at each stage of assessment, the
different types of documentation that can be used as evidence of compliance are listed below.
These evidence types fall broadly into three categories:

Evidence BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
1. General evidence type

2. Specific evidence type
3. Other evidence type.
For some assessment issues, the assessor is likely to require a mixture of general and specific evidence types.
General evidence includes a broad list of defined building information commonly produced for a building project. One or a
mix of these types of building information can be used to demonstrate compliance for one or more of the BREEAM issues and
criteria, as deemed appropriate by the BREEAM assessor for the stage of assessment.
General BREEAM evidence types are listed in Table 9 , and are not specifically listed in the ’ Evidence‘ section found within each
BREEAM issue. Note, not all general evidence types will be appropriate for all issues and it is the responsibility of the assessor
to ensure that the evidence provided specifically demonstrates compliance and is fully referenced in the Assessment
reporting tool.
Specific evidence is defined building information that must be provided to verify compliance with the relevant criteria for the
BREEAM credit sought. In all cases it will be the only type of evidence that will be accepted by BRE Global Ltd for that particular
issue/criteria. Where specific evidence is not provided and appropriately referenced in the assessment report, the Quality
Assurance checks will identify non-conformity and certification will be delayed. An example of specific evidence would be a
copy of the building regulations output document from the approved software for BREEAM issue Ene 01, and this is listed in
the evidence table for this issue.
When required, specific evidence is defined and listed for each BREEAM issue in the ‘Evidence’ section for both final and interim
stages of assessment. Although the ‘Evidence’ section lists the specific evidence required to demonstrate compliance with
particular criteria, simply submitting this evidence may not be sufficient to demonstrate full compliance. Additional ‘general
evidence types’ may also be required. For example Mat 01; to demonstrate compliance with criteria 1-5 at the design stage, a
copy of the Mat 01 Calculator tool is listed in the ‘Evidence’ table. However, in addition to the Mat 01 tool, further evidence is
required to demonstrate how the inputs for this tool have been determined, i.e. general evidence types such as building
specifications or drawings etc., confirming the material specifications to be used. Note, not all BREEAM issues will have specific
evidence requirements.
Other types of evidence can still be used to demonstrate compliance where an information type provided by a client/design
team is not listed in Table 9 or the ‘Evidence’ section for each issue. To avoid non-conformities and delays in certification,
undefined alternative types of evidence must demonstrate credible, robust and traceable assurance to the same level as, or
better than, specified or general evidence types. If in doubt, please contact BREEAM prior to accepting such evidence.
Written commitments at the interim stage of assessment – Design

stage
At the interim design stage of assessment it is permissible to use letters or emails to demonstrate intent to comply with
BREEAM criteria (provided they meet the requirements for communication records). Such evidence must also make clear the
actions and evidence (or an understanding thereof) that will be undertaken and provided to ensure the project's ongoing
compliance, particularly at the final stage of assessment, i.e. post construction. This is to ensure that the party who makes the
commitment is clearly aware of the actions and evidence that needs to be supplied to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM
at the final stage of assessment. For example, in many circumstances it would not be acceptable for the design team to copy
and paste the BREEAM criteria into a formal commitment. The commitment should specifically detail how criteria are to be
achieved in the context of the assessment, and often copying and pasting the BREEAM criteria will not provide this detail.
While letters of commitment can play a role in demonstrating compliance, they are not a replacement for more formal and
established types of project information. The assessor must not award credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity
or intent of written commitments, or where it is not unreasonable to expect formal design or specification information to be
available to confirm compliance.

Written commitments at the final stage of assessment – post

construction
As stated in the Scope section, there are two types of assessment that can be carried out at the post construction stage, a
post construction review of a design stage assessment, or a post construction assessment (where no design stage
assessment has been carried out). The 'Final post construction stage' column of the evidence table in each issue assumes that
a design stage assessment has been completed. Where a design stage assessment has not been completed, the assessor
will need to review both the 'Interim design stage' and 'Final post construction stage' evidence listed in the evidence table and
ensure sufficient evidence is submitted with the assessment to demonstrate compliance with the criteria.
Evidence supplied at the post construction stage must be reflective of the completed building and must therefore
demonstrate what has actually been implemented. For example, if sub-meters have been specified at the design stage,
evidence at the post construction stage would need to demonstrate that these have actually been installed. Appropriate
evidence may be a site inspection report with supporting photographs or as built drawings showing the location of the sub-
meters.
Letters of commitment cannot be used to demonstrate compliance at the final, post construction stage of assessment. The
only exception to this is where the criteria require an action to take place post construction, i.e. after handover and possibly
during the building operation. An example could be a written commitment from the building owner/occupier making a
commitment to conduct post occupancy evaluation. As with written commitments at the design stage, the BREEAM assessor
must not award BREEAM credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity or intent of written commitments or where it
is not unreasonable to expect formal documentation, e.g. a schedule of services and/or professional services contract.
Evidence principles that BREEAM assessors and the BRE Global Ltd
Quality Assurance work to
As described above, where specific evidence is stated in the ‘evidence’ table within each assessment issue, this must be
sourced and verified by the BREEAM assessor.
Where no specific evidence has been listed for an issue or specific criterion, this means that there are potentially a number of
different types of ‘general’ project information, as per Table 9 that can be sourced by the BREEAM assessor and used to
demonstrate compliance. It is the BREEAM assessor’s responsibility to source and verify the ‘general evidence types’ for each
relevant criterion, where compliance and credits are being claimed by the project team.
In determining the appropriateness of ‘general evidence types’ for each issue, the principles outlined in Table 8 must be
considered by BREEAM assessors. Where the ‘general evidence types’ meet the principles outlined in Table 8 and, where
appropriate, the guidance provided in the ‘robustness of evidence’ section, such evidence is admissible for the purpose of the
assessment and the BRE Global Quality Assurance checks.
These principles are not listed in a hierarchical order and are all equally important when considering which evidence type to
submit to demonstrate compliance for each issue/criterion.
Table 8 BREEAM Evidence principles
Summary Principle Objective A question to ask to check
1 Evidence Evidence must demonstrate that ALL Completeness Are all criteria and sub-
provided for relevant* criteria and sub-criteria for each criteria covered? Have all
all criteria for credit sought are achieved and where relevant compliance notes
all credits relevant, is provided to support and definitions been
sought compliance notes, definitions etc. addressed?

Summary Principle Objective A question to ask to check
2 Unambiguous The assessment must demonstrate Independent If a 3rd party (e.g. BRE Global
assessment unambiguous compliance and the review Ltd) reviewed my report
evidence must support this assessment. compatibility with the submitted evidence,
Evidence (and supporting notes) must would they be able to
clearly demonstrate to a 3rd party confirm compliance and
reviewer that the criteria have been met. award the same credits I
have?
3 Robust a. When selecting the Evidence type, Proof that In your judgement as an
always ensure it is robust and is evidence is assessor, is the evidence
relevant to the stage of robust and robust enough to
assessment. from a reliable demonstrate compliance
b. The selected Evidence contains all source with the criterion? Does the
the relevant basic information, with evidence contain all the
the necessary constituent parts to relevant basic information?
be deemed robust. Is it fully auditable?
(see The BREEAM evidential requirements
section for further details on both of the
above)
4 Use existing Use existing project information to Minimises Does robust evidence
evidence demonstrate compliance. In most cases evidence and meeting the above
evidence shouldn’t need to be ‘created’ reduces time principles already exist that I
for BREEAM compliance purposes. and cost of can use? If I need to ask for
compliance more evidence, is the project
seeking credits where
compliance is not
adequately demonstrated?
* Where the assessor/design team deem specific criteria 'not relevant' to the assessment, a full justification should be
collated and then submitted as a technical query for review by BRE Global Ltd.
Robustness of Evidence
Robust evidence provides confirmation that the assessment has been carried out correctly and the building complies with the
criteria for the BREEAM credits sought. The assessor should consider the following when gathering project information and
evaluating whether the evidence provided is as ‘robust’ as possible:
Is there more than one piece of evidence that could be used to demonstrate compliance?
Is the chosen evidence robust and appropriate to demonstrate that a particular criterion has been achieved?
Any evidence submitted for a BREEAM assessment must be robust in terms of its source and its traceability. Below is a list of
the minimum information the assessor must expect to see when certain types of evidence are submitted:
Communication records: Any communication records used as evidence must provide clear confirmation of the site name,
author’s identity and role, the date and recipient(s) identity.
Formal letters of correspondence: Must be on company/organisation headed note-paper with a signature (electronic
signatures are acceptable). Ideally letters should be a secured document. (Please see sections relating to written commitment
for further information.)

Meeting minutes: Must include date, location and attendee information (names, organisations and roles), along with a record
of the meeting and agreed actions.
Drawings: All drawings must have the building/site name, phase (if applicable), title of drawing, date, revision number and a
scale.
Specification: A specification must be clear that it relates to the project under assessment, and it must have a date and revision
number. Where sections of a specification are provided the assessor should reference the extract and as a minimum submit
the front page of the specification detailing the project name, revision number and date.
Site inspection report: A site inspection report must include the building/site name, date, author and summary text to detail
what was witnessed, confirming compliance. Photographic evidence can be used to support the text in the report.
For other types of evidence not listed, the assessor should use the above as a guide for the sort of evidence that is suitable. As
a minimum in most cases the evidence used to assess compliance should always contain key information such as the project
name, the author, date, revision numbers etc.
Table 9 General evidence types
Ref Document/evidence Description/notes

type
E1 As constructed Information produced at the end of a project to represent what has been
information constructed. This will comprise a mixture of ‘as built’ information/drawings and
surveys from specialist subcontractors and the ‘final construction issue’ from
design team members.
E2 Building information The BIM (or BIM files) used for the project containing relevant
model (BIM) information/evidence of compliance.
E3 BRE Global For example the reference number for a BRE Global response to an assessor's
correspondence technical query.
reference number
E4 BREEAM assessor’s site A formal report based on the BREEAM assessor's own survey of the site/building
inspection report to confirm compliance with BREEAM criteria. An assessor’s site inspection report
will be distinct from their formal BREEAM assessment report, serving as a form
of evidence of compliance in its own right, and it may include photographs taken
by the assessor as part of the survey.
E5 Building contract(s) The building contract (or excerpts/clauses from it) between the client and the
contractor for the construction of the project. In some instances, the building
contract may contain design duties for specialist subcontractors and/or design
team members.
E6 Certificates of Examples include ISO 14001, BES 6001, FSC (Forest Stewardship Council), EPC
compliance (third (environmental profile certificate), EPD (environmental product declaration),
party) Considerate Constructors etc.
E7 Communication Formal communication records between/from relevant project stakeholders

records and/or other third parties confirming an appointment, action or outcome. This
may be in the form of a letter, meeting minutes, email correspondence,
publication or another form of media (see also additional guidance on following
pages).


type
E8 Communication The strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will
strategy communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the
various parties, both informally and at information exchanges.
E9 Computer aided Examples include thermal modelling, flooding, life cycle assessment, life cycle
modelling costing, ventilation modelling etc.
results/outputs
E10 Construction The specification for the project/building.1

specification
E11 Construction stage For example, purchase orders, metering data, log books, commissioning
data/information records/reports etc.
E12 Contractual tree A diagram that clarifies the contractual relationship between the client and the
parties undertaking the roles required on a project.
E13 Cost information Project costs, including the cost estimate and life cycle costs.
E14 Design drawings2 Developed Design and Technical Design, including the coordinated architectural,
structural and building services design. Site plans, drainage designs.
E15 Design programme A programme setting out the strategic dates in relation to the design process. It
is aligned with the Project Programme but is strategic in its nature, due to the
iterative nature of the design process, particularly in the early stages.
E16 Design responsibility A matrix that sets out who is responsible for designing each aspect of the
matrix project and when. This document sets out the extent of any performance
specified design.
E17 Feasibility study Studies undertaken to test the feasibility of the Initial Project Brief for the site or in
a specific context and to consider how site-wide issues will be addressed.
E18 Final project brief The Initial Project Brief amended so that it is aligned with the Concept Design and
any briefing decisions made during this stage.
E19 Other third party For example, maps, public transport timetables, product data/details,
information manufacturers’ literature, government/EU standards or codes, EU labelling.
E20 Professional services An agreement to provide professional or consulting services such as designing,
contract feasibility studies, or legal or technical advice.


type
E21 Professional specialist Professional reports resulting from specialist surveys/studies/test results, e.g.
reports contaminated land, ecology, flood risk assessment, surface water run-off report,
site investigation, acoustics, indoor air quality plan, low and zero carbon
technologies study, transportation analysis, commissioning reports, passive
design analysis report, free cooling analysis report, life cycle assessment,
landscape and habitat management plan etc.
E22 Project Execution or The Project Execution Plan is produced in collaboration with the project lead and
Quality Plan lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the
project team. The Project Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to
be used to develop the design.
E23 Project programme The overall period for the briefing, design, construction and post completion
activities of a project.
E24 Project roles table A table that sets out the roles required on a project as well as defining the stages
during which those roles are required and the parties responsible for carrying
out the roles.
E25 Project strategy The strategies developed in parallel with the Concept Design to support the
design and, in certain instances, to respond to the Final Project Brief as it is
concluded. Examples include strategies for sustainability, acoustics, handover,
maintenance and operational, fire engineering, building control, technology,
health and safety, construction, travel plan, sustainable procurement plan.
E26 Risk assessment The risk assessment considers the various design risks and other risks on a
project and how each risk will be managed and the party responsible for
managing each risk.
E27 Schedule of services A list of specific services and tasks to be undertaken by a party involved in the
project which is incorporated into their professional services contract.
E28 Strategic or initial The brief prepared following discussions with the client to ascertain the project
project brief objectives, the client’s business case and, in certain instances, in response to site
feasibility studies.
1 For the purpose of BREEAM the specific clause of the specification must be referenced within the report.
2 Evidence in the form of design drawings must be presented in a clear, professional working format with clearly identified
legends indicating revision number, date, title, owner etc. (where appropriate).

Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Management
Category overview
Weightings Minimum standards
Fully fitted 12% Shell only 12.5% Shell and core 11% Man 03, Man 04, Man 05
Summary
This category encourages the adoption of sustainable management practices in connection with design, construction,
commissioning, handover and aftercare activities to ensure that robust sustainability objectives are set and followed through
into the operation of the building. Issues in this section focus on embedding sustainability actions through the key stages of
design, procurement and initial occupation from the initial project brief stage to the appropriate provision of aftercare.
Category summary table

Issue ID Issue name Credits Credit summary
Man 01 Project brief 4 Stakeholder consultation covering project delivery and relevant
and design third parties.
Sustainability champion appointed to facilitate the setting,
monitoring and achievement of BREEAM performance target(s) for
the project.
Man 02 Life cycle cost 4 Recognising and encouraging the use of life cycle costing and
and service life service life planning and the sharing of data to raise awareness and
planning understanding.
Man 03 Responsible 6 The principal contractor demonstrates sound environmental

construction management practices and consideration for neighbours across
practices their activities on-site.
Site related energy, water and transport impacts are monitored
and reported to ensure ongoing compliance during the
Construction, Handover and Close Out stages and to improve
awareness and understanding for future projects.
Man 04 Commissioning 4 Schedule of commissioning including optimal timescales and

and handover appropriate testing and commissioning of all building services
systems and building fabric in line with best practice.
Inspecting, testing, identifying and rectifying defects via an
appropriate method.
Provision of a non-technical Building User Guide and user/operator
training timed appropriately around handover and proposed
occupation.

Management ■ Management
Man 05 Aftercare 3 Provision of the necessary infrastructure and resources to provide

aftercare support to the building occupier(s).
Seasonal commissioning activities will be completed over a
minimum 12 month period, once the building becomes
substantially occupied.
The client or building occupier commit to carrying out a post
occupancy evaluation (POE) exercise one year after initial building
occupation and to disseminate the findings in terms of the
building’s post occupancy performance.

Man 01 Project brief and design

Number of credits available Minimum standards
4 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage an integrated design process that optimises building performance.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into two parts:
Stakeholder consultation (2 credits)

Sustainability Champion (2 credits).
The following is required to demonstrate compliance.
One credit – Stakeholder consultation (project delivery)

1. Prior to completion of the Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), the project delivery stakeholders (see Relevant
definitions) have met to identify and define their roles, responsibilities and contributions for each of the key phases of
project delivery.
2. In defining the roles and responsibilities for each key phase of the project, the following must be considered:
a. End user requirements
b. Aims of the design and design strategy
c. Particular installation and construction requirements/limitations
d. Occupiers' budget and technical expertise in maintaining any proposed systems
e. Maintainability and adaptability of the proposals
f. Requirements for the production of project and end user documentation
g. Requirements for commissioning, training and aftercare support.
3. The project team demonstrate how the project delivery stakeholder contributions and the outcomes of the
consultation process have influenced or changed the Initial Project Brief, including if appropriate, the Project Execution
Plan, Communication Strategy, and the Concept Design.
One credit - Stakeholder consultation (third party)

4. Prior to completion of the Concept Design stage, all relevant third party stakeholders have been consulted by the design
team and this covers the minimum consultation content (see compliance note CN3).
5. The project must demonstrate how the stakeholder contributions and outcomes of the consultation exercise have
influenced or changed the Initial Project Brief and Concept Design.
6. Prior to completion of the detailed design (RIBA Stage 4, Technical Design or equivalent), consultation feedback has been
given to, and received by, all relevant parties.
Additionally for Education, Healthcare, Law courts and Major transport node building types only:
7. The consultation exercise used a method carried out by an independent party. See Relevant definitions.
One credit - Sustainability Champion (design)

8. A Sustainability Champion has been appointed to facilitate the setting and achievement of BREEAM performance
targets for the project. The design stage Sustainability Champion is appointed to perform this role during the feasibility
stage (Stage 1, Preparation and Brief stage, as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work 2013 or equivalent).
9. The defined BREEAM performance target(s) has been formally agreed (see Relevant definitions) between the client and

■ Man 01 Project brief and design Management
design/project team no later than the Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent).
10. To achieve this credit at the interim design stage assessment, the agreed BREEAM performance target(s) must be
demonstrably achieved by the project design. This must be demonstrated via the BREEAM assessor’s design stage
assessment report.
One credit - Sustainability Champion (monitoring progress)

11. The Sustainability Champion criteria 8, 9 and 10 have been achieved.
12. A Sustainability Champion is appointed to monitor progress against the agreed BREEAM performance target(s)
throughout the design process and formally report progress to the client and design team.
To do this the Sustainability Champion must attend key project/design team meetings during the Concept Design, Developed
Design and Technical Design stages, as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work 2013, reporting during, and prior to, completion of
each stage, as a minimum.
Checklists and tables

None.
Compliance notes
Ref Terms Description
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment criteria apply.
Refer to Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project
Assessments for a more detailed description of the above shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Stakeholder consultation (project delivery) (1 credit)

assessment criteria 1. Criteria 1 to 3.
Stakeholder consultation (third party) (1 credit)
2. Criteria 4 to 6; criterion 7 is not applicable .
Exemplary level criteria

The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for
this BREEAM issue.
Sustainability Champion (design) (1 credit)
3. Criteria 8 to 10.
Sustainability Champion (monitoring progress) (1 credit)
4. Criteria 11 and 12 .
General

CN3 Minimum The minimum consultation content of the consultation plan will be dependent on
consultation content the building but would typically include the following:
See criterion 4. 1. Functionality, build quality and impact (including aesthetics).
2. Provision of appropriate internal and external facilities (for future building
occupants and visitors/users).
3. Management and operational implications.
4. Maintenance resources implications.
5. Impacts on the local community, e.g. local traffic/transport impact.
6. Opportunities for shared use of facilities and infrastructure with the
community/appropriate stakeholders, if relevant/appropriate to building
type.
7. Compliance with statutory (national/local) consultation requirements.
8. Inclusive and accessible design.
In the case of educational building types, minimum content also includes:
9. How the building/grounds could best be designed to facilitate learning and
provide a range of social spaces appropriate to the needs of pupils, students
and other users.
In the case of building types containing technical areas or functions, e.g.
laboratories, workshops etc., minimum content also includes:
10. The end users broad requirements for such facilities, including appropriate
sizing, optimisation and integration of equipment and systems.
CN3.1 Assessing and There is an additional credit for appointing a Sustainability Champion during the
awarding the construction and handover phase (see BREEAM issue Man 03 Responsible
available credits for construction practices). The aim of the credit in Man 03 is to encourage and reward
a Sustainability contractors and project teams that appoint a Sustainability Champion and
Champion therefore ensure continuation of the sustainability objectives during the
construction phase and that the constructed building meets the client's target
BREEAM rating.
CN3.2 BREEAM-related If the BREEAM-related performance targets set at the end of the Concept design
performance stage have not been achieved at the post construction stage assessment, the
targets credits awarded at the interim design stage assessment for appointing the
See criteria 9 to 12. Sustainability champion must be withheld in the final assessment. See Man 01
Project brief and design.
Methodology
None.

Evidence
Criteria Interim design stage Final post construction stage
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
4-6 Consultation plan setting out the process and As per interim design stage.
scope of the consultation.
Additional information
Relevant definitions
BREEAM-related performance targets

BREEAM performance targets refer specifically to the BREEAM rating and minimum standards required. This does not
necessarily include individual targeted BREEAM issues/credits, which may be traded over the course of the project as it
evolves. In agreeing a BREEAM target it is recommended that individual BREEAM issues, credits and criteria are
targeted or prioritised to ensure that the agreed target is achievable, and achieved without potentially costly
alterations to the design at a later stage.
Communication strategy
The RIBA Plan of Works 2013 defines the Communication Strategy as a strategy that sets out when the project team
will meet, how they will communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various
parties, both informally and at Information Exchanges.
Consultation feedback
This is feedback which focuses on the stakeholder suggestions, comments, recommendations and the consultation
outcomes. This includes how the suggestions and outcomes influenced, or resulted in modifications to, the proposed
design and building operation/use.
Formally agreed
The term 'formally agreed' relates to BREEAM performance targets. Examples of formal agreements include a
contract or letters of appointment with the architect and with other relevant project team members.
Independent party
To comply with the criterion relating to the use of an independent party, the client/design team needs to
demonstrate either of the following options:
1. They have used a party independent of the design process to conduct the necessary consultation exercise, using a
compliant method. Examples of independent compliant methods include, but are not limited to, the Design
Quality Indicator 1 (DQI), healthcare building also have the option to use the Achieving Excellence Design Evaluation
Toolkit (AEDET);
OR
2. If the consultation is to be carried out by an organisation involved with the design of the building, e.g. the project
architect, then they must present the assessor with evidence that robustly demonstrates the independence of the
consultation process. BREEAM has not attempted to define what form this evidence must take; the onus is on the
design team or relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the BREEAM assessor a credible level of
independence.
Key design team meetings

Key design team meetings can be defined as those where fundamental decisions that influence or affect the
building’s proposed design and its construction in accordance with the design (and therefore the building’s
sustainability impacts and BREEAM performance), are discussed and made. These meetings would typically include
representatives from at least three of the parties listed below.
1. Representatives of the client/developer
2. The principal contractor
3. The architect
4. Structural engineers
5. Building services engineers
6. Cost consultants
7. Environmental consultants
8. Project management consultants.
Key phases
The definition of key phases of project delivery includes the following:
Concept Design
Developed Design
Construction
Commissioning and Handover
In-Use occupation.
Project delivery stakeholders

The purpose of criterion 1 is to reflect the need to consider the input of all the major project stakeholders from the
earliest practical stage, to ensure smooth and successful delivery of the project's sustainability objectives.
Project delivery stakeholders therefore include the client, the building occupier (where known), the design team and
the principal contractor. With regards to contractors' involvement, it ensures their input in terms of formulating
sustainable design solutions, commenting/inputting on the practicality and build ability of (one or more) design
solutions and their impact on programming, cost etc.
BREEAM recognises that traditionally for some projects, the contractor for the works might not be appointed at the
early stages of the project and therefore compliance with criterion 1 would not be possible. In these instances, to
ensure the aim of the criteria is upheld, criterion 1 will be met provided that a suitably experienced person with
substantial construction/contracting experience in projects similar to the proposed works is involved prior to
appointment of the contractor. A suitably experienced person could be a contractor appointed as a consultant for
this stage or a construction project manager.
Project Execution Plan

The RIBA Plan of Works 2013 defines a Project Execution Plan as a plan produced in collaboration between the project
lead and lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project team. The Project
Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the design. It is sometimes referred to as a
'project quality plan'.
Relevant third parties (see criterion 4)

This includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Actual/intended building users (if known) including facilities management (FM) staff or those responsible for the
day-to-day operation of the building and grounds.
2. Representative consultation group from the existing community (if the building is a new development in an
existing community) or for a community still under construction.
3. Existing partnerships and networks that have knowledge of, and experience working on, existing buildings of the
same type.
4. Potential users of any shared facilities, e.g. operators of clubs and community groups.
AND the following where relevant:
5. In educational buildings, representatives of Local Education Authority, Board of Governors etc.
6. Local or national historic/heritage groups (over and above any requirements relating to statutory consultees).
7. Specialist service and maintenance contractors/representatives where the building function has particular
technical requirements in complex environments, e.g. buildings containing laboratories.
Sustainability Champion (design and monitoring progress)

Members of formal schemes approved by BRE Global in connection with the provision of design advice. At present
the following schemes are deemed to satisfy this requirement:
BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP) Membership Scheme.
Sustainability Champions are trained and qualified to provide BREEAM-related advice to the design team to facilitate
timely and successful target setting, scheduling, prioritisation and monitoring of BREEAM compliance relating to the
design of the building.
They will be subject to ongoing training and competency requirements to ensure that their knowledge is maintained.
Providers of schemes/qualifications not listed, who feel their members meet this definition and who would like to be
listed as approved membership schemes, should contact BRE Global.
Note: The aim of the Sustainability Champion credits is to encourage an integrated design and construction process
that uses BREEAM as a framework for establishing, agreeing and achieving the desired level of sustainability
performance for the project. The Sustainability Champion credits in this BREEAM issue focus on achieving this objective
through the provision of appropriate expertise during the preparation and brief, and design stages of the project.
BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP)

An individual trained and qualified by BRE as a specialist inbuilt environment sustainability, environmental design and
assessment. The role of the BREEAM AP is to facilitate the project team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set
priorities and negotiate the trade-offs required to achieve a target BREEAM rating when the design is formally
assessed. Only qualified individuals who are members of BRE's associated membership scheme comply with the
BREEAM Requirements. This membership ensures an adequate level of competence is maintained through regular
Continuing Professional Development(CPD) in key relevant areas. For a list and contact details of BREEAM Accredited
Professionals, visit http://www.greenbooklive.com/.
Other information
None.
1The Design Quality Indicator (DQI) is a method to assess the design quality of buildings www.dqi.org.uk.

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning

4 No
Aim
To deliver whole life value by encouraging the use of life cycle costing to improve design, specification, through-life
maintenance and operation , and through the dissemination of capital cost reporting promote economic sustainability.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into three parts:
Elemental life cycle cost (2 credits)

Component level life cycle cost (1 credit)
Capital cost reporting (1 credit)
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
Two credits - Elemental life cycle cost (LCC)

1. An outline, entire asset elemental life cycle cost (LCC) plan has been carried out at Process Stage 2 (equivalent to Concept
Design - RIBA Stage 2) in line with 'Standardised method of life cycle costing for construction procurement' PD
156865:2008 1.
2. The elemental LCC plan:
a. Provides an indication of future replacement costs over a period of analysis as required by the client (e.g. 20, 30, 50
or 60 years);
b. Includes service life, maintenance and operation cost estimates.
3. Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the elemental LCC plan has been used to
influence building and systems design/specification to minimise life cycle costs and maximise critical value.
One credit - Component level LCC option appraisal

4. A component level LCC option appraisal has been developed by the end of Process Stage 4 (equivalent to Technical
Design – RIBA Stage 4) in line with PD 156865:2008 and includes the following component types (where present):
a. Envelope, e.g. cladding, windows, and/or roofing
b. Services, e.g. heat source cooling source, and/or controls
c. Finishes, e.g. walls, floors and/or ceilings
d. External spaces, e.g. alternative hard landscaping, boundary protection.
5. Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the component level LCC cycle appraisal
has been used to influence building and systems design/specification to minimise life cycle costs and maximise critical
value.
One credit - Capital cost reporting

6. Report the capital cost for the building in pounds per square metre (£k/m²), via the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and
Reporting tool, Assessment Issue Scoring tab, Management section.

None.

■ Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning Management
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Elemental life cycle cost, capital cost reporting and maintenance strategy, criteria
assessment 1 to 3 and 6
criteria Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply.
Component level LCC plan, criteria 4 to 5
Both options: The plan must include all component types to be installed by the
developer.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Capital cost reporting (1 credit)

assessment 1. Criterion 6.
criteria
General
CN3 Appropriate The option(s) selected to demonstrate how life cycle costs have been minimised
examples and critical value maximised must be appropriate in terms of its relative impact
See criteria 3 and on project costs, future building maintenance burden and size (volume or area)
5. and the stage of the project.
At stage 2, when considering the outputs from the elemental LCC plan,
examples could be in the form of elemental appraisal(s) (where appropriate),
evolutions in concept design to reduce maintenance or replacement costs and /
or contracts for further elemental analysis.
At stage 4, when considering the outputs from the component level option
analysis, examples are likely to be in the form of component specifications
coupled with justifications for their selection (i.e. how they reduce life cycle costs /
maximise critical value).
CN3.1 Pre-defined Where the building is constructed to a pre-defined standard specification, the
specifications LCC elemental plan for this specification may be used to help demonstrate
compliance.

CN3.2 Capital cost At the design stage of assessment, where the final information is not available,
reporting the credit can be awarded where the client provides the predicted capital cost,
including contingencies, and commits to providing this information for the final
stage of assessment. At the final stage, if the final capital cost is not known, the
client's/cost consultant's best estimate should be provided.
This data will be used to inform future BREEAM performance benchmarking and
will be anonymised.
CN3.3 Independent All three parts can be awarded independently from one another. For example,
assessment of the project team can still target the one credit for the component level LCC
parts option appraisal at stage 4 even if they have not been awarded the first two
credits at stage 2 for developing an elemental life cycle cost plan. The capital cost
reporting credit can also be awarded independently from the other two parts.
CN3.4 Component level The Component level LCC option appraisal should review all of the component
LCC option types listed; 4a to 4d (where present). However not every single example cited
appraisal – under each component need be considered; only a selection of those most likely
assessing types to draw valued comparisons. This is to ensure that a wide range of options are
4a-4d considered and help focus the analysis on components which would benefit the
most from appraisal.
CN3.5 Elemental LCC The study period should ideally be agreed by the client, in line with the design life
plan study expectancy of the building. However, where the life expectancy of the building
period has not yet been formally agreed (due to the early stages of the design process),
the default design life of 60 years should be used for modelling purposes (in line
with the UK default).
Building type specific
CN4 Law courts When considering this issue, the term 'project team' includes the Ministry of
buildings – Justice. Responsibility for complying with the criteria of this issue may rest with
responsibility for any or all of the project team members and it is likely that this will vary depending
compliance on the procurement route used for the project.
Methodology
None.
Evidence

■ Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning Management
1, 2 and 3 Elemental life cycle cost plan. As per interim design stage.
4, 5 Component level life cycle cost plan. As per interim design stage.
6 Predicted capital costs via the BREEAM scoring Capital costs via the BREEAM scoring and
and reporting tool. reporting tool.
Life cycle cost (LCC)

The cost of an asset, or its parts throughout its life cycle, while fulfilling the performance requirements; a
methodology for systematic economic evaluation of life cycle costs over a period of analysis, as defined in the agreed
scope.
Elemental LCC plan

This is commonly used for developing solutions at project level during option appraisals. Costs are normally at
building elemental level on the entire asset. Information may be a mix of typical benchmark costs for key elements,
comparative cost modelling or approximate estimates. It is expressed as cost per square metre of gross internal
floor area (GIFA) and presented for elemental analysis, aligned to the level of capital cost plans.
Component level LCC option appraisal

A component level LCC plan is commonly used for cost planning specification choices of systems or component
levels during design development. Component level LCC appraisal for service life planning requires the environment
of the building and other local conditions to be identified, and the fundamental requirements to be met in planning
the service life of the building. Decisions should be made on:
the likely design life of the building (rather than the contractual design life)
minimum functional performance criteria for each component over the building’s design life
components that must be repairable, maintainable or replaceable within the design life of the building. Only
the key differentiators between components and systems need to be comparatively modelled.
Predicted capital cost

The capital cost for the building includes the expenses related to the initial construction of the building:
Construction, including preparatory works, materials, equipment and labour
Site management
Construction financing
Insurance and taxes during construction
Inspection and testing
Costs relating to land procurement, clearance, design, statutory approvals and post occupancy aftercare should not
be included.
Other information
Capital cost reporting

The lack of data relating to capital and life cycle costs/benefits arising from more sustainable building design presents
a major barrier to take-up of more sustainable solutions. This issue seeks to encourage the sharing of data to break
down these barriers and ensure that BREEAM continues to encourage cost effective and financially beneficial
solutions. This information is collected to assist research into the cost and savings of developing sustainable/BREEAM-
assessed buildings, to inform the business case for sustainability and the ongoing development of BREEAM. All data
submitted will be treated as confidential and will only be used anonymously.

When to undertake life cycle costing

Life cycle costing is relevant throughout the building or constructed asset’s life cycle, in particular during the project
planning, design and construction and also during the in-use phases. (For further information please refer to guide
PD156865:2008. A supplement to BS ISO 15686-5.)
Standardised method for life cycle costing (SMLCC) for construction

The guide PD 156865:2008 describes the Standardised method for life cycle costing (SMLCC) for construction
procurement. The objectives of this guide are to provide:
1. A UK standard cost data structure for life cycle costing, which aligns with BS ISO 15686-5 and with the Building
Cost Information Service (BCIS) Standard Form of Capital Cost Analysis (SFCA) and industry recognised occupancy
cost codes. (Refer to Annexes A, B and C) ( www.rics.org)
2. Life cycle costing practitioners with a standardised method of applying life cycle costing, applicable to the UK
construction industry and to the key stages of the procurement process.
3. Process mapping the life cycle costing stages – to help structure how to plan, generate, and interpret and present
the results for a variety of different purposes and levels of life cycle cost planning.
4. Instructions on how to define the client’s specific requirements for life cycle costing and the required outputs and
forms of reporting – and to decide on which method of economic evaluation to apply.
5. Simplification and demystification – by providing practical guidance, instructions and definitions, together with
informative worked examples on how to undertake life cycle costing (for construction).
6. An industry accepted methodology, to facilitate a more accurate, consistent and robust application of life cycle
costing estimation and option appraisals, thereby creating a more effective and robust basis for life cycle cost
analysis and benchmarking.
The guide, PD156865:2008, also seeks to help eliminate confusion over scoping and terminology and to
address concerns over the uncertainty and risks that are undermining confidence in life cycle costs used for
construction procurement. (For further information, please refer to PD 156865 Supplement to BS ISO: 15686-5.)
1PD 156865:2008 Standardized method of life cycle costing for construction procurement: a supplement to BS ISO 15686-
5:2008. Buildings and constructed assets. Service life planning - Part 5: Life cycle costing.

■ Man 03 Responsible construction practices Management
Man 03 Responsible construction practices

6 Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage construction sites which are managed in an environmentally and socially considerate,
responsible and accountable manner.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split in to four parts:
Environmental management (1 credit)

Sustainability Champion (1 credit)
Considerate construction (up to 2 credits)
Monitoring of construction-site impacts (2 credits).
Pre-requisite
1. All timber and timber-based products used on the project is 'Legally harvested and traded timber' (see Relevant
definitions).
Note: For other materials there are no pre-requisite requirements at this stage.
One credit – Environmental management

2. The principal contractor operates an environmental management system (EMS) covering their main operations. The EMS
must be either:
a. Third party certified, to ISO 14001/EMAS or equivalent standard; or
b. Have a structure that is in compliance with BS 8555:2003 and has reached phase four of the implementation stage,
‘implementation and operation of the environmental management system’, and has completed phase audits one to
four, as defined in BS 8555:2003.
For Healthcare NHS buildings, see the pre-requisite for this issue in compliance note Man 03 Responsible construction
practices
3. The principal contractor implements best practice pollution prevention policies and procedures on-site in accordance
with Pollution Prevention Guidelines, Working at construction and demolition-sites: PPG6 1.
One credit – Sustainability Champion (construction)

4. A Sustainability Champion is appointed to monitor the project to ensure ongoing compliance with the relevant
sustainability performance/process criteria, and therefore BREEAM target(s), during the Construction, Handover and
Close Out stages (as defined by the RIBA Plan of Works 2013, Stages 5 and 6).
To do this the Sustainability Champion will ideally be site based or will visit the site regularly to carry out spot checks, with
the relevant authority to do so, and will require action to be taken to address shortcomings in compliance. The
Sustainability Champion will monitor site activities with sufficient frequency (see compliance note CN3.3) to ensure that
risks of non-compliance are minimised. They will report on progress at relevant project team meetings including
identifying potential areas of non-compliance and any action needed to mitigate.
5. The defined BREEAM performance target forms a requirement of the principal contractor's contract (see Man 01

Project brief and design: CN3.2 and Man 01 Project brief and design – Relevant definitions).
6. To achieve this credit at the final post construction stage of assessment, the BREEAM-related performance target for
the project must be demonstrably achieved by the project. This is demonstrated via the BREEAM assessor’s final post
construction stage assessment report.
Up to two credits - Considerate construction

7. Where the principal contractor has used a ‘compliant’ organisational, local or national considerate construction scheme
and their performance against the scheme has been confirmed by independent assessment and verification.
The BREEAM credits can be awarded as follows:
a. One credit where the contractor achieves ‘compliance’ with the criteria of a compliant scheme.
b. Two credits where the contractor significantly exceeds ‘compliance’ with the criteria of the scheme.
Refer to the Relevant definitions section for a list of compliant schemes and therefore how performance, as
determined by a compliant scheme, translates in to BREEAM credits.
Up to two credits - Monitoring of construction-site impacts

8. Responsibility has been assigned to an individual(s) for monitoring, recording and reporting energy use, water
consumption and transport data (where measured) resulting from all on-site construction processes (and dedicated
off-site monitoring) throughout the build programme.
To ensure the robust collection of information, this individual(s) must have the appropriate authority and responsibility
to request and access the data required. Where appointed, the Sustainability Champion could perform this role.
First monitoring credit - Utility consumption
Energy consumption
9. Criterion 8 is achieved.
10. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and subcontractors' energy consumption in kWh (and where
relevant, litres of fuel used) as a result of the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site
accommodation.
11. Report the total carbon dioxide emissions (total kgCO2/project value) from the construction process via the BREEAM
Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool.
Water consumption
13. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and subcontractors' potable water consumption (m³) arising from
the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation.
14. Using the collated data report the total net water consumption (m³), i.e. consumption minus any recycled water use from
the construction process via the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool.
Second monitoring credit - Transport of construction materials and waste

16. Monitor and record data on transport movements and impacts resulting from delivery of the majority of construction
materials to site and construction waste from site. As a minimum this must cover:
a. Transport of materials from the factory gate to the building site, including any transport, intermediate storage and
distribution, (see Relevant definitions).
b. Scope of this monitoring must cover the following as a minimum:
i. Materials used in major building elements (i.e. those defined in BREEAM issue Mat 01 Life cycle impacts), including
insulation materials.
ii. Ground works and landscaping materials.
c. Transport of construction waste from the construction gate to waste disposal processing/recovery centre gate.
Scope of this monitoring must cover the construction waste groups outlined in the project's waste management
plan.
17. Using the collated data, report separately for materials and waste, the total fuel consumption (litres) and total carbon
dioxide emissions (kgCO2 eq), plus total distance travelled (km) via the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool.

The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue:

18. With reference to the considerate construction criterion 7, in addition to meeting the criteria for two credits, the
contractor achieves compliance with the criteria of the compliant scheme to an exemplary level of practice.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment Refer to Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project
criteria Assessments for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment
options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Environmental management (1 credit)

assessment 1. Criteria 1 to 3
criteria
Considerate construction (up to 2 credits)
2. Criterion 7
Monitoring of construction-site impacts
Utility consumption (1 credit)
3. Criteria 8 to 14
Exemplary level performance (1 credit)
4. Criteria 15, 16a, 16b and 17
5. Criterion 16c. As a minimum, this must cover inert materials, metals and mixed
waste groups.
Exemplary level criteria – Considerate construction (1 credit)
6. Criterion 18
General
CN3 Site clearance The scope of this issue applies to the principal contractor and their scope of works. If
the scope of their works includes demolition and site clearance then this stage of
work falls within the scope of the assessment and therefore the issue criteria.
CN3.1 Site timber and Reusable timber formwork itself does not automatically comply. All timber used in the
reusable manufacture of the formwork must be either initially reclaimed, or 'legally harvested
formwork and traded' (see Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials, Relevant definitions
See criterion 2. section).

CN3.2 Target setting At present data from construction-sites do not generally exist in enough detail to set
benchmarks and targets. BREEAM therefore does not set any requirements at
present in terms of specific targets for reducing energy, water and transport
consumption resulting from the construction process.
While BREEAM does not require them, it is strongly recommended that site specific
targets are set and reported against.
Following adoption of widespread and consistent measurement and reporting
protocols for construction-site impacts and collation of construction-site data,
BREEAM is likely in future to establish consistent and complimentary targets as part of
demonstrating compliance with this BREEAM issue (see also Man 03 Responsible
construction practices).
CN3.3 Frequency of site In this context, visits should occur at key stages of the construction process, at times
monitoring where: works can be observed before they are covered up or new works or trades
See criterion 4. start; where significant risks of conflicts or errors could occur; where timing is critical to
demonstrating compliance; where key evidence is required to be produced at specific
times including, but not limited to photographic, delivery notes and other
documentary evidence; and where different trades and systems come together and
one could harm the integrity or compliance of another system's performance against
BREEAM requirements.
CN4 Healthcare (NHS As a pre-requisite of awarding any of the available credits for this issue, the principal
sites) contractor must achieve the measure requiring operation of ‘An Environmental
See criterion 2. Management System’ (as defined in criterion 2 One credit – Environmental
management).
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 Refer to generic evidence A copy of the principal contractors EMS/EMAS

requirement above certificate or for BS8555, evidence of their status, e.g. a
copy of their phase 4 audit.

2 Refer to generic evidence Where certified materials were used, copies of all
requirement above relevant certificates/chain of custody evidence.
7 Refer to generic evidence Scheme certificate and/or compliance report.

requirement above
Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes

The following are defined as compliant schemes for the purpose of this BREEAM issue:
Considerate Constructors Scheme.
To achieve BREEAM credits using the Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) and its Code of Considerate Practice,
the principal contractor must achieve scheme certification and a CCS score as follows:
1. One credit: a CCS score between 25 and 34*
2. Two credits: a CCS score between 35 and 39**
3. Exemplary level performance: a CCS score of 40 or more**.
* A score of at least 5 in each of the five sections must be achieved.
** A score of at least 7 in each of the five sections must be achieved.
A site can be visited by a CCS Monitor more than once and the CCS Certificate will be awarded based on the results of
the CCS Monitor’s final visit. At the final stage of the BREEAM assessment, the number of BREEAM credits awarded
should therefore be based on the final visit and the subsequent Monitor’s report and certified CCS score.
Considerate Constructors Scheme

The Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) is a national initiative set up by the UK construction industry to improve
its image. The scheme is a self-financing, independent organisation owned by the Construction Umbrella Bodies
(Holdings) Ltd (made up of the Construction Products Association and the Construction Industry Council). Sites and
companies that register with the scheme sign up and are monitored against a Code of Considerate Practice,
designed to encourage best practice beyond statutory requirements.
Construction processes
The construction process includes the enabling works, assembly, installation and dis-assembly activities necessary for
servicing the construction and completion of a new building.
Dedicated off-site manufacturing or fabrication

Production of a component or material carried out in an off-site manufacturing or processing facility specifically set
up for the development project.
Factory gate
For the purposes of this issue, the factory gate is defined as being the product manufacturer gate (i.e. where
manufacture and pre-assembly finishes and the material is in its final product form).
Examples might include:
1. Steel/concrete/glass manufacturers for cladding, windows and beams etc.
2. Quarry gate for aggregate and sand
3. Concrete plant for concrete
4. Saw mill and timber processing plant for timber.
Legally harvested and traded timber

Refer to BREEAM issue Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials .
Sustainability Champion (Construction)

Members of formal schemes approved by BRE Global in connection with the provision of design advice. At present
the following schemes are deemed to satisfy this requirement:
BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP) Membership Scheme
BRE Site Sustainability Manager Membership Scheme.
Sustainability Champions are trained and qualified to provide BREEAM-related advice to the design team to facilitate
timely and successful target setting, scheduling, prioritisation and monitoring of BREEAM compliance relating to the
design of the building. They will be subject to ongoing training and competency requirements to ensure that their
knowledge is maintained. Providers of schemes/qualifications not listed, who feel their members meet this definition
and who would like to be listed as approved membership schemes, should contact BRE Global.
Note: The aim of the Sustainability Champion credits is to encourage an integrated design and construction process
that uses BREEAM as a framework for establishing, agreeing and achieving the desired level of sustainability
performance for the project. The Sustainability Champion credits in this BREEAM issue focus on achieving this objective
through the provision of appropriate expertise during the Construction, Handover and Close Out stages of the
project.
BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP)

Refer to Man 01 Project brief and design.
Site Sustainability Manager

An individual qualified by BRE to help to ensure quality in project delivery and to minimise the environmental impacts of
the construction process, as well as achieving the intentions of the building designers. They are based on-site and
ensure that the construction site is managed in an environmentally efficient manner and that the site teams are
confident in achieving the exacting regulations and requirements of environmental certification schemes, for example
BREEAM. Only qualified individuals who are members of BRE's associated membership scheme and are registered to
the scheme throughout the period of construction comply with the BREEAM requirements. This membership ensures
an adequate level of competence is maintained through regular continuing professional development (CPD) in key
relevant areas.
Other information
CO2 reporting protocols

At time of publication, the following guidance is available for CO2 measuring protocols.
1. Encord: http://www.encord.org. They have launched a CO2 reporting protocol.

2. GHG Protocol - http://www.ghgprotocol.org.
3. DECC guidance for business: https://www.gov.uk/measuring-and-reporting-environmental-impacts-guidance-for-
businesses.
Tools for monitoring and targeting construction-site impacts

BRE’s online environmental reporting tool, SMARTWaste, enables users to capture, monitor and target a project's on-site
energy consumption and produce a CO2 footprint, water consumption and responsible sourcing of timber. Transport and
CCS data can also be collected. The system can be used as a tool to help meet the criteria of this issue and as a source of
evidence for demonstrating compliance. It is available through the SMARTWaste Membership scheme by developing tailor-
made versions of SMARTWaste. More details on the tool and membership are available at www.smartwaste.co.uk
Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes

Where a considerate construction/constructors scheme exists and is not listed as a BREEAM-compliant scheme, the scheme
administrator/operator should apply to BRE Global Ltd for details on how to achieve recognition as a compliant scheme.
Constructing Excellence and reporting of construction site impacts

Constructing Excellence publishes the construction industry key performance indicators (KPIs) based on data collected by the
Department for Business, Innovation and Skills via a voluntary quarterly survey returned by contractors throughout the UK. The
Office of National Statistics also reports the annual results in the Construction Statistics Annual. One of the key performance
indicators is the ‘amount of CO2 emissions caused by the energy used during the construction process per £100,000 of

project value (kgCO2/£100k).
Information collated by contractors as part of their voluntary submissions to Constructing Excellence may also serve to help
demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue.
1Working at construction and demolition-sites: PPG6, Pollution Prevention Guidelines. Environment Agency, Northern Ireland
Environment Agency (NIEA) and the Scottish Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA); 2012. www.environment-
agency.gov.uk/business, www.sepa.org.uk.

Man 04 Commissioning and handover

4 Yes
Aim
To encourage a properly planned handover and commissioning process that reflects the needs of the building occupants.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into four parts:
Commissioning and testing schedule and responsibilities (1 credit)

Commissioning building services (1 credit)
Testing and inspecting building fabric (1 credit)
Handover (1 credit).
One credit - Commissioning and testing schedule and responsibilities

1. A schedule of commissioning and testing that identifies and includes a suitable timescale for commissioning and re-
commissioning of all complex and non-complex building services and control systems and testing and inspecting
building fabric.
2. The schedule will identify the appropriate standards that all commissioning activities will be conducted in accordance
with, such as current Building Regulations, BSRIA 1 and CIBSE2 guidelines and/or other appropriate standards, where
applicable. Where a building management system (BMS) is specified, refer to compliance note CN3.2 on BMS
commissioning procedures.
3. An appropriate project team member(s) is appointed to monitor and programme pre-commissioning, commissioning,
testing and, where necessary, re-commissioning activities on behalf of the client.
4. The principal contractor accounts for the commissioning and testing programme, responsibilities and criteria within
their budget and main programme of works, allowing for the required time to complete all commissioning and testing
activities prior to handover.
One credit - Commissioning building services

5. The commissioning and testing schedule and responsibilities credit is achieved.
6. For buildings with complex building services and systems, a specialist commissioning manager is appointed during the
design stage (by either the client or the principal contractor) with responsibility for:
a. Undertaking design reviews and giving advice on suitability for ease of commissioning.
b. Providing commissioning management input to construction programming and during installation stages.
c. Management of commissioning, performance testing and handover/post-handover stages.
Where there are simple building services, this role can be carried out by an appropriate project team member (see
criterion 3), provided they are not involved in the general installation works for the building services system(s).
One credit - Testing and inspecting building fabric

7. The commissioning and testing schedule and responsibilities credit is achieved.
8. The integrity of the building fabric, including continuity of insulation, avoidance of thermal bridging and air leakage paths
is quality assured through completion of post construction testing and inspection (see compliance notes CN3.3, CN3.4
and Man 04 Commissioning and handover). The survey and testing is undertaken by a Suitably Qualified Professional

■ Man 04 Commissioning and handover Management
(see Relevant definitions) in accordance with the appropriate standard.

9. Any defects identified in the thermographic survey or the airtightness testing reports are rectified prior to building
handover and close out. Any remedial work must meet the required performance characteristics for the
building/element.
One credit - Handover

10. A Building User Guide (BUG) is developed prior to handover, for distribution to the building occupiers and premises
managers (see Relevant definitions).
11. A training schedule is prepared for building occupiers/premises managers, timed appropriately around handover and
proposed occupation plans, which includes the following content as a minimum:
a. The building’s design intent
b. The available aftercare provision and aftercare team main contact(s), including any scheduled seasonal
commissioning and post occupancy evaluation
c. Introduction to, and demonstration of, installed systems and key features, particularly building management
systems, controls and their interfaces
d. Introduction to the Building User Guide and other relevant building documentation, e.g. design data, technical
guides, maintenance strategy, operations and maintenance (O&M) manual, commissioning records, log book etc.
e. Maintenance requirements, including any maintenance contracts and regimes in place.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Commissioning and testing schedule and responsibilities, commissioning building
assessment services, criteria 1 to 6
criteria Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable.
Option 2 - Shell and core: With regard to the scope of services being
specified/installed, all criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
Testing and inspecting building fabric
Option 1 - Shell only: criteria 8 and 9
Option 2 - Shell and core: criteria 7 to 9
Handover, criteria 10 to 11
Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable.
Option 2 - Shell and core: Criterion 10 only is applicable. The guide includes, as far as
possible, all relevant sections regarding the services and fabric installed. On
completion of works the building owner/agent/user hands it over to the fit-out
contractor, who can then complete the relevant sections based on the fit-out strategy.
Handover, criterion 11
Both options: This criterion is not applicable.
Assessments for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment
options.

Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Commissioning and testing schedule and responsibilities (1 credit)

assessment 1. Criteria 2 to 4. Simplification of criteria under consideration
criteria Handover (1 credit)
2. Criteria 10 and 11
General
CN3 Other Appropriate standards for completion of this criterion are referenced accordingly
appropriate and include standards covering:
standards Building fabric
See criterion 2. 1. BSEN 13187 Qualitative detection of thermal irregularities in building envelopes.
Infrared method
2. BSEN 13829:2001 Thermal performance of buildings – Determination of air
permeability of buildings – Fan pressurisation method
Commercial refrigeration
1. Guide to Good Commercial Refrigeration Practice, Part5 Commissioning
2. GPG 347 Installation and Commissioning of refrigeration systems
Fume cupboards
1. Labs21programme: A design Guide for energy Efficient Research Laboratories:
Commissioning section- (Applicable to Education building only)
2. BS 7989:2001 Specification for recirculatory filtration fume cupboards
3. BS EN 14175-4 Fume cupboards. On-site test methods
4. CLEAPSS G9 Fume Cupboards in Schools - revision of DfEE Building Bulletin 88
Microbiological safety cabinets
1. Labs21programme: A design Guide for energy Efficient Research Laboratories:
Commissioning section- (Applicable to Education building only)
CN3.1 Process-related Any process or manufacture-related equipment specified as part of the project may
equipment be excluded from the assessment of the commissioning credits, except where they
See criterion 2. form an integral part of the building HVAC services, such as some heat recovery
systems.
CN3.2 BMS Where a building management system (BMS) is specified, the following commissioning
commissioning procedures must be carried out:
procedures 1. Commissioning of air and water systems is carried out when all control devices
See criterion 2. are installed, wired and functional
2. In addition to air and water flow results, commissioning results include physical
measurements of room temperatures, off-coil temperatures and other key
parameters as appropriate
3. The BMS/controls installation should be running in auto with satisfactory internal
conditions prior to handover
4. All BMS schematics and graphics (if BMS is present) are fully installed and
functional to user interface before handover
5. The occupier or facilities team is fully trained in the operation of the system.

CN3.3 Scope of the The thermographic survey must cover 100% of the treated spaces, unless it is a large
thermographic complex building (see CN3.4), and ensure that all elements of the building fabric that
survey enclose an internal heated and/or conditioned (treated) zone of the building will be
tested. This includes internal walls separating treated and untreated zones.
CN3.4 Thermographic In the case of large and complex buildings, it may be impractical for the thermographic
survey of large survey and air-tightness testing to cover 100% of the building. Where a complete
complex buildings thermographic survey is deemed impractical by a Level 2 qualified thermographic
surveyor, the guidance in air tightness standard TSL2 3 should be followed on the
extent of the survey and testing. This could include airports, large hospitals and high-
rise buildings.
CN3.5 Remediation work Any remediation work undertaken, resulting from a thermographic survey and air-
tightness test of the building, should be robust and durable, i.e. the remedial work
must have the same performance characteristics and life expectancy of the
surrounding element(s).
CN3.6 Thermographer The thermographic survey is normally undertaken by a Suitably Qualified Professional
qualification holding a valid Level 2 certificate in thermography (see Relevant definitions). Where a
Level 2 thermographer is not available at the site, the survey may be undertaken by a
Level 1 thermographer and then the images interpreted by a Level 2 thermographer.
CN3.7 Alternatives to A thermographic survey is considered the primary means through which the testing
Thermographic inspection of building fabric criteria could be met.
Survey However there may be other robust means of testing that also fulfill the aim of the
credit. Assessors should consider how such methodology addresses all of the
elements of the criteria (e.g. insulation, thermal bridging, air leakage and the general
integrity of the building fabric) as well as what is appropriate for the building type and
construction. Assessors should then contact BRE Global for approval before
submitting their final assessment report.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be
used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
9, 10 Refer to generic evidence requirement above Thermographic survey and Level 2 thermography
certificate

10, 11 Refer to generic evidence requirement above Building User Guide
Building User Guide (BUG)

Dedicated building/site specific guidance for the non-technical building user. The purpose of the guide is to help
building users access, understand and operate the building efficiently and in a manner in keeping with the original
design intent. A Building User Guide should be written in plain English and will provide easily accessible and
understandable information relevant to the following stakeholders:
The building’s staff (or where relevant residents)
The non-technical facilities management team/building manager
Other building users, e.g. visitors/community users.
The content of the guide will be specific to the building type and end users, but broadly should include information on
the following:
Overview of the building and its environmental strategy, e.g. energy/water/waste efficiency policy/strategy
and how users should engage with/deliver the policy/strategy.
Building services overview and access to controls, e.g. where to find them, what they control, how to
operate effectively and efficiently etc.
Pre-arrival information for visitors, e.g. access and security procedures/provisions
Provision of, and access to, shared facilities
Safety and emergency information/instructions
Building related operational procedures specific to building type/operation, e.g. laboratories
Building related incident reporting/feedback arrangements
Building related training information/links
Provision of, and access to, transport facilities, e.g. public transport, cyclist facilities, pedestrian routes etc.
Provision of, and access to, local amenities
Re-fit, refurbishment and maintenance arrangements/considerations
Links, references and relevant contact details
There is no requirement on the format the Building User Guide should take.
Complex systems
These include, but are not limited to, air-conditioning, comfort cooling, mechanical ventilation, displacement
ventilation, complex passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources,
microbiological safety cabinets and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant.
Specialist Commissioning Managers

The Specialist Commissioning Manager is a specialist contractor rather than a general sub-contractor.
Suitably Qualified Professionals - thermographic survey and airtightness testing

Thermography surveys and airtightness testing are to be undertaken by suitably qualified professionals in
accordance with the appropriate standards, as follows:
Airtightness testing: by professionals with membership of ATTMA (Air Tightness Testing and Measurement
Association) attained at organisational level maintaining UKAS accreditation (as air tightness testing laboratories to
ISO 17025).
Thermographic survey: by a professional holding a valid Level 2 certificate in thermography, as defined by the UKTA
website http://www.ukta.org.
Other information
Thermal bridging assessments

It is good practice to carry out thermal bridging assessments at the design stage. This is encouraged through
building regulations for energy conservation by allowing the use of actual values in the energy calculation, which could
make a significant improvement over using the default values in the National Calculation Methodology. This is
reflected in the Ene 01 Energy Use and Carbon Emissions Reduction issue, so no additional credit is offered within this
issue for thermal bridging assessments. However, good thermal bridging design and assessment will contribute to
successful building fabric testing results and the associated credit.
1BSRIA Commissioning Guides:
Commissioning HVAC Systems: Guidance on the division of responsibilities (TM 1/88.1)
Commissioning of Air Systems (BG 49/2013)
Pre-Commission Cleaning of Pipework Systems (BG 29/2012
Commissioning Water Systems (BG 2/2010)
Commissioning Job Book - A framework for managing the commissioning process (BG 11/2010) .
2CIBSE Commissioning Codes: Set of Seven Codes (2003)
CIBSE Commissioning Code A: Air Distribution Systems (1996 confirmed 2006). ISBN: 9780900953736 CIBSE
Commissioning Code B: Boilers ISBN: 9781903287293
CIBSE Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls ISBN: 9781903287132
CIBSE Commissioning Code L: Lighting (SLL Commissioning Code L). ISBN: 9781903287323
CIBSE Commissioning Code M: Commissioning Management. ISBN: 9781903287330
CIBSE Commissioning Code R: Refrigerating Systems. ISBN: 9781903287286
CIBSE Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems ISBN: 9781906846152.
3Measuring air permeability of building envelopes (non-dwellings), Technical standard Level 2 (TSL2). The Air Tightness Testing
and Measurement Association (ATTMA). October 2010.

Man 05 Aftercare
3 Yes
Aim
To provide post-handover aftercare to the building owner/occupants during the first year of occupation to ensure the
building operates and adapts, where relevant, in accordance with the design intent and operational demands.
Assessment criteria
Aftercare support (1 credit)

Seasonal commissioning (1 credit)
Post occupancy evaluation (1 credit).
The following is required to demonstrate compliance :
One credit - Aftercare support

1. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to provide aftercare support to the building
occupier(s), which includes the following as a minimum:
a. A meeting programmed to occur between the aftercare team/individual and the building occupier/management
(prior to initial occupation, or as soon as possible thereafter) to:
i. Introduce the aftercare team or individual to the aftercare support available, including the Building User Guide
(where existing) and training schedule/content.
ii. Present key information about the building including the design intent and how to use the building to ensure it
operates as efficiently and effectively as possible.
b. On-site facilities management training, to include a walkabout of the building and introduction to and familiarisation
with the building systems, their controls and how to operate them in accordance with the design intent and
operational demands.
c. Initial aftercare support provision for at least the first month of building occupation, e.g. on-site attendance on a
weekly basis to support building users and management (this could be more or less frequent depending on the
complexity of the building and building operations).
d. Longer term aftercare support provision for occupants for at least the first 12 months from occupation, e.g. a
helpline, nominated individual or other appropriate system to support building users/management.
2. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to coordinate the collection and monitoring of
energy and water consumption data for a minimum of 12 months, once the building is occupied. This is done to
facilitate analysis of discrepancies between actual and predicted performance, with a view to adjusting systems and/or
user behaviours accordingly.
One credit - Seasonal commissioning

3. The following seasonal commissioning activities will be completed over a minimum 12-month period, once the building
becomes substantially occupied:
a. Complex systems - Specialist Commissioning Manager:
i. Testing of all building services under full load conditions, i.e. heating equipment in mid-winter, cooling/ventilation
equipment in mid-summer, and under part load conditions (spring/autumn).
ii. Where applicable, testing should also be carried out during periods of extreme (high or low) occupancy.
iii. Interviews with building occupants (where they are affected by the complex services) to identify problems or

■ Man 05 Aftercare Management
concerns regarding the effectiveness of the systems.

iv. Re-commissioning of systems (following any work needed to serve revised loads), and incorporating any
revisions in operating procedures into the operations and maintenance (O&M) manuals.
b. Simple systems (naturally ventilated) - external consultant/aftercare team/facilities manager:
i. Review thermal comfort, ventilation, and lighting, at three, six and nine month intervals after initial occupation,
either by measurement or occupant feedback.
ii. Take all reasonable steps to re-commission systems following the review to take account of deficiencies
identified and incorporate any relevant revisions in operating procedures into the O&M manuals.
One credit - Post occupancy evaluation

4. The client or building occupier makes a commitment to carry out a post occupancy evaluation (POE) exercise one year
after initial building occupation. This is done to gain in-use performance feedback from building users to inform
operational processes, including re-commissioning activities, and maintain or improve productivity, health, safety and
comfort. The POE is carried out by an independent third party (see Man 01 Project brief and design – Relevant
definitions) and needs to cover:
a. A review of the design intent and construction process (review of design, procurement, construction and handover
processes).
b. Feedback from a wide range of building users including Facilities Management on the design and environmental
conditions of the building covering:
i. Internal environmental conditions (light, noise, temperature, air quality)
ii. Control, operation and maintenance
iii. Facilities and amenities
iv. Access and layout
v. Other relevant issues
vi. Sustainability performance (energy/water consumption, performance of any sustainable features or
technologies e.g. materials, renewable energy, rainwater harvesting etc.).
5. The client or building occupier makes a commitment to carry out the appropriate dissemination of information on the
building’s post occupancy performance. This is done to share good practice and lessons learned and inform changes in
user behaviour, building operational processes and procedures, and system controls.
Refer to compliance notes CN3.1 and CN3.2 for a definition of appropriate dissemination. This also provides advice on
appropriate dissemination where the building or building information is commercially or security sensitive.

6. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to coordinate the following activities at quarterly
intervals for the first three years of building occupation:
a. Collection of occupant satisfaction, energy consumption and water consumption data.
b. Analysis of the data to check the building is performing as expected and make any necessary adjustments to
systems controls or to inform building user behaviours.
c. Setting targets for reducing water and energy consumption and monitor progress towards these.
d. Feedback any ‘lessons learned’ to the design team and developer for use in future projects.
e. Provision of the actual annual building energy, water consumption and occupant satisfaction data to BRE.

None.

Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable This issue is not applicable.

assessment
criteria
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Collection and This function can be coordinated/carried out by a dedicated aftercare team or, where
monitoring of the building occupier is known and able to confirm compliance based on their existing
energy and water or proposed operations for the building, the building owner/occupier’s
consumption estates/facilities management team.
data
See criteria 2 and
4.
CN3.1 Appropriate 1. Appropriate dissemination includes communication to immediate stakeholders

dissemination of such as building occupants, managers and owners.
post occupancy In addition information should be communicated externally.
evaluation 2. Appropriate dissemination in most cases will be the production and publication of a
information building case study through one of the following means:
See criterion 4. 1. Client’s/building owner’s own website, publicly available literature or press
release
2. Industry/sector or government/local authority sponsored website or
information portals.
Where there is a demonstrably justifiable reason why public dissemination is not
possible, for example the information is commercially or security sensitive, compliance
can be demonstrated by a commitment to produce and disseminate the relevant
information at an organisational level or to appropriate internal/external stakeholders.
Alternatively, the sensitive parts of the relevant information for dissemination can be
omitted from the publication.

CN3.2 Relevant This includes the following information about the building and its performance:
information for 1. A basic description of the project and building
dissemination 2. BREEAM rating and score
See criterion 4. 3. The key innovative and low-impact design features of the building
4. Project cost
5. Project size: floor area, site area
6. Facilities available for community use (where relevant)
7. Any steps taken during the construction process to reduce environmental
impacts, i.e. innovative construction management techniques
8. Predicted and actual carbon dioxide emissions and/or Energy Performance
Certificate rating.
9. Outcomes of the post occupancy evaluation study, to share lessons learned
from the project including:
a. Occupant feedback
b. Energy and water consumption including renewable energy generation, level
of rainwater/grey water provision.
CN3.3 Provision of One way of demonstrating compliance with this criterion is for the client/end user to
annual energy register and therefore commit the building for assessment under the relevant part of
and water the BREEAM In-Use scheme.
consumption and
occupant
satisfaction data
See criterion 4.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 Refer to generic evidence requirement Contract to provide compliant aftercare support

above and training
2 Refer to generic evidence requirement Seasonal commissioning records/reports and

above letter of appointment

Complex systems
These include, but are not limited to, air-conditioning, mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, complex
passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources, microbiological safety cabinets
and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant.
Specialist Commissioning Manager

The Specialist Commissioning Manager is a specialist contractor rather than a general sub-contractor.
Independent third party

To comply with criterion 4 relating to the use of an independent third party, the client/design team needs to
demonstrate either of the following options:
1. They have used a third party independent of the design process to conduct the necessary Post Occupancy
Evaluation exercise using a compliant method. Or alternatively;
2. If the Post Occupancy Evaluation is to be carried out by an organisation involved with the design of the building e.g.
the project architect, then they must present the assessor with the evidence that demonstrates the independence
of the Post Occupancy Evaluation process from the design process. BREEAM has not attempted to define what
form this exercise must take, the onus is on the design team/relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the
BREEAM assessor a credible level of independence.
Actual vs predicted performance

In most cases it is not feasible to accurately compare predicted vs actual performance due to variances in the
assumptions used in predicted vs actual models. Figures reported via the Carbon Buzz website show that on average,
buildings consume between 1.5 and 2.5 times predicted values. When comparing predicted with actual, an analysis
should be carried out to understand why there may be discrepancies in performance. These discrepancies can be for
a number of reasons including:
Predicted energy consumption is normally based upon building regulation compliance models which only
focus on ‘regulated’ energy use, therefore additional unrelated energy use may not have been modelled in
the design prediction model
may be extended use due to extra occupancy and operating hours, not accounted for in predicted models
Inefficiencies from poor control, bad commissioning or poor maintenance
Additional special functions such as cafeteria, server rooms etc. not accounted for in the predicted model
Variances in actual occupant behaviour that vary from predicted such as use of small power and lighting
CIBSE TM54, Evaluating Operational Energy Performance of Buildings at the Design Stage, CIBSE, 2013 provides
guidance on how to improve the accuracy of the model for operational energy use of buildings at the design stage.
The Carbon Trust guidance, ‘Closing the gap: Lessons learned on realising the potential of low carbon building
design’, also provides additional guidance on this issue.
Absence of predicted performance data

Where building occupiers do not have predicted performance models, it may be more appropriate to benchmark
actual building performance data with other sources of Building Performance Evaluation Data and benchmarks.
Sources of benchmarking information can be found here:
Building performance benchmarks can be found in CIBSE Guidance including:
Guide F: Energy Efficiency in Buildings
CIBSE TM46: Energy Benchmarks
CIBSE TM47: Operational Ratings and Display Energy Certificates
Actual building performance data can also be found here:
CarbonBuzz: www.carbonbuzz.org
Technology Strategy Board Building Performance Evaluation: https://connect.innovateuk.org/web/building-
performance-evaluation/overview
Centre for Sustainable Energy, Display Energy Certificate Data, http://www.cse.org.uk/resources/open-
data/Display Energy Certificate data

Post Occupancy Evaluation Methodologies

The BUS methodology was developed following a series of government funded ‘PROBE’ building performance
evaluation studies in 1995. The BUS methodology is used by independent licensed partners following a four part
process. Further information can be found at http://www.busmethodology.org.uk/
BRE’s Design Quality Method (DQM) is a tried and tested, independent, post occupancy evaluation (POE) method used
by all UK auditing authorities, and many funding bodies. Further information can be found at
http://www.bre.co.uk/dqm
Further guidance on POE
The BCO guide to Post Occupancy Evaluation (POE), British Council for Offices, 2007
BRE Digest 478, Building performance feedback: getting started, Building Research Establishment, 2003
Guide to Post Occupancy Evaluation Report and Toolkit, HEFCE, AUDE & University of Westminster, 2006
Other information
Soft Landings Framework 1
A framework written and produced by Usable Buildings Trust (UBT) and Building Services Research and Information
Association (BSRIA) that seeks to promote improved briefing, design, handover and building performance in-use. Embedding
the principles of this framework within a project should ensure that the evidence is available to demonstrate compliance with
particular aspects of the criteria under this BREEAM issue. Please also note that BSRIA has produced a BREEAM New
Construction/Soft landings interpretation note2 for clients and design teams.
The Government Soft Landings (GSL) is a version of the Soft Landings concept tailored for use on public sector related
projects to link in with the work of the government’s Building Information Modelling Task Group. It is to be mandated in 2016
alongside Building Information Modelling (BIM) Level 2 and is to be implemented by central government departments. It
should be noted that the GSL programme will become compulsory for local government developments after 2016. Further
information is available from: http://www.bimtaskgroup.org/Government Soft Landings
1The Soft Landings Framework, for better briefing, design, handover and building performance in-use, Usable Buildings Trust
(UBT), BSRIA BG 4/2009.
2BREEAM 2011 and Soft Landings, an interpretation note for clients and designers, BSRIA BG 28/2011

Health & wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Health and Wellbeing
Category overview
Fully fitted 15% Shell only 10% Shell and core 10.5% None
Summary
This category encourages the increased comfort, health and safety of building occupants, visitors and others within the
vicinity. Issues in this section aim to enhance the quality of life in buildings by recognising those that encourage a healthy and
safe internal and external environment for occupants.

Hea 01 Visual Up to 6 Potential for disabling glare has been designed out of all relevant
comfort building areas.
Good practice daylighting levels have been met.
Floor space in relevant building areas has an adequate view out to
reduce eye-strain and provide a link to the outside.
Internal and external lighting systems are designed to avoid flicker and
provide appropriate illuminance (lux) levels.
Internal lighting is zoned to allow for occupant control.
Hea 02 Indoor air 5 Minimising sources of air pollution through careful design
quality specification and planning.
Building ventilation strategy is designed to be flexible and adaptable
to potential future building occupant needs and climatic scenarios.
Hea 03 Safe 2 Production of an objective risk assessment of the proposed

containment laboratory facilities.
in Containment devices such as fume cupboards meet best practice
laboratories safety and performance requirements and objectives.
Containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities to meet best practice
safety and performance criteria where specified.
Hea 04 Thermal 3 Thermal modelling carried out to appropriate standards.

comfort Projected climate change scenario(s) considered as part of the
thermal model.
The thermal modelling analysis has informed the temperature control
strategy for the building and its users.

Health and Wellbeing ■ Health & wellbeing
Hea 05 Acoustic up to 4 The building meets appropriate acoustic performance standards and
performance credits testing requirements in terms of:
Sound insulation
Indoor ambient noise level
Reverberation times.
Hea 06 Safety and 2 Provision of effective measures which support safe access to and
security from the building.
Security needs are understood and taken into account in the design
and specification.

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Building type dependent No
Aim
To ensure daylighting, artificial lighting and occupant controls are considered at the design stage to ensure best practice in
visual performance and comfort for building occupants.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into four parts:
Glare control (1 credit)

Daylighting (up to 2 credits - building type dependent)
View out (1 credit except for a Healthcare building with inpatient areas, which has 2 credits available)
Internal and external lighting (1 credit)
One credit - Glare control

1. The potential for disabling glare has been designed out of all relevant building areas using a glare control strategy, either
through building form and layout and/or building design measures (see compliance note CN3).
2. The glare control strategy avoids increasing lighting energy consumption, by ensuring that:
a. The glare control system is designed to maximise daylight levels under all conditions while avoiding disabling glare in
the workplace or other sensitive areas. The system should not inhibit daylight from entering the space under cloudy
conditions, or when sunlight is not on the façade.
AND
b. The use or location of shading does not conflict with the operation of lighting control systems.
Up to two credits - Daylighting (building type dependent)

3. Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options:
4. a. The relevant building areas meet good practice daylight factor(s) and other criterion as outlined in Table 10 and
Table 11 .
OR
b. The relevant building areas meet good practice average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria as outlined
in Table 12 .
Table 10 Minimum values of average daylight factor required
Building/area type Credits Average Minimum Other requirements

daylight factor area (m²) to
required comply
Education buildings

■ Hea 01 Visual comfort Health & wellbeing

required comply
Pre-schools, schools, 2 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table 11

further education-
occupied spaces
Higher education- 1 2% 60%

occupied spaces
2 2% 80%
Healthcare buildings
Staff and public areas 2 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table 11
Occupied patient’s areas 3% 80%

(dayrooms, wards) and
consulting rooms
Multi-residential buildings
Kitchen 1 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR (c) in Table 11
Living rooms, dining rooms, 2% 80%

studies (including home
office)
Non-residential or 2% 80%
communal occupied
spaces
Retail buildings
Sales areas 1 - 35% Point daylight factors of 2% or more
Other occupied areas 1 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table 11
Courts, Industrial, Office, Prison buildings and all Other building types


required comply
Cells and custody cells 1 1.5% 80% N/A
Internal association or 3% 80% EITHER a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7

atrium area OR a minimum point daylight factor of
2.1%
Patient care spaces 3% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table 11
Teaching, lecture and 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table 11
seminar spaces
All occupied spaces, unless 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table 11
indicated in Hea 01 Visual
comfort
Table 11 Daylighting uniformity criteria
Ref Criteria
(a) A uniformity ratio of at least 0.3 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.3 times the relevant average
daylight factor value in Table 10 . Spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at
least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.7 times the relevant average daylight factor value in
Table 10 .
(b) At least 80% of the room has a view of sky from desk or table top height (0.85m in multi-residential
buildings, 0.7m in other buildings).
(c) The room depth criterion d/w +d/HW < 2/(1-RB) is satisfied.
Where:
d = room depth,
w = room width,
HW = window head height from floor level,
RB = average reflectance of surfaces in the rear half of the room,
Note:
Table 17 gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head
heights of side-lit rooms
Table 12 Space type and illuminance requirements - both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should
be met.
Area type Credits Minimum Average daylight Minimum daylight

area to illuminance (averaged over illuminance at worst lit point
comply entire space)
Education buildings


Pre-schools, schools, further 2 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 At least 90 lux for 2000
education - occupied hours per year or more hours per year or more
spaces
Higher education - occupied 1 60%

spaces
OR Higher education - 2 80%

occupied spaces
Healthcare buildings
Staff and public areas 2 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 At least 90 lux for 2000
hours per year or more hours per year or more
Occupied patient's areas 80% At least 300 lux for 2650 At least 90 lux for 2650
(dayrooms, wards) and hours per year or more hours per year or more
consulting rooms
Multi-residential buildings
Kitchen 1 100% At least 100 lux for 3450 At least 30 lux for 3450
Living rooms, dining rooms, At least 100 lux for 3450 At least 30 lux for 3450
studies (including home hours per year or more hours per year or more
office)
Non-residential/communal 80% At least 200 lux for 2650 At least 60 lux for 2650
occupied spaces hours per year or more hours per year or more
Retail buildings
Sales areas 1 35% At least 200 lux point daylight illuminances for 2650 hours
per year or more
Other occupied areas 1 80% At least 200 lux for 2650 At least 60 lux for 2650
Courts, Industrial, Office, Prison buildings and all Other building types


Cells and custody cells 1 80% At least 100 lux for 3150 N/A
hours per year or more
Internal association or 80% At least 300 lux for 2650 At least 210 lux for 2650
atrium hours per year or more hours per year
Patient care spaces 80% At least 300 lux for 2650 At least 210 lux for 2650
Teaching, lecture and 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 At least 90 lux for 2000
seminar spaces hours per year or more hours per year or more
All occupied spaces, unless 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 At least 90 lux for 2000
indicated in Relevant hours per year or more hours per year or more
definitions
One credit - View out

4. 95% of the floor area in each relevant building areas is within 7m of a wall which has a window or permanent opening
that provides an adequate view out.
5. The window/opening must be ≥ 20% of the surrounding wall area (refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort in the Additional
information section). Where the room depth is greater than 7m, compliance is only possible where the percentage of
window/opening is the same as, or greater than, the values in table 1.0 of BS 8206 1.
6. In addition, the building type criteria in Table 13 are applicable to view out criteria.
Table 13 View out building specific requirements.
Building type View out requirements
Prison buildings Cells

An adequate view out from a normal standing or sitting position and the distance
between each window and nearest external solid object (i.e. buildings, screens,
walls/fences) is ≥ 10m.
Where existing features prevent compliance with this criteria in less than 20% of the cells
within the building, the credit can still be awarded.
Patient occupied spaces
See Healthcare requirements for these spaces.
Multi-residential buildings Self-contained flats - living rooms

Sheltered housing - communal lounges, individual bedrooms and bedsits
All positions within relevant areas are to be within 5m of a wall which has a window or
permanent opening providing an adequate view out. The window/opening must be ≥
20% of the surrounding wall area.
Healthcare buildings with Patient occupied spaces, e.g. wards and dayrooms
inpatient areas (one As criteria 4 and 5 for the relevant building areas PLUS the distance between the wall with
additional credit) the window/opening and nearest external solid object (e.g. buildings, screens,
walls/fences) is ≥ 10m.

One credit - Internal and external lighting levels, zoning and control
Internal lighting
7. All fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps are fitted with high frequency ballasts.
8. Internal lighting in all relevant areas of the building is designed to provide an illuminance (lux) level appropriate to the
tasks undertaken, accounting for building user concentration and comfort levels. This can be demonstrated through a
lighting design strategy that provides illuminance levels in accordance with the SLL Code for Lighting 2012 and any other
relevant industry standard.
9. For areas where computer screens are regularly used, the lighting design complies with CIBSE Lighting Guide 7 2 sections
2.4, 2.20, and 6.10 to 6.20. This gives recommendations highlighting:
a. Limits to the luminance of the luminaires to avoid screen reflections. (Manufacturers’ data for the luminaires should
be sought to confirm this.)
b. For uplighting, the recommendations refer to the luminance of the lit ceiling rather than the luminaire; a design team
calculation is usually required to demonstrate this.
c. Recommendations for direct lighting, ceiling illuminance, and average wall illuminance.
External lighting
10. All external lighting located within the construction zone is designed to provide illuminance levels that enable users to
perform outdoor visual tasks efficiently and accurately, especially during the night. To demonstrate this, external lighting
provided is specified in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas3 and BS EN
12464-2:2014 Light and lighting - Lighting of work places - Part 2: Outdoor work places.
Zoning and occupant control

11. Internal lighting is zoned to allow for occupant control (see Relevant definitions) in accordance with the criteria below for
relevant areas present within the building:
a. In office areas, zones of no more than four workplaces
b. Workstations adjacent to windows/atria and other building areas separately zoned and controlled
c. Seminar and lecture rooms: zoned for presentation and audience areas
d. Library spaces: separate zoning of stacks, reading and counter areas
e. Teaching space or demonstration area
f. Whiteboard or display screen
g. Auditoria: zoning of seating areas, circulation space and lectern area
h. Dining, restaurant, café areas: separate zoning of servery and seating/dining areas
i. Retail: separate zoning of display and counter areas
j. Bar areas: separate zoning of bar and seating areas
k. Wards or bedded areas: zoned lighting control for individual bed spaces and control for staff over groups of bed
spaces
l. Treatment areas, dayrooms, waiting areas: zoning of seating and activity areas and circulation space with controls
accessible to staff.
Note: the criteria for zoning of lighting control are excluded for assessments of prison buildings.
12. Areas used for teaching, seminar or lecture purposes have lighting controls provided in accordance with CIBSE Lighting
Guide 5 4
13. In addition the building type criteria in Table 14 (where relevant);
Table 14 Internal and external lighting building specific requirements.
Building type Internal and external lighting requirements
Education buildings Manual lighting controls are easily accessible for the teacher while teaching and on
entering/leaving the teaching space.

Building type Internal and external lighting requirements
Prison buildings Cells

Lit to a maintained illuminance of 200 lux at table top level. In addition there must be the
facility (using, for example, dimming, step switching or separate task and general lighting)
for the occupant of the cell to select a lower level of general lighting if required.
Exercise yards
Lit to a maintained illuminance of at least 10 lux. However, if such spaces are, or will be, used
as sports facilities they must be lit to a maintained illuminance of 100 lux.
Court buildings Separate zoning is also provided for the following areas (as a minimum):
1. Judge’s/magistrate’s bench
2. Dock
3. Jury area
4. Public seating area.
Lighting control of the zones in the above spaces, and the courtroom as a whole, cater for
the following settings:
1. Full lighting (to allow cleaning etc.)
2. Normal lighting (for court sessions)
3. Dimmed (for the purpose of showing audio-visual evidence, but allowing enough
light for note taking).

The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for daylighting:
14. Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options:
15. a. Relevant building areas meet exemplary daylight factor(s) and the relevant criteria in Table 15 .
OR
b. Relevant building areas meet exemplary average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria in Table 16 .
Table 15 Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required.
Area type Credits Average Minimum Other requirements

daylight area (m2) to
factor comply
required
All building types The criteria outlined in Table 10 and Table 11 concerning uniformity ratio (a), view
of sky (b) or room depth criterion (c) are met where they are used to demonstrate
compliance.
All building types (excluding retail – see below)

Area type Credits Average Minimum Other requirements

daylight area (m2) to
factor comply
required
Functions as identified in the 1 3% 80% Where used, a minimum point

standard criteria (multi storey daylight factor of 1.2% OR
buildings) 2.1% for spaces with glazed
roofs, such as atria
Functions as identified in the 4% 80% Where used, a minimum point

standard criteria (single storey daylight factor of 1.6% OR
buildings) 2.8% for spaces with glazed
Prisons and court cells 2% 80% N/A
Prison internal 5% 80% A uniformity ratio of at least 0.7

association/atrium area or a minimum point daylight
factor of 3.5%
Retail
Sales areas 1 N/A 50% A minimum point daylight

factor of 2% must be achieved
in the compliant areas. Assess
total sales areas without
rounding up to the nearest
room.
Common areas and offices 3% 80% Where used, a minimum point

(multi storey buildings) daylight factor of 1.2% OR
2.1% for spaces with glazed
Common areas and offices 4% 80% Where used, a minimum point

(single storey buildings) daylight factor of 1.6% OR
2.8% for spaces with glazed
Table 16 Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance)
should be met.

area to illuminance illuminance at worst
comply (averaged over lit point
entire space)
All building types (excluding retail – see below)


area to illuminance illuminance at worst
comply (averaged over lit point
entire space)
Multi-storey buildings 1 80% At least 300 lux for At least 90 lux for
Occupied spaces 2650 hours per 2650 hours per
(unless indicated below) year or more year or more
Single storey buildings 80% At least 300 lux for At least 120 lux for
Occupied spaces 3000 hours per 3000 hours per
(unless indicated below) year or more year or more;
or in spaces with
glazed roofs (such
as atria),
at least 210 lux for
3000 hours per
year or more
Prisons and courts buildings 80% At least 100 lux for N/A
Cells and custody cells 3450 hours per
year or more
Prison buildings 80% At least 300 lux for At least 210 lux for
Internal association or atrium areas 3250 hours per 3250 hours per
year or more year or more
Retail
Retail buildings 1 50% At least 300 lux point daylight illuminances

Sales areas for 2000 hours per year or more
Retail buildings 80% Select relevant

Other occupied areas criteria above for
occupied spaces
dependant on
whether you are
assessing a multi-
storey or single-
storey building.

Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights
The table below gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of side-lit
rooms.

Table 17 Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights
Reflectance (RB) 0.4 0.5 0.6
Room width (m) 3 10 3 10 3 10
Window head height (m)
2.5 4.5 6.7 5.4 8.0 6.8 10.0
3.0 5.0 7.7 6.0 9.2 7.5 11.5
3.5 5.4 8.6 6.5 10.4 8.1 13.0
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Glare control, criteria 1 to 2

assessment Both options :These criteria are not applicable.
criteria
Daylighting, criteria 3 and 14
Both options : All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
View out, criteria 4 to 6
Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
Internal lighting, zoning and occupant control, criteria 7 to 9, 11 to 13

Both options : These criteria are not applicable.
External lighting, criteria 10, 13
options.
CN1.1 Glare control This compliance note has been removed as the Glare control credit is not applicable
to Shell only and Shell and core assessments.
CN1.2 View out Both options

Where it is not possible to confirm which areas of the building will contain
workstations/benches or desks, then all areas of the building designed for and/or
likely to be occupied by workstations/benches or desks must comply with the relevant
criteria.
Simple buildings

assessment
criteria
General
Glare control
CN3 Compliant forms Compliant shading measures for meeting glare control credit include:
of glare control -
building integrated measures (e.g. low eaves)
curtains as glare
occupant controlled devices such as blinds (where transmittance value is <
control
0.1 (10%))
bioclimatic design
external shading or brise soleil.
Glare control must provide shading from both high level summer and low level winter
sun. Where using fixed systems, design studies can be used to demonstrate that
sunlight is prevented from reaching building occupants during occupied hours.
Curtains (where used without other forms of shading) do not meet the criteria for the
glare control credit, as they do not provide sufficient control to optimise daylight in to
the space. Furthermore, the use of curtains to control glare is likely to cause occupants
to rely more on artificial lighting.
Daylighting
CN3.1 Percentage of Where the criteria specify that a percentage of floor area must be adequately
assessed area illuminated by daylight, this refers to the percentage of the total floor area of all the
See criterion 3. rooms that must be assessed, i.e. the compliant area. If for example, a development
has six rooms that must be assessed, each 150m²(total area 900m²) and 80% of this
floor area must meet the criterion, then 720m²must comply with the criterion; this is
equal to 4.8 rooms. The number of rooms that must comply must always be rounded
up; therefore in this example, five rooms must have an average daylight factor of 2%
or more (plus meet the other criteria) to achieve the credit.
When using the point daylight factor to determine compliance for retail sales areas,
the minimum percentage area should be based on the total floor area being
assessed. Individual 'rooms' or sub areas do not need to meet the minimum
thresholds. This is to allow for the typical building form restrictions and layout
configurations that are necessary for these type of spaces.
CN3.2 External In calculating minimum and average daylight factors and daylight illuminances,
obstructions external obstructions should be taken into account. For illuminance calculations, the
reflectance of external obstructions should be taken as 0.2 unless on-site
measurements of external reflectance have been made.
CN3.3 Dirt factors when Daylight calculations should include a maintenance factor for dirt on the windows, as
calculating given in British Standard Code of Practice for daylighting, BS8206 Part 2, appendix
daylight A1.3.

CN3.4 Borrowed light For areas where borrowed light is used to demonstrate compliance with daylighting
criteria, calculations or results from appropriate lighting design software must be
provided to demonstrate that such areas meet the BREEAM criteria (if the light from
these sources is required in order for the room to comply). Examples of borrowed
light include: light shelves, clerestory glazing, sun pipes or internal
translucent/transparent partitions (such as those using frosted glass).
CN3.5 Room depth For rooms lit by windows on two opposite sides, the maximum room depth that can
criterion - rooms be satisfactorily illuminated by daylight is twice the limiting room depth (d) (measured
lit from two from window wall to window wall; CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 5. The reflectance of the
opposite sides imaginary internal wall should be taken as 1.
CN3.6 Uniformity with The room depth criteria cannot be used where the lighting strategy relies on
rooflights rooflights. In such areas either appropriate software has to be used to calculate the
uniformity ratio or, in the case of a regular array of rooflights across the whole of the
space, figure 2.36 (page 37) within CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 can be used to
determine the uniformity ratio.
CN3.7 Daylighting - The uniformity ratio calculation, minimum point daylight factor and minimum daylight
uniformity ratio illuminance can exclude areas within 0.5m of walls. Areas within 0.5m are not
Calculation regarded as part of the working plane for this purpose, although they are included in
the average daylight factor and average daylight illuminance calculations.
CN3.8 View of sky To comply with the view of sky criteria (ref (b)) in Table 11 , at least 80% of the room
requirement that complies with the average daylight factor requirement must receive direct light
See criterion 3. from the sky, i.e. it is permissible for up to 20% of the room not to meet the view of
sky requirement and still achieve a compliant room.
Internal and external lighting levels/zoning and control
CN3.9 Relevant industry Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges: Building Bulletin 90: ‘Lighting Design for
standard for Schools’6
lighting design Please note that for care homes housing people with dementia the following
standard can be used instead of the SLL Code for Lighting:
Design Lighting for People with Dementia, University of Stirling, Stirling,

2013 7.
Please note that the illuminance levels specified in the SLL Code for Lighting, 2012
align with BS EN 12464-1 8.
CN3.10 Occupancy/ Where occupancy or workstation layout is not known, lighting control can be zoned
workstation on the basis of 40m²grids, i.e. an assumption of 1 person/workspace per 10m².
layout unknown
CN3.11 Small spaces Buildings consisting entirely of small rooms/spaces (less than 40m²) which do not
require any subdivision of lighting zones/control will meet the zoning criteria by
default.

CN3.12 Zones of four The limit of four workspaces is indicative of the required standard but is not a fixed
workspaces requirement. Where there is justification for this to be increased to fit with the
adopted lighting strategy, this may be accepted provided that the assessor is
satisfied that the aim of this criterion is upheld, i.e. that there is suitable zoning/control
of lighting to enable a reasonable degree of occupant control over lighting in their
personable work area. The relevant design team member, e.g. lighting consultant,
should set out how this is to be achieved in such an instance.
CN3.13 Lighting zoning The controls specified will depend on the size and use of the space but a typical
and control - auditorium or lecture theatre with stepped seating and a formal
auditoria spaces lectern/demonstration/performance area would typically be expected to have
lighting controls as follows:
1. Full normal lighting (to allow for entry/exit, cleaning etc.)
2. Demonstration area lighting off and audience area lighting reduced to a low
level (for the purpose of line slide projection, but allowing enough light for the
audience to take notes)
3. All lighting off (for the projection of tone slides, colour slides, and for the
purposes of visual demonstrations/performances)
4. Separate localised lectern lighting.
CN3.14 No external Where no external light fittings are specified (either separate from or mounted on the
lighting external building façade or roof), the criteria relating to external lighting do not apply
and the credit can be awarded on the basis of compliance with the internal lighting
criteria. The following internal areas are excluded from the lighting zone requirements:
1. Media and arts production spaces
2. Sports facilities (exercise spaces only, including hydrotherapy and physiotherapy
areas).
CN4 Education - For Education buildings, where the EFA daylighting requirements have been achieved,
Education Funding for all relevant rooms within the building (in accordance with Priority School Building
Agency (EFA) Programme (PSBP) Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification: Generic Design Brief
requirements by the Education Funding Agency, June 2013 9), it can be assumed that the BREEAM
daylighting requirements have also been met and therefore the two credits available
for daylighting can be awarded by default. In this instance, evidence would need to be
provided to demonstrate that the EFA requirements have been achieved.
CN4.1 Education (pre- Where child care and/or acute SEN spaces are included within the scope of the
schools) and acute assessment, controls should be provided for the teacher/member of staff, i.e. it is not
Special a necessity for the controls to be accessible to the children.
Educational Needs Where nursery spaces are included within the scope of the assessment, controls
(SEN) should be provided for the member of staff, not the nursery school children.
controls for
children
Methodology
None.

Evidence
3, 4 Daylighting calculations Refer to generic evidence requirement above
Adequate view out

BREEAM defines an adequate view out as a view of a landscape or buildings (rather than just the sky) at seated eye
level (1.2 – 1.3m) within the relevant building areas and should ideally be through an external window. A view into an
internal courtyard or atrium will comply provided the distance from the opening to the back wall of the
courtyard/atrium is at least 10m (therefore allowing enough distance for the eyes to refocus). The view cannot be an
internal view across the room, as this is likely to become obstructed by partitions, filing cabinets etc.
Average daylight factor

The average daylight factor is the average indoor illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room,
expressed as a percentage of the simultaneous outdoor illuminance on a horizontal plane under an unobstructed CIE
Standard Overcast Sky.
Clinical areas
Areas of the building in which medical functions are carried out that require specific restricted environmental
conditions such as humidity, daylighting, temperature, etc. (e.g. X-ray, operating department, delivery room, etc.).
Computer simulation
Software tools that can be used to model more complex room geometries for daylighting.
Construction zone
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the
BREEAM-assessed building, and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works.
Illuminance
The amount of light falling on a surface per unit area, measured in lux.
Occupied space
A room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user.
Please note there is a specific, unrelated, definition of 'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and
measurement and this should not be confused with the definition used here.
Patient areas
Areas of the building used mainly by inpatients (e.g. wards, dayrooms, etc.).
Point daylight factor

A point daylight factor is the ratio between the illuminance (from daylight) at a specific point on the working plane
within a room, expressed as a percentage of the illuminance received on an outdoor unobstructed horizontal plane.
This is based on an assumed overcast sky, approximated by the ‘CIE (Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage)

overcast sky’.
The minimum point daylight factor is the lowest value of the daylight factor on the working plane at a point that is not
within 0.5m of a wall. Similarly the minimum illuminance is calculated at the worst lit point on the working plane that is
not within 0.5m of a wall. These points will usually be close to a rear corner of the room. Computer simulations are the
most appropriate tools to allow for point daylight factors and illuminances to be calculated.
Public areas
Within a Healthcare building type, this includes areas of the building designed for public use where no medical
functions are carried out (e.g. reception, retail unit, waiting areas).
Relevant building areas:
Daylighting
For the purpose of BREEAM this is defined as areas within the building where good daylighting is considered to be of
benefit to the building users (typically those areas occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more). This includes the
following (where occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more) specifically stated because they are often omitted;
1. Sports hall exercise spaces
2. Laboratory areas unless the type of research that will be carried out requires strictly controlled environmental
conditions, such as the exclusion of natural light at all times.
3. Self-contained flats
4. Kitchen and catering areas
5. General communal areas
6. Small offices (including those within multi-residential buildings)
7. Meeting rooms (including those within multi-residential buildings)
8. Leisure areas
9. Any area that may involve close up work.
However, this excludes the following (where present):
1. Media, arts production, SEN sensory spaces, x-ray rooms and other areas requiring strictly controlled acoustic or
lighting conditions
2. Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions, e.g. operating theatres, delivery rooms or pathology.
However, BREEAM strongly advises that the benefits from daylighting and view out are seriously considered when
designing areas of critical and intensive care in Healthcare buildings.
3. Holding areas and custody cells where security issues conflict with the BREEAM daylighting requirements
4. Custody cells in courts, where privacy is a functional/operational requirement.
Glare control
For glare control include areas of the building where lighting and resultant glare could be problematic for users, e.g.
those areas that have been designed to contain/use workstations, projector screens etc. and sports halls. Spaces in
the categories described above, for which daylight and view out are excluded, should not be assessed against the
glare control criteria.
View out
BREEAM defines relevant building areas requiring a view out to include areas of the building where:
1. There are or will be workstations/benches or desks for building users.
2. Close work will be undertaken or visual aids will be used.
3. A view out is deemed to be of benefit to the building occupants, e.g. in spaces where occupants are likely to
spend a significant amount of time.
Excluded areas for each of these might include:
1. Nurse bases where they are located centrally in a ward/patient area in order to enable patient observation.
2. Courtrooms and interview rooms where compliance is not possible due to security or privacy criteria.
3. Prison staff areas containing workstations that for security or observational purposes must be located centrally
within the building.
4. Any clinical areas where the control of environmental/operational conditions prevents such spaces from
providing a view out.
5. Conference rooms, lecture theatres, sports halls, acute SEN and also any spaces where the exclusion or limitation
of natural light is a functional requirement e.g. laboratories, media spaces, etc.

Internal and external lighting

Where no external light fittings are specified (either separate from or mounted on the external building façade or
roof), the criteria relating to external lighting do not apply and the credit can be awarded on the basis of compliance
with the internal lighting criteria. The following internal areas are excluded from the lighting zone requirements:
1. Media and arts production spaces
2. Sports facilities (exercise spaces only, including hydrotherapy and physiotherapy areas).
Lighting zoning
For rooms or spaces not listed within criterion 12, the assessor can exercise an element of judgement when
determining whether the specification is appropriate for the space given its end use, and the aim and criteria of this
BREEAM issue.
Separate zoning control

Light switches or controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can be accessed and operated by the
individual(s) occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone or area
they control.
Staff areas
Areas of the building used mainly by staff (e.g. offices, meeting rooms, staff rooms) and medical areas where
patients are admitted but that do not require restricted environmental conditions (e.g. consulting rooms,
physiotherapy, etc.).
Surrounding wall area

Surrounding wall area refers to the area (in m²) of the internal wall on which the window/opening is located, including
the area of the window/opening itself.
Uniformity
The uniformity is the ratio between the minimum illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room (or
minimum daylight factor) and the average illuminance (from daylight) on the same working plane (or average daylight
factor).
View of sky/no-sky line

Areas of the working plane have a view of sky when they receive direct light from the sky, i.e. when the sky can be seen
from working plane height. The no-sky line divides those areas of the working plane, which can receive direct skylight,
from those that cannot.
Working plane
CIBSE LG10 defines the working plane as the horizontal, vertical or inclined plane in which a visual task lies. The working
plane is normally taken as 0.7m above the floor for offices and 0.85m for industry.
Other information
None.
1BS 8206-2:2008 Lighting for buildings Code of practice for daylighting
2CIBSE Lighting Guide 7, 2015
3BS 5489-1:2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas, Code of Practice for the design of road lighting, BSI, 2013
4SLL LIGHTING GUIDE 5: Lecture, teaching and conference rooms, 1991
5CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 Daylighting and window design, 1999.
6Building Bulletin 90: ‘Lighting Design for Schools’
7Pollock R, McNair D, McGuire B and Cunningham C, Design Lighting for People with Dementia, Dementia Services
Development Centre, University of Stirling, Stirling, 2013
8BS EN 12464-1:2014 Light and lighting. Lighting of work places. Indoor work places, 2003

9Priority School Building Programme PSBP Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification: Generic Design Brief by the Education
Funding Agency, June 2013

■ Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health & wellbeing
Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Aim
To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the specification and installation of appropriate
ventilation, equipment and finishes.
Assessment criteria
Minimising sources of air pollution (4 credits)

Adaptability - potential for natural ventilation (1 credit)
Note:
The potential for natural ventilation credit does not apply to buildings on a prison development.
Minimising sources of air pollution
One credit - Indoor air quality (IAQ) plan

1. An indoor air quality plan has been produced , with the objective of facilitating a process that leads to design,
specification and installation decisions and actions that minimise indoor air pollution during occupation of the building.
The indoor air quality plan must consider the following:
a. Removal of contaminant sources
b. Dilution and control of contaminant sources
c. Procedures for pre-occupancy flush out
d. Third party testing and analysis
e. Maintaining indoor air quality in-use
One credit- Ventilation

The building has been designed to minimise the concentration and recirculation of pollutants in the building as follows:
2. Provide fresh air into the building in accordance with the criteria of the relevant standard for ventilation.
3. Design ventilation pathways to minimise the build-up of air pollutants in the building, as follows:
a. In air conditioned and mixed mode buildings/spaces:
i. The building’s air intakes and exhausts are over 10m apart and intakes are over 20m from sources of external
pollution; OR
ii. The location of the building's air intakes and exhausts, in relation to each other and external sources of pollution,
is designed in accordance with BS EN 13779:2007 1 Annex A2.
b. In naturally ventilated buildings/spaces: openable windows/ventilators are over 10m from sources of external
pollution.
4. Where present, HVAC systems must incorporate suitable filtration to minimise external air pollution, as defined in BS EN
13779:2007 Annex A3.

5. Areas of the building subject to large and unpredictable or variable occupancy patterns have carbon dioxide (CO ) or air
2
quality sensors specified and:
a. In mechanically ventilated buildings/spaces: sensor(s) are linked to the mechanical ventilation system and provide
demand-controlled ventilation to the space.
b. In naturally ventilated buildings/spaces: sensors either have the ability to alert the building owner or manager when
CO levels exceed the recommended set point, or are linked to controls with the ability to adjust the quantity of fresh
2
air, i.e. automatic opening windows/roof vents.
One credit - Volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (products)

6. All decorative paints and varnishes specified meet the criteria in Table 18
7. At least five of the seven remaining product categories listed in Table 18 meet the testing requirements and emission
levels criteria for volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions (listed in the table).
One credit - Volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (post construction)
8. The formaldehyde concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and is found to be less than
or equal to 100µg/m3 averaged over 30 minutes (WHO guidelines for indoor air quality: Selected pollutants, 2010 2).
9. The total volatile organic compound (TVOC) concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and
found to be less than 300µg/m3 over 8 hours, in line with the Building Regulation requirements.
10. Where VOC and formaldehyde levels are found to exceed the limits defined in criteria 8 and 9, the project team confirms
the measures that have, or will be taken, in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the levels to within these limits, .
11. The testing and measurement of the above pollutants are in accordance with the following standards where relevant:
a. BS ISO 16000-4: 2011 Diffusive sampling of formaldehyde in air 3
b. BS ISO 16000-6: 2011 VOCs in air by active sampling 4
c. BS EN ISO 16017-2: 2003 VOCs - Indoor, ambient and workplace air by diffusive sampling 5
d. BS ISO 16000-3: 2011 6 Formaldehyde and other carbonyls in air by active sampling.
12. The measured concentration levels of formaldehyde (µg/m³) and TVOC (µg/m³) are reported, via the BREEAM
Assessment Scoring and Reporting Tool.
Adaptability - Potential for natural ventilation
One credit (credit not applicable to prison buildings)

13. The building ventilation strategy is designed to be flexible and adaptable to potential building occupant needs and
climatic scenarios. This can be demonstrated as follows:
a. Occupied spaces of the building are designed to be capable of providing fresh air entirely via a natural ventilation
strategy. The following are methods deemed to satisfy this criterion dependent upon the complexity of the
proposed system:
i. Room depths are designed in accordance with CIBSE AM10 (section 2.4) to ensure effectiveness of any natural
ventilation system. The openable window area in each occupied space is equivalent to 5% of the gross internal
floor area of that room/floor plate; OR
ii. The design demonstrates that the natural ventilation strategy provides adequate cross flow of air to maintain
the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates. This is demonstrated using ventilation design tool
types that meet the requirements of CIBSE AM10 7 (or for education buildings by using the ClassVent tool).
b. For a strategy which does not rely on openable windows, or which has occupied spaces with a plan depth greater
than 15m, the design must demonstrate (in accordance with criterion 13.a.ii. above) that the ventilation strategy can
provide adequate cross flow of air to maintain the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates.
14. The natural ventilation strategy is capable of providing at least two levels of user-control on the supply of fresh air to the
occupied space (see compliance note CN3.3 for further details).
Note: Any opening mechanisms must be easily accessible and provide adequate user-control over air flow rates
to avoid draughts. Relevant industry standards for ventilation can be used to define ‘adequate levels of fresh air’
sufficient for occupancy and internal air pollution loads relevant to the building type.
Note: Multi-residential buildings with self-contained flats and individual bedrooms must have a degree of
openable window function. This does not need to provide two levels of user-control (as required above), but
must be occupant controlled.

Minimising sources of air pollution - volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (products)
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve innovation credits for this BREEAM issue:
One credit
15. Criterion 6 has been achieved.
16. All seven remaining product categories listed in Table 18 meet the testing requirements and emission levels criteria for
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions (listed in the table).
17. For products B – F listed in Table 18 , the formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than
or equal to 0.06mg/m³air in accordance with the approved testing standards in Table 18 .
Two credits
19. All seven remaining products categories listed in Table 18 meet the testing requirements and emission levels criteria for
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions (listed in the table).
20. For products B to F listed in Table 18 , the formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than
or equal to 0.01mg/m³air, in accordance with the approved testing standards in Table 18 .

Table 18 : VOC criteria by product type
Ref Product Requirements
A Paints and varnishes
Performance requirements VOC content limit
Compliant performance standard EU Directive 2004/42/CE ('Paints Directive')
Compliant testing standard BS EN ISO 11890-2:2013 – Paints and varnishes –

Determination of VOC content, Part 2 – Gas
Chromatographic method
Manufacturer also to confirm Paint to be fungal and algal resistant in wet areas e.g.
bathrooms, kitchens, utility rooms

B Wood panels (including particle board, fibreboard including MDF, OSB, cement bonded particle
board, plywood, solid wood panel and acoustic board)
Option 1
Performance requirements Formaldehyde E1 class
Compliant performance standard BS EN 13986:2004 Wood-based panels for use in

construction - Characteristics evaluation of conformity and
marking
Compliant testing standard(s) In accordance with Annex B of BS EN 13986:2004
Manufacturer also to confirm The absence of prohibited wood preservatives/biocides.
Option 2
Performance requirements Formaldehyde level of 0.1mg/m³
Compliant testing standard(s) 1. BS EN ISO 16000-9:2006 Indoor air - Part 9:

Determination of the emission of volatile organic
compounds from building products and furnishing -
Emission test chamber method. OR
2. Standard method for the testing and evaluation of
volatile organic chemical emissions from indoor
sources using environmental chambers, version 1.1 -
Emission testing method for California Specification
01350, Californian Department for Public Health,
2010.
Note: For either method the resultant emission/surface area
obtained from the chamber test method must be
extrapolated to predict what the emissions would be in a
theoretical model room (as detailed in the standard) and
this extrapolated emission rate compared with the required
formaldehyde level of 0.1mg/m³.
Manufacturer also to confirm The absence of prohibited wood preservatives/biocides.

C Timber structures (e.g. glue laminated timber)
Option 1
Performance requirements Formaldehyde E1 Class
Compliant performance standards BS EN 14080:2005 Timber structures - Glues laminated

timber - Requirements
Compliant testing standards In accordance with Annex B of BS EN 13986:2004
Option 2
Performance requirements As category B Option 2.
Compliant testing standards As category B Option 2.
D Wood flooring (e.g. parquet)
Option 1
Compliant performance standard BS EN 14342:2005+A1:2008 Wood flooring -

Characteristics, evaluation of conformity and marking
Option 2

E Resilient textile and laminated floor coverings (e.g. vinyl, linoleum, cork, rubber, carpet, laminated wood
flooring)
Option 1
Performance requirements Option 1 - Formaldehyde E1 Class
Compliant performance standard BS EN 14041:2004 Resilient, textile and laminate floor

coverings - Essential characteristics
Option 2
F Suspended ceiling tiles
Option 1
Compliant performance standard BS EN 13964:2004+A1:2006 Suspended ceilings -

Requirements and test methods
Option 2

G Flooring adhesives
Performance requirements Carcinogenic or sensitising volatile substances are

substantially absent
Compliant performance standard BS EN 13999-1:2013 Adhesives - Short term method for

measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or
solvent-free adhesives after application - Part 1: General
procedure
Compliant testing standard 1. BS EN 13999-1:2013 Adhesives - Short term method

for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent
or solvent-free adhesives after application - Part 1:
General procedure
2. BS EN 13999-2:2013 Adhesives - Short term method
for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent
or solvent-free adhesives after application - Part 2:
Determination of volatile organic compounds
3. BS EN 13999-3:2007+A1:2009 Adhesives - Short
term method for measuring the emission properties
of low-solvent or solvent-free adhesives after
application - Part 3: Determination of volatile
aldehydes
4. BS EN 13999-4:2007+A1:2009 Adhesives - Short
term method for measuring the emission properties
of low-solvent or solvent-free adhesives after
application - Part 4: Determination of volatile
diisocyanates
H Wall coverings
Performance requirements Vinyl chloride monomer (VCM) content

Formaldehyde level
Migration of heavy metals
Compliant performance standard 1. BS EN 233:1999 Wallcoverings in roll form -

Specification for finished wallpapers, wall vinyls and
plastic wall coverings
2. BS EN 234:1997 Wallcoverings in roll form -
Specification for wallcoverings for subsequent
decoration
3. BS EN 259-1:2001 Wallcoverings in roll form - Heavy
duty wallcoverings - Part 1: Specifications
Compliant testing standard BS EN 12149:1998 – Wall coverings in roll form.

Determination of migration of heavy metals and certain
other elements, of vinyl chloride monomer and of
formaldehyde release

Relevant standards - VOCs

All standards outlined inTable 18 are standards recognised across Europe and internationally for VOC content and
testing. In instances where a product is not assessed against the listed European or International standard, it is acceptable
to use an alternative, nationally recognised, standard provided the following is met as a minimum:
1. The performance level requirements required by the alternative standard are equivalent to or better than those
specified in the standards in Table 18 . For example, if a material containing formaldehyde has been added to the
floor covering product as part of the production process, then the E1 emission measured for formaldehyde must
be less than 0.124mg/m³(as required by BS EN 14041:2004).
2. Where an alternative standard omits evaluation of a particular material, it is only acceptable to use the alternative
standard in instances where the product does not contain that particular material.
BREEAM assessors should seek confirmation from BRE Global prior to awarding credits for compliance with standards
not listed in Table 18 or previously approved as alternative nationally recognised standards.
Products with no formaldehyde containing materials

For some floor coverings and wood-based panels, the requirement for formaldehyde testing (referred to in the above
criteria) does not apply to 'floor coverings to which no formaldehyde containing materials were added during
production or post-production processing', or in the case of EN 13986:2004, wood-based panels.
As such, if a product manufacturer confirms that they have made a declaration of formaldehyde class E1 without testing
(in writing or via a company product fact sheet or literature) then the product in question meets the BREEAM requirement
relevant to formaldehyde testing. A declaration of E1 without testing is effectively confirmation from the manufacturer
that formaldehyde emissions comply with the emission level requirements of the relevant standard(s) and therefore,
evidence confirming the actual emission level(s) via testing will not be required by the assessor to demonstrate
compliance with that particular requirement.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Indoor air quality, criterion 1

assessment criteria Both options: This criterion is not applicable.
Ventilation, criteria 2 to 5
Option 2 - Shell and core: Criteria 2 and 3 are applicable. Criterion 4 and 5 do not
apply.
VOCs, criteria 6 to 12 and 15 to 20
Both options: These criteria are not applicable.
Adaptability - Potential for natural ventilation, criteria 13 to 14
assessment options.

CN1.1 Ventilation systems Option 2 - Shell and core:

See criteria 2 to 5. Where ventilation systems are not within the remit of the shell and core developer,
compliance can be demonstrated through the building servicing strategy where this
is predetermined by the built form or core services provision as appropriate to the
shell and core option being followed.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Indoor air quality - N/A

assessment criteria
Ventilation (1 credit)
1. Criteria 2 and 3; criteria 4 and 5 are not applicable
Volatile organic compound (VOC) (1 credit)
2. Criteria 6 and 7; criteria 8 to 12 are not applicable
Adaptability - Potential for natural ventilation (1 credit - not applicable to prison
buildings)
3. Criteria 13 and 14
Exemplary level criteria (up to 2 credits)
4. Criteria 15 to 20
General
CN3 Furnishings The scope of the VOC credits does not extend to furnishings, e.g. desks or shelving, it
focuses on the key internal finishes and fittings integral to the building.
CN3.1 Mechanically Buildings that employ a mechanically ventilated/cooled strategy are still able to
ventilated or cooled achieve this credit provided it can be demonstrated that the features required by
buildings the criteria can be made easily available to the building user, e.g. windows fixed shut
See criteria 13 and for an air conditioned strategy can be modified to be opening windows. The aim of
14. the potential for natural ventilation criteria is to ensure that a building is capable of
providing fresh air using a natural ventilation strategy.
Where the building is predominantly naturally ventilated, but mechanical ventilation is
necessary to boost ventilation during peak conditions, (i.e. maximum occupancy
and/or peak temperature conditions) due to the function/specific usage patterns of
the building, the potential for the natural ventilation credit can still be awarded
provided calculations/modelling demonstrate that the mechanical ventilation
system will be required for ≤ 5% of the annual occupied hours in the occupied space
(s) for the adopted building design/layout.
CN3.2 VOCs - number of Where five or fewer products are specified within the building, the number of
products required products that need to be assessed for the VOC criteria reduces proportionally as
to comply follows:
See criterion 7.
Where five products are present, four must comply
Where four products are present, three must comply
Where three products are present, two must comply
Where two or fewer products are present, all must comply.

CN3.3 Levels of ventilation The two levels of ventilation must be able to achieve the following:
See criterion 14.
Higher level: higher rates of ventilation achievable to remove short term
odours and/or prevent summertime overheating
Lower level: adequate levels of draught-free fresh air to meet the need for
good indoor air quality throughout the year, sufficient for the occupancy
load and the internal pollution loads of the space.
CN3.4 Industrial areas: air For industrial buildings, the minimising sources of air pollution and adaptability
pollution/ventilation (potential for natural ventilation) criteria and credits apply only to office areas and
rate requirements not to operational areas. If the building does not contain any office areas, this issue is
not applicable.
CN3.5 Measuring the The distance requirement for air intakes and extracts does not necessarily mean the
distance plan distance, but the three-dimensional distance around and over objects, e.g. on
See criteria 3a and plan the air intakes may be less than 20m from a source of external pollution, but the
3b. intake may be on the roof of a 10-storey building and therefore over 20m from the
source of pollution.
CN3.6 BREEAM recognised Guidance note 22 available from the BREEAM website provides a list of approved
alternative VOC alternative schemes recognised by BREEAM and that can be used to demonstrate
testing schemes compliance for the VOC emission levels.
CN4 Healthcare In healthcare buildings some openings in public and patient areas need to be
Window openings provided with restricted opening distances of not more than 100mm (HBN 00-10
See criteria 13 and Part D: Windows and associated hardware8). This is for health and safety reasons,
14. especially where windows are within reach of the elderly, mentally ill or children.
However, it is felt that good design can overcome these restrictions and provide
compliant natural ventilation solutions, even in safety-sensitive areas.
Methodology
None.
Evidence

Areas with a large and unpredictable occupancy

The following are examples of these types of space:
Auditoria
Gyms
Retail stores or malls
Cinemas
Waiting rooms.
Where the assessed building does not have any areas deemed to be large with an unpredictable pattern of
occupancy, the criterion does not apply.
ClassVent
ClassVent is a customised spreadsheet design tool that provides a means of sizing ventilation openings for a natural
ventilation strategy for school classrooms. The tool was developed by the Department for Children, Families and
Schools (DCFS, formerly DfES). The tool can be downloaded from
http://www.teachernet.gov.uk/docbank/index.cfm?id=9955
Clinical areas
See issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Containment Levels
Containment Levels 2 and 3 are defined in The Management, Design and Operation of Microbiological Containment
Laboratories 2001, ACDP.
Occupied spaces
See relevant definition provided in issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. The following building areas, where relevant to the
building type, can be excluded from the definition of occupied spaces for the potential for natural ventilation criteria:
1. Ancillary building areas, e.g. WCs, corridors, stairwells, store rooms, plant rooms
2. Swimming/hydrotherapy pools
3. Catering and small staff kitchens
4. Washrooms or changing areas
5. Laboratory or other areas where strictly controlled environmental conditions are a functional requirement of the
space
6. Custody cells and holding areas in law courts
7. Operational, shop floors or ancillary areas in industrial buildings and retail buildings

8. Healthcare buildings: rooms or departments where control of ventilation is required for prevention of cross
infection and/or controlled environmental conditions including:
a. Operating theatres
b. Laser surgery unit
c. Operative imaging unit
d. Intensive treatment unit
e. Infectious diseases isolation unit
f. Wards housing immuno-compromised patients
g. Manufacturing pharmacy
h. Specialised imaging, X-ray and scanning unit
i. Pathology containment laboratories
j. Mortuary and dissection suite
k. Research laboratories and associated animal houses
l. Sterilising and disinfecting unit (SDU)
m. Emerging treatment technologies including gene therapy and stem cell units
n. Areas immediately adjacent to the above are excluded if it can be demonstrated that reverse air flow would
be likely with natural ventilation
o. Any other areas which require mechanical ventilation to satisfy the requirements of Healthcare Technical
Memoranda
p. Any other areas that require mechanical ventilation due to specific operational-related processes.
Occupied spaces requiring local exhaust ventilation, e.g. laboratories, workshops and food technology rooms, must
still demonstrate that they meet the criteria for potential for natural ventilation (unless listed as an exempted area in
this definition).
Openable window area

The openable window area is defined as the geometric free ventilation area created when a ventilation opening, e.g.
window, is open to its normal operational fully designed extent for ventilation purposes (i.e. this excludes open areas
created when reversible windows are opened for cleaning etc.). It is not the glazed area of a façade or the glazed area
of the part of the window that is openable (unless it opens fully).
Relevant standards (ventilation)

Education buildings: Building Bulletin 101 Ventilation of School Buildings, April 2014.
Offices spaces: Top of the range recommended in the British Council for Offices Guide to Best Practice in the
Specification of Offices9 i.e. 12 litres per second per person.
Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions:
HTM 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises10 (England, Wales and Northern Ireland)
Relevant standards are not listed for all areas/building types as the provision of fresh air is adequately covered in
Approved Document Part F Ventilation (and the standards referenced therein).
Sources of external pollution

This includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Highways and the main access roads on the assessed site
2. Car parks and delivery/vehicle waiting bays
3. Other building exhausts, including from building services plant industrial/agricultural processes
Service and access roads with restricted and infrequent access (for example roads used only for waste collection) are
unlikely to represent a significant source of external pollution. These roads can therefore be excluded from the criteria
of this issue. This does not include vehicle pick-up/drop-off or waiting bays.
Volatile organic compound (VOC)

Any organic liquid and/or solid that evaporates spontaneously at the prevailing temperature and pressure of the
atmosphere with which it is in contact (Source: BS EN ISO 11890).

Other information
Indoor air quality and measurement

The testing and measurement of pollutants must be in accordance with the relevant standards (as listed in the Hea 02 Indoor
air quality table). Sample measurements should normally be taken in representative habitable or occupiable rooms, so not
every room in a building would need to be sampled (see below for examples of representative room types). For example, in
an office, one sample in a cellular/single occupancy office should suffice to assess the VOC concentration of the air for that
type of habitable space in the building (assuming the other cellular offices have the same specification). In larger rooms, such
as open plan office areas, further sampling locations should be used to understand the homogeneity of the atmosphere.
Depending upon the performance of the measurement method in terms of repeatability and the required level of confidence
in the value obtained, replicate samples may be taken at one or more sampling locations.
Prior to measurements being taken, the ventilation and heating systems should be operating for a period of time to ensure
the relevant spaces in the building reach equilibrium in terms of their internal environmental conditions. Typically this may take
between 12 and 24 hours.
Examples of representative room types include: naturally ventilated carpeted office, mechanically ventilated vinyl floored
meeting room, workshop, living room or bedroom. Rooms that are not habitable or occupiable may, for example, include
toilets, store rooms, plant rooms, stairways or corridors. The definition of 'habitable or occupiable rooms' comes from
Approved Document F, Means of Ventilation, HM Government, 2010.
In accordance with the criteria, where levels are found to exceed the defined limits, the credit can only be claimed where the
project team confirms the measures that have, or will be undertaken in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the TVOC and
formaldehyde levels to within the required limits.
This information is provided to assist project teams and BREEAM assessors on the appropriate scope of IAQ testing;
therefore it is guidance only and not a requirement of complying with BREEAM. The testing regime should be determined
based on the advice of the appropriate person appointed to conduct the testing, in order to determine and report
representative values of indoor air quality for the building.
There are a number of publications available on the issue of measuring and improving the indoor air quality in buildings
including BR 450, A protocol for the assessment of indoor air quality in homes and office buildings, Crump, Raw, Upton,
Scivyer, Hunter, Hartless. BRE (2002).
Volatile organic compounds

VOCs are emitted by a wide array of products numbering in the thousands. Examples include: paints and lacquers, paint
strippers, cleaning supplies, pesticides, building materials and furnishings, glues and adhesives, urea-formaldehyde foam
insulation (UFFI), pressed wood products (hardwood plywood wall panelling, particleboard, fibreboard) and furniture made
with these pressed wood products.
‘No’ or ‘low’ VOC paints are available from most standard mainstream paint manufacturers. The emissions of VOCs from
paints and varnishes are regulated by the Directive 2004/42/CE, implemented in the UK by the Volatile Organic Compounds in
Paints, Varnishes and Vehicle Refinishing Products Regulation 2005. Products containing high organic solvent content should
also be avoided (EU VOC Solvent Directive 1999/13/EC).
Exposure risk assessment of any possible release of chemicals from manufactured products and their possible impact on
health and the environment generally, is an important requirement of European regulations. The possible impact of a building
product on indoor air quality is included in the European Construction Products Directive, 89/106/EEC. The amended Directive,
93/68/EEC provided the criteria for CE Marking of products.
Products to be fitted in buildings should not contain any substances regulated by the Dangerous Substances Directive
2004/42/CE, which could cause harm to people by inhalation or contact. Materials containing heavy metals (e.g. antimony,
barium, cadmium, lead and mercury) and other toxic elements (e.g. arsenic, chromium and selenium) or regulated biocides
(e.g. pentachlorophenol) should be avoided.
Various labelling schemes identify products that have been tested and shown to be low emitting and these have been
summarised in various publications including:

BRE Digest 464 (the standards outlined in Table 18 however, are the only standards recognised by BREEAM for the purposes
of assessing this issue.)
ECA (European Collaborative Action, Urban Air, Indoor Environment and Human Exposure) (2005): Harmonisation of indoor
material emissions labelling systems in the EU, Inventory of existing schemes11.
ECA (European Collaborative Action, Urban Air, Indoor Environment and Human Exposure) (2012): Harmonisation framework
for indoor material labelling schemes in the EU12.
Dangerous substances are defined in the Dangerous Substances Directive (67/548/EEC)
BS EN 14175 and Fume cupboard discharge velocity: BS EN 14175 Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume
cupboard extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be
trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but
higher rates may cause noise problems.
1BS EN 13779:2007 Ventilation for non-residential buildings - Performance requirements for ventilation and room-
conditioning systems
2WHO guidelines for indoor air quality:selected pollutants, World Health Organisation, 2010
3BS ISO 16000-4: 2011 Indoor air - Part 4: Determination of formaldehyde -- Diffusive sampling method
4BS ISO 16000-6: 2011 Indoor air - Part 6: Determination of volatile organic compounds in indoor and test chamber air by
active sampling on Tenax TA sorbent, thermal desorption and gas chromatography using MS/FID
5BS EN ISO 16017-2:2003, Indoor, ambient and workplace air. Sampling and analysis of volatile organic compounds by
sorbent tube/thermal desorption/capillary gas chromatography. Diffusive sampling
6BS ISO 16000-3: 2011 Indoor air - Part 3: Determination of formaldehyde and other carbonyl compounds - Active sampling
method
7CIBSE AM10, 2005, Natural ventilation in non-domestic buildings
8Health Building Note 00-10: Part D: Windows and associated hardware, Department of Health, 2013.
9BCO Guide 2009, Best Practice in the Specification of Offices, BCO, 2009.
10HTM 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises, Department of Health, 2007.
11ECA (European Collaborative Action, Urban Air, Indoor Environment and Human Exposure) (2005): Harmonisation of indoor
material emissions labelling systems in the EU, Inventory of existing schemes., Luxembourg: Publications Office of the European
Union. Report No. 24, EUR 21891 EN.
12ECA (European Collaborative Action, Urban Air, Indoor Environment and Human Exposure) (2012): Harmonisation
framework for indoor material labelling schemes in the EU. Luxembourg: Publications Office of the European Union. Report No.
27, EUR 25276 EN
■ Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories Health & wellbeing
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories

Aim
To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the safe containment and removal of pollutants.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
One credit - Laboratory containment devices and containment areas

1. An objective risk assessment of the proposed laboratory facilities has been carried out prior to completion of the
Developed Design (RIBA Stage 3 or equivalent) to ensure potential risks are considered in the design of the laboratory.
2. Where containment devices such as fume cupboards are specified their manufacture and installation meet best practice
safety and performance requirements and objectives, demonstrated through compliance with the following standards:
a. General purpose fume cupboards: BS EN 14175 Parts 1-7 (as appropriate) 1
b. Recirculatory filtration fume cupboards: BS 7989:2001 2
c. Microbiological safety cabinets: BS EN 12469:2000 3 (for manufacture) and BS 5726:2005 4 (for installation).
d. Clean air hoods, glove boxes, isolators and mini-environments: BS EN ISO 14644-7:2004 5
e. Articulated extension arms: PD CEN/TR 16589 6
Or, for Schools, Sixth Form Colleges and Further Education with laboratories and fume cupboards for subjects up to and
including 'A'-level (or equivalent):
f. G9 Fume cupboards in schools7 (Building Bulletin 88 8 can be used for assessments in Northern Ireland) .
3. Where laboratory containment devices that are ducted to discharge externally are specified, the guidance in the
National Annex of BS EN 14175-2 must be followed to ensure an appropriate discharge velocity is achieved.
One credit - Buildings with containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities

4. Where containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities are specified they must meet best practice safety and
performance criteria and objectives. This is demonstrated as follows:
a. Criterion 1 has been achieved.
b. Ventilation systems are designed in compliance with the best practice guidance set out in 'DRAFT HSE Biological
Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010'9.
c. Filters for all areas designated as containment level 2 and 3 are located outside the main laboratory space for ease
of cleaning/replacement and the filters are easily accessible by maintenance staff or technicians.
5. The design team demonstrate that the individual fume cupboard location and stack heights have been considered in
accordance with HMIP Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D1 10.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Both options: This issue is not applicable.

options.
Simple buildings

assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Laboratory For fume cupboards specified/installed for up to and including A-Level subjects,
containment confirmation of the specification and installation in accordance with G9 Fume
device Cupboards in Schools (Building Bulletin 88 can be used for assessments in Northern
requirement for Ireland) will be acceptable for BREEAM compliance. BS 7989 and parts of BS 14175
Schools, Sixth may be relevant to some installations; in such cases the person or organisation
Form and Further responsible for producing or installing the laboratory equipment should be able to
Education confirm if they are relevant given the type of fume cupboard installation.
See criterion 2f.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
■ Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories Health & wellbeing
Fume cupboard/safety cabinet

Scientific equipment designed to limit a person's exposure to hazardous fumes or biological material. Air is drawn
through the enclosure of the cupboard conducting the contaminated air away from the experimental area and those
using the equipment.
Risk assessment
For the purpose of the relevant laboratory criteria in this issue, a risk assessment is a systematic consideration of any
activity in which there is a hazard, followed by decisions on the substances, equipment and procedures used and on
the restrictions and precautions needed to make the risk acceptably low. Below is a list of useful resources:
1. Schools, Sixth Form Colleges and Further Education building assessments can refer to CLEAPSS
(www.cleapss.org.uk) for further advice.
2. Higher Education building assessments should discuss the most appropriate risk assessment with the end user of
the building.
Other information
BS EN 14175 Fume cupboard discharge velocity: Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume cupboard extracts
should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be trapped in the
aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but higher rates
may cause noise problems.
1BS EN 14175-1:2003 Fume Cupboards, Vocabulary, BSi
BS EN 14175-2:2003 Fume Cupboards, Safety and performance requirements, BSi.
BS EN 14175-3:2003 Fume Cupboards, Type test methods, BSi.
BS EN 14175-4:2004 Fume Cupboards, on-sitetest methods, BSi.
DD CEN/TS 14175-5:2006 Fume Cupboards, Recommendations for installation and maintenance, BSi.
BS EN 14175-6:2006 Fume Cupboards, Variable air volume fume cupboards, BSi.
BS EN 14175-7:2012 Fume Cupboards, Fume cupboards for high heat and acidic load, BSi.
2BS 7989:2003 Specification for recirculatory filtration fume cupboards, BSi. 2003.
3BS EN 12469:2000 Biotechnology. Performance criteria for microbiological safety cabinets, BSi.
4BS 5726:2005 Microbiological safety cabinets, Information to be supplied by the purchaser to the vendor and to the
installer and siting and use of cabinets. Recommendations and guidance, BSi.
5BS EN ISO 14644-7:2004 Clean rooms and associated controlled environments. Separative devices (clean air hoods,
gloveboxes, isolators and mini-environments), BSi.
6PD CEN/TR 16589 Laboratory installations - Capture devices with articulated extract arm, BSi.
7G9 Fume cupboards in schools, 2014, Consortium of Local Education Authorities for the Provision of Science Services.
8Building Bulletin 88: Fume Cupboards in Schools, 1988, Department for Education and Employment
9The Biological Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010, HSE.
10Guidelines on Discharge Stack Heights for Polluting Emissions, HMIP Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D1, 1993.
Hea 04 Thermal comfort

3 No
Aim
To ensure that appropriate thermal comfort levels are achieved through design, and controls are selected to maintain a
thermally comfortable environment for occupants within the building.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Thermal modelling

1. Thermal modelling has been carried out using software in accordance with CIBSE AM11 1 Building Energy and
Environmental Modelling.
2. The software used to carry out the simulation at the detailed design stage provides full dynamic thermal analysis. For
smaller and more basic building designs with less complex heating or cooling systems, an alternative less complex
means of analysis may be appropriate (such methodologies must still be in accordance with CIBSE AM11).
3. The modelling demonstrates that:
a. For air conditioned buildings, summer and winter operative temperature ranges in occupied spaces are in
accordance with the criteria set out in CIBSE Guide A Environmental design2, Table 1.5; or other appropriate industry
standard (where this sets a higher or more appropriate requirement/level for the building type).
b. For naturally ventilated/free running buildings:
i. Winter operative temperature ranges in occupied spaces are in accordance with the criteria set out in CIBSE Guide
A Environmental design, Table 1.5; or other appropriate industry standard (where this sets a higher or more
appropriate requirement/level for the building type).
ii. The building is designed to limit the risk of overheating, in accordance with the adaptive comfort methodology
outlined in CIBSE TM52: The limits of thermal comfort: avoiding overheating in European buildings3.
4. For air conditioned buildings, the PMV (predicted mean vote) and PPD (predicted percentage of dissatisfied) indices
based on the above modelling are reported via the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool.
One credit - Adaptability - for a projected climate change scenario

5. Criteria 1 to 4 are achieved.
6. The thermal modelling demonstrates that the relevant requirements set out in criterion 3 are achieved for a projected
climate change environment (see Hea 04 Thermal comfort).
7. Where thermal comfort criteria are not met for the projected climate change environment, the project team
demonstrates how the building has been adapted, or designed to be easily adapted in future using passive design
solutions in order to subsequently meet the requirements under criterion 6.
8. For air conditioned buildings, the PMV and PPD indices based on the above modelling are reported via the BREEAM
assessment scoring and reporting tool.
■ Hea 04 Thermal comfort Health & wellbeing
One credit - Thermal zoning and controls

9. Criteria 1 to 4 are achieved.
10. The thermal modelling analysis (undertaken for compliance with criteria 1 to 4) has informed the temperature control
strategy for the building and its users.
11. The strategy for proposed heating/cooling system(s) demonstrates that it has addressed the following:
a. Zones within the building and how the building services could efficiently and appropriately heat or cool these areas.
For example consider the different requirements for the central core of a building compared with the external
perimeter adjacent to the windows.
b. The degree of occupant control required for these zones, based on discussions with the end user (or alternatively
building type or use specific design guidance, case studies, feedback) considers:
i. User knowledge of building services
ii. Occupancy type, patterns and room functions (and therefore appropriate level of control required)
iii. How the user is likely to operate or interact with the system(s), e.g. are they likely to open windows, access
thermostatic radiator valves (TRV) on radiators, change air-conditioning settings etc.
iv. The user expectations (this may differ in the summer and winter) and degree of individual control (i.e. obtaining
the balance between occupant preferences, for example some occupants like fresh air and others dislike
draughts).
c. How the proposed systems will interact with each other (where there is more than one system) and how this may
affect the thermal comfort of the building occupants.
d. The need or otherwise for an accessible building user actuated manual override for any automatic systems.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Thermal modelling, criteria 1 to 4

assessment Option 1: Shell only: This issue is not applicable.
criteria Option 2: Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
Adaptability - for projected climate changes, criteria 5 to 8
Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
Thermal zoning and controls criteria 9 to 11
options.
CN1.1 Thermal model - Option 2 - Shell and core

thermal modelling Where assumptions are required for the purpose of the thermal model, these must
See criteria 1 to 4. be reasonable and represent typical use patterns and loads given the parameters and
function of the building. Note that thermal modelling may need to be completed on
the basis of a typical notional layout.
CN1.2 Thermal model - Option 2 - Shell and core

adaptability Where assumptions are required for the purpose of the thermal model, these must
See criteria 5 to 8. be reasonable and represent typical use patterns and loads given the parameters and
function of the building. Note that thermal modelling may need to be completed on
the basis of a typical notional layout.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
CN2.1 Dynamic thermal For simple building assessments, dynamic thermal modelling is not a requirement to
modelling achieve the credits but may be preferable as it can provide more accurate analysis
results. Note that assessment criterion 2 already clarifies use of an alternative less
complex means of modelling, which must be in accordance with CIBSE AM11.
General
CN3 Typical If it is not possible to confirm the number of building occupants using the building, e.g.
occupancy/use speculative developments (or shell and core), then the default occupancy rates given in
patterns CIBSE Guide A can be used to determine a default number of users. Where the typical
use patterns are also unknown, the table given in Tra 01 Public transport accessibility
can be used to determine the typical opening hours of different building types. The
design team need to justify/validate the occupancy number and use patterns applied
in the thermal model.
CN3.1 Appropriate BREEAM has not attempted to list all appropriate industry standards. Any recognised
industry standard collaborative industry or sector best practice standard or guidance that sets thermal
See criterion 3. performance levels, in terms of thermal comfort and design temperature can be
considered an appropriate industry standard for the purposes of this BREEAM issue.
CIBSE Guide A (table 1.5) includes recommended summer and winter comfort criteria
(temperature ranges) for a number of specific building applications. See also the
relevant compliance notes below for industry standards deemed appropriate by
BREEAM for schools and healthcare buildings.
CN3.2 Buildings with less For buildings with less complex heating/cooling systems the thermal comfort strategy
complex need only comply with criteria 11a and 11b.
heating/cooling Compliance can be demonstrated where zoning allows separate occupant control
systems (within the occupied space) of each perimeter area (i.e. within 7m of each external wall)
See criterion 11. and the central zone (i.e. over 7m from the external walls). For example, adequate TRVs
(thermostatic radiator valves) placed in zones around the building perimeter, and the
provision of local occupant controls to internal areas, such as fan coil units.
Note: The distance requirement for smaller buildings is approximate; however, the
assessor must use sound judgement considering fully the aims of this issue, before
accepting solutions that do not strictly meet the above criteria.
Examples of potentially compliant heating control measures can be found in
Technology Guide CTG065 Heating control4.
CN4 Industrial Where an industrial unit contains no office space and only an operational or storage
Industrial unit with area, this BREEAM issue does not apply.
no office space
CN4.1 Education An appropriate industry standard for schools is Building Bulletin 101, Ventilation of
(schools only): school buildings (April 2014).
Appropriate For schools with a straightforward servicing strategy, ClassCool is considered a
industry suitable alternative to an AM11 full dynamic model.
standards and
criteria for
schools,
See criterion 3.
CN4.2 Healthcare: The appropriate industry standard for healthcare is Health Technical Memorandum
Appropriate 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises. Thermal comfort levels in
industry patient and clinical areas must be in accordance with the temperature ranges set out
standards and in HTM 03-01, Appendix 2. Furthermore, internal summer temperatures must not
criteria exceed 28º C dry bulb for more than 50 hours per year (as defined in HTM 03-01,
See criterion 3. paragraph 2.15). Other occupied spaces not covered in HTM03-01 Appendix 2
should be in accordance with CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design.
CN4.3 Education and In this issue, occupant controls are intended to be for staff use only.
prisons
Occupant controls
See criterion 11.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
10, 11, 12 Thermal comfort study Refer to generic evidence requirement above
ClassCool
A tool developed by the Department for Children, Schools and Families (DCSF, formerly DfES) which provides a
simplified method of assessing the extent of classroom overheating. ClassCool may not be appropriate for other
spaces, such as libraries and halls, and other means of assessing overheating will be required:www.teachernet.gov.uk.
Clinical areas
Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort
Occupied space
Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort, however for the purpose of BREEAM issue Hea 04 the definition excludes the
following;
1. Atria or concourses
2. Entrance halls or reception areas
3. Ancillary space e.g. circulation areas, storerooms and plant rooms.
Passive design
Passive design uses layout, fabric and form to reduce or remove mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation and lighting
demand. Examples of passive design include optimising spatial planning and orientation to control solar gains and
maximise daylighting, manipulating the building form and fabric to facilitate natural ventilation strategies and making
effective use of thermal mass to help reduce peak internal temperatures.
Patient areas
Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Predicted mean vote (PMV)

The PMV is an index that predicts the mean votes of a large group of persons on the seven-point thermal sensation
scale based on the heat balance of the human body. Thermal balance is obtained when the internal heat production in
the body is equal to the loss of heat to the environment. See 'Other Information' for the seven-point thermal sensation
scale.
Predicted percentage dissatisfied (PPD)

The PPD is an index that establishes a quantitative prediction of the percentage of thermally dissatisfied people who
feel too cool or too warm. For the purposes of ISO 7730, thermally dissatisfied people are those who will feel hot,
warm, cool or cold. See the seven-point thermal sensation scale in Other information.
Projected climate change environment

Dynamic thermal simulation software packages currently provide the facility for building designs to be assessed
under external climatic conditions specific to geographic location. Industry standard weather data for the UK is
available in the form of Test Reference Years (TRYs) and Design Summer Years (DSYs) provided by CIBSE.
This weather data enables thermal analysis of building designs under current climatic conditions, yet no account is
taken of the projected variations in weather data that will occur during the building's life cycle as a result of climate
change. The following probabilistic DSY weather data files should be used to establish the projected climate change
environment against which the design is evaluated:
Free Running Buildings

Time period: 2050s
Emissions scenario: Medium (A1B)
Mechanically Ventilated or Mixed Mode Buildings
Time period: 2030s
Emissions scenario: Medium (A1B).
The above weather files represent the minimum requirements to perform thermal modelling under a climate change
scenario and subsequently demonstrate compliance. Where design teams feel that added consideration of building
occupant risk/sensitivity to overheating is necessary, weather files can be used that exceed the minimum
requirements outlined above. The time periods indicated above have been selected to represent the building services
life cycle likely to be present in each building services strategy type. A shorter time period is chosen for mechanically
ventilated/mixed mode building types due to consideration of mechanical servicing equipment life span (before
major upgrade or replacement is required), and to avoid over-specification of plant which could lead to inefficient
operation.
Separate occupant control

Responsive heating or cooling controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can be accessed and operated
by the individual(s) occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone or
area they control.
Thermal comfort
In British Standard BS EN ISO 7730:2005: Ergonomics of the thermal environment. Analytical determination and
interpretation of thermal comfort, thermal comfort is defined using the calculation of PMV and PPD indices and local
thermal comfort criteria and is ‘that condition of mind which expresses satisfaction with the thermal environment.’
The term ‘thermal comfort’ describes a person’s psychological state of mind and is usually referred to in terms of
whether someone is feeling too hot or too cold. Thermal comfort is difficult to define because it needs to account for
a range of environmental and personal factors in order to establish what makes people feel comfortable. HSE
considers 80% of occupants as a reasonable limit for the minimum number of people who should be thermally
comfortable in an environment. The purpose of this issue is to encourage appropriate and robust consideration of
thermal comfort issues and specification of appropriate occupant controls to ensure both maximum flexibility of the
space and thermal comfort for the majority of building occupants.
Thermal dynamic analysis

Thermal comfort analysis tools can be subdivided into a number of methods of increasing complexity. The most
complex of these and the one that provides greatest confidence in results is the full dynamic model. This type of
model enables annual heating or cooling loads, overheating risks and control strategies to be assessed.
Other information
CIBSE Guide A and BS EN ISO 7730:2005

The assessment criteria for this issue require compliance with the operative room temperature ranges set out in CIBSE Guide
A, Table 1.5.
The operative room temperature ranges provided in CIBSE Guide A have been derived in accordance with the heat balance
model for thermal comfort (predicted mean vote (PMV) and predicted percentage dissatisfied (PPD)) as detailed in BS EN
ISO7730.
The CIBSE Guide A operative temperature ranges correspond to a PMV of +/- 0.25 which sits between the Category A and
Category B requirements listed in Annex A, Table A.1 of EN ISO 7730. Compliance with the CIBSE Guide A criteria will therefore
effectively also demonstrate compliance with the Category B requirements set out in EN ISO 7730.
Projected climate change weather data

A range of alternative probabilistic weather files produced in accordance with the UK climate impacts programme (UKCIP)
2009 projections have been produced to be compatible with simulation software packages. These weather files provide the
opportunity to evaluate the impact of varying climate change scenarios building design performance throughout its life cycle.
Projected climate change weather files are currently available in TRYs and DSYs and according to three projected time
periods; 2030s, 2050s and 2080s, and for each period, two 'emissions scenarios' are available; Medium Emissions (A1B) and
High Emissions (A1F1).
The PROMETHEUS project at Exeter University has produced a number of future weather files specific to different locations
across the UK, created using the UKCP09 weather generator. Weather files produced under the PROMETHEUS project are
available at the following location:
http://emps.exeter.ac.uk/research/energy-environment/cee/research/prometheus/downloads/
1CIBSE Applications Manual AM11 Building energy and environmental modelling, CIBSE, 1998
2CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design,8th Edition, CIBSE, 2015
3CIBSE TM52 The limits of thermal comfort: Avoiding overheating in European buildings, 2013
4CTG065 Technology Guide, Heating control: maximising comfort, minimising energy consumption, The Carbon Trust, 2011
■ Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health & wellbeing
Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Aim
To ensure the building's acoustic performance including sound insulation meet the appropriate standards for its purpose.
Assessment criteria
Up to three credits for Education, Healthcare, Office and Law courts building types
1. The building meets the appropriate acoustic performance standards and testing requirements defined in the checklists
and tables section which defines criteria for the acoustic principles of:
a. Sound insulation
b. Indoor ambient noise level
c. Reverberation times.
Up to three credits are available for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and ‘Other’ building types
Up to two credits
2. Where the building meets the acoustic performance standards and testing requirements detailed in Table 23 (see
Checklists and tables) for all relevant functional areas.
OR
Up to three credits
3. Where a suitably qualified acoustician (see relevant definitions) is appointed to define a bespoke set of performance
requirements for all function areas in the building using the three acoustic principles defined in criterion 1, setting out the
performance requirements for each and the testing regime required.
Up to four credits are available for Multi-residential and Other, Residential institutions building types
4. One, three or four credits are available for Multi-residential and Other, Residential institution buildings where the relevant
criteria in the checklists and table section have been applied. Please also see CN3.

Table 19 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Education buildings
Education buildings (three credits)
First credit - Sound insulation
Education buildings (three credits)
Criteria Achieve the performance standards set out in Section 1 of Building bulletin 93: Acoustic design of
schools: performance standards, February2015 1 (BB93) relating to airborne sound insulation
between spaces and impact sound insulation of floors.
Testing A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in
requirement accordance with the BB93 requirements and the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of
Schools2.
Second credit - Internal indoor ambient noise levels
Criteria Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 1 of BB93for all room
types. For lightweight roofs and roof glazing, calculations using laboratory data with ‘heavy’ rain
noise excitation as defined in BS EN ISO 140-18 3 are required (in accordance with the guidance in
BB93) for teaching/learning spaces to demonstrate that the reverberant sound pressure level in
these rooms are not more than 25 dB above the appropriate limits presented within Section 1 of
BB93, table 1.
Testing Indoor ambient noise levels (excluding rain noise):

requirement A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance
with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools.
Rain noise: installation of a specification compliant with the BB93criteria demonstrates
compliance, reference is also made to the notes below.
Notes For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area
greater than 150kg/m²(including those with sedum planting) that do not have any glazing or
rooflights, calculations are not required, as such the credit can be awarded on a default basis of
compliance.
Third credit - Reverberation
Criteria Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission
index (STI)):
Teaching and study spaces: achieve the requirements relating to reverberation time for teaching
and study spaces set out within table 6 in Section 1 of BB93.
Open plan teaching spaces: achieve the performance requirements relating to speech
transmission index (STI) set out within Section 1.8 of BB93 .
Corridor and stairwells: for those that give direct access to teaching and study spaces, achieve
the performance requirements relating to sound absorption.
Testing Teaching and study spaces:

Open plan teaching spaces:
STI Measurements of the STI should be taken in at least one in ten typical student listening
positions in the open plan spaces in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic
testing of Schools.
Corridors and stairwells:
Installation of a specification compliant with the BB93 criteria demonstrates compliance. Where
this refers to the use of Building Regulations, the country-specific Building Regulations or
standards can be applied.
Table 20 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Healthcare buildings
Healthcare buildings (three credits)
Criteria Achieve the airborne sound insulation performance standards set out in Section 2 of HTM 08-01:
Acoustics, 2013 4 determined according to the privacy requirements using both Table 3 and
Table 4 from HTM 08-01: Acoustics. Impact noise is controlled at source and the weighted
standardised impact sound pressure level (L’nT,w) does not exceed 65dB in noise-sensitive
rooms, following the guidance in HTM 08-01: Acoustics.
requirement accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.
Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels
Criteria The indoor ambient noise requirements for noise intrusion from external sources in Table 1 of
HTM 08-01: Acoustics, 2013 are not exceeded. The values for internal noise from mechanical
and electrical services in Table 2 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics are not exceeded.
Testing A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance
requirement with the Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics. Rain noise: Installation of a specification compliant
with the HTM 08-01: Acoustics criteria demonstrates compliance.
index (STI)):
Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption set out in Section 2 of HTM 08-01:
Acoustics.
Requirement with the Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.
Table 21 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings
Office buildings (three credits)
Criteria The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies
with the performance criteria given in Section 7 of BS 8233:2014 5.
requirement accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional
information section of this BREEAM issue.
Office buildings (three credits)
Notes If testing is to be carried out where the office is not yet furnished, then section 7.5 of BS
8233:2014 should be referred to when determining the performance criteria. Where the office is
to be furnished at the time testing is carried out, then refer to section 7.7.6 of BS 8233:2014 for
the relevant performance criteria.
Second credit - Internal indoor ambient noise levels
Criteria Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the design ranges given in Section 7 of BS
8233:2014.
requirement with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlines in the Additional information
section of this BREEAM issue.
Criteria Acoustic environment (control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission
index):
Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where
applicable, set out in Section 7 of BS 8233:2014.
Requirement with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information
section of this BREEAM issue.
Table 22 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Law courts buildings
Law courts buildings (three credits)
Criteria The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies
with the performance targets given in Section 28 of Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), HMCS,
2010 6.
requirement accordance with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation Procedures’ where
applicable.
Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels
Criteria Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the requirements of Section 28 of the
CSDG.
requirement with Section 28 of the CSDG.
Law courts buildings (three credits)
index):
Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where
applicable, set out in Section 28 of the CSDG.
requirement with Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation Procedures’ where applicable.
Table 23 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types
Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types (two credits)
First credit – Sound insulation and internal indoor ambient noise levels
Room function All room functions
Criteria Internal indoor ambient noise levels:

Indoor ambient noise levels comply with the design ranges given in BS 8233: 2014 unless
otherwise stated below. Where the room types below are present, the appropriate criteria for
ambient noise levels, sound insulation and acoustic privacy must also be achieved.
Testing Internal indoor ambient noise levels:

requirement A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in
accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional
information section of this BREEAM issue.
Room function Educational space (teaching and lecture spaces)
Criteria Internal indoor ambient noise levels:

Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 1 of BB93 for all
teaching and lecture theatre room types. See also the criteria below for acoustically sensitive
rooms and apply if relevant.
Testing Internal indoor ambient noise levels:

Rain noise: Installation of a specification compliant with the BB93 criteria demonstrates
compliance; reference is also made to the Notes section in Table 19 .
Notes For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area
greater than 150kg/m²(including those with sedum planting) that do not have any
glazing/rooflights, calculations are not required. As such, the credit can be awarded on a default
basis of compliance.
Room function Medical treatment rooms
Criteria Sound insulation:

Achieve the airborne and impact sound insulation criteria in Health Technical Memorandum HTM
08-01.
Testing Sound insulation:

accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.
Room function Acoustically sensitive rooms
Criteria Sound insulation:

The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies
with the example matrix relating to internal sound insulation within Section 7.5 of BS 8233:2014
which takes into consideration the likely level of activity noise, the degree of privacy required and
the sensitivity of the adjacent space. It may be considered appropriate to adapt the levels of
sound insulation presented within the table according to a specific building’s use and any
modification to the criteria should be justified by an SQA. Examples of rooms with a 'confidential'
privacy requirement may include human resources meeting rooms, or rooms where private
conversations may be taking place, however their 'activity noise' is likely to be only 'typical' and
then the level of sound insulation would be determined based on the sensitivity of the receiving
space. Factory spaces are likely to be considered less sensitive as a receiving space than an
adjacent office area, however the activity noise level may be anticipated to be higher.
Testing Sound insulation:

accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures in the Hea 05 Acoustic
performance section.
Notes See Hea 05 Acoustic performance.

To increase the ambient noise level, where privacy is required or the ambient targets include a
minimum as well as maximum limit, an artificial sound source or sound masking system may be
required. Any artificial sound source or sound masking system should be installed and in
operation at the time of the acoustic testing to demonstrate compliance.
Second credit – Reverberation
Room function Rooms/areas used for speech or performance, including public speaking
Criteria Achieve reverberation times compliant with Section 1 of BB93. In addition, or alternatively, if
relevant to the assessed building; classrooms, seminar rooms and lecture theatres achieve
reverberation times compliant with section 1 of BB93.
Testing Reverberation times within teaching and study spaces: A programme of acoustic
requirement measurements is carried out by a compliant test body to achieve the required performance
standards set out in table 6 in section 1 of BB93. Measurements should be carried out in
accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools.
Open Plan teaching spaces: STI Measurements of the STI should be taken in at least one in ten
typical student listening positions in the open plan spaces in accordance with the ANC Good
Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools.
Corridors and stairwells: installation of a specification compliant with the BB93criteria
demonstrates compliance. Reference is also made to the Notes below.
Notes Where the reverberation time required by the relevant standard is not appropriate for the type
of space/building assessed, the acoustician must confirm why this is the case. In addition the
acoustician must set alternative appropriate reverberation times and provide these to
demonstrate compliance.
Table 24 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions
Multi-residential and 'Other residential' buildings (four credits)
Room function Individual bedrooms and self-contained dwellings
Criteria One credit

Airborne sound insulation values are at least 3dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at
least 3dB lower than the performance standards in the relevant Building Regulations or
Standards.
Three credits
Standards.
Four credits
Standards.
Testing A programme of pre-completion testing is carried out by a compliant test body based on the
requirement normal programme of testing described in the relevant Building Regulations or Standards for
every group or sub-group of dwellings (houses, flats or rooms for residential purposes) this must
demonstrate that the performance standards detailed within this table are achieved.
OR
Use of constructions for all relevant building elements have been registered with and assessed
and approved by Robust Details Limited (RDL) and found to achieve the performance standards
required for the number of credits sought (see additional information section for further
information on Robust Details).
Notes Testing should be between habitable rooms on the ground floor and at higher storey levels if
applicable. Where there are insufficient suitable separating walls or floors in a development to
carry out the number of tests specified in the appropriate Building Regulations or Standards, all of
the available suitable separating walls or floors must be tested.
See also CN5 and CN3.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Indoor ambient noise criteria:

assessment Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply (an alternative
criteria method to demonstrate compliance applies in this instance, refer to CN1.1 for further
information).
Sound insulation and reverberation criteria:
options.
CN1.1 Alternative means The basic built form has a large impact on the acoustic performance of the building,
of demonstrating and in the case of a shell only or shell and core development, this aspect of the build
compliance would be outside the control of the tenant. A suitably qualified acoustician (SQA) must
carry out a quantifiable assessment of the specification of the build form, construction
and any external factors that are likely to affect the indoor ambient noise levels. From
this assessment, the SQA must confirm that the developer's works will enable a future
tenant utilising a typical fit-out and specification to meet the levels required to
demonstrate compliance with the BREEAM criteria.
Simple buildings

assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Building types Where a building type does not have areas 'used for speech', it does not need to
without areas comply with the relevant 'reverberation times' criteria. In these instances, the credit
'used for speech' available for reverberation can be awarded by default where the building complies
with the indoor ambient noise level and sound insulation criteria.
CN3.1 Remedial works Where a programme of pre-completion testing identifies that spaces do not meet
the standards, remedial works must be carried out prior to handover and occupation
and the spaces re-tested to ensure compliance. Remedial works must be carried out
to all affected and potentially affected areas, including rooms or spaces previously
untested of a similar construction and performance requirement. The test report, or
covering correspondence, should include a clear statement that the testing is in
accordance with the required standard (where specified) or the BREEAM criteria (see
Hea 05 Acoustic performance and Hea 05 Acoustic performance section), and
include the relevant pass/fail criteria.
CN3.2 Programme of It is not acceptable to undertake a shorter test programme due to site readiness on
testing the day of testing. If this issue arises additional testing should be scheduled. It may be
that testing at less than the typical regime identified would be acceptable in some
instances, for example in small healthcare facilities. Where this is the case, clear
reasoning must be provided by the compliant test body prior to awarding the credit
(s).
CN4 Education The Acoustic Performance Standard for the Priority Schools Building Programme
BB93, February (APS), June 2013, referenced in previous versions of the manual has been replaced by
2015 the ‘Building Bulletin 93: Acoustic design of schools: performance standards’
See Table 19 published by the Department of Education in February 2015.
CN4.1 Multi-residential or Multi-residential and other residential institutions often contain a mixture of ‘non-
Other, Residential residential’ areas such as offices, small retail outlets, meeting rooms etc. and
institutions residential areas, e.g. self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes.
Rooms not Where less than 5% of the floor area of the assessed building includes ‘non-
covered by residential’ areas, these areas do not need to be assessed, hence only the residential
residential criteria spaces need to be assessed against the residential criteria to demonstrate
compliance with Table 24 .
Where more than 5% of the floor area of the assessed building includes areas other
than self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes:
If awarding 1 credit, only the self-contained dwellings and/or rooms for

residential purposes need to be assessed to demonstrate compliance.
If awarding 3 or 4 credits the ‘non-residential’ areas must meet the relevant
criteria for their function, as set out in Table 23 for ‘other buildings’ and the
self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes need to be
assessed to demonstrate compliance.
The calculation for the percentage of floor area that is ‘non- residential’ should only
include occupied spaces (as defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort) covered
by the Other buildings criteria.
Country specific
CN5 Country specific The following Standards or Building Regulations etc. are relevant for the assessment
guidance of the issue:
England
For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance
standards in Building Regulations, in England, this is referring to Approved Document E
2003 edition, with amendments 2004 and 2010 – Resistance to the passage of
sound.
Methodology
Testing, measurement and calculation procedures
Where specific guidance on testing, measurement and calculation is not stated in the criteria tables above for the relevant
building type, or within the relevant standard/guidance referenced, the following procedures can be followed by the
acoustician when measuring or calculating the levels required to demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue.
Measurements of sound insulation (airborne and impact) should be made in accordance with the relevant part of BS EN ISO
140 series, or the successor to these standards. For measurements of reverberation time, the relevant principles of BS EN ISO
354:2003 should be used and the guidance provided in BS EN ISO 140-7:1998 should be followed in respect of the number
of source and microphone positions, and decay measurements. For measurements of ambient noise, when no specific
guidance is available, the following procedures should be used:
1. Noise from both internal sources (e.g. mechanical ventilation systems, plant noise, noise-making systems) and external
sources (e.g. traffic noise transmitted via the building façade) should be included, and, where windows are openable as
part of the ventilation strategy, these should be assumed to be open for the purposes of calculations and open for
measurements. If openable windows are not part of the background/permanent ventilation strategy, then these should
be assumed to be closed for the purposes of calculation and closed for measurements.
2. Noise from occupants and office equipment (e.g. computers) should not be included in the measurements.
3. Unless otherwise stated in the referenced document, a rate of testing of at least one in ten rooms/spaces of each
performance level shall be subject to on-site performance testing.
4. Measurements should be made in at least four rooms in which noise levels can be expected to be greatest either
because they are on the noisiest façade or because they are on a naturally ventilated façade.
5. Where different ventilation strategies are used, measurements should be conducted in rooms utilising each strategy.
Otherwise, measurements should be made in rooms on the noisiest façade.
6. T in LAeq,T is taken as the duration of the normal working day (typically 8 hours between 09.00 and 17.00).
7. Measurements need not be made over a period of 8 hours if a shorter measurement period can be used. In this case,
measurements should be made when external noise levels are representative of normal conditions throughout the day.
8. Measurement periods less than 30 minutes may give representative values for indoor ambient noise levels and may be
utilised where this is the case. However measurement periods shorter than 5 minutes should not be used.
9. Measurements should be taken in a minimum of three locations in rooms at a height of 1.2m above the floor level and at
least 1m away from any surface.
10. Where relevant, measurement of airborne sound insulation between teaching spaces should be conducted between
one in four pairs of adjacent rooms (or teaching spaces) of each room type or performance requirement category and
construction type.
11. Where relevant, measurement of impact sound pressure level should be conducted in one in four teaching spaces
(separated from rooms above) of each room type or performance requirement category and construction type.
12. The measured level of ambient noise should be used to determine compliance with the criteria for acoustically sensitive
rooms. If at the time of acoustic commissioning it is not possible to measure ambient noise levels in the absence of
construction or other extraneous noise sources that will not be present when the building is complete, then, for
mechanical services the lower level of 35 dB, LAeq or the lowest design limit for the acoustically sensitive space should be
used.
The above is intended as guidance for undertaking acoustic testing or measurement to demonstrate compliance with the
performance requirements in BREEAM. If the acoustician has felt it necessary to deviate from the above procedures, they
should provide a reason for doing so and confirm that the alternative procedures are adequate for demonstrating that the
building meets the acoustic performance requirements.
Evidence
4 Multi-residential specific Completed Robust Details Ltd Compliance

Where Robust Details are to be used, Certificate signed by the developer for all relevant
the following must be provided: constructions relating to the plots being assessed.
1. Design team confirmation that
Robust Details chosen will achieve
the required performance
standards for sound insulation.
2. Purchase Statement from RDL
which confirms that the relevant
plots are registered with RDL.
Acoustically sensitive rooms

Where the term ‘acoustically sensitive rooms’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue, it refers to);
1. Cellular offices
2. Meeting/interview/consulting/treatment rooms.
3. Court buildings: Witness/consultation rooms and Judges'/magistrates' chambers and jury retiring rooms.
4. Prison buildings: Care/listener suites, Official visit rooms, 'Closed visits' rooms.
5. Educational buildings/spaces: rooms for teaching and learning i.e. classrooms, lecture theatres.
6. Rooms used for public speaking or seminars.
7. Any other room/space the design team or client deems to be acoustically sensitive for the purposes of privacy.
Compliant test body

A Compliant Test Body is defined as :
1. Organisations having United Kingdom Accreditation Scheme (UKAS) accreditation to the appropriate scope (for
e.g. to BS EN ISO/IEC 17025), or who are accredited by a member of the International Accreditation Forum (IAF -
www.iaf.nu) to the appropriate scope OR
2. Organisations or individuals registered with the Association of Noise Consultants (ANC) Registration Scheme OR
3. Companies or individuals that have been declared competent by an organisation who can provide evidence that
they follow the relevant principles of BS EN ISO/IEC 17024 (Conformity assessment - General requirements for
bodies operating certification of persons)7 in relation to BREEAM requirements.
Groups and sub-groups

As defined in the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E: Resistance to the Passage of
sound, section 1 (paragraphs 1.11 – 1.17). For example, flats and study bedrooms are usually considered as two
separate groups, and if there are significant differences in construction type then the groups will need to be broken
down into sub groups. In addition to this, where there are steps or staggers greater than 300mm between
dwellings, dwellings without steps/staggers should be treated as a different sub-group to those with step/staggers.
This is because the presence of steps/staggers is likely to improve performance.
Habitable rooms
For the purpose of this issue, habitable rooms include any room where individuals will sit or lie down and require a
reasonably quiet environmental to concentrate or rest. Such rooms are bedrooms, living rooms, dining rooms,
studies as well as kitchen-dining and kitchen-living rooms.
Material change of use

This is where there is a change in the purpose for which or the circumstance in which a building is used e.g. where a
building has been converted from a non-dwelling (office, school, church etc.) to a dwelling.
Multiple occupancy offices

Office space that is not cellular in nature, i.e. it is open plan, and designed to accommodate more than two desk
spaces/workstations.
Non-habitable rooms
For the purpose of this issue, non-habitable rooms include any room that is not considered a habitable room (as
defined above), it includes rooms such as kitchens, bathrooms, toilets, hallways, garages and laundry rooms.
Occupied spaces
Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 and note that for BREEAM issue Hea 05 there is a specific, unrelated, definition of
'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and measurement, see Compliance notes for details.
Robust Details
Robust Details (RDs) are construction solutions that provide an alternative to pre-completion sound insulation testing
as a method of complying with Requirements E1 of Approved Document E (2003 edition) of the Building Regulations
(England and Wales), DOE Technical Booklet G - Sound 2012 (Northern Ireland) and Technical Handbook Section 5 -
Noise, 2013 (Scotland). The relevant plots on a development must be registered with RDL and built in accordance
with the RD specification. To give a reasonable level of assurance that these details will achieve the required minimum
standards, RDL carry out random inspections during construction and random sound insulation tests after
construction. A Robust Detail is deemed to be approved for BREEAM (Multi-residential building) credits only when it
achieves a specified performance level as assessed by RDL. Robust Details can only be used in relation to assessment
for new build dwellings and cannot be used to assess the performance of construction details in rooms for
residential purposes or material change of use.
Room for residential purposes

This is defined within the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E as a room, or a suite of
rooms which is not a dwelling (house or a flat) and which is used by one or more persons to live and sleep. It includes a
room in a hostel, hotel, a boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential home, whether or not the room is
separated from or arranged in a cluster group with other rooms, but does not include a room in hospital, or other
similar establishment, used for patient accommodation.
Specified performance level

Robust Details are approved for credits under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), where the specified
performance levels set out below are met. Construction types that meet these levels are listed on the Robust Details
website www.robustdetails.com on the CSH page. Where assessing self-contained dwellings in multi-residential
buildings that are not defined as material change of use or rooms for residential purposes, Robust Details that meet
the specified performance level as set out below can also comply with the credit criteria for self-contained units in
Multi-residential buildings and reference must be made to the CSH page on the Robust Details website:
1. Mature Robust Details (published for over 12 months and at least 100 test results) – regular assessment based
on the 90th percentile of results from the last 100 site tests
2. Low use Robust Detail (published for over 12 months but fewer than 100 test results) – initial assessment based
on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme and the site tests available, and reviewed
regularly as new test results become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected.
3. New Robust Detail (published for less than 12 months and fewer than 100 test results) – initial assessment based
on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme, and reviewed regularly as new test results
become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected.
It should be noted that not all RDs will necessarily achieve the performance levels required to achieve multi-residential
credits. If in doubt, please check the list of currently approved details with RDL directly at www.robustdetails.com.
Suitably qualified acoustician (SQA)

An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of a
BREEAM assessment:
1. Holds a degree, PhD or equivalent qualification in acoustics/sound testing.
2. Has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly
demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting acoustics in relation to construction and the built
environment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for suitable acoustic
performance levels and mitigation measures.
3. An individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional
body. The primary professional body for acoustics in the UK is the Institute of Acoustics.
Where a suitably qualified acoustician is verifying the acoustic measurements/calculations carried out by another
acoustician who does not meet the SQA requirements, they must, as a minimum, have read and reviewed the report
and confirm in writing that they have found it to:
1. Represent sound industry practice
2. Be appropriate given the building being assessed and scope of works proposed
3. Avoid invalid, biased and exaggerated recommendations.
Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with the definition of a Suitably
Qualified Acoustician is required.
Single occupancy offices

Cellular office space designed to accommodate one or two desk spaces/workstations (typically no greater than
10m²).
Unoccupied spaces
Where the term ‘unoccupied space’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the nature of the space for the
purpose of carrying acoustic calculations or measurements i.e. such measurements must be carried out when the
space is unoccupied and therefore devoid of sources of noise.
Weighted standardized level differences (D )

nT,w
HTM 08-01 defines this as the ‘unit for rating airborne sound insulation on-site’.
Weighted standardised impact sound pressure level (L' )

nT,w
HTM 08-01 defines this as the ‘unit for rating impact airborne sound insulation on-site’.
Other information
Noise rating (NR) curves

Noise assessments based on NR curves are often used by building services consultants to predict internal noise levels due to
mechanical ventilation systems. However, the BREEAM requirement uses the indoor ambient noise level, LAeq,T which includes
external noise transmitted via the façade as well as internal noise such as that from mechanical ventilation systems. In the
absence of strong low frequency noise, LAeq,T can be estimated from the NR value using the following formula: LAeq,T≈ NR + 6
dB. Therefore, if the NR value is known, but not the sound pressure levels in the individual frequency bands, an estimate for the
indoor ambient noise level LAeq,T can still be determined from the NR value for the building services noise. The LAeq,T for the
external noise transmitted via the façade must then be combined with the LAeq,T for the building services.
1Building bulletin 93: Acoustic design of schools: performance standards, Department of Education, February 2015
2ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic Testing of Schools, version 1.2, July 2011
3BS EN ISO 140-18:2006 Acoustics. Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements
4HTM 08-01: Acoustics, Health Technical Memorandum, Department of Health, 2013
5BS 8233: Sound Insulation and noise reduction for buildings - Code of practice, 2014
6Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), Her Majesty's Court Service (HMCS), 2010
7ISO/IEC 17024:2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons
■ Hea 06 Safety and security Health & wellbeing
Hea 06 Safety and security

2 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage effective measures that promote safe and secure use and access to and from the building.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Safe access

Where external site areas form part of the assessed development the following apply:
1. Dedicated cycle paths provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to any cycle storage provided, without the need to
deviate from the cycle path and, if relevant, connect to off-site cycle paths (or other appropriate safe route) where these
run adjacent to the development’s site boundary.
2. Footpaths on-site provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to the building entrance(s) and connect to public
footpaths off-site (where existing), providing practical and convenient access to local transport nodes and other off-site
amenities (where existing).
3. Where provided, drop-off areas are designed off/adjoining to the access road and provide direct access to pedestrian
footpaths, therefore avoiding the need for the pedestrian to cross vehicle access routes.
4. Dedicated pedestrian crossings are provided where pedestrian routes cross vehicle access routes, and appropriate
traffic calming measures are in place to slow traffic down at these crossing points.
5. For large developments with a high number of public users or visitors, pedestrian footpaths must be signposted to
other local amenities and public transport nodes off-site (where existing).
6. The lighting for access roads, pedestrian routes and cycle lanes is compliant with the external lighting criteria defined in
Hea 01 Visual comfort, i.e. in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 1 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas.
Where vehicle delivery access and drop-off areas form part of the assessed development, the following apply:
7. Delivery areas are not directly accessed through general parking areas and do not cross or share pedestrian and cyclist
routes and other outside amenity areas accessible to building users and general public.
8. There is a dedicated parking/waiting area for goods vehicles with appropriate separation from the manoeuvring area
and staff and visitor car parking.
9. Parking and turning areas are designed for simple manoeuvring according to the type of delivery vehicle likely to access
the site, thus avoiding the need for repeated shunting.
10. There is a dedicated space for the storage of refuse skips and pallets away from the delivery vehicle manoeuvring area
and staff/visitor car parking (if appropriate given the building type/function).
One credit - Security of site and building

11. A Suitably Qualified Security Specialist (SQSS) conducts an evidence based Security Needs Assessment (SNA) during or
prior to Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent).
12. The SQSS develops a set of recommendations or solutions during or prior to Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or
equivalent). These recommendations or solutions aim to ensure that the design of buildings, public and private car parks
and public or amenity space are planned, designed and specified to address the issues identified in the preceding SNA.
13. The recommendations or solutions proposed by the SQSS are implemented (see CN3.6. Any deviation from those
recommendations or solutions will need to be justified, documented and agreed in advance with a suitably qualified
security specialist.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
assessment criteria Refer to Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project
assessment options.
CN1.1 Recommendations Both options:

for speculative If the SQSS is unable to make complete recommendations due to the speculative
projects. See criteria nature of the assessment, then the credit may still be available. The SQSS must
11-13 confirm that they have addressed all parts of the project where it is feasible to do so,
based on the information available to them at the time of assessment. In relation to
the influence of the occupier(s) on security, the SQSS shall clearly document their
assumptions in the Security Needs Assessment.
Simple buildings
assessment criteria
General
Safe access
CN3 Development does The safe access criteria apply only to developments that have areas external to the
not have any assessed building and within the boundary of the assessed development
external site areas. (regardless or not of whether that external area is or will be the responsibility of the
See criteria 1 to 10. future building occupant). This includes external parking areas. If the assessed
building does not have any external areas and access to the building is direct from
the public highway/footpath i.e. there is no on-site vehicle access and parking areas,
then the criteria concerning safe access are not applicable. In such instances the two
available credits must be assessed and awarded based on compliance with the
security criteria.
CN3.1 Covered parking Where the assessed building has no external areas but does have a covered parking
area See criteria 1 to facility, and cyclists/pedestrians/delivery vehicles access the building via this area,
10. then the relevant safe access criteria apply and this area must be assessed against
those criteria.
CN3.2 Delivery access Criterion 7 (delivery access through general parking areas) can be relaxed for smaller
through parking sites if it can be confirmed that the building is of an operational type and size which is
areas (smaller likely to mean all deliveries to the building will be made by small vans and not heavy
sites/deliveries) goods vehicles.
See criteria 1 to 10
apart from 7.
CN3.3 No vehicle delivery The criteria concerning vehicle delivery access is not applicable where dedicated
and manoeuvring delivery access and drop-off areas do not form part of the assessed development.
areas
See criteria 1 to 6.
CN3.4 Dedicated Where it is not practical to provide dedicated footpaths from each parking space
footpaths from car within a car park, it is expected that design teams take every practical measure to
parking spaces ensure the safety of pedestrians. In general terms, as a minimum, a safe pedestrian
route should be provided from the pedestrian exit of the car park to the building
entrance. For larger car parks it would be beneficial to provide footpaths at regular
intervals across it, to aid safe access from the car to the building entrance and the
design team should demonstrate that they have achieved this as far as is practical.
Security of site and building
CN3.5 Security Needs Where a suitably qualified security specialist was consulted at a later stage than RIBA
Assessment stage 2, this credit may still be achievable. If the suitably qualified security specialist
confirms that the implementation of security measures have not been restricted,
impaired or are not possible as a result of their later involvement ( i.e. everything that
would/could have been recommended can still be implemented), then the credit can
still be awarded (provided all other compliance requirements are met).
CN3.6 Implementing When confirming whether the recommendations or solutions set out by the suitably
recommendations qualified security specialist(s) have been implemented at the post construction
or solutions stage, it may be necessary for the assessor to use one or more of the following
See criterion 13. evidence types, supplied by the design team:
Desk-based evidence e.g manufacturers literature/certificates etc

Site-based evidence e.g. site inspection report/photographs etc
CN4 Prisons In the case of an assessment of a prison building/development the security criteria
Scope of security apply only to publicly accessible buildings and car parking areas outside of the
criteria for buildings secure perimeter zone (but still on the wider prison site). This could include visitor
on prison sites reception/waiting buildings, facilities/estates offices and storage and visitor/staff
parking. Security relating to secure prison buildings and their related site layout falls
outside of the scope of BREEAM.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO)

An ALO is the same as the Crime Prevention Design Advisor (see below) and is the title given to the same role in some
police forces. http://www.securedbydesign.com/index.aspx
Counter Terrorism Security Advisor (CTSA)

CTSA's receive specialist training allowing them to identify and assess sites within their police force area that are
deemed critical and may be vulnerable to terrorist and/or extremist attack. They then devise appropriate security
plans to minimise impact on that site and the surrounding community. They also have responsibility for the protection
afforded to Crowded Places (areas which by virtue of their crowd density may be liable to terrorist attack).
Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA)

A Crime Prevention Design Advisor is a specialist crime prevention officer, trained at the Home Office Crime Reduction
College, who deals with crime risk and designing out crime advice for the built environment. In addition to physical
security measures the officer will consider defensible space, access, crime and movement generators all of which can
contribute to a reduction in crime and disorder. http://www.securedbydesign.com/index.aspx
SABRE
SABRE is a new security assessment and certification scheme for buildings and built infrastructure assets. The scheme
provides facility owners, occupiers and interested parties with:
1. an independently assessed security risk management rating for a facility (SABRE Assurance Rating); and
2. the ability to measure, compare and evaluate the security performance of a facility against a range of credible
security threats.
SABRE has a star based rating system, with ratings subject to certain minimum criteria and the achievement of issues.
The scheme offers:
Recognition of good practice
A credible security label for buildings & infrastructure
Demand for secure buildings
Quantifiable reduction in security risks
Better informed security investment decisions
Improved value for money
Security Needs Assessment (SNA)

The project and site specific assessment of security needs, including:
1. A visual audit of the site and surroundings, identifying environmental cues and features pertinent to the security of
the proposed development.
2. Formal consultation with relevant stakeholders, including the local ALO, CPDA & CTSA (as applicable), in order to
obtain a summary of crime and disorder issues in the immediate vicinity of the proposed development.
3. Identify risks specific to the proposed, likely or potential use of the building(s).
4. Identify risks specific to the proposed, likely or potential user groups of the building(s).
5. Identify any detrimental effects the development may have on the existing community.
The purpose of the assessment is to inform stakeholder decision-making and allow the identification and evaluation
of security recommendations and solutions.

In most cases it is likely that an assessment carried out in accordance with the relevant Secured by Design (SBD) design
guides (relevant to the building / development type) will cover the items listed above. Wherever possible, duplication
should be avoided and so where existing schemes such as SBD cover the required information there would be no
need for a separate report to be created specifically for the purpose of the BREEAM assessment. In all instances the
assessor should review the evidence supplied, and ensure that the points listed have been covered.
Dedicated cycle lanes

Marked-out and clearly signed routes to accommodate building users arriving on and travelling through the
assessed site on a bicycle. Cycle lanes should be fit for purpose and the following publications offer guidance on how
to appropriately size, design and construct cycle lanes:
1. Local Transport Note 2/08 Cycle Infrastructure Design, Department of Transport, 2008.
2. The National Cycle Network Guidelines and Practical Details – issue 2, Sustrans and the relevant parts of Appendix
VI NCN Design and Construction Checklist.
Dedicated pedestrian crossing

Dedicated infrastructure/road markings and signage/instructions that enables a pedestrian to safely cross a vehicle
carriageway on the assessed site and continue their journey to/from the building. Such a crossing must be fit for
purpose, in that it will be appropriate for the width of the road, level of traffic and pedestrian use specific to the site. It
will also act to alert drivers of vehicles using the carriageway to the potential presence of pedestrians in the
carriageway, by ensuring they can be clearly seen and requiring the driver of the vehicle to give way to the pedestrian.
External site areas

Areas external to the assessed building, but within the development’s site boundary, which contain vehicle and/or
pedestrian access roads/pathways to the building, parking, unloading and drop-off areas.
Peer review
A process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a
standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional
ethics.
Secured by Design (SBD)

Secured by Design is a crime prevention initiative operated by the Police Services of the United Kingdom, which aims
to utilise design principles and products in the built environment that reduce the risk of crime by combining minimum
standards of physical security and proven principles of natural surveillance and defensible space.
Secured by Design is administered by Police Crime Prevention Initiatives (PCPI) which is owned by the London Mayor's
Office for Policing Crime Prevention Initiatives (MOPAC) on behalf of the UK police service, and has the support of the
National Police Chiefs Council and Police Scotland.
The Safer Parking Scheme

An initiative of the Association of Chief Police Officers aimed at reducing crime and the fear of crime in parking
facilities. Safer parking status, Park Mark®, is awarded to parking facilities that have met the criteria of a risk
assessment conducted by the Police. The scheme is managed by the British Parking Association (BPA) and supported
by the Home Office and Scottish Executive.
Suitably Qualified Security Specialist (SQSS)

An individual achieving any of the following can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of
compliance with BREEAM:
1. Crime Prevention Design Advisors (CPDA) or Architectural Liaison Officers (ALO), Counter Terrorism Security
Advisor (CTSA); or
2. A specialist registered with a BREEAM-recognised third party accreditation scheme for security specialists.
3. A practising security consultant that meets the following requirements:
a. Minimum of three years relevant experience within the last five years. This experience must clearly
demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting security in relation to construction and the built
environment, relevant to the type and scale of the project being undertaken.
b. Hold a suitable qualification relevant to security.
c. Maintains (full) membership to a relevant professional body or accreditation scheme that meets the following:
i. Has a professional code of conduct, to which members must adhere; and
ii. Ongoing membership is subject to peer review.
When appointing the suitably qualified security specialist, consideration should be given to the appropriateness of the
individual to carry out the security needs assessment, based on the size, scope and security needs of the
development.
Organisations, associations or scheme operators who wish to have their membership recognised as a ‘third party
accreditation scheme for security specialist’, should review their current status (and therefore their members) against
the requirements above and, where they feel they are compliant, contact BRE Global with the relevant
information/evidence.
Other information
The following is a list of existing schemes that may support the SQSS when developing the recommendations or solutions
addressing the issues raised in the Security Needs Assessment (SNA) (criterion 12):
Secured by Design, Design Guides (relevant to the building/development type)

Safer Parking Scheme
SABRE**
*The Safer Parking Scheme is only applicable to schemes where the primary function of the site is for parking of vehicles, or to
parking areas serving the prevailing site use(s).
**SABRE is currently in piloting phase, with a public launch targeted for December 2016.
Useful references
The Metric Handbook2 contains details of typical delivery/freight vehicle sizes and turning circles.
In addition to the SbD Schools guidance, Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the
Department for Education and Employment (1996)3, offers guidance on how to improve the security of school premises.
1BS 5489-1:2013 Part 1: lighting of roads and public amenity areas, Code of Practice for the design of road lighting, BSI, 2013
2Metric handbook Planning and design data, Adler, Architectural Press 4th Edition. 2012.
3Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the Department for Education and
Employment (1996)
Energy ■ Energy
Energy
Category overview
Fully fitted 15% Shell only 14.5% Shell and core 15% Ene 01, Ene 02
Summary
This category encourages the specification and design of energy efficient building solutions, systems and equipment that
support the sustainable use of energy in the building and sustainable management in the building’s operation. Issues in this
section assess measures to improve the inherent energy efficiency of the building, encourage the reduction of carbon
emissions and support efficient management throughout the operational phase of the building’s life.

Ene 01 Reduction of 12 Recognise improvements in the energy performance of the building

energy use above national building regulations in relation to heating and cooling
and carbon energy demand, primary energy consumption and carbon dioxide
emissions emissions.
Encouraging steps taken to reduce energy demand through building
design and systems specification.
Ene 02 Energy 2 Energy metering systems are installed to enable energy

monitoring consumption to be assigned to end uses.
Sub-meters are provided for high energy load and tenancy areas.
Ene 03 External 1 Specification of energy efficient light fittings for external areas of the
lighting development and controls to prevent use during daylight hours or
when not needed.
Ene 04 Low carbon 3 Analysis of the proposed building design/development is

design undertaken to identify opportunities for and encourage the
adoption of passive design solutions, including free cooling.
A feasibility study has been carried out to establish the most
appropriate on-site/near-site low or zero carbon (LZC) energy
source(s) for the building/development and is specified.
Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Ene 05 Energy 2 The refrigeration system, its controls and components have been
efficient cold designed, installed and commissioned in accordance with
storage appropriate codes and standards and demonstrates a saving in
indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO2 eq.) over the course of its
operational life.
Ene 06 Energy 3 An analysis of the transport demand and usage patterns is

efficient undertaken to determine the optimum number and size of lifts,
transportation escalators and/or moving walks.
systems Energy efficient installations are specified.
Ene 07 Energy 5 Client engagement to determine occupant requirements and define

efficient laboratory performance criteria to optimise energy demand of the
laboratory laboratory facilities.
systems Specification of best practice energy efficient equipment and
measures as appropriate.
Ene 08 Energy 2 Identification of the building's unregulated energy consuming loads

efficient which have a major impact on the total unregulated energy demand.
equipment Demonstrate a meaningful reduction in the total unregulated energy
demand of the building.
Ene 09 Drying space 1 Provision of adequate internal or external space and equipment.
■ Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon
emissions
12 Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage buildings designed to minimise operational energy demand, primary energy consumption and
CO2 emissions.
Assessment criteria
Up to twelve credits - Energy performance

1. Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPR NC). Compare the EPR NC achieved with the
benchmarks in Table 25 and award the corresponding number of BREEAM credits.
Table 25 Ene 01 EPR NC benchmark scale
Minimum standards
BREEAM EPR NC Rating Minimum requirements

credits
1 0.075 Requires a performance improvement progressively

better than the relevant national building regulations
2 0.15 compliant standard (see Other information ).
3 0.225
4 0.30
5 0.375 Excellent Requires 5 credits to be achieved (equivalent to an EPR of

at least 0.375).
6 0.45
7 0.525
Minimum standards
BREEAM EPR NC Rating Minimum requirements

credits
8 0.60 Outstanding Requires 8 credits to be achieved (equivalent to an EPR of

at least 0.6).
9 0.675
10 0.75
11 0.825
12 0.90 AND zero net

regulated CO2
emissions*.
* Note: Zero net regulated CO2 emissions are only required to achieve the maximum number of credits (12). There is no
additional CO2 minimum requirement for any BREEAM rating.
A description of how the EPR NC is calculated from a building's modelled operational energy performance, primary energy
consumption and CO2 emissions is provided in the Methodology section.
Note: The four countries of the UK have their own building regulations for energy and while they use the same methodology
and approved calculation software, each have different definitions of the notional building and set different requirements for
regulatory compliance i.e. baseline performance. This is accounted for in the BREEAM NC 2014 Ene 01 methodology through
the ‘translator curves’ defined for each country. Therefore, the EPR NC and the BREEAM credits are determined by comparing
the assessed buildings modelled operational energy performance relative to the regulatory baseline for the country in which
the building is located. See compliance note CN4.

The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve up to five innovation credits for this BREEAM issue:
Up to four credits - Zero regulated carbon

2. The building achieves an EPR NC≥ 0.9 and zero net regulated CO2 emissions (see Relevant definitions ).
3. An equivalent percentage of the building's modelled ‘regulated’ operational energy consumption, as stipulated in Table
26 , is generated by carbon neutral on-site or near-site sources and used to meet energy demand from ‘unregulated’
building systems or processes.
Five credits - Carbon negative

4. The building is ‘carbon negative’ in terms of its total modelled operational energy consumption, including regulated and
unregulated energy (see Relevant definitions in the Additional information section of this issue).
Table 26 Innovation credits
Innovation credits Equivalent % criteria
1 10%
2 20%
Innovation credits Equivalent % criteria
3 50%
4 80%
5 > 100%

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Energy performance, criterion 1

assessment criteria Option 1 - Shell only: Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio just for the building’s
heating and cooling energy demand only (EPR ED). Compare the EPR ED achieved with
the EPR NC in Table 25 'Ene 01 EPR NC benchmark scale' with the EPR ED substituted for
the EPR NC. Award the corresponding number of BREEAM credits.
The exemplary credits for this issue are not applicable for shell only.
Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type
and function apply.
assessment options.
CN1.1 Building services Option 2 - Shell and core:

efficiencies not Where the building services efficiencies are not known, for example where they are
known not within the remit of the shell and core developer (i.e. where services will be
provided as part of the fit-out works), services complying with the minimum energy
efficiency standards or backstop levels required by the relevant national building
regulations should be used for the energy modelling
CN1.2 Green fit-out Option 2 - Shell and core:

agreement For the purposes of this BREEAM assessment, it is permissible, when conducting the
(See Relevant energy modelling, for the design team to substitute the minimum energy efficiency
definitions .) standards or backstop levels required by the relevant national building regulations
for the performance specifications confirmed within a green fit-out agreement. This
is permissible provided that the performance specification forms part of, or is
referenced within, a fit-out agreement which is, or will be, contractually required of
the tenant(s) in their fit-out works. This rule applies only to those areas of the
building that the scope of the green fit-out agreement covers. Speculative areas of
the assessed building development not fitted out or covered by the scope of such
an agreement must assume the minimum energy efficiency standards or backstop
levels required by the relevant national building regulations in the energy model, and
no better.
England, Wales, Northern Ireland
For the purposes of this BREEAM assessment, it is permissible, when conducting the
energy modelling, for the design team to substitute the minimum energy efficiency
standards required by the relevant national building regulations for the
performance specifications confirmed within a green fit-out agreement. This is
permissible provided that the performance specification forms part of, or is
referenced within, a fit-out agreement which is, or will be, contractually required of
the tenant(s) in their fit-out works. This rule applies only to those areas of the
building that the scope of the green fit-out agreement covers. Speculative areas of
the assessed building development not fitted out or covered by the scope of such
an agreement must assume the minimum energy efficiency standards required by
the relevant national building regulations in the energy model, and no better
Simple buildings
assessment criteria
General
CN3 Extensions to Where an existing building is being extended (and only the new extension is being
existing buildings assessed) and that extension uses existing building services plant, the energy
See criterion 1. modelling must be based on the building fabric of the new extension and any
existing, common, building services plant and new building services plant installed
that will service the new extension.
The energy modelling does not have to consider the existing building fabric where
this will not form part of the scope of the BREEAM assessment. Nor does it have to
consider existing building services where they are not supplying services (heating,
cooling and/or ventilation) to the new extension being BREEAM-assessed.
CN3.1 Renewable and low Where included as part of the project and therefore assessed under this BREEAM
carbon installations issue, the installation of low or zero carbon technologies can be used to offset CO2
emissions arising from regulated and, in the case of exemplary credits, unregulated
energy consumption. The LZC technology can be installed on-site or near site where
a private wire arrangement is in place (see Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and
carbon emissions).
CN3.2 Zero carbon sources The project team must avoid double counting the energy from the zero carbon
of energy - double source. This may be particularly relevant where that source of energy generation is
counting being accounted for in terms of the assessed building’s regulated CO2 emissions
See criteria 2-4. and/or it will contribute to offsetting other buildings' CO2 emissions, which are not
part of this assessment.
CN3.3 Mixed use buildings In some instances, BREEAM-assessed buildings with residential areas may have been
assessed using SAP classified under the domestic building regulations and will therefore have had their
or SAP and SBEM energy use modelled using the domestic assessment method, SAP, as well as or
See criterion 1. instead of SBEM. Further guidance on assessing a building's Ene 01 performance
where SAP is used is provided in the Other information section for this assessment
issue.
CN3.4 Building assessed as Where the building under assessment forms part of a larger development and
part of a larger either a new or existing LZC installation is provided for the whole site, then the
development amount of LZC energy generation counted for in this issue, and subsequent CO
2
emissions saved, should be proportional to the building’s energy consumption
compared to the total energy consumption for the site.
CN3.5 Estimating energy At present there is no standard or national calculation methodology for modelling
demand from unregulated energy demands in a building. To demonstrate compliance with the
unregulated ‘exemplary level criteria’ the building’s modelled operational ‘regulated’ energy
building consumption is therefore used as a proxy for a building’s unregulated energy
systems/processes demand, i.e. unregulated energy equals 100% of regulated energy. While not
accurate, this approach enables BREEAM to assess and award credits for buildings
that meet a proportion of its unregulated energy demand via on-site or near-site
renewable energy sources. Where unregulated energy demand for the building can
be accurately predicted, then this data can be used to determine the percentage of
unregulated energy demand met via renewable energy sources. Unregulated
energy demand could be estimated on the basis of metered data from a similar or
the same building type with the same unregulated system/process loads or by
using the methodology described in CIBSE TM54: 2013, 'Evaluating Operational
Energy Performance of Buildings at the Design Stage, 2013' 1.
Country specific
CN4 Building regulations The relevant building regulations for England are Approved Document Part L2A
for energy 2010 Conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other than dwellings, 2013
edition - for use in England
These regulations are used to define the country-specific BREEAM ‘translator curve’
for the purpose of benchmarking building energy performance relative to a
regulatory baseline and awarding credits for this issue.
Methodology
The methodology for the EPR NC calculation considers three metrics of modelled building performance when determining the
number of credits achieved for this issue. The three metrics are:
1. The building’s heating and cooling energy demand

2. The building's primary energy consumption
3. The total resulting CO2 emissions.
These three metrics for the actual modelled building performance are compared against the relevant national building
regulations compliant standard (i.e. a baseline) and each is expressed as a percentage improvement. The percentage
improvements are then compared against modelled building stock and 'translated' into a ratio of performance for each
metric. These ratios are then weighted for each metric and added together to determine the overall Energy Performance
Ratio (EPR NC).
The calculation is determined using the following performance data from annual energy modelling of the building’s
specified/designed regulated fixed building services and fabric, as undertaken by an accredited energy assessor using
approved building energy calculation software:
1. Building floor area ( m²)

2. Notional building heating and cooling energy demand (mJ/ m²)
3. Actual building heating and cooling energy demand (mJ/ m²)
4. Notional building primary energy consumption (kWh/ m²)
5. Actual building primary energy consumption (kWh/ m²)
6. Target Emission Rate (TER) (kg CO2 / m²)
7. Building Emission Rate (BER) (kg CO2 / m²).
The necessary energy modelling data required to determine building performance is sourced from National Calculation
Method compliant energy modelling software, used by the design team to demonstrate building regulation compliance. This
data is then entered into the BREEAM Ene 01 calculator to determine the EPR NC and number of credits achieved. The Ene 01
calculator is within the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, in the Assessment issue scoring tab, Energy section.
The methodology summarised above is described in greater detail in Guidance Note 12 to be provided on the BREEAM
website.
Evidence
2-4 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
1 A copy of the Building Regulations As per interim design stage, but with the output
Output Document from the documents from the approved software reflecting
approved software. The output performance at the as built stage of analysis. This must
documents must be based on the account for any changes to the specification during
design stage of analysis. construction and the measured air leakage rate,
A copy of the Building Regulations ductwork leakage and fan performances (as required by
Output Document from the design building regulations).
stage SAP calculations (where
relevant for multi-residential
buildings)
2-4 As above, plus evidence confirming: As required above and as per interim design stage.
1. The total carbon neutral
energy generation (kWh/yr)
2. The source of the carbon
neutral energy
3. Calculated estimate of energy
consumption from
unregulated systems/process
(kWh/yr) (only required if
confirming zero regulated
carbon or carbon negative
exemplary credits)
4. Calculated estimate of
exported energy surplus (only
required if confirming carbon
negative status).
Accredited energy assessor

A person registered with an accredited energy assessment scheme provider. The scheme provider will be licensed by
the relevant government department to accredit competent persons in the energy assessment of non-
domestic/domestic buildings for the purposes of demonstrating compliance with the building regulations in the
country of origin. The energy assessor should be appropriately accredited for the building being assessed.
For a full list of approved accreditation schemes/organisations for energy assessors and links to registers of
accredited energy assessors visit:
https://www.ndepcregister.com (non-domestic), www.epcregister.com (domestic)
Approved building energy calculation software

Software approved for the purpose of demonstrating compliance with the energy efficiency and carbon emission
requirements of the building regulations (and in turn compliance with the Energy Performance of Buildings Directive
(EPBD) recast 2012. The definition includes the Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM) and its interface iSBEM, as well
as third party software approved by the relevant government department.
Approved building energy calculation software will provide the data required for calculating the EPR NC and BREEAM
Ene 01 credits.
Please note that for dwellings (where relevant to the assessment of multi-residential buildings), the government’s
Standard Assessment Procedure for the Energy Rating of Dwellings (SAP) may be used. The current version is SAP
2012 version 9.92 (October 2013). See also compliance note CN3.3 regarding the use of SAP outputs in multi-
residential building assessments.
Building Emission Rate (BER)

The building CO2 emission rate expressed as carbon dioxide emissions per square metre per year (kg CO2 / m²/year).
The BER is calculated in accordance with the National Calculation Methodology (NCM) and the Simplified Buildings
Energy Model (SBEM).
Building regulations
Building regulations set standards for the design and construction of buildings to ensure the safety and health of
people in or about those buildings. They also include requirements to ensure that fuel and power is conserved and
facilities are provided for people, including those with disabilities, to access and move around inside buildings.
Carbon negative building

A building/site that generates, surplus to its own energy demand, an excess of renewable or carbon neutral energy
and exports that surplus via the national grid to meet other, off-site energy demands, i.e. the building is a net exporter
of zero carbon energy.
Surplus in this respect means the building/site generates more energy via renewable/carbon neutral sources that it
needs to meet its own regulated and unregulated energy needs. Any surplus must be exported through the national
grid as additional capacity to that required by the Renewables Obligation i.e. Renewable Obligation Certificates are
not claimed/sold for the renewable energy generation (see definition of Renewables Obligation Certificate).
This definition of carbon negative focuses only on energy and carbon dioxide emissions resulting from the
operational stage of the building life cycle (as this is the stated aim of this assessment issue). It does not take into
account the embodied carbon, in terms of carbon fixing or emissions resulting from the manufacture or disposal of
building materials and components (these impacts/benefits are dealt with in Mat 01 Life cycle impacts).
Carbon neutral
Carbon neutral means that, through a transparent process of calculating building operational emissions, reducing
those emissions and offsetting residual emissions, net carbon emissions equal zero. This includes carbon emissions
from both regulated and unregulated energy consuming plan and systems. See the 'Zero net regulated CO2
emissions' definition also.
Controlled service or fitting

The building regulations for England 2 define this as a service or fitting in relation to which the building regulations
imposes a requirement.
Dwelling Emission Rate (DER)

The DER is the estimated carbon dioxide emissions per square metre per year (kg CO2 / m²yr) for the dwelling as
designed. It accounts for energy used in heating, fixed cooling, hot water and lighting. It is the equivalent of the BER for
dwellings.
Dynamic simulation model (DSM)

A software tool that models energy inputs and outputs for different types of buildings over time. In certain situations,
SBEM will not be sophisticated enough to provide an accurate assessment of a building’s energy efficiency. In these
cases government-approved proprietary dynamic simulation models may be used.
Energy demand
The building energy provided for end uses in the building such as space heating, hot water, space cooling, lighting, fan
power and pump power. Energy demands are the same as room loads. One of the outputs from the Building
Regulations Output Document is for heating and cooling energy demand only, not for any other building energy uses.
Heating and cooling energy demands are influenced by factors including building fabric heat loss, air permeability,
glazing and shading.
Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPR )

NC
A metric that is unique to BREEAM and calculated by the BREEAM Ene 01 Calculator within the BREEAM Assessment
Scoring and Reporting tool, using modelled outputs from the approved building energy calculation software. It is a
ratio that defines the performance of a BREEAM-assessed building in terms of its regulated operational heating and
cooling energy demand, primary energy consumption and CO2 emissions. This measure of performance is used to
determine the number of Ene 01 credits a building achieves in the BREEAM assessment. A description of how the EPR
NC
is defined and calculated is summarised in the Methodology section and outlined in greater detail in Guidance
Note 12.
Fixed building service

The building regulations for energy performance of buildings define this as any part of, or any controls associated
with:
1. Fixed internal or external lighting systems but does not include emergency escape lighting or specialist process
lighting; or
2. Fixed systems for heating, hot water service, air-conditioning or mechanical ventilation.
Green fit-out agreement

A formal contractually binding agreement between a building developer/owner and their tenant(s). As such, a green
fit-out agreement (or ‘green’ clauses/sections in a lease agreement) can be used as evidence demonstrating
compliance with the relevant BREEAM issue criteria at the interim design and final post construction stages of
assessment. The agreement should make specific reference to the specification requirements/levels claimed, and as
defined by BREEAM in this technical manual, where credits are awarded.
BREEAM aims to encourage a mutually beneficial relationship between the shell and core developer/owner of a
building and its future tenant(s) so that the fully fitted operational building achieves performance against the highest
possible environmental standards. In order to achieve this, BREEAM encourages and rewards the use of formal legally
binding green fit-out agreements between a developer/owner and their tenant. Where a legally binding green fit-out
agreement is provided as evidence and it commits the tenant’s fit-out to meet the criteria of this BREEAM issue,
credits are available to be awarded.
Minimum energy efficiency standards

Minimum energy efficiency standards are the minimum acceptable values for each type of service required by the
building regulations for Wales, Northern Ireland and England, as set out in the Non-Domestic Building Services
Compliance Guide.
They are called 'Limiting services efficiencies' in Part L2A for England.
Low or zero carbon (LZC) technologies

A low or zero carbon technology provides a source of energy generation from renewable energy sources or from a
low carbon source such as combined heat and power (CHP) or ground source heat pumps (GSHP).
National Calculation Method (NCM)

The National Calculation Method (NCM) enables quantification of building operational energy consumption and CO2
emissions resulting from regulated building services/systems and fabric performance. The NCM is the methodology
used for demonstrating compliance with the European Union Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) 2012
(recast). Building energy modelling compliant with the NCM can be carried out using approved software (see Relevant
definition of Approved building energy calculation software).
The full details are described in the NCM Modelling Guide (2013), www.ncm.bre.co.uk.
Notional building
A hypothetical building of the same size, shape, orientation and shading as the actual building, with the same
activities, zoning and system types and exposed to the same weather data, but with pre-defined specified properties
for the building fabric, fittings and services.
The notional building is concurrent with the national building regulations for Wales 2014, Northern Ireland 2012 and
England 2013.
Near-site LZC
A low or zero carbon source of energy generation located near to the site of the assessed building. The source is
most likely to be providing energy for all or part of a local community of buildings, including the assessed building, e.g.
decentralised energy generation linked to a community heat network or renewable electricity sources connected via
private wire.
On-site LZC
A low or zero carbon source of energy generation which is located on the same site as the assessed building.
Primary energy
Energy from fossil fuel and renewable sources that has not undergone any conversion or transformation process.
Primary energy is transformed by the means of energy generation used and its transmission to the building.
Primary energy consumption

This refers to the direct use at the source, or supply to users without transformation, of crude energy, that is, energy
that has not been subjected to any conversion or transformation process.
Private wire arrangement
In the context of BREEAM for low or zero carbon technology installations, a private wire arrangement is where any
electricity generated on or in the vicinity of the site is fed directly to the building being assessed, by dedicated power
supplies. If electricity is generated which is surplus to the instantaneous demand of the building, this electricity may be
fed back to the national grid. The carbon benefit associated with any electricity fed into the grid in this manner can
only be allocated against an individual installation or building. In cases where a building is supplied by a communal
installation, no carbon benefit can be allocated to buildings which are not connected to the communal installation.
Regulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from the specification of a controlled, fixed building services and fittings,
including space heating and cooling, hot water, ventilation and lighting.
Renewables Obligation Certificate (ROC)

This is a green certificate issued to an accredited generator for eligible renewable electricity generated within the UK
and supplied to customers by a licensed electricity supplier. One ROC is issued for each megawatt hour (MWh) of
eligible renewable output generated 3.
Standard Assessment Procedure (SAP) for Energy Rating of Dwellings

The government’s approved methodology for assessing the energy performance of new dwellings. The current
version is SAP 2012 version 9.92. The procedure accounts for energy used in:
Space heating and cooling
Hot water
Fixed lighting
Mechanical ventilation.
The Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM)

SBEM is software developed for DCLG by BRE. SBEM is a computer program that provides an analysis of a building’s
energy consumption. It calculates monthly energy use and carbon dioxide emissions of a building (excluding
dwellings) based on a description of the building geometry, construction, use and HVAC and lighting equipment.
SBEM is accompanied by a basic user interface, iSBEM. There also exists alternative approved software ‘front-end’
interfaces for SBEM (see definition of Approved building energy calculation software).
Target Emission Rate (TER)

The target emission rate is the minimum energy performance requirement (required by building regulations) for a
new non-domestic building (kgCO2 / m²yr). The TER is calculated in accordance with the National Calculation
Methodology (NCM) and the Simplified Buildings Energy Model (SBEM). For dwellings, the TER is calculated using the
SAP methodology according to the requirements defined in the building regulations for dwellings. The TER is
expressed in terms of the mass of CO2 emitted per year per square metre of total useful floor area of the building
(kgC O2 / m²yr).
Unregulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption from
systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. For example, this may include
energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its operation, e.g. lifts, escalators, refrigeration
systems and ducted fume cupboards; or energy consumption from operational-related equipment e.g. computers,
servers, printers, photocopiers, laptops, mobile fume cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other
appliances.
Zero net regulated carbon emissions

The annual building net regulated CO2 emissions (kg CO2 / m²yr) arising as a result of annual energy consumption
from fixed building services, i.e. space heating and cooling, domestic hot water, ventilation and lighting, also referred
to as controlled services and fittings, as a result of requirements imposed on such systems by the building regulations.
In aiming to achieve a zero regulated carbon status, the building energy modelling can take account of contributions
of energy generated from on-site and near-site renewable and low carbon installations. Energy generated and
supplied from off-site renewable and low carbon installations cannot be used to meet this definition.
Other information
Allowable solutions
The term 'allowable solutions' forms part of the proposed zero carbon definition. A consultation on allowable solutions is
ongoing (at the time of writing). Once an official definition of allowable solutions is confirmed by the government for non-
domestic buildings, BRE will advise accordingly on the contribution of allowable solutions towards achieving BREEAM credits.
Building regulations classifications for multi-residential buildings

Multi-residential buildings that can be assessed under BREEAM New Construction 2014 will be classified under either the non-
dwelling version of the relevant building regulations or a combination of the non-dwelling and dwelling of the building
regulations, as outlined in compliance note CN3.3.
For England, areas classified under the relevant building regulations documents, Approved Documents (AD) Part L2A, are
classed as ‘buildings other than dwellings’. However this does also include ‘rooms for residential purposes’ (see below). Areas
classified as Part L1A are ‘self-contained dwellings’. The Part L classification impacts this BREEAM issue in that areas classified
as Part L2A must be assessed using SBEM and areas classified as Part L1A must be assessed using SAP.
Room for residential purposes

The building regulations for Wales, Northern Ireland and England give the following definition: Room for residential purposes
means a room, or suite of rooms, which is not a dwelling-house or a flat and which is used by one or more persons to live and
sleep and includes a room in a hostel, a hotel, a boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential home but does not include
a room in a hospital, or other similar establishment, used for patient accommodation.
Guidance for assessing Ene 01 performance in buildings that contain residential areas
Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled using SAP only
The relevant data must be sourced from the SAP data sheet from the approved software (provided by the Accredited
energy assessor). This data must first be entered in to the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings
Using SAP'. The calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. Once converted by the Ene
01 Supplementary Calculator, the outputs should be entered into BREEAM’s Ene 01 Calculator in the BREEAM Assessment
Scoring and Reporting tool. This calculator will then confirm the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM
credits achieved.
The Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP describes in detail what data to source from
the SAP data sheet(s).
Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled using SAP and SBEM
Where the building has been classified under both the non-dwelling and the dwelling regulations, because it contains both
residential and non-residential areas, two sets of energy performance data will be required: one set from SBEM for the non-
domestic areas; and one from SAP for the self-contained dwellings.
The relevant SAP data must first be entered into the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using
SAP'. This calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. This converted SAP data along
with the relevant outputs from SBEM must then be added to BREEAM’s Ene 01 Calculator in the BREEAM Assessment Scoring
and Reporting Tool. This calculator will then confirm the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM credits
achieved.
Where both SBEM and SAP outputs are used, the total credits achieved are determined by area weighting the credits achieved
for the domestic and non-domestic parts of the building. The area weighted totals are then added together and rounded
down to the nearest whole credit. The same method of area weighting is applied to the percentage improvement on the
building's Target Emission Rate. The area weighted credits and percentage improvement are the totals used to determine
compliance with BREEAM’s Ene 01 minimum standards.
1CIBSE TM54: 2013, Evaluating Operational Energy Performance of Buildings at the Design Stage
2The Building Regulations 2000, Approved Document Part L2A: The conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other
than dwellings, 2013 edition, HM Government
3www.ofgem.gov.uk
■ Ene 02 Energy monitoring Energy
Ene 02 Energy monitoring

Number of credits available minimum standards
Building type dependent Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of operational energy
consumption.
Assessment criteria
Please note:
The first credit is applicable to all building types.

The second credit is not applicable to Pre-schools, Primary schools, Law courts, Prisons, Multi-residential and Other
buildings: Residential institutions.
One credit - Sub-metering of major energy consuming systems

1. Energy metering systems are installed that enable at least 90% of the estimated annual energy consumption of each
fuel to be assigned to the various end-use categories of energy consuming systems (see Methodology ).
2. The energy consuming systems in buildings with a total useful floor area greater than 1,000m²are metered using an
appropriate energy monitoring and management system.
3. The systems in smaller buildings are metered either with an energy monitoring and management system or with
separate accessible energy sub-meters with pulsed or other open protocol communication outputs, to enable future
connection to an energy monitoring and management system (see Relevant definitions ).
4. The energy consuming end uses are identifiable to the building users, for example through labelling or data outputs.
One credit - Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas

5. An accessible energy monitoring and management system or separate accessible energy sub-meters with pulsed or
other open protocol communication outputs to enable future connection to an energy monitoring and management
system are provided, covering a significant majority of the energy supply to tenanted areas or, in the case of single
occupancy buildings, relevant function areas or departments within the building/unit.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Sub-metering of major energy consuming systems, criteria 1 to 4

assessment criteria Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable.
Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas, criterion 5
Option 1 - Shell only: This criterion is not applicable.
Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply,
subject to the following:
meters must be installed on the energy supply to each separate tenanted unit or
floor plate within the assessed development.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
assessment criteria
CN2.1 Scope of sub- Depending on the building type, the assessor should use their discretion to identify
metering for simple which major energy consuming systems (where present) should be sub-metered.
building
assessments
General
CN3 Extensions to Where an existing building is being extended and it has existing building services
existing buildings plant and systems that will be common to both the new extension and existing
building, the criteria only apply to the extension. In this case, energy services
supplying energy consuming systems from the existing building shall, as a minimum,
be metered at the entry points to the extension, e.g. hot water, chilled water, gas
and electricity. However the best practice approach would usually be to ensure that
the energy metering covers the entire building.
CN3.1 Modular boiler Modular boiler systems can be monitored as a whole. See Relevant definitions
systems
See criterion 1.
CN3.2 Lighting and small Due to traditional distribution methods, it can be difficult to separate lighting and
power small power cost effectively. It is acceptable, within a single floor, for lighting and
See criterion 5. small power to be combined for metering purposes, provided that sub-metering is
provided for each floor plate.
CN3.3 Small function For a building consisting of a number of small function areas or departments, sub-
areas/departments metering the heating, hot water and combined electricity energy uses is sufficient to
See criterion 5. achieve this credit. Individual electricity energy uses within each unit do not need to
be sub-metered. For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, a small function
area/department is defined as less than 200m².
CN3.4 Heating and hot Space heating and domestic hot water may be combined with a single heat or gas
water meter per tenanted area/function area/department, where it is impractical to sub-
See criterion 5. meter these items separately.
CN3.5 Significant majority A significant majority of the energy supply to the tenanted areas/function
See criterion 5. areas/departments covers most of the energy uses but does not have to include
very small ones. As a guide, energy uses that cumulatively make up less than 10% of
the energy supply for that area may be excluded.
CN4 Buildings situated on The systems for buildings situated on campus developments must be monitored
campus using either an appropriate energy monitoring and management system or
developments another automated control system, e.g. outstations linked to a central computer,
See criterion 5. for monitoring energy consumption. The criteria only apply to the assessed building.
Where energy services are supplied from an existing building on the campus, they
shall be metered at the entry points to the assessed building, e.g. hot water, chilled
water, gas and electricity. Provision of a pulsed or other open protocol
communication output is not sufficient to award the credit for these building types.
CN4.1 Small tenanted For a development consisting of a number of small tenanted units, a single meter
office, industrial or per unit for electricity and another for heating is sufficient to achieve this credit.
retail units Individual areas within each unit do not need to be sub-metered. For the purpose of
See criterion 5. this BREEAM issue, a small unit is defined as less than 200m².
CN4.2 Large office, For a development consisting of one or more larger units (i.e. greater than 200m²),
industrial or retail sufficient sub-metering to allow for monitoring of the relevant function areas or
units departments within the unit must be specified, in addition to metering of the unit as
See criterion 5. a whole.
CN4.3 Healthcare Large-scale medical equipment/systems can be excluded when assessing

buildings: medical- compliance with this issue (although it is recommended that sub-metering is
based systems considered in such instances).
See criterion 5.
CN4.4 Single occupant The lists below summarise the commonly found functions by building types. These
buildings: relevant lists are not exhaustive and where other areas or departments exist, these should
function areas or also be separately metered.
departments
See criterion 5.
CN4.5 Office buildings 1. Office areas (metering by floor plate)

2. Catering
CN4.6 Retail buildings 1. Sales area

2. Storage and warehouse
3. Cold storage
4. Offices
5. Catering
6. Tenant units
CN4.7 Industrial units 1. Office areas

2. Operational area
3. Ancillary areas (e.g. canteens etc.)
CN4.8 Education buildings 1. Kitchens (excluding small staff kitchens and food technology rooms)
2. Computer suites
3. Workshops
4. Lecture halls
5. Conference rooms
6. Drama studios
7. Swimming pools
8. Sports halls
9. Process areas
10. Laboratories
11. High containment suites within laboratories
12. Controlled environment chambers
13. Animal accommodation areas
14. Data centres
15. IT work and study rooms, including IT-equipped library space and any space
with provision of more than one computer terminal per 5m².
Individual sub-metering of standard classrooms/seminar rooms is not required.
CN4.9 Hospitals and other 1. Operating departments

healthcare facilities 2. Imaging departments
3. Radiotherapy departments
4. Pathology departments
5. Dialysis departments
6. Medical physics facilities
7. Mortuary and post mortem departments
8. Rehabilitation when including hydrotherapy pools
9. Central sterile supplies departments (or equivalent)
10. Process areas, e.g. commercial-scale kitchens and laundries
11. IT rooms
12. Pharmacy departments
13. Laboratories
14. Tenancy areas (e.g. catering, retail, laundry)
In small healthcare buildings (<999m²) with no high energy load areas (as defined
above), a single meter per floor plate is sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual
areas within each floor plate do not need to be sub-metered.
CN4.10 Other buildings Other types of single occupant buildings should use the above lists of function areas
See criterion 5. as a guide to the level of provision required to comply, bearing in mind the aim of
the credit is to encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the
monitoring of in-use energy consumption (in this case by area).
Methodology
Metering strategy
Detailed guidance on how to develop an appropriate metering strategy for the energy criteria of a new building is available in
CIBSE TM39 Building energy metering 1.
Estimating the annual energy consumption of each end use

Where the total consumption of any single end use category (or a combination of end use categories added together) is
estimated to account for less than 10% of the annual energy consumption for a given fuel type, it is not necessary for this end
use to be sub-metered. In this instance, the design team should demonstrate that the respective end use(s) is expected to
account for less than 10% of the annual energy consumption for the fuel type. Where a given end use(s) will clearly account for
less than 10% of the total annual energy consumption for the fuel type in question, a simple hand calculation or use of
benchmark data to demonstrate this is acceptable.
Estimating the total annual energy consumption

Where it is unclear whether an end use(s) would account for 10% of the annual energy consumption for a given fuel type or
not, more detailed calculations should be provided. The total annual energy consumption should be estimated using a
method that estimates actual energy consumption. The energy consumption for each end use may be estimated by using
methods described in CIBSE TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage2, using actual
operational inputs (rather than those used for Building Regulations calculations). The weather data used should be the
average current weather data for the local area. The data on water consumption from the Wat 01 Water consumption issue
may be used as inputs for evaluating the energy use of domestic hot water.
Evidence
Accessible meters
Energy meters located in an area of the building that allows for easy access to facilitate regular monitoring and
readings by the building occupant/facilities manager. Typically this will be the plant room, main distribution room or
control room (where a building energy management system (BEMS) is installed).
Common areas
Developments that have several tenant units, particularly large retail developments, may also share common facilities
and access that is not owned or controlled by any one individual tenant, but used by all. Common areas are typically
managed and maintained by the development’s owner, i.e. landlord or their managing agent. Examples of common
areas include an atrium, stairwells, main entrance foyers/reception and external areas, e.g. parking.
Energy consuming systems
Systems that consume energy to perform the following functions within a building:
a. Space heating
b. Domestic hot water heating
c. Humidification*
d. Cooling*
e. Ventilation, i.e. fans (major)*
f. Pumps
g. Lighting
h. Small power
i. Renewable or low carbon systems (separately)
j. Controls
k. Other major energy consuming systems/plant, where appropriate. Depending on the building type, this might
include for example: plant used for swimming or hydrotherapy pools; other sports and leisure facilities; kitchen
plant/catering equipment; cold storage plan; laboratory plant; sterile services equipment; transportation systems
(e.g. lifts and escalators); drama studios and theatres with large lighting rigs; telecommunications; dedicated
computer room or suite; dealing rooms; covered car parks; ovens/furnaces; and floodlighting. See also CIBSE
TM39: Building energy metering for further information.
Note: the systems succeeded by * must not be present where a BREEAM New Construction Simple Buildings
assessment is being carried out.
Energy monitoring and management system

Examples include automatic meter reading systems (AMR) and building energy management systems (BEMS).
Automatic monitoring and targeting (aM&T) is an example of a management tool that includes automatic meter
reading and data management.
Energy supply
All types of energy supplied to a building area (function area/department/tenancy/unit) within the boundary of the
assessed development; including electricity, gas, heat or other forms of energy/fuel that are consumed as a result of
the use of, and operations within, each relevant area.
Energy meters
Energy meters measure the amount of energy used on a circuit where energy is flowing. Primary meters measure the
main incoming energy and are used for billing by the utility supplier. They include the principal smart and advanced
utility meters to a site for electricity and gas.
Sub-meters are the second tier including heat and steam meters and secondary meters installed to measure
consumption by specific items of plant or equipment, or to discrete physical areas, e.g. individual buildings, floors in a
multi-storey building, tenanted areas, function areas.
Major fans
Major fans typically include fans in air handling units (AHUs). Where multiple fans are within an air handling unit, they can
be metered as one unit. Small fans such as individual extract fans for single rooms, such as kitchen, bathroom and
toilet areas, are not required to be included where they only account for a small proportion of the total annual energy
use.
Modular boiler systems

A modular boiler system consists of a series of boilers that are linked together to meet a variety of heating demands.
They are generally composed of several identical boiler units, sometimes stacked, although a mix of condensing and
conventional boilers could be used. They operate in increments of capacity, each at around their full capacity and their
peak efficiency, so that the overall part load efficiency is greater than it would be for a single boiler.
Sub-meter outputs
Examples include pulsed outputs and other open protocol communication outputs, such as Modbus.
Other information
Building regulations requirements

The Building Regulations for energy use in all four countries of the UK require energy meters to be provided to allow the use of
fuel and power consumption to be monitored.
The Building Regulations of Wales, Northern Ireland and England also require energy meters to be provided that enable at
least 90% of the estimated annual energy consumption of each fuel to be assigned to the various end-use categories
(heating, lighting etc.) with separate monitoring of any renewable systems.
Buildings with a total floor area greater than 1,000m²are also required to have automatic meter reading and data collection
facilities. This has to be considered for larger buildings in Scotland.
The Scotland building regulations recommend that solid mineral fuel or biomass use is recorded, where applicable, and they
require separate monitoring of low carbon equipment, including combined heat and power installations.
The metering provisions are required to be designed to facilitate the benchmarking of energy performance as set out in CIBSE
TM46 Energy benchmarks3.
Note: this BREEAM scheme is intended for use within the four territories comprising the UK only and should not be
used for assessments in British Crown Dependencies such as the Channel Islands and Gibraltar. Assessments in these
territories should be assessed using BREEAM International.
1TM39 Building energy metering. CIBSE. 2009.
2TM54 Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage. CIBSE. 2013.
3TM46 Energy benchmarks. CIBSE. 2008.
Ene 03 External lighting

1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of energy efficient light fittings for external areas of the development.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. The building has been designed to operate without the need for external lighting (which includes on the building, signs
and at entrances).
OR alternatively, where the building does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows:
2. The average initial luminous efficacy of the external light fittings within the construction zone is not less than 60 luminaire
lumens per circuit Watt.
3. All external light fittings are automatically controlled for prevention of operation during daylight hours and presence
detection in areas of intermittent pedestrian traffic.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
assessment criteria
■ Ene 03 External lighting Energy
General
CN3 Single building Where the building being assessed forms part of a larger development (or is an
assessments on extension to an existing building) containing common areas and other buildings, the
larger scope of the external lighting criteria apply only to external new and existing lighting
developments or within the construction zone of the assessed building.
campuses and
extensions to
existing buildings
CN3.1 Temporary lighting, Temporary lighting such as theatrical, stage or local display installations, where
decorative lighting specified, can be excluded from assessment under this issue. Decorative lighting and
and floodlighting floodlighting must however not be exempt from the assessment criteria.
CN4 Prisons and other The criteria are concerned only with general external lighting, e.g. way-finding, car
secured buildings parking, decorative, signage, landscape, storage areas etc. Lighting specified for
security lighting specific security purposes within secured buildings, such as prisons, can be excluded
from assessment under this issue.
Methodology
Average initial luminous efficacy of the external light fittings
The individual luminous fluxes of all luminaires within the construction zone are summed (in lumens), then divided by the total
circuit Watts for all the luminaires.
For lamps other than LED lamps, the luminous flux of a luminaire using those lamps can be determined by multiplying the sum
of the luminous fluxes produced by all the lamps in the luminaire by the light output ratio of the luminaire (as confirmed by the
luminaire manufacturer).
Note: LED lamps are typically integral to the luminaire (LED luminaires). As such, the manufacturers' literature will
encompass both lamp and luminaire as a whole.
Evidence
Criteria Interim design stage Interim post construction stage
Automatic control
An automatic external lighting control system that prevents operation during daylight hours through either a time
switch or a daylight sensor (a manually switched lighting circuit with daylight sensor or time switch override is also
acceptable) in addition to providing presence detection in areas of intermittent traffic.
Note: for external lighting not fitted with presence detectors, time switches must provide automatic switch off of
lighting after a specified curfew hour, except in cases where there is a specific requirement for lighting to be left on all
night.
Construction zone
For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM-
assessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works.
Daylight sensor
A type of sensor that detects daylight and switches lighting on at dusk and off at dawn.
Luminous efficacy in luminaire lumens per circuit Watt

The ratio between the luminous flux produced by an entire luminaire (light fitting) (in lumens) and the total power
consumed by the lamps and the control gear contained within the luminaire (Watts).
Presence detector
A sensor that can turn lighting on when a presence is detected in the scanned area, and off after a pre-set time when
no presence is detected. Presence detectors must be compatible with the lamp type used as very frequent switching
can reduce the life of some lamp types.
Time switch
A switch with an inbuilt clock which will allow lighting to be switched on and off at programmed times.
Other information
None.
■ Ene 04 Low carbon design Energy
Ene 04 Low carbon design

3 No
Aim
To encourage the adoption of design measures, which reduce building energy consumption and associated carbon
emissions and minimise reliance on active building services systems.
Assessment criteria
Passive design (2 credits)

Low or zero carbon technologies (1 credit).
Passive design
One credit - Passive design analysis

1. The first credit within issue Hea 04 Thermal comfort has been achieved to demonstrate the building design can deliver
appropriate thermal comfort levels in occupied spaces.
2. The project team carries out an analysis of the proposed building design/development to influence decisions made
during Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent) and identify opportunities for the implementation of passive
design solutions that reduce demands for energy consuming building services (see compliance note CN2).
3. The building uses passive design measures to reduce the total heating, cooling, mechanical ventilation and lighting loads
and energy consumption in line with the findings of the passive design analysis and the analysis demonstrates a
meaningful reduction in the total energy demand as a result (see compliance note CN3.12).
One credit - Free cooling

4. The passive design analysis credit is achieved.
5. The passive design analysis carried out under criterion 2 includes an analysis of free cooling and identifies opportunities
for the implementation of free cooling solutions.
6. The building uses ANY of the free cooling strategies listed in compliance note CN3.1 to reduce the cooling energy
demand, i.e. it does not use active cooling.
Low and zero carbon technologies
One credit - Low zero carbon feasibility study

7. A feasibility study has been carried out by the completion of the Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent) by
an energy specialist (see Relevant definitions) to establish the most appropriate recognised local (on-site or near-site)
low or zero carbon (LZC) energy source(s) for the building/development (see compliance note CN3.3).
8. A local LZC technology/technologies has/have been specified for the building/development in line with the
recommendations of this feasibility study and this method of supply results in a meaningful reduction in regulated
carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions (see compliance note CN3.12).

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Passive design analysis, criteria 1 to 3

assessment Option 1 - Shell only: Criterion 1 - Hea 04 is not applicable to Shell Only assessments,
criteria however to achieve the Ene 04 Passive design credit, compliance with Hea 04 criteria
1, 2 and 3bii must be demonstrated.
Free cooling, criteria 4 to 6
Option 1 - Shell only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply subject
to the following: Only free cooling options 1 to 3 listed in compliance note CN3.1 are
applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and
function apply.
LZC feasibility study, criteria 7 to 8
Option 1 - Shell only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply,
subject to the following: Criterion 7: The LZC feasibility study must be completed as
part of the shell only design, based on the expected building use and loads specified
in the design brief or, where these are not specified, for likely scenarios. Criterion 8:
The built form should allow for the future installation of the most cost effective LZC
options. Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function
apply.
options.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
CN2.1 Microgeneration On-site LZC technologies are only eligible to contribute to meeting the criteria of this
technologies issue where the proposed solution can be classified as a microgeneration technology.
The requirements for classification as a microgeneration technology must be met as
described in compliance note CN3.5.
General
CN3 Passive design As a minimum, the passive design analysis should cover:
analysis 1. Site location
See criterion 2. 2. Site weather
3. Microclimate
4. Building layout
5. Building orientation
6. Building form
7. Building fabric
8. Thermal mass or other fabric thermal storage
9. Building occupancy type
10. Daylighting strategy
11. Ventilation strategy
12. Adaptation to climate change.
CN3.1 Free cooling The free cooling analysis should demonstrate consideration of appropriate
analysis technologies from the following:
See criterion 6. 1. Night time cooling (which could include the use of a high exposed thermal mass)
2. Ground coupled air cooling
3. Displacement ventilation (not linked to any active cooling system)
4. Ground water cooling
5. Surface water cooling
6. Evaporative cooling, direct or indirect
7. Desiccant dehumidification and evaporative cooling, using waste heat
8. Absorption cooling, using waste heat
9. The building does not require any significant form of active cooling or
mechanical ventilation (i.e. naturally ventilated).
CN3.2 Free cooling scope The free cooling should apply to all occupied spaces in the building. Small IT rooms
and lift motor rooms are excluded. Mechanical ventilation may only be used for small
areas, e.g. for kitchenettes and toilets.
CN3.3 LZC feasibility The LZC study should cover as a minimum:

study 1. Energy generated from LZC energy source per year
See criterion 7. 2. Carbon dioxide savings from LZC energy source per year
3. Life cycle cost of the potential specification, accounting for payback
4. Local planning criteria, including land use and noise
5. Feasibility of exporting heat/electricity from the system
6. Any available grants
7. All technologies appropriate to the site and energy demand of the
development.
8. Reasons for excluding other technologies
9. Where appropriate to the building type, connecting the proposed building to
an existing local community CHP system or source of waste heat or power OR
specifying a building/site CHP system or source of waste heat or power with the
potential to export excess heat or power via a local community energy scheme.
CN3.4 LZC feasibility When undertaking a feasibility study at a stage later than Concept Design (RIBA Stage
study timing 2 or equivalent), an additional element would need to be included in the report to
See criterion 7. highlight the local LZC energy sources which had been discounted due to the
constraints placed on the project by the late consideration, and the reason for their
omission. If the feasibility study discounted all local LZC as infeasible due to the late
stage in the project that the study was commissioned, then the credit for the
feasibility study must be withheld.
If the feasibility study were commissioned at the Concept Design stage or earlier, and
in the unlikely event the study concluded that the specification of any local LZC
technology were infeasible, the LZC credit could still be awarded.
CN3.5 Recognised local Technologies eligible to contribute to achieving the requirements of this issue must
LZC technologies produce energy from renewable sources and meet all other ancillary requirements as
See criterion 7. defined by Directive 2009/28/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23
April 2009 on the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources and
amending and subsequently repealing Directives 2001/77/EC and 2003/30/EC
www.eur-lex.europa.eu/en).
The following requirements must also be met:
1. There must be a direct supply of energy produced to the building under
assessment.
2. Where covered by the Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS),
technologies under 50kWe or 45kWth must be MCS (or equivalent) certified
products installed by MCS (or equivalent) certified installers.
3. Combined heat and power (CHP) schemes above 50kWe must be certified
under the CHPQA standard.
CHP schemes fuelled by mains gas are eligible to contribute to performance against
this issue.
4. Air source heat pumps can only be considered as a renewable technology when
used in heating mode. Refer to Annex VI of Directive 2009/28/EC for more
detail on accounting for energy from heat pumps.
5. Where MCS or CHPQA certification is not available, the design team must
investigate the availability of alternative accreditation schemes in line with the
Directives listed above, or an equivalent country/regional directive or standard.
Where an accreditation scheme exists it should be used for the purpose of
verifying compliance of the specified LZC technology. If no accreditation scheme
exists in the country, the design team must demonstrate they have investigated
the competence of the installer selected to install the LZC technology and are
confident that they have the skill and competence to install the technology
appropriately.
CN3.6 Novel LZC Other systems may be acceptable as part of a LZC strategy under this issue but are
technology not not currently included as LZC technologies in any of the approved building energy
listed calculation software packages. Acceptability will be dependent on the nature of the
See criterion 7. system proposed and the carbon benefits achieved. The BREEAM assessor must
confirm acceptability with BRE before an assessment is submitted. The calculation
procedure for the new LZC technology should be submitted for consideration as a
'novel technology' to be included in the 'SBEM-Q' innovation process
(see Other information ).
The novel technology would only be acceptable for the LZC credit if EITHER:
a. It is already demonstrably modelled in one of the approved dynamic simulation
compliance tools;
b. The calculation procedure has been accepted by the SBEM-Q process and
integrated into the SBEM tool; OR
c. It has been applied for and is in the process of being accepted for SBEM-Q.
For one-off LZC technology designs, where it is not viable to obtain SBEM-Q approval,
a BREEAM innovation credit can be applied for and subject to approval, obtained
instead.
CN3.7 Waste heat from a Waste heat from an operational process that takes place within the assessed building
building- related (or on the assessed site) can be considered as ‘low carbon’ for the purpose of this
operational BREEAM issue. This is on the condition that the generation of the heat from the
process process is integral to the assessed building. Examples of operational processes and
See criterion 7. functions include manufacturing processes, high temperature oven/kiln, compressors
serving process plant, micro-brewery, crematorium, testing and commissioning
boilers for training or manufacture, and data centres. It does not include waste heat
from IT or server rooms, which could be used as part of conventional heat recovery
measures.
CN3.8 Community and ‘Local’ does not have to mean on-site; community schemes (near-site) can be used as
near-site schemes a means of demonstrating compliance, as this BREEAM issue seeks to encourage the
See criterion 7. installation of on-site and near-site LZC technologies.
CN3.9 Waste incineration Waste heat from an incineration plant can only be considered as low carbon for the
See criterion 7. purpose of this BREEAM issue under the following circumstances:
1. All other LZC technologies have been considered and discounted in the
feasibility study and; EITHER
2. The local authority or region in which the incineration plant is located is
demonstrably meeting its annual waste reuse/recycling targets and waste
management policies; OR
3. There is a near or on-site facility connected to the building, via a private wire
arrangement, which is demonstrably removing reusable and recyclable waste
material prior to incineration.
CN3.10 First generation Given the current uncertainty over their impact on biodiversity, global food
biofuels production and greenhouse gas savings, plus the ease of inter-changeability
See criterion 7. between fossil fuels, BREEAM does not recognise or reward building systems fuelled
by first generation biofuels manufactured from feedstocks, e.g. biofuels
manufactured from sugars, seeds, grain, animal fats etc. where these are grown or
farmed for the purposes of biofuel production. Subject to review against the criteria
set out in compliance note CN3.11, BREEAM may recognise systems using second
generation biofuels (see Relevant definitions) or biofuels manufactured from
biodegradable waste materials e.g. biogas, waste vegetable oil or locally and
sustainably sourced solid biofuels e.g. woodchip, wood pellets, where these are not
interchangeable with fossil fuels or first generation biofuels.
CN3.11 Second BREEAM recognises that biofuels produced from biomass which is a by product of
generation other processes may provide a more sustainable alternative to fossil fuels. Typically,
biofuels and these use waste feedstock consisting of residual non-food parts of current food
biofuels from crops, industry waste such as woodchips, other waste vegetable matter and waste
waste streams fish oil from sustainable fish stocks to produce biofuel. Such biofuels will, in principle
See criterion 7. be recognised by BREEAM for the purposes of defining low/zero carbon
technologies. However due to the emerging nature of such technologies, full details
would be required for review by BRE Global prior to confirmation of acceptability.
Matters which would be required for consideration include the following:
1. Type, provenance and sustainability of the biomass feedstock
2. Avoidance/minimisation of fossil fuel use in extracting the biofuel
3. Minimising fossil fuel use in transporting the biomass/biofuel
4. Presence of a supply agreement and a robust supply chain
5. Compatibility of the biofuel with the specified boiler/plant and manufacturer’s
warranty issues
The use of other recycled or waste-derived biofuels such as waste oil from catering
may also be recognised by BREEAM subject to the above criteria. For smaller scale
applications, the assessor will, in addition, be required to demonstrate that the
biofuel is locally sourced. BREEAM does not qualify the term ‘locally sourced’ or specify
a minimum supply contract. However the assessor must determine and demonstrate
that these are reasonable for the particular application.
CN3.12 Meaningful The amount of energy or CO2 emissions reduction is not specified in the criteria in this
reduction issue. However, it should not be a trivial amount. As a guide, the installation should
See criteria 3 and contribute at least 5% of overall building energy demand and/or CO2 emissions.
8.
CN4 Schools: With respect to the free cooling credit, it is possible for ICT classrooms to be designed
information to avoid the use of active cooling. Hence, they are not exempt from the requirements
communication of this issue, i.e. if active cooling were used to treat these spaces, it would not be
technology (ICT) possible to achieve the free cooling credit within this BREEAM issue.
classrooms
Methodology
Passive design analysis
Any savings resulting from the incorporation of passive design measures should be demonstrated by comparing the energy
demand and / or CO2 emissions for the building with and without the proposed passive design measures adopted, as
identified in the passive design analysis.
To enable a baseline for comparison to be established, a ‘standard building’ should be modelled with fabric performance
equivalent to that of the local Building Regulations Notional Building (or for Scotland, an equivalent compliant building) and
without the passive design measures (where feasible i.e. building orientation is likely to be fixed). The glazing areas should
remain the same in both models.
With the exception of any changes to account for passive design measures and fabric performance, this ‘standard building’
should be modelled as equivalent to the actual building.
Any savings in energy demand and / or CO2 emissions should then be calculated by comparing the respective Building
Emission Rate (BER) outputs from two building models representing the ‘proposed building’ specification (fixed at a point as
agreed by the project team and assessor), and the ‘standard building’ specification.
These calculations should be carried out by a building services engineer who is a Member of The Chartered Institute of
Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) or by an accredited energy assessor (see Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon
emissions – Relevant Definitions).
Free cooling analysis

The free cooling demand reduction is demonstrated by estimating the cooling and mechanical ventilation energy savings with
free cooling measures compared with the total building services energy demand with the other passive design measures
from the passive design analysis. The calculation methods should be the same as for the passive design analysis, as far as
possible. Where the free cooling approach(es) chosen cannot be adequately modelled by these methods, the use of an/any
alternative method(s) should be justified by the building services engineer or accredited energy assessor, demonstrating that
it is/they are appropriate.
Low and zero carbon feasibility study

The demand reduction with the low and/or zero carbon (LZC) technologies is demonstrated by comparing regulated carbon
dioxide (CO2) emissions with LZC technologies to the actual building regulated emissions without LZCs. When the CO2 savings
are compared for different technologies, they may be estimated separately from the building energy model where
appropriate, e.g. by using manufacturers' data, simple hand calculations and/or spreadsheets. For the specified
technology/technologies, the demand reductions are modelled using dynamic simulation modelling. The energy supply used
for the base case is mains gas and grid electricity. If mains gas were not available at the site, then oil may be used instead. The
base case includes any passive design or free cooling measures adopted for the first two credits. The actual building energy
demands are calculated as for the passive design analysis. The carbon dioxide emissions factors used for the Building
Regulations calculations are then applied.
Evidence
4 Results from a dynamic simulation model demonstrating the As per interim design stage.
feasibility of the free cooling strategy.
7 Results from a dynamic simulation model demonstrating As per interim design stage
demand reductions from the specified low zero carbon
technology.
Approved building energy modelling software

Refer to Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions.
Energy specialist
An individual who has acquired substantial expertise or a recognised qualification for undertaking assessments,
designs and installations of low or zero carbon solutions in the commercial buildings sector and is not professionally
connected to a single low or zero carbon technology or manufacturer.
First and second generation biofuels

First generation biofuels are fuels made from sugar, starch, vegetable oil, or animal fats using conventional
technology. Second generation biofuels are fuels from lignocellulosic biomass feedstock using advanced technical
processes1. Common first generation biofuels include vegetable oil, biodiesel and bioalcohols.
Free cooling
The ability of the building to provide cooling to the internal occupied areas without the need to rely on energy
consuming mechanical cooling. Free cooling is an enhanced passive design method that requires engineering design
and modelling to demonstrate its effectiveness. Other similar methods include enhanced passive ventilation and
enhanced daylighting.
Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS)

The Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS) is an independent scheme that certifies microgeneration products
and installers in accordance with consistent standards. It is designed to evaluate microgeneration products and
installers against robust criteria, and provides consumers with an independent indication of the reliability of products,
assurance that the installation will be carried out to the appropriate standard and a route for complaints should there
be any issues. The MCS is a United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) accredited certification scheme covering all
microgeneration products and services. It has support from the Department of Energy and Climate Change (DECC),
industry and non-governmental groups as a prime method for making a substantial contribution to cutting the UK’s
dependency on fossil fuels and carbon dioxide emissions.
Near-site LZC
On-site LZC
Payback period
The period of time needed for a financial return on an investment to equal the sum of the original investment.
Other information
Free cooling aim
Free cooling has been highlighted in this issue as it relates particularly to contributing to reducing overheating for
adaptation to climate change. It can also make the building much simpler to operate and maintain than one with
mechanical cooling.
Novel low and zero carbon (LZC) technologies - SBEM-Q

In order to deal with the integration of new technologies into SBEM, a new procedure has been established which
mirrors the SAP Appendix Q approach to some extent. Appendix Q provides a means whereby validated individual
branded product performance information can be accessed and used as an adjunct to the SAP calculation. A
product’s performance information is determined by testing against a specification that has been agreed by DECC’s
NCM contractor, the relevant manufacturer(s) and industry sector representatives. Product data are listed in the SAP
Appendix Q database (at:www.ncm-pcdb.org.uk/sap). By following the ‘Innovation' path from that website,
manufacturers can apply for novel LZC technologies to be validated under the so-called ‘SBEM-Q’ procedure and then
integrated as part of an amendment to the SBEM calculation.
LZC feasibility study in Building Regulations

The European Union Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) (recast) 2012 (Directive 2010/31/EU), requires
that all member states have a methodology for calculating the energy performance of buildings and that the
feasibility of high efficiency alternative systems is considered before construction starts, including energy from
renewable sources, cogeneration, district heating and cooling and heat pumps (Article 6). This requirement has been
included in the building regulations for England (amendment Regulation 25A, 2013) and Scotland (October 2013)
and it has been proposed for the forthcoming regulations in Wales, expected in July 2014. The LZC feasibility study in
BREEAM is intended to encourage the study to be done early in the project, not just before construction starts, so that
the most appropriate solutions can be adopted. Also, this credit does not permit technologies that are not best
practice/sustainable or cannot be modelled with a robust method.
Passive design aim

Unlike the Ene 01 - Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions (which is focused on demonstrable and robust
performance improvement), Ene 04 - Low carbon design aims to encourage project teams to consider a particular
design approach.
In relation to the passive design credit, this is mostly reflected in criterion 2; the passive design analysis which is
intended to encourage project teams to proactively consider the ways in which the building could benefit from, and
adopt passive design measures (such as those listed in CN3).
1Sustainable Bioenergy: a framework for decision makers, United Nations – Energy, 2007.
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage

2 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the installation of energy efficient refrigeration systems, therefore reducing operational
greenhouse gas emissions resulting from the system's energy use.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Refrigeration energy consumption

1. The refrigeration system, its controls and components have been designed, installed and commissioned as follows:
a. In accordance with the Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the refrigeration retail sector 1 (see Other
information) and BS EN 378-2 Refrigeration systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements.
b. Using robust and tested refrigeration systems/components, normally defined as those included on the Enhanced
Capital Allowance (ECA) Energy Technology Product List (ETPL)2 or an equivalent list (see CN3.2 for a list of
components).
2. The refrigeration plant has been commissioned to comply with the criteria for commissioning outlined in BREEAM issue
Man 04 Commissioning and handover.
One credit - Indirect greenhouse gas emissions

3. Criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved.
4. The installed refrigeration system demonstrates a saving in indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO2 eq.) over the course
of its operational life.
With reference to The Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map 3, this can be demonstrated through specification of
technologies described in CO2 emissions saving options available when designing a new store/retail concept that delivers
savings in comparison with the 'baseline' building. Refer to the Methodology section for further information.
Note: for non-retail building types with cold storage refrigeration systems, refer to compliance note CN3.1.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
■ Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage Energy
CN1 Applicable assessment Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable.
criteria Option 2 – Shell and core: Where cold storage systems are
specified/installed, all assessment criteria relevant to the building type and
function apply.
Refer to Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core
Project Assessments for a more detailed description of the above shell and
core assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable assessment This issue is not applicable.

criteria
General
CN3 Scope of this BREEAM issue This issue is applicable only in instances where commercial/industrial sized
refrigeration and storage systems are specified, for example:
1. Storage and refrigeration of food in supermarkets
2. Cold storage facilities in industrial, laboratory, healthcare and other
buildings.
The criteria do not apply to:
1. Domestic scale refrigeration
or
2. Refrigeration for kitchen and catering facilities where these are self-
contained units not connected to building cooling systems.
These types of installation are covered within BREEAM issue Ene 08 Energy
efficient equipment.
If the building does not contain commercial/industrial sized refrigeration
system(s), this issue is not applicable to the assessment.
CN3.1 Non-retail buildings and the The Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map introduces the main energy
Carbon Trust Refrigeration saving opportunities for refrigeration use in the retail sector and defines a
Road Map Action Plan ‘baseline supermarket’. However, many of the technologies outlined in the
See criterion 4. Road Map are appropriate to non-food applications and therefore non-
retail building types that specify or install cold storage systems.
If the ‘baseline supermarket’ does not provide an appropriate benchmark
for achieving the second and third credit, the design team can still comply
with the criteria by demonstrating a reduction in indirect greenhouse gas
emissions (CO2 eq.) against an alternative baseline. The design team must
confirm details of the alternative baseline system used, and demonstrate
that it is based on a typical installation/technology for that building type.
The systems being compared must have the same duty and service
conditions and include the relevant consumption from the refrigeration
system's ancillary equipment.
CN3.2 Components on the ECA Where specified as part of the refrigeration system, products used for the
Energy Technology Product following components must be listed on the ECA Energy Technology
List Product List (or equivalent list):
See criterion 1b. 1. Air cooled condensing units
2. Automatic air purgers
3. Cellar cooling equipment
4. Commercial service cabinets (cold food storage)
5. Curtains, blinds, sliding doors and covers for refrigerated display
cabinets
6. Evaporative condensers
7. Forced air pre-coolers
8. Refrigerated display cabinets
9. Refrigeration compressors
10. Refrigeration system controls.
CN3.3 Extensions to existing If the assessed building is an extension to an existing building and there is
buildings cold storage plant in the existing building that will serve the new extension,
then this plant must meet the criteria in order to achieve any available
credits.
Methodology
Calculating indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO eq.)
2
The indirect emissions must be calculated in accordance with the procedures in BS EN 378-1 4- Refrigerating system and heat
pumps safety and environmental requirements, Annex B. Further detail on applying this method to calculate the indirect
emissions are available in the Guideline methods of calculating Total Equivalent Warming Impact (TEWI5) published by the
British Refrigeration Association (BRA).
Calculations must be carried out by an appropriately qualified professional (e.g. a building services engineer), including
calculations to justify for assumptions and methodologies for savings in indirect greenhouse emissions.
Evidence
2 Refer to generic evidence requirement above Refrigeration plant commissioning record
ECA Energy Technology Product List (ETPL)
■ Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage Energy
The ETPL is part of the government's Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme, a key part of the government’s
programme to manage climate change. The scheme provides a tax incentive to encourage investment in low carbon
energy saving equipment that meets published energy efficiency criteria. The Energy Technology List (ETL) details the
criteria for each type of technology, and lists those products in each category that meet them:
https://etl.decc.gov.uk/etl/site.html.
Indirect operational greenhouse gas emissions

These are the indirect greenhouse gas emissions that result from the production of energy used to power the
refrigeration system's, cooling plant. This includes the emissions from the production of grid electricity or an on-site
source of energy generation, e.g. gas CHP. In the case of refrigeration systems, the term ‘direct greenhouse gas
emissions’ is also used; this refers to the emissions that occur as a direct result of leakage of refrigerant from the
system. The impacts of direct greenhouse gas emissions from refrigeration systems are dealt with in the BREEAM
issue Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants. Therefore, only indirect emissions resulting from the energy consumption of the
system are covered in this issue.
Other information
Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the retail refrigeration sector

The Code of Conduct has been developed by the Carbon Trust, in partnership with the Institute of Refrigeration (IoR) and the
British Refrigeration Association (BRA). The Code is intended to compliment the Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map.
1Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the retail refrigeration sector, Carbon Trust, British Refrigeration Association,
Institute of Refrigeration (June 2011).
2Enhanced Capital Allowance (ECA) Scheme Energy Technology Product List (ETPL): https://etl.decc.gov.uk/etl/site.html
3Refrigeration Road Map – An action plan for the retail sector, Carbon Trust, CTG021, 2012
(http://www.carbontrust.com/resources/guides)
4BS EN 378:2008 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements, BSI.
5Guideline methods of calculating TEWI Issue 2, 2006, BRA Specification, British Refrigeration Association.
Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems

3 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of energy efficient transportation systems.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance.
One credit - Energy consumption

1. Where lifts, escalators and/or moving walks (transportation types) are specified:
a. An analysis of the transportation demand and usage patterns for the building has been carried out to determine the
optimum number and size of lifts, escalators and/or moving walks.
b. The energy consumption has been calculated in accordance with BS EN ISO 25745 Energy performance of lifts,
escalators and moving walks, Part 2 : Energy calculation and classification for lifts (elevators) and/or Part 3: Energy
calculation and classification for escalators and moving walks, for one of the following:
i. At least two types of system (for each transportation type required); OR
ii. An arrangement of systems (e.g. for lifts, hydraulic, traction, machine room-less lift (MRL)); OR
iii. A system strategy which is ‘fit for purpose’.
c. The use of regenerative drives should be considered, subject to the requirements in CN3.3.
d. The transportation system with the lowest energy consumption is specified.
Two credits - Energy efficient features

Lifts
3. For each lift, the following three energy efficient features are specified:
a. The lifts operate in a standby condition during off-peak periods. For example the power side of the lift controller and
other operating equipment such as lift car lighting, user displays and ventilation fans switch off when the lift has been
idle for a prescribed length of time.
b. The lift car lighting and display lighting provides an average lamp efficacy, (across all fittings in the car) of > 55 lamp
lumens/circuit Watt.
c. The lift uses a drive controller capable of variable speed, variable-voltage, and variable-frequency (VVVF) control of
the drive motor.
4. Where the use of regenerative drives is demonstrated to save energy, they are specified.
Escalators and/or moving walks

Each escalator and/or moving walk complies with at least one of the following:
5. It is fitted with a load-sensing device that synchronises motor output to passenger demand through a variable speed
drive; OR
6. It is fitted with a passenger-sensing device for automated operation (auto walk), so the escalator operates in standby
mode when there is no passenger demand.
■ Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems Energy

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable.

assessment Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
criteria Refer to Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project
options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Energy consumption (1 credit)

assessment 1. Criterion 1
criteria Energy efficient features (1 credit)
2. Criteria 2 and 3 only; criteria 4 to 6 are not applicable.
General
CN3 Scope of this issue The criteria relating to lifts do not apply to lifting platforms, wheelchair platform
stairlift(s) or other similar facilities to aid persons with impaired mobility. However, any
lifting device with a rated speed greater than 0.15m/s must be assessed, inclusive of
goods, vehicle and passenger lifts. A demonstration of compliance with the BREEAM
criteria relating to the excluded transportation types would be considered best
practice for an energy efficient system (despite not being required for the purpose of
awarding the available credits).
CN3.1 Transport analysis The transport analysis can be in the form of a written statement justifying the lift
selection for the following conditions: where a single lift is provided in a low rise
building for the purpose of providing disabled access only; or where a goods lift is
selected based on the size of the goods it is intended to carry.
CN3.2 Building has no This issue will not be assessed where a building contains no lifts, escalators or moving
lifts, escalators or walks. Where only one of the transportation systems is present, the two 'Energy
moving walks or efficient features' credits can be awarded where the one system is compliant with the
has only one of relevant criteria.
the
transportation
systems
CN3.3 Regenerative A regenerative drive should only be considered where it produces an energy saving
drives greater than the additional standby energy used to support the drives. Regenerative
See criteria 1c and drives will typically be appropriate for lifts with high travel and high intensity use.
4.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Lift car lighting

The level of lift car lighting is determined by the relevant standards. For example, BS EN 81-1 and 2: 1998+A3: 2009
require 50 lux on the car floor and any control surfaces.
MRL: Machine room-less lift

All equipment is contained in the lift well, not in a separate machine room.
Standby condition - lifts

A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor and may have reduced the power consumption to a lower level set for
that particular lift (from BS EN ISO 25745-1: 2012). The period between when a lift was last used and when a standby
condition is entered is defined in BS EN ISO 25745-1 as 5 minutes.
Standby condition - escalators and moving walks

A condition when the escalator or moving walk is stationary and powered on and it can be started by authorised
personnel.
Idle condition
A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor following a run before the standby mode is entered (from BS EN ISO
25745-1: 2012).
Other information
BS EN ISO 25745 - Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks

ISO 25745 is planned to consist of three parts, under the general title Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving
walks:
■ Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems Energy
Part 1: Energy measurement and verification

Part 2: Energy calculation and classification for lifts (elevators)
Part 3: Energy calculation and classification for escalators and moving walks.
In Part 1, it has been estimated that approximately 5% of a building’s total energy consumption can be attributed to the
operation of lifts and a large proportion of this can be attributed to standby mode in many situations. BS EN ISO 25745 Parts
2 and 3 have been prepared in response to the rapidly increasing need to ensure and to support the efficient and effective
use of energy, providing:
1. A method to estimate energy consumption on a daily and an annual basis for lifts, escalators and moving walks.
2. A method for energy classification of new, existing or modernised lifts, escalators and moving walks.
3. Guidelines for reducing energy consumption that can be used to support building environmental and energy
classification systems.
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems

Aim
To recognise and encourage laboratory areas that are designed to be energy efficient and minimise the CO2 emissions
associated with their operational energy consumption.
Assessment criteria
Pre-requisite
Design specification (1 credit)
Best practice energy efficient measures (up to 4 credits) - building type dependent.
Pre-requisite
1. Criterion 1 within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories has been achieved.
One credit - Design specification

2. Client engagement is sought through consultation during the preparation of the initial project brief (RIBA Stage 1 or
equivalent) to determine occupant requirements and define laboratory performance criteria. Performance criteria
should include, but not be limited to the following aspects:
a. Description of purpose
b. Occupant/process activities
c. Containment requirements and standards
d. Air change rate requirements
e. Ventilation system performance and efficiencies
f. Heating and cooling requirements
g. Interaction between systems
h. Flexibility/adaptability of laboratory facilities.
3. The design team demonstrates that the energy demand of the laboratory facilities has been minimised as a result of
achieving the defined design performance criteria. This has informed the right-sizing (see Relevant definitions) of the
services system equipment (including ventilation supply and extract).
Laboratory containment devices and containment areas (criteria only applicable to buildings containing
these facilities)
4. Specification of fume cupboards and other containment devices has been carried out in compliance with criteria 2 and 3
of issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories, as appropriate to the containment device specification.
5. Where ducted fume cupboards are specified:
a. Compliance with item A in Table 27 .
b. The measurement of volume flow rate should be taken in the exhaust duct (at the boundary of the laboratory) to
take account of reductions in (inward) volume flow rate from fume cupboard leakage.
c. A reduction in air flow does not compromise the defined performance criteria and therefore does not increase the
health and safety risk to future building occupants.
■ Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems Energy
Up to four credits - Best practice energy efficient measures

The following criteria are applicable where the laboratory area accounts for at least 10% of the total building floor area (see
Relevant definitions).
6. Criteria 1 to 5 are achieved (or criteria 1 to 4 where ducted fume cupboards are not specified).
7. Laboratory plant and systems are designed, specified and installed to promote energy efficiency, demonstrated
through compliance with items B to L in Table 27 (see 7a. and b. below for how credits are awarded).
a. Up to 2 credits: The laboratory areas (see Relevant definitions) accounts for at least 10% (but less than 25%) of the
total building floor area; OR
b. Up to 4 credits: The laboratory area accounts for 25% or more of the total building floor area.
8. To achieve credits for energy efficient measures, the chosen measure(s) must have a reasonably significant effect on the
total energy consumption of the laboratory, i.e. 2% reduction or greater. This must be demonstrated by calculations or
modelling.
9. The energy efficient measures specified do not compromise the defined performance criteria, and therefore do not
increase the health and safety risk to future building occupants.

Table 27 Best practice energy efficient measures in laboratories
Item Category Item description Credits1
A Fume cupboard An average design air flow rate in the fume cupboards -
reduced volume specified no greater than 0.16m3 /s per linear metre
flow rates (internal width) of fume cupboard workspace.
Additional items
B Fan power Specification and achievement of best practice fan power 1

figures (as shown below) for all air handling units,
laboratory extract systems, local extract ventilation,
containment area extracts (where applicable) and fume
cupboard extracts (where applicable).
Laboratory system Best practice specific fan power (W/(L/s))
General laboratory supply air handling 1.5

unit (AHU) with heating and cooling
General laboratory extract systems 1.2
Laboratory local extract ventilation – 1.0

ducted
Containment area extract, without high 1.5

efficiency particulate absorption (HEPA)
filtration
Item Category Item description Credits1
Containment area extract, with HEPA 2.5

filtration
Fume cupboard extract 1.5
C Fume cupboard An average design air flow rate of < 0.12m³/s per linear 0.5
volume flow rates metre (internal width) of fume cupboard workspace
(further reduction)
D Grouping and/or Minimisation of room air change rates and overall facility 0.5
isolation of high ventilation flows by grouping together or isolating
filtration/ventilation activities and equipment with high filtration or ventilation
activities requirements.
E Energy recovery - Heat recovery from exhaust air (where there is no risk of 0.5
heat cross-contamination) or via refrigerant or water cooling
systems.
F Energy recovery – Cooling recovery via exhaust air heat exchangers (where 0.5
cooling there is no risk of cross-contamination) or via refrigerant
or water cooling systems.
G Grouping of cooling Grouping of cooling loads to enable supply efficiencies 0.5

loads and thermal transfer.
H Free cooling Specification of free cooling coils in chillers or dry air 0.5
coolers related to laboratory-specific activities.
I Load Effective matching of supply with demand through 0.5

responsiveness modularity, variable speed drives and pumps, and other
mechanisms.
J Clean rooms Specification of particle monitoring systems, linked to 0.5

airflow controls.
K Diversity Achievement of high levels of diversity in central plant 0.5

sizing and laboratory duct sizing, where compatible with
safety.
L Room air changes Reducing air change rates by matching ventilation airflows 0.5
rates to environmental needs and demands of containment
devices.
Notes:
1. Only whole credits can be awarded in BREEAM. Therefore to achieve a credit for items C to L (above) the laboratory
must comply with at least two of the items. In an instance where, for example, three and half credits are achieved this
would need to be rounded down to three credits.
Compliance notes
Shell and core

assessment
criteria
Simple buildings

assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Scope of this This issue is applicable only to Further education, Higher education, Offices with
BREEAM issue Research and development areas and Other buildings with Research and
development facilities that contain laboratory space and containment devices and/or
areas.
This issue is not applicable for School buildings (primary and secondary level). The
laboratory criteria within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories and guidance
within G9 Fume Cupboards in Schools (Building Bulletin 88 can be used for
assessments in Northern Ireland) should be followed for assessing laboratories and
containment devices in these building types. Where containment devices present in a
School or Sixth Form College assessment are of a specialist nature more typical of a
commercial or research laboratory, BRE should be contacted for further guidance.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Laboratory areas
Laboratory areas are defined as highly serviced (temperature/ventilation/humidity/containment controlled) spaces
where physical/biological or chemical processing and/or testing is carried out. Such areas will have inherently high
energy demands. In order to maintain controlled conditions to enable experiments and comply with health and safety
standards, typically laboratories:
1. Contain various exhaust and containment devices (such as fume cupboards and microbiological safety cabinets)
2. Are heavily serviced to circulate air and to supply heating, cooling, humidity, and clean air
3. Often require 24-hour access and fail-safe redundant backup systems and uninterrupted power supply or
emergency power to enable irreplaceable experiments.
Therefore, for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, the definition of laboratory areas excludes any laboratory
support areas such as:
1. Write up/offices
2. Meeting rooms
3. Storage
4. Ancillary and other support areas with lower servicing requirements.
Teaching and other laboratories/workshops with a limited amount of fume cupboards or other containment devices
and/or no energy intensive process equipment specified are excluded, unless the design team can provide evidence
that their consumption is at least 50% higher than a typical office due to the laboratory process-related activities.
Benchmarks for general offices can be found in Table 27 in CIBSE TM46 1 Energy benchmarks. Typically, in buildings
where 40% of the floor area is laboratory related, only 10% will actually constitute laboratory areas as per the
BREEAM definition.
Different types of laboratories have different requirements for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning (HVAC), plug
load equipment and access. This can lead to enormous variations in energy and water requirements. The main types
of laboratories include:
1. Wet laboratories - where chemicals, drugs or other material or biological matter are tested and analysed
requiring water, direct ventilation and specialised piped utilities. They typically include chemical science
laboratories. These laboratories require specially designed facilities.
2. Dry laboratories - contain dry stored materials, electronics, and/or large instruments with few piped services. They
typically include engineering or analytical laboratories that may require accurate temperature and humidity
control, dust control, and clean power.
3. Microbiological/clinical laboratories - often involve working with infectious agents. They typically require higher
levels of primary containment and multiple secondary barriers including specialised ventilation systems to ensure
directional air flow, air treatment systems to decontaminate or remove agents from exhaust air, controlled access
zones, airlocks as laboratory entrances, or separate buildings or modules to isolate the laboratory.
4. In vivo laboratories - these require highly controlled environments for the care and maintenance of flora and
fauna. The facilities are complex, and expensive to build and to operate. Tight environmental control over the
facility is required to avoid the introduction of contaminants or pathogens, and prevent the possibility of
infectious outbreaks, and avoid the transmission of odours.
5. Teaching laboratories - unique to academic institutes, they require space for teaching equipment, storage space
for student belongings and less instrumentation than research labs.
6. Clean rooms - refers to a controlled environment (air quality, temperature and humidity) which prevent
contamination and the regulating of environmental conditions, to facilitate accurate research and production
needs. They are typically used in UK universities for nanotechnology, medical and pharmaceutical research/studies
and microelectronics applications.
Right-sizing
Right-sizing principles encourage the use of better estimates in equipment loads from which services equipment is
sized in comparison to traditional methods of estimates based on ‘rated’ data obtained from manufacturers’
literature or design assumptions from previous projects. This can result in construction cost savings in addition to life
cycle cost benefits, while taking account of the need for appropriate contingency.
Other information
Synergy with BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions
This BREEAM issue has been developed to recognise improvements made to new laboratory areas/buildings that are not
currently fully recognised in the National Calculation Methodology, used to assess and award credits in Ene 01 Reduction of
energy use and carbon emissions.
1TM46 Energy benchmarks. CIBSE, 2008
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment

2 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage procurement of energy efficient equipment to ensure optimum performance and energy
savings in operation.
Assessment criteria
Two credits
1. Identify the building's unregulated energy consuming loads and estimate their contribution to the total annual
unregulated energy consumption of the building, assuming a typical/standard specification.
2. Identify the systems and/or processes that use a significant proportion of the total annual unregulated energy
consumption of the development and its operation.
3. Demonstrate a meaningful reduction in the total annual unregulated energy consumption of the building. See Table 28
Table 28 contains solutions deemed to satisfy compliance for common examples of significant contributors to unregulated
energy consumption, for a number of different building types/functions.

Table 28 Examples of solutions deemed to comply with the criteria for the reduction of unregulated energy load from
significantly contributing systems
Ref Function/equipment Criteria
A Small power, The following equipment has been awarded an Energy

plug-in equipment Star 1 rating OR has been procured in accordance with the
Government Buying Standards2:
1. Office equipment
2. Other small powered equipment
3. Supplementary electric heating.
For domestic scale white goods, the criteria in Ref F apply.
■ Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment Energy
B Swimming pool 1. Where automatic or semi-automatic pool covers, or

‘liquid’ pool covers with an automatic dosing system,
are fitted to ALL pools, including spa pools and
Jacuzzis (if relevant).
2. The covers envelop the entire pool surface when fully
extended.
3. Where the air temperature in the pool hall can be
controlled so that it is 1°C above the water
temperature.
C Communal laundry facilities with At least one of the following can be demonstrated for
commercial sized appliances commercial sized appliances:
1. Specification of heat recovery from waste water
2. Use of greywater for part of the washing process.
This may be recycled from the final rinse and used for
the next pre-wash.
D Data centres 1. Design is in accordance with the ‘Best practices for

the EU Code of Conduct on Data Centres’3 principles
with the data centre achieving at least the ‘Expected
minimum practice’ level (as defined in the Code of
Conduct).
2. Temperature set points are not less than 24°C, as
measured at the inlet of the equipment in the rack.
E IT-intensive operating areas 1. Uses a natural ventilation and cooling strategy as

standard, with forced ventilation only to be used
when the internal temperature exceeds 20°C and
active cooling only when the internal temperature
exceeds 22°C.
2. There is a mechanism to achieve automatic power-
down of equipment when not in-use, including
overnight.
F Domestic scale appliances (individual Domestic scale appliances have the following ratings (or
and communal facilities) better) under the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme,
where provided:
1. Fridges, fridge-freezers: A+ rating
2. Washing machines: A++ rating
3. Dishwashers: A+ rating
4. Washer-dryers and tumble dryers: A rating.
OR
5. If any of the appliances will be purchased during
occupation by the tenant/owner, information on the
EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme of efficient
white goods must be provided to the residential
areas of the building.
Note:
1. Any white goods available to purchase from the
developer must be compliant with criteria F1 to F4
above.
2. If criterion F5 was chosen to demonstrate
compliance, only one of the two available credits
could be awarded.
G Healthcare The procurement of large-scale equipment (where

present, see compliance note CN4) and sets of electrical
equipment (where numbering more than 50) has been
informed and selected by life cycle costing analysis for at
least two options in accordance with HTM07-02,Part B,
Chapter 1 4.
H Kitchen and catering facilities The project has incorporated at least two-thirds of the
energy efficiency measures outlined in the section
summaries of each of the following sections of CIBSE Guide
TM50 5 (except as specified):
1. Section 8 (Drainage and kitchen waste removal)
2. Section 9 (Energy controls - specifically controls
relevant to appliances)
3. Section 11 (Appliance specification - not fabrication
or utensil specifications)
4. Section 12 (Refrigeration)
5. Section 13 (Warewashing: dishwashers and
glasswashers)
6. Section 14 (Cooking appliance selection)
7. Section 15 (Water temperatures, taps, faucets and
water saving controls).
Refrigeration (see CN3) for kitchen and catering facilities
should be assessed here, not in Ene 05 Energy efficient cold
storage.
Energy efficient white goods scheme and equivalent rating scheme (Category reference F)
Energy rating certifications other than the EU labelling scheme will be accepted, providing the energy efficiency
performance is equivalent to the EU labelling scheme. This can be any internationally recognised energy efficiency labelling
scheme for white goods or a national scheme developed for use in the country of assessment, for example Energy Label
(in the EU), Energy Star (in the USA), The Appliance Energy Rating Scheme (in Australia), etc. A statement confirming that the
scheme is nationally recognised and can be regarded as equivalent to the EU labelling scheme is required for use.
Large-scale equipment in Healthcare (Category reference G)
This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment, and all other equipment with connected electrical loads
in excess of 10kW rated input power. All medical equipment can be exempted from complying with the criteria.
Compliance notes
Shell and core

assessment
criteria
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Criteria 1 and 2; ‘Ref B Swimming pool’ from Table 28 are not applicable.
assessment All other criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
criteria
General
CN3 Refrigeration Ref H in the Checklists and tables section apply to the following refrigeration
equipment equipment (where present):
1. Air cooled condensing units
2. Cellar cooling
3. Commercial service cabinets
4. Curtains/blinds for refrigerated display cabinets
5. Refrigeration compressors
6. Refrigeration system controls
7. Refrigerated display cabinets.
CN3.1 A meaningful BREEAM does not specify a level or percentage that defines a meaningful reduction in
reduction in unregulated energy demand. The project team must justify how they have
unregulated determined or judged a meaningful reduction from the unregulated energy demand
energy demand and the assessor must be satisfied that this is an appropriate justification.
CN3.2 Cold storage The criteria do apply to commercial kitchen refrigeration but not to other commercial
or industrial sized refrigeration and storage systems. These systems are covered
within the scope of Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage and should be removed from
the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.
CN3.3 Lifts, escalators This issue does not apply to lifts, escalators and moving walkways. These systems are
and moving walks covered within the scope of Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems and
should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.
CN3.4 Laboratory This issue does not apply to laboratory ducted fume cupboards. These systems are
systems covered within the scope of Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems and should be
removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.
CN3.5 Reuse of Reuse of electrical equipment does not comply by default, as it may not be the most
equipment energy efficient option. However, the credit could be awarded if either of the
following criteria are demonstrated:
1. The existing electrical appliances meet the criteria for inclusion on the Enhanced
Capital Allowance Scheme Energy Technology Product List 6.
2. Reusing the old equipment would, over the course of its life, be a more energy
efficient option than specifying new equipment.
Building specific
CN4 Healthcare This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment and all other
Large-scale equipment with connected electrical loads in excess of 10kW rated input power.
equipment
See criterion 1 and
Ref G.
Methodology
Estimating annual unregulated energy consumption
A method should be used that estimates actual energy use, based on expected equipment loads and hours of operation. The
energy uses may be estimated by using simple hand calculations, benchmark data or by the methods described in CIBSE
TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage7.
Estimating a significant proportion of annual unregulated energy consumption

This methodology is used to estimate which energy uses make-up a significant proportion of the unregulated energy uses
and so detailed calculations are not required. The approach should focus on identifying the larger energy uses that should be
included and the small energy uses that can be excluded. As a guide, energy uses making up at least 90% of the estimated
total annual energy consumption should typically be included (this is a statutory requirement in Wales, Northern Ireland and
England – see Ene 02 Other information).
Evidence
Data centre
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, the term ‘data centres’ includes all buildings, facilities and rooms which contain
enterprise servers, server communication equipment, cooling equipment and power equipment, and may provide
some form of data service (e.g. large-scale mission critical facilities all the way down to small server rooms located in
office buildings).
Government’s Buying Standards

A website listing minimum and best practice standards for equipment being procured for projects.
IT-intensive areas
These include computer areas where more than one computer per 5m²is provided, e.g. training suites, design
studios, libraries’ IT areas and other areas with a high density of computing devices.
Office equipment
Computer monitors, desktop computers, scanners, photocopiers, printers, workstations etc.
Regulated energy
Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions.
Unregulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption from
systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. This may include energy
consumption from operational-related equipment, e.g. computers, servers, printers, laptops, mobile fume
cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other appliances etc. Unlike the definition for Ene 01 Reduction of
energy use and carbon emissions, for this issue, it does not include energy consumption from systems integral to the
building and its operation, e.g. commercial/industrial refrigeration systems; lifts, escalators and other transportation
systems; and ducted fume cupboards; because they are already assessed separately in issues Ene 05, Ene 06 and Ene
07 respectively.
White goods and small power equipment

Domestic appliances for example washing machines, fridges, freezers, fridge-freezers, tumble dryers, washer-dryers,
air movement fans/heaters, etc.
Other information
None.
1Energy Star labelling scheme, http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=products.pr_find_es_products or http://www.eu-
energystar.org/en/index.html
2Government Buying Standards, http://sd.defra.gov.uk/advice/public/buying/
3EU Code of Conduct on Data Centres: http://iet.jrc.ec.europa.eu/energyefficiency/sites/energyefficiency/files/best_

practices_v4_0_5-r1.pdf
4HTM 07-02: EnCO de, Making energy work in Healthcare - Part B, Department of Health, 2015
2
5CIBSE TM50: Energy Efficiency in Commercial Kitchens, CIBSE
6Enhanced Capital Allowance scheme, http://www.eca.gov.uk
7TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage. CIBSE. 2013
■ Ene 09 Drying space Energy
Ene 09 Drying space

1 No
Aim
To provide a reduced energy means of drying clothes.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. For self-contained dwellings: an adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of
holding:
a. One to two bedrooms: 4m+ of drying line
b. Three or more bedrooms: 6m+ of drying line.
OR
2. Individual bedrooms: an adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding:
a. Two metres or more of drying line per bedroom for developments with up to 30 individual bedrooms; plus
b. One metre of additional drying line for each bedroom over the 30 individual bedroom threshold.
AND
3. The space (internal or external) is secure.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core

assessment
criteria
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Multi-residential For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for
developments Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies:
with CSH Where CSH issue Ene 4 Drying Space has been achieved for all dwellings assessed
assessed under the CSH, the requirements for self-contained dwellings under this issue are also
dwellings met. If this is the case, the credit under this issue can be achieved, provided any self-
See criterion 1. contained dwellings not assessed under the CSH or individual bedrooms in the
building meet the compliance requirements for this issue.
CN3.1 Adequate internal This is either:

space See criteria An heated space with adequate, controlled ventilation, complying with the national
1 and 2. Building Regulations relevant to the location of the building (rooms that commonly
meet these requirements are a bathroom or utility room); OR
An unheated outbuilding, where calculations by an appropriate Member of the
Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) or an equivalent professional
demonstrate that ventilation in the space is adequate to allow drying in normal
climatic conditions and to prevent condensation and mould growth.
The fixing or fitting needs to be a permanent feature of the room. Internal drying
spaces in the following rooms do not comply:
1. Living rooms
2. Kitchens
3. Dining rooms
4. Main halls
5. Bedrooms.
CN3.2 Building has no Please note that where a building contains no residential function this issue is not
residential areas applicable and will not require assessment.
CN3.3 Supported living This issue does not apply to multi-residential assessments of supported living facilities
facilities (for safety reasons, to minimise ligature risk to particular residents).
Methodology
None.
Evidence
■ Ene 09 Drying space Energy
Secure space
For self-contained dwellings this can be defined as an enclosed space only accessible to the residents of the dwelling.
For buildings with a communal drying space it is an enclosed space with a secure entrance, accessible to the residents
of the building only.
Other information
Ventilation - Building Regulations

The relevant Building Regulations document for England for the assessment of this issue is Approved Document F Ventilation
2010 (incorporating further amendments in 2013) (England and Wales).
Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Transport
Category overview
Fully fitted 9% Shell only 11.5% Shell and core 10% None
Summary
This category encourages better access to sustainable means of transport for building users. Issues in this section focus on
the accessibility of public transport and other alternative transport solutions (cyclist facilities, provision of amenities local to a
building) that support reductions in car journeys and, therefore, congestion and CO2 emissions over the life of the building.

Issue Issue name Credits Credit summary
ID
Tra 01 Public Up to Recognition for developments in proximity to good public transport

transport 5 networks, thereby helping to reduce transport-related pollution and
accessibility credits congestion.
Tra 02 Proximity to Up to Recognition of developments in close proximity of, and accessible to,
amenities 2 local amenities which are likely to be frequently required and used by
credits building occupants.
Tra 03 Cyclist Up to Provision of compliant cycle storage spaces and facilities to encourage
facilities 2 safe and healthy cycling
credits
Tra 04 Maximum Up to Recognition of developments that limit car parking capacity.

car parking 2
capacity credits
Tra 05 Travel plan 1 To promote sustainable reductions in transport burdens by

undertaking a site specific travel assessment/statement and developing
a travel plan based on the needs of the particular site.
■ Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Transport
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility

Aim
To recognise and encourage development in proximity of good public transport networks, thereby helping to reduce
transport-related pollution and congestion.
Assessment criteria
Accessibility Index (up to 5 credits - building type dependent)

Dedicated bus service (1 credit)
Up to five credits - Accessibility Index

1. The public transport Accessibility Index (AI) for the assessed building is calculated and BREEAM credits awarded in
accordance with the table of building types, AI benchmarks and BREEAM credits in Table 29 (see checklists and tables).
2. The Accessibility Index is determined by entering the following information in to the BREEAM Tra 01 calculator:
a. The distance (m) from the main building entrance to each compliant public transport node
b. The public transport type(s) serving the compliant node e.g. bus or rail
c. The average number of services stopping per hour at each compliant node during the operating hours of the
building for a typical day (see compliance notes and Table 30 in the Additional Information section).
OR
One credit - Dedicated bus service

3. For buildings with a fixed shift pattern, i.e. where building users will predominantly arrive/depart at set times, one credit
can be awarded where the building occupier provides, or commits to providing a dedicated bus service to and from the
building at the beginning and end of each shift/day.
This credit is only available in cases where a development is unable to achieve any of the available credits using the Accessibility
Index criteria (i.e. its location has a low public transport Accessibility Index).

Table 29 .Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) score.
Accessibility Index ≥2 ≥4 ≥8 ≥ 10 ≥ 12 ≥ 18
Building type BREEAM credits available
Offices, Industrial, Multi-residential, Other building type 1 1 2 3 - - -
Accessibility Index ≥2 ≥4 ≥8 ≥ 10 ≥ 12 ≥ 18
Pre-school, School, Sixth Form 1 2 3 - - -
Retail, Law Court, Further Education College, Higher Education type 1 2 3 3 4 5

1, Other building type 2
Higher Education type 2 1 2 3 4 5 -
Healthcare - Hospitals (Acute, Specialist, Teaching, Mental health) 1 2 3 3 4 5
Healthcare - GP surgery, Health centre, Community hospital 1 2 3 4 5 -
Rural location sensitive buildings. Other building type 3 1 2 - - - -
prison site, MOD site 1 2 - - - -
Transport hub 1 2 3 3 3 4
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply
assessment criteria
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply
assessment criteria
General
CN3 Campus Where 80% or more of the buildings on a campus style development, e.g. further or
developments, higher education-sites, are within 1000m of the campus' main entrance, then the
see criterion 1 campus' main entrance can be used as the reference point for the assessment of
distance to compliant public transport nodes for this issue.
The campus’ main entrance is that which is accessed by the majority of the assessed
building’s staff/students/visitors. A site may have more than one main entrance which
between them account for the majority of staff, students and visitors that access the
site. In such a case either entrance can be used as the basis for the calculation.
Where less than 80% of the buildings on the campus development are within 1000m
of the campus’ main entrance, the assessed building’s main entrance must be used as
the reference point for the assessment of distance to compliant public transport
node for this issue. This rule implies that for large campus developments, when
distances are too great to be comfortably covered by walking, the needs of the
building users would be served better by locating the public transport nodes inside
or on the periphery of the campus.
Where the building is not part of a centralised campus then its main entrance must be
used as the reference point for the assessment of this issue.
CN3.1 Dedicated bus The credit for the provision of a dedicated bus service is available for any building
services, type with a fixed shift pattern; examples could include schools, offices, retail, factories,
see criterion 3 prisons etc. The bus must provide transfer to the local population centre, public
transport interchange or be a door-to-door service. The credit is provided as an
alternative, where the AI of the building is too low to achieve any BREEAM credits, but
where the building users will have the option of a dedicated bus service. However, a
dedicated bus service can be included in the public transport Accessibility Index
calculation as a means of contributing towards achieving credits via this method
(regardless of the shift pattern). Where this is the case, the distance from the main
building entrance to the drop-off/pick-up point (the transport node) of the service
should be used.
CN3.2 Phased In the case of a large phased development where new transport facilities will be
developments, provided, but at a later stage than the building being assessed, the assessment can
see criterion 3 consider such facilities provided that:
A commitment has been made to provide transport facilities within the shortest of
the following periods, this is demonstrated either within the General Contract
Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement:
1. The transport facilities will be available for use by the time 25% of all phases
have been completed and are ready for occupation. OR
2. The transport facilities will be available for use within 25% of the total build time
for the phase in which the assessed building forms a part, measured from the
completion date of that phase.
The most appropriate rule for the development in question must be used, ensuring
that the time building users have to wait before having use of the transport facilities is
as short as possible. Where the transport facilities will not be available for use within a
period of five years from occupation of the building, they cannot be considered for
determining compliance with the BREEAM criteria.
Methodology
The methodology for calculating the Accessibility Index uses Transport for London’s Public Transport Accessibility Level (PTAL)
method, itself based on a methodology developed in 1992 by the London Borough of Hammersmith and Fulham. For a
detailed description of the PTAL methodology see the 'Measuring Public Transport Accessibility Levels Summary' document:
See data.london.gov.uk (PDF) .
Calculating the average number of services

For the purpose of the calculation, the frequency of public transport is the average number of services per hour. This is
calculated by determining the number of stopping services at the node during the peak arrival/departure times for the
building or the building's typical day’s operating hours (see definition 'operating hours'), divided by the number of hours within
that period. For example: the average number of services for an assessment of a building that operates between 08:00 -
19:00 hrs (11 hours) and is within proximity of a bus stop with 35 stopping services during this period is 3.2 (equivalent to an
average service frequency of approximately 20 minutes).
Multiple services
Services that operate from more than one node within proximity of the building, i.e. two separate bus stops served by the
same bus, must be considered only once - at the node in closest proximity to the building. Different services at the same node
can be considered as separate.
Bi-directional routes
Routes will be bi-directional; however for the purpose of calculating the index, consider only the direction with the highest
frequency (in accordance with the PTAL methodology).
Buildings in Greater London

Transport for London hosts a Planning Information Database that allows users to search for a specific London location by
street name, coordinates or postcode and then calculate the Accessibility Index (AI) for that location. The Total AI is confirmed
for the Point of Interest (POI) within the summary report, which can be downloaded and used as evidence of compliance for
the assessed building. Go to: www.webptals.org.uk
Evidence
1, 2 A completed copy of the Tra 01 calculator As per interim design stage
1, 2 Documentary evidence supporting the As per interim design stage

data used to complete the Calculator tool.
Accessibility Index
A measure that provides an indicator of the accessibility and density of the public transport network at a point of
interest (in the case of BREEAM, a building). The index is influenced by the proximity and diversity of the public
transport network and the level or frequency of service at the accessible node.
For example, a building that has a single public transport node 500m from its main building entrance with one service
stopping every 15 minutes, i.e. four services per hour on average, will score an AI of approximately 1.90. Alternatively,
the same node with one service every 15 minutes, but 300m from the building entrance will achieve an AI of 2.26. The
same node with two services stopping every 15 minutes will score an AI of 2.85. The greater the number of
compliant nodes, services and their proximity to the building, the higher the AI.
Additional building type classifications

Higher Education type 1: H.E buildings located on a campus where less than 25% of students are resident on the
campus or within 1km radius from the campus’ main entrance.
Higher Education type 2: H.E buildings located on a campus where 25% or more of the students are resident on the
campus or within 1km radius from the campus’ main entrance.
Other Building - type 1: A building predominantly occupied by staff/employees with occasional business related
visitors.
Other Building - type 2: A building occupied by a number of core staff/employees with a larger number of
consistently frequent visitors/users (either resident or non-resident).
Other Building - type 3: As type 2, but building types specifically required to be located rurally as a result of its function,
i.e. a building which would never be located within an urban area, e.g. a National Park visitor centre (see definition of
rural and rural location sensitive buildings location).
Compliant transport node

A compliant node includes any bus service with a stop within 650m and any railway station within 1000m of the
assessed building’s main entrance, measured via a safe pedestrian route (not ‘as the crow flies’). The service stopping
at each node must provide transport from, or onward travel to, either an urban centre, major transport node or a
community focal point e.g. doctor’s surgery, library, school or village centre. Only local services should be assessed
and any national public transport services should be excluded from the analysis, unless such a service can be said to
provide a local commuter service.
Prison and M.O.D sites: The distance requirement for a compliant node for buildings on these sites is 1000m for both
bus and rail.
Main building entrance

The main building entrance is the entrance to the assessed building which is directly connected to the main building
reception, circulation routes, lifts/stairs and is available to the majority of the building’s staff and visitors on arrival, it is
not the site entrance (unless the site entrance is also the building entrance e.g. building with a boundary on a public
highway).
For prison/MOD site assessments, the main entrance should be taken as the gatehouse entrance.
Operating hours
BREEAM seeks to define the building’s accessibility to the public transport network for the period during which the
majority of building users will travel to and from the building. In most cases the normal operating hours of the
building can be used. Where shift patterns see the majority of building users (over 80%) arriving or leaving during a
certain period, for example an office building where the majority of office workers arrive between 8.00-10.00, then
that period can be used as an alternative to the operating hours of the building. This accounts for some building
types that operate a 24 hour day and on a shift work basis.
During what typically would be deemed unsociable hours, and therefore periods where there is little if any public
transport operating, such periods are not required to be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Where the
assessed building operates on a 24-hour basis or the operating hours are unknown at the time of assessment, then
refer to and use the table of default operating hours, which can be found in the additional information section of this
issue.
BREEAM Tra 01 Calculator tool

A spreadsheet-based calculator used to determine the Accessibility Index for the assessed building and the number
of BREEAM credits achieved.
Rural location (Urban location)

A rural location is defined in this context as a site clearly not within or on the boundary of a small, medium or large
urban cover. An urban cover will have a population of 3000 people or more, located within a tract of continuously
built-up urban land extending 20 hectares or more. Therefore, the definition of rural includes village locations, green
field sites or small urban centres with a population of less 3000 people within a tract of land no greater than 20
hectares. Such locations will most likely be on a local bus route to larger urban areas or other local towns and may
have local shops and other facilities. This classification is based on the Department of Transport National Travel Survey
definition, which specifies urban areas based on the extent of urban development indicated on Ordnance Survey
maps
Rural location sensitive buildings

This definition includes any of the building types (listed below) where there is a demonstrable social or economic need
from a rural population for the service/demand, which the new building is intended to meet; and therefore locating
the building at an alternative site which could have higher public transport accessibility levels, i.e. within an urbanised
area, is unfeasible. The following building types are examples of those that may fall into this category.
1. Offices where providing services to the local community
2. Industrial where providing services to the local community
3. Retail where providing services to the local community
4. Pre-school, primary and secondary school
5. GP surgery
Typical day
The typical day is that which represents the period when travel to and from the building by its users and visitors will be
at its highest. For most buildings this should be taken as a mid-week day. In choosing a typical day the assessor should
check that timetabled information for that day is, within reason, representative of the public transport provision for
the entire operating week (excluding Sundays).
Other information
Table 30 Default hours of operation by building type for a typical day
Building type Default hours
Commercial 08.00 - 19.00
Pre-school, school, sixth form 07.30 -10.00,15.00 - 17.30

college
Further & Higher Education 08.00 - 19.00
Healthcare 07.00 - 20.00 (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift
pattern)
Retail: Shopping centre 09.00 - 19.00
Retail: Supermarket 08.00 - 22.00
Building type Default hours
Retail: Service provider 08.00 - 18.00
Retail: Convenience store 07.00 - 22.00
Retail: DIY/retail park 08.00 - 20.00
Retail: shop 08.30 - 17.30
Multi-residential accommodation 08.00 - 19.00
Court 08.00 - 19.00
Prison 07.00 - 20:00

(encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift pattern)
Other Buildings 08.00 - 19.00

Or use any of the above hours, as appropriate to the building type.
24 hour use building 07.00 - 20.00
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities

Aim
To encourage and reward a building location that facilitates easy access to local services and so reduces the environmental,
social and economic impacts resulting from multiple or extended building user journeys, including transport-related emissions
and traffic congestion.
Assessment criteria
Up to two credits
1. Where the building is located within close proximity of, and accessible to, local amenities which are likely to be frequently
required and used by building occupants, as outlined in Table 31 .
2. Where a building type is indicated to have core amenities ('C' in Table 31 ) at least two of these must be provided as a
part of the total number required. The remaining number of amenities required can be met using any other applicable
amenities (including any remaining core amenities).

Table 31 Credits available for Tra02 for different building types
Building types
Criteria Type Type Type Type Type 5 Type

1 2 3 4 (Two credits 6
available)
No. of BREEAM credits 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
No. of amenities 3 3 4 4 4 7 2
Proximity (metres) 500 500 500 500 500 1000 500
Appropriate food outlet C C C C C C ✔
Access to cash C C C C C C ✔
■ Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Transport
Building types
Criteria Type Type Type Type Type 5 Type

1 2 3 4 (Two credits 6
available)
Access to an outdoor open space (public or ✔ ✔ ✔ C C C ✔

private, provided suitably sized and
accessible to building users)
Access to a recreation/leisure facility for C C C ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

fitness/sports
Publicly available postal facility ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Community facility ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Over the counter services associated with a ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

pharmacy
Public sector GP surgery or general medical ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

centre
Child care facility or school ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Key:
✔ - Amenity relevant to building type.
C - Core amenity for building type
Building Types:
Type 1: Offices, Retail, Industrial, Courts
Type 2: Pre-school, Schools, Sixth Form
Type 3: Higher Education and Further Education
Type 4: Healthcare
Type 5: Multi-residential (two credits are available and each can be awarded independently of the other).
Type 6: Other Building types
This issue is not applicable to prison buildings/developments.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
assessment
criteria
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Collective One type of amenity may also exist within or as part of other types of amenities, e.g. a
amenities grocery store in a petrol station, cash point or pharmacy in a supermarket etc. It is not
a requirement of this issue that each amenity is ‘stand alone’.
CN3.1 Amenities within An amenity within the building or on the same site as the proposed development, e.g.
assessed building where the assessed building is part of a campus, retail or business park/centre,
or on-site complies with the assessment criteria.
CN3.2 Phased The guidance provided in BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility,
developments concerning phased developments, also applies to this issue.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the ‘BREEAM Evidential Requirements’
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria
All Where the amenities do not currently exist but As per interim design stage
are due to be developed a letter from the
client/developer confirming:
1. The location and type of amenities to be
provided
2. The timescale for development of the
amenities.
Accessible amenities
■ Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Transport
Amenities (as listed) that are within the required proximity (distance in metres) of the building and accessible via safe
pedestrian routes, e.g. pavements/paths and safe crossing points or, where provided, dedicated pedestrian crossing
points. The distance should not be measured in a straight line, ‘as the crow flies’.
Access to an outdoor open space (public or private, suitably sized and accessible to building users)
A space that enables building users to take an appropriate break from internal building activities, for example, an
office building would benefit from a space to sit outside and have lunch. These spaces will need to be suitably sized to
ensure that the space supports a reasonable number of building users associated with the project and should not
form a part of the public highway.
Appropriate food outlet

A means of accessing a food supply that is affordable to the majority of the building's users as well as being
appropriate for their day-to-day needs. For example, a small office building would benefit from having a small shop
selling sandwiches or snacks for a multi-residential building would benefit from having a restaurant in the local area.
Access to a recreation/leisure facility

A facility that will allow building users to exercise and maintain a healthy lifestyle. This could include a local leisure
centre, tennis courts, an on-site gym or, for a school, a local playground.
Child care or school

The intention of this amenity is to provide child support for potential building users, this could include a nursery, child
minding facilities or a school local to the development. A school cannot be considered an amenity to a BREEAM
assessment of the same school.
Community facility
An internal space that is inclusive to the majority of building users who will occupy the assessed
building/development. The facility will serve to facilitate community activities for the assessed building and its users.
For example, for a multi-residential building this could be a community hall or for an office building, a public house.
Other information
None.
Tra 03 Cyclist facilities

Aim
To encourage building users to cycle, so promoting exercise and helping reduce congestion and emissions, by ensuring
adequate provision of cyclist facilities.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Cycle storage (excluding sheltered housing, care homes, supported living facilities and
prison building types)
1. Compliant cycle storage spaces that meet the minimum levels set out in Table 32 (see Checklists and tables) are
installed.
One credit - Cyclist facilities (excluding sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facilities,
student residents, key accommodation, transport hub and MOD residential and prison building
types)
3. At least two of the following types of compliant cyclist facilities have been provided for all building users (including pupils
where appropriate to the building type) - see Relevant definitions for the scope of each compliant cyclist facility:
a. Showers
b. Changing facilities
c. Lockers
d. Drying spaces .
One credit - Cycle storage and cyclist facilities (sheltered housing, care homes and supported living
facilities and prison building types only)
4. Where criteria 1 to 3 have been met for cycle space and cycle facilities requirements.

Table 32 Cycle storage criteria for each building type
Building type No. spaces Unit of Notes

per unit of measure
measure
Commercial
Offices, Industrial 1 10 staff None
■ Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Transport
Retail
Large retail 1 10 staff The number of staff should be the maximum

number using the building at any time/shift. The
staff spaces must be provided in addition to
customer spaces. While they do not need to be
separate from customer spaces, this is
1 20 public car encouraged. This is subject to providing a
parking spaces minimum of 10 cycle customer spaces. Any
retail development that provides at least 50
customer cycle storage spaces will comply
regardless of the number of parking spaces.
Small retail 10 Total The spaces must be publicly accessible within

the proximity of a main building entrance.
Compliant cyclist facilities are intended for staff
only i.e. it is not a requirement of compliance to
provide facilities for customers.
Education
Pre-school or crèche 1 10 staff None
Primary school 5 Per form or For example: where a primary school has been
class in year designed to accommodate three classes per
group year, a total of 15 compliant cycle storage
spaces are provided for the whole school.
Where there are varying numbers of
forms/classes per year, the calculation must be
based on the year with the greatest number of
classes/forms.
Secondary schools and sixth 1 10 staff & FE/HE: student numbers must account for both
form, Further and Higher pupils/students under- and post-graduates, as well as PhD
education (FE and HE) total students and Post-Doctorates.
Healthcare
All healthcare building types 1 10 staff Unit of measure: use the measure which is the
largest for the building type e.g. if hospital then
use beds, if GP surgery then use consulting
rooms. The requirement for consulting
1 2 consulting rooms/beds is subject to a minimum of four
rooms OR 10 compliant cycle storage spaces being
beds provided.
Courts and Prisons
Prison establishment located 1 10 staff Only one credit available with the provision of
building two cyclist facilities.
Law Court 1 10 building None

occupants
(staff and
visitors)
Multi-residential
Student residences, key worker 1 10 staff The requirement is subject to a minimum of

accommodation one compliant space being provided.
1 2 residents
Sheltered housing, Care homes, 1 10 staff * Or spaces specified in accordance with the
Supported living facility number required as identified by the likely
resident profile. Where the resident profile is
1 10 residents* not the elderly or physically disabled or
compliant impaired then, where appropriate, the
wheelchair requirement for wheelchair or electric buggy
or electric spaces should be changed to compliant cycle
buggy spaces.
storage
spaces
Other buildings
Type 1* Use the criteria defined for office buildings.
Type 2* 1 10 staff None
1 10 visitors or
beds
Type 3* 1 20 staff A single credit can be awarded where spaces

for staff only are provided as well as the
appropriate compliant cyclist facilities. The
Compliance note allowing a reduction to the
1 20 building cyclist provision in rural locations has been
visitors/beds accounted for in the unit of measure for this
transport type. It should not therefore be
applied again.
Transport hubs 1 10 public users Apply the sliding scale (as per compliance note)
to a maximum of 5000 daily public users. Public
users refer to regular peak time users of the
service who start and/or finish their public
transport journey at the assessed building.
MOD non-residential 1 10 living-out These criteria apply to MOD buildings where

personnel the majority of personnel live off-site.
MOD residential 1 2 residents None
Note : Where the number of building users (based upon the unit of measure) exceeds 200 the sliding scale of compliance
can be used to identify the appropriate number of cycle spaces required (see Methodology section).
* See relevant definitions in the BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility for classification of Other buildings - type 1, 2
and 3.
Compliance notes
c Terms Description
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment apply.
assessment options.
CN1.1 Shell and core Both options: Where the credits are being sought the compliant number of cycle
requirements storage spaces must be provided as part of the base build. Compliant cyclist
facilities (showers, changing areas etc.) can be provided in shell and core areas of
the building as part of the base build. Alternatively, compliance can be
demonstrated where the shell and core building is designed to facilitate future
installation of the compliant number and type of cyclist facilities by the
tenant/owner-occupier through the provision of an appropriately sized and
dedicated space in the base building, including either the installation of the
appropriate services (for showers) or infrastructure to allow the future
installation of the relevant services e.g. capped water supply, service or
ventilation ducts, drainage etc.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
CN2.1 Use of local For all buildings which form part of a larger site/development, use of existing
compliant cycle local BREEAM compliant cycle storage space is acceptable.
storage
CN2.2 Compliant cyclist Where the assessed building has compliant cyclist facilities, plus access to some
facilities and non- local cycle storage spaces that are not BREEAM compliant, one credit can still be
compliant local awarded.
storage spaces
c Terms Description
CN2.3 Compliant cycle Where the assessed building meets the minimum number of compliant cycle
spaces but no spaces required for two credits, but does not have or meet the minimum
cyclist facilities provision for compliant cyclist facilities, then one credit can be awarded.
General
CN3 Existing/new site- For assessments of new infill buildings on an existing site where there exist
wide facilities shared compliant facilities, or where the new building will form a part of a larger
development (e.g. campus, retail or business park), the required number of
facilities can be determined on a development-wide basis. The number of
compliant facilities must be large enough to cater for the building occupants of
the assessed building, in addition to the occupants of any existing or other new
buildings that will share those facilities.
CN3.1 Building locations For sites where at least 50% of the available BREEAM credits for Public transport
with a high level accessibility (Tra 01) have been awarded (rounded to the nearest whole credit),
of public the number of compliant cycle spaces required in Table - 1 can be reduced by
transport 50%. This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant showers or
accessibility lockers by the same margin for most building types by default, since the
calculation is based on the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where
the number of required showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision
can reduce the actual requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%.
CN3.2 Rural locations For sites in rural locations the following can be applied;
1. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 10 miles,
the number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 50%.
This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower/lockers by
the same margin for most building types by default, since the calculation is
based on the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where the number
of required showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce
the actual requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%, 70% or 90% as
appropriate.
A percentage reduction in this context cannot be applied in addition to the 50%
reduction due to the building's Public Transport Accessibility level (as described
in CN3.1 compliance note above).
The definition of a rural location (and urban location) can be found in the BREEAM
issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility – Additional information.
CN3.3 Number of If it is not possible to confirm the number of building occupants commuting to
building the development, e.g. speculative developments, then the default occupancy
occupants rates given in the table in Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity: Table 34 can be
unknown used to determine a default number of users. Alternatively, the number of
building occupants in an existing development of similar type and size can be
used (the assessor must justify/validate the number used in their certification
report).
c Terms Description
CN3.4 Phased Where cycle storage cannot be installed at construction stage, due to phasing
developments and / or pending demolition works, compliance may still be demonstrated
provided:
Clarification and justification is given for why the storage is not currently
available.
A written contractual agreement is in place to provide BREEAM
compliant storage within a clear and justifiable time scale taking into
account any related works which would reasonably delay final
installation of facilities relating to the development.
Alternative storage is provided in the meantime that allow bikes to be
easily stored and removed, with the ability to be locked securely against
a fixed structure.
The methodology above applies to cycle storage only, and cannot be applied to
provision of cyclist facilities which must be assessed as normal.
CN4 Education In the case of a pre-school or primary school, shower provision is for staff only
(schools only): and set at a rate of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces provided
Compliant (subject to a minimum of one shower being provided). For example, where a
showers - primary school has been designed to accommodate three classes per year, a
additional total of 15 compliant spaces are required to meet the BREEAM criteria for cycle
requirements storage, and therefore two showers for staff use would be required for
See criterion 3. compliance with the cycle facilities criterion.
In secondary schools (and sixth forms) where there are less than 100 pupils, a
minimum of two showers must be provided for pupils with one male and one
female shower (where applicable). A minimum of one shower for staff should
be provided in all cases.
CN4.1 Sheltered Compliant wheelchair and buggy storage facilities are those that meet the
housing or care following:
homes and 1. Charging points for electric buggies (at least two) provided within the
supported living storage space
facilities see 2. Storage area must be secure yet easily accessible
criterion 3. 3. Lighting of the storage facility must be compliant with the external (or
internal where relevant) lighting criteria defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01
Visual comfort. The lighting must be controlled to avoid operation during
daylight hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility.
4. Where access to and from the building main entrance needs to be tightly
controlled for the safety/security of residents, and it can be demonstrated
that compliance with points 2 and 3 above impact on this (e.g. where
residents include those with mental health problems), these two items can
be excluded from the compliance requirements.
CN4.2 Residential The unit of measure for visitors or beds does not apply in residential buildings
buildings with with transient visitors, e.g. hotels, hostels, training centres where the visitor
transient visitors typically resides for less than one month. For a secure accommodation unit
such as hotels, compliance should be based on visitors (not beds). In this case, cyclist facilities for
hostels and staff must be accessible to all building users to ensure that visitors and
training centres patients/community members that will travel to and use or work within the
building are provided for.
Methodology
Sliding scale of compliance
To recognise the increased confidence in availability that occurs where there is larger scale provision of facilities, it is acceptable
to reduce the provision requirement for building users by increasing the standard unit of measure (defined in Table 32 ) and
potentially the provision of cyclist facilities on a sliding scale as follows:
1. For buildings with more than 200 users but less than 300, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 1.5.
2. For buildings with more than 300 users but less than 400, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2.
3. For buildings with more than 400 users, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2.5.
For example, an office building with 800 users would be required to provide the following number of cycle storage spaces:
1-200 users @ 1 space per 10 users = 20 spaces

201-300 users @ 1 space per 15 users (standard unit of measure x 1.5) = 7 spaces
301-400 users @ 1 space per 20 users (standard unit of measure x 2) = 5 spaces
401+ users @ 1 space per 25 users (standard unit of measure x 2.5) = 16 spaces
Total compliant cycle storage spaces required = 48 spaces
The sliding scale of compliance does not apply to the following building types: small and large retail, primary schools, multi-
residential buildings and MOD residential buildings.
Minimum cycle storage provision

Where the calculated number of required cycle storage spaces is less than four, total provision should be based on the lower
of the following:
1. A minimum of four compliant storage spaces must be provided OR

2. One space per user (staff and where appropriate other user groups).
Provision of cycle storage and facilities on sites with multiple buildings

Where a new or in-fill building is constructed on an existing site, or multiple new buildings are to be constructed on the same
site, compliance with this issue may be assessed based on the stand-alone building or on a site-wide basis. How this is
determined depends on the configuration of the proposed cycle storage, cycle facilities and the interpretation and
justification of the assessor.
Stand alone approach

Where cycle storage and associated facilities are being provided for the assessed building only, the following applies:
Cyclist storage:
The number of cycle storage spaces is compliant based on the number of users in the assessed building. The sliding
scale of compliance can be used (where applicable) when determining the number of storage spaces required.
All storage spaces provided must be BREEAM compliant and these must be located within, or in close proximity to the
assessed building. It is clear from access arrangements, demarcation and positioning that the cycle storage provided
is clearly associated with the assessed building only.
Cyclist facilities:
All new and existing facilities may be included provided they are BREEAM compliant.
Facilities should be located within the assessed building, or in an accessible adjacent building and for the sole use of
the assessed building’s users.
Site-wide approach
Where the cycle storage and associated facilities being provided are accessible to users of the entire site, or where there is a
distinct group of local buildings within a site that would share facilities, the following applies:
Cyclist storage:
The number of cycle storage spaces is compliant based on the number of users on site or within a group of local
buildings. The sliding scale of compliance can be used (where applicable) when determining the number of storage
spaces required.
All new storage spaces must be BREEAM compliant. Existing storage spaces may also be counted, provided they
allow bikes to be easily stored and accessed with the ability to be locked securely against a fixed structure.
Cyclist facilities:
The number of compliant cyclist facilities is based on the number of users on site who would be able to use these
facilities.
Cyclist facilities may be located anywhere on site. However, the path taken to access the nearest cycle storage, cyclist
facilities and building entrance(s) must be no greater than 500m via a safe and convenient route. The distances
should be measured from the first to the last point on the route. Where possible, different types of cyclist facilities
should be grouped together in designated areas for ease of access and use.
Existing facilities may be included provided they are BREEAM compliant and conform to the 500m requirement
above.
Combination of the two approaches

A mixture of the two approaches can be applied where cycle storage is delivered as a site wide approach and facilities are
being met for the assessed building only. However, where the opposite is being proposed (i.e. storage spaces are provided
only for the assessed building and facilities are provided on a site wide basis); the number of compliant cyclist facilities must be
based on the number of users on site and the facilities must located in an accessible location in close proximity to the storage
spaces.
Evidence
Additional building type classifications

See relevant definitions in the BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility for classification of other buildings -
type 1, 2 and 3
Compliant cycle storage spaces

Compliant cycle storage spaces are defined as those that meet the following:
1. Cycles can be secured within spaces in rack(s). They are covered overhead and the cycle racks are set in or fixed to
a permanent structure (building or hardstanding). Alternatively the cycle storage may be located in a locked
structure fixed to, or part of, a permanent structure with appropriate surveillance.
2. The distance between each cycle rack, and cycle racks and other obstructions, e.g. a wall, allows for appropriate
access to the cycle storage space to enable bikes to be easily stored and accessed.
3. The storage facility or entrance to the facility is in a prominent site location that is viewable/overlooked from either
an occupied building or a main access to a building.

4. The cycle storage facility has adequate lighting; this could be demonstrated with the lighting criteria defined in
BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. The lighting must be controlled to avoid out-of-hours use and operation
during daylight hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility.
Compliant showers
Compliant showers are defined as those that meet the following:
1. Provision of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces, subject to a minimum provision of one shower.
2. Any building providing eight showers or more will comply regardless of the number of cycle storage spaces
provided.
3. Both male and female users must be catered for, i.e. either separate showers within shared gender-specific
facilities (required provision split 50-50) or single shower cubicles and changing space for mixed use.
4. The showers do not need to be dedicated to cyclists and can be those shared with other users/uses.
Compliant changing facilities

Compliant changing facilities are defined as those that meet the following:
1. Appropriately sized for the likely/required number of users. The assessor should use their judgement to
determine whether the changing area is appropriately sized given the number of cycle storage spaces or showers
provided.
2. Changing areas must include adequate space and facilities to hang or store clothing and equipment while
changing or showering, e.g. bench seat and/or hooks.
3. Toilet/shower cubicles cannot be counted as changing facilities.
Compliant lockers
Compliant lockers are defined as those that meet the following:
1. The number of lockers is at least equal to the number of cycle spaces required.
2. Lockers are either in, or adjacent to, compliant changing rooms, where provided.
3. The lockers are sized appropriately for the storage of a cyclist's equipment.
Compliant drying spaces

A compliant drying space is defined as a space that is specifically designed and designated with adequate
heating/ventilation for the drying of wet clothes. A plant room, for example, is not a compliant drying space.
Small retail type

Includes smaller retail units/shops that may form part of a wider retail/business district, city or town centre or mixed
use sites, and typically do not have the scope to provide their own dedicated cyclist facilities.
Large retail type

Includes large retail developments, such as shopping centres, retail parks and supermarkets, which typically will have
covered or uncovered parking, or external areas, and therefore scope to provide their own dedicated cyclist facilities.
Other information
None.
■ Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Transport
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity

Aim
To encourage the use of alternative means of transport other than the private car to and from the building, thereby helping
to reduce transport-related emissions and traffic congestion associated with the building’s operation.
Assessment criteria
Up to two credits - Car parking capacity

1. The building’s car parking capacity is compared to the maximum car parking capacity benchmarks in Table 33 and the
relevant number of BREEAM credits awarded.
2. For most building types, except those where stated, the benchmarks vary according to the building's public transport
Accessibility Index (AI determined in accordance with BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility). Therefore, for
these building types the AI must be determined prior to assessing this issue. This is required to ensure that the building’s
car parking capacity is relative to the development's accessibility to the public transport network.

Table 33 Credits available in Tra04 Maximum car parking capacity for different building types
Criteria Credits
Building's Accessibility Index <4 ≥4-<8 ≥8
Building Type Max. parking capacity

1 space per x building users, where x is:
Office, industrial, student residences and key 3 4 5 1

worker accommodation
4 5 6 2
Sheltered housing, care homes and 4 5 6 1

supported living facility
5 6 7 2
Criteria Credits
Building's Accessibility Index <4 ≥4-<8 ≥8
Further and Higher Education 15 20 25 1
20 25 30 2
Other Building – Transport type 1 and 2 3 4 5 1
4 5 6 2
Other Building – MOD (where building users 2 3 4 1

are ‘living-out personnel’)
3 4 5 2
For the building types listed below, the maximum number of parking spaces provided must not be greater than the total
of the following:
Healthcare - Hospitals (acute, specialist, One parking space for every four staff, plus; 1
teaching, mental health) One parking space for every four beds, plus
Two parking spaces for each consulting, examination,
treatment, therapy room and A&E cubicle.
Healthcare - GP surgery, health centre, One parking space for every two medical staff, plus; 1
community hospital One parking space for every three non-medical staff,
plus;
Two parking spaces for each consulting, examination,
treatment, therapy room and A&E cubicle.
Pre-school, schools, sixth form, Retail, Prison, Issue not assessed for these building types
Court, Other Building – Transport type 3,
Other Building – Transport hubs
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment
criteria
Simple buildings

assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Exclusions Parking spaces set aside for the following building users can be excluded provided
these spaces are dedicated for that use, i.e. sized accordingly with the appropriate
signage/markings:
1. Disabled
2. Parent and baby
3. Motorbike
4. Car share .
In the case of excluding car share spaces, the future building occupier will need to
confirm they have an enforceable car share policy.
CN3.1 Parking shared Where the assessed building forms part of a wider site, e.g. campus, business park,
with other hospital, and parking is not designated to individual buildings, then the assessor has
buildings two options:
1. Assess compliance on the basis of parking capacity for the whole development,
accounting for all existing and new users and parking spaces.
2. Assess compliance using a pro-rata of parking capacity to building users, e.g. if
the assessed building is occupied by 20% of the development’s total occupants,
then attribute 20% of the total parking spaces to the assessed building for the
purpose of the assessment.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All Where relevant, a completed copy of Tra 01 As per interim design stage.
calculator confirming the building's
Accessibility Index.
Accessibility Index
Refer to Tra 01 Public transport accessibility.
Building users
Where the term building users is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the following, where relevant to the
building type:
1. Staff (who will work within the building).
2. Students (who will access the building for work or study during a typical academic term-time/semester day).
3. Residents (who will reside permanently or for a short period of time in the building).
If known, or can be reasonably estimated, project specific occupancy figures should be used. If this is not possible, for
example where the building is a speculative project, use the default occupancy rates given in Table 34 in the Other
information section (below) to determine the number of users. Where the number of building users is variable,
provision of parking spaces should be based on the maximum number of building users likely to be using the building
at any time during a typical day.
Care homes
For the purpose of BREEAM, care homes are defined as those buildings which are legally required to register with the
Commission for Social Care Inspection by the Care Standards Act, 2000.
Sheltered housing
Sheltered housing falls within Class C3 of the Town and Country Planning (Use Classes) Order 1987, and can be
defined as self-contained accommodation, usually with an emergency alarm system, communal facilities and a
resident warden. This includes all sheltered housing defined as 'Category 1, 2, 2.5 and 3' in accordance with the 1969
Ministry of Housing and Local Government Circular 82/69 and Local Authority Guidelines.
MOD Living-out personnel

This refers to staff that work in the assessed building and are not residents on the MOD site where the assessed
building is located.
Other building types

See the BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility for a definition of other building types 1, 2 and 3.
See the BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility for a definition of other building types 1, 2 and 3.
Other information
Table 34 Default occupancy rates by building type
Building type and function area Occupant density Building type and function area Occupant density
Business Secure Residential Institution
Office area (including reception 0.111 Cell 0.190

areas)
Food preparation area (staffed) 0.108 Reception 0.121
Small workshop/category lab 0.068 Hall/lecture theatre/assembly 0.183

space area
Industrial Eating/drinking area 0.141
Food preparation area 0.213 Workshop - small-scale 0.048
Industrial process area 0.022 Laundry 0.086
Laboratory 0.107 Classroom 0.183
Reception 0.110 Office and consulting areas 0.093
Warehouse storage 0.009 Food preparation area 0.111
Generic Office Area 0.108 Libraries, Museums, Galleries
Hospitals, care homes Reception 0.095
Reception 0.152 Food preparation area 0.176
Post Mortem Facility 0.050 Hall/lecture theatre/assembly 0.150

area
Food preparation area 0.161 Laboratory 0.098
Physiotherapy Studio 0.200 Workshop - small-scale 0.062
Bedroom Unit 0.105 Display and Public areas 0.150
Laundry 0.117 Generic Office Area 0.099
24-hours consulting/treatment 0.000 General Assembly and Leisure, Clubs, Theatres

areas
Assembly areas/halls 1.000 Dry sports hall 0.047
Hydrotherapy pool hall 0.100 Fitness Studio 0.132
Industrial process area 0.124 Fitness suite/gym 0.170
Laboratory 0.080 Food preparation area 0.131
Operating theatre 0.125 Hall/lecture theatre/assembly 0.175

area
Classroom 1.000 Auditoria 0.341
Diagnostic Imaging 0.100 Ice rink 0.225
Generic Ward 0.175 Performance area (stage) 0.049
Office and consulting areas 0.195 Public circulation areas 0.241
Primary Healthcare Reception 0.126
Reception 0.11 Sales area - general 0.102
Office and consulting areas 0.082 Swimming pool 0.163
Further and Higher Education Workshop - small-scale 0.067
Residents Bedroom 0.120 Generic Office Area 0.116
Classroom 0.203 Display area 0.001
Food preparation area 0.096 Community/day centres
Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area 0.202 Reception 0.108
Computer laboratory 0.231 Dry sports hall 0.047
Laboratory 0.106 Food preparation area 0.143
Laundry 0.105 Workshop - small scale 0.064
Reception 0.112 Hall/lecture theatre/assembly 0.169

area
Workshop - small scale 0.068 Office and consulting areas 0.106
Office and consulting areas 0.098 Other spaces/buildings
Hotels Data Centre 0.096
Bedroom 0.094 Server Room 0.096
Food preparation area 0.108 Heavy Plant Room 0.096
Reception 0.105
Generic Office Area 0.106
Notes for Table 34 of default occupancy rates:
1. The net floor area for each function must be multiplied by the equivalent occupant density to determine an overall
occupancy for the function area.
2. Not all potential building areas are listed, only those required to reflect estimated building occupancy for the building
type. For example, an office building may have a canteen but it will be the staff that predominantly uses the canteen. The
office staff numbers will be estimated using the default occupancy rate for the office area; therefore to include the
canteen would result in double counting of occupancy.
3. If a building type is not listed, occupancy rates for a similar building type or function area may be used.
4. The above occupancy rates have been sourced from the activity database of the Simplified Building Energy Model
(SBEM).
Tra 05 Travel plan

1 No
Aim
To recognise the consideration given to accommodating a range of travel options for building users, thereby encouraging
the reduction of reliance on forms of travel that have the highest environmental impact.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. A travel plan has been developed as part of the feasibility and design stages.
2. A site specific travel assessment/statement has been undertaken to ensure the travel plan is structured to meet the
needs of the particular site and covers the following (as a minimum):
a. Where relevant, existing travel patterns and opinions of existing building or site users towards cycling and walking so
that constraints and opportunities can be identified.
b. Travel patterns and transport impact of future building users.
c. Current local environment for walkers and cyclists (accounting for visitors who may be accompanied by young
children).
d. Disabled access (accounting for varying levels of disability and visual impairment).
e. Public transport links serving the site.
f. Current facilities for cyclists.
3. The travel plan includes a package of measures to encourage the use of sustainable modes of transport and movement
of people and goods during the building's operation and use.
4. If the occupier is known, they must be involved in the development of the travel plan and they must confirm that the
travel plan will be implemented post construction and be supported by the building's management in operation.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Applicable assessment criteria: Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the
assessment criteria building type and function apply.
■ Tra 05 Travel plan Transport
CN1.1 Shell and core A travel plan is still required even if the end user/occupier is not known, albeit that it
requirements may only be an interim travel plan or one that broadly addresses all the issues covered
in the assessment criteria. The developer must confirm that they will hand over a copy
of the travel plan to the building’s future tenant(s)/owner-occupier, so that it may
inform their own travel plan/strategy.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable This issue is not applicable to simple buildings assessments.

assessment criteria
General
CN3 Existing travel plan The credit can be awarded if the assessed building is part of a site that has an existing
See criterion 3 up to date organisational travel plan that is compliant with BREEAM, is applicable to all
building users (in existing and assessed new buildings) and accounts for the additional
travel resulting from users of the new building.
CN3.1 Travel assessment A travel assessment (also referred to as transport assessment) will be required where
or a proposed development is likely to have significant transport and related
Statement environmental impacts. The study area for a transport assessment related to a
see criterion 2 proposed development should be determined in discussions between the developer
and appropriate authorities. A transport statement is required where the proposed
development is not likely to have a significant transport impact. A transport
statement is suitable to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM when the proposed
development is expected to generate relatively low numbers of trips or traffic flows,
with minor transport impacts. For further guidance refer to:
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/guidance-on-transport-assessment
CN3.2 Travel plan The following measures could be considered as part of the travel plan for
measures development:
See criterion 3
Providing parking priority spaces for car sharers
Providing dedicated and convenient cycle storage and changing facilities
Lighting, landscaping and shelter to make pedestrian and public transport
waiting areas pleasant
Negotiating improved bus services, i.e. altering bus routes or offering
discounts
Restricting and/or charging for car parking
Criteria for lobby areas where information about public transport or car
sharing can be made available.
Pedestrian and cycle friendly (for all types of user regardless of the level of
mobility or visual impairment) via the provision of cycle lanes, safe crossing
points, direct routes, appropriate tactile surfaces, well-lit and signposted to
other amenities, public transport nodes and adjoining off-site pedestrian
and cycle routes
Providing suitable taxi drop-off/waiting areas
Ensuring that rural buildings are located with appropriate transport access to
ensure that they adequately serve the local community (where procured to
do so e.g. community centre).
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Travel plan
A travel plan is a strategy for managing all travel and transport within an organisation, principally to increase choice
and reduce reliance on the car by seeking to improve access to a site or development by sustainable modes of
transport. A travel plan contains both physical and behavioural measures to increase travel choices and reduce
reliance on single occupancy car travel.
Building users
Where the term 'building users' is used, this refers to the following, as appropriate to building type:
1. Staff (commuter journeys and business travel)
2. Pupils/students
3. Visitors
4. Patients
5. Customers
6. Community users
7. Personnel who make deliveries/collections to and from the development
8. Contractors/service providers, who regularly work at and access the building/development
9. Residents of multi-residential buildings.
Other information
None.
Water ■ Water
Water
Category overview
Fully fitted 7% Shell only 4% Shell and core 7.5% Wat 01, Wat 02
Summary
This category encourages sustainable water use in the operation of the building and its site. Issues in this section focus on
identifying means of reducing potable water consumption (internal and external) over the life time of the building and
minimising losses through leakage.

ID
Wat Water 5 Reducing the demand for potable water through the provision of
01 consumption efficient sanitary fitting, rainwater collection and water recycling
systems
Wat Water 1 Specification of a water meter/s on the mains water supply to

02 monitoring encourage water consumption management and monitoring to
reduce the impacts of inefficiencies and leakage.
Wat Water leak 2 Recognition of leak detection systems capable of detecting a major
03 detection water leak on the mains water supply
Flow control devices that regulate the supply of water to each WC
area/facility to reduce water wastage.
Wat Water 1 Identify a building's total unregulated water demand and mitigate or
04 efficient reduce consumption through systems and/or processes.
equipment
Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Wat 01 Water consumption

5 Yes
Aim
To reduce the consumption of potable water for sanitary use in new buildings from all sources through the use of water
efficient components and water recycling systems.
Assessment criteria
Up to five credits
1. An assessment of the efficiency of the building’s domestic water-consuming components is undertaken using the
BREEAM Wat 01 calculator.
2. The water consumption (L/person/day) for the assessed building is compared against a baseline performance and
BREEAM credits awarded based upon Table 35 .
3. The efficiency of the following ‘domestic scale’ water-consuming components must be included in the assessment
(where specified):
a. WCs
b. Urinals
c. Taps (wash hand basins and where specified kitchen taps and waste disposal unit)
d. Showers
e. Baths
f. Dishwashers (domestic and commercial sized)
g. Washing machines (domestic and commercial or industrial sized).
The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building types and activity areas for which the above components must be
assessed.
4. Where a greywater and/or rainwater system is specified, its yield (L/person/day) is used to off-set non-potable water
demand from components that would otherwise be supplied using potable water.
5. Any greywater systems must be specified and installed in compliance with BS 8525-1:2010 Greywater Systems - Part 1
Code of Practice1. Any rainwater systems must be specified and installed in compliance with BS 8515:2009+A1:2013
Rainwater Harvesting Systems - Code of practice2.
6. Healthcare and prison buildings: refer to the relevant compliance note for additional criteria regarding the specification
of particular water-consuming component controls.

Table 35 BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building water consumption
% improvement No. of BREEAM credits
12.5% 1
■ Wat 01 Water consumption Water
% improvement No. of BREEAM credits
25% 2
40% 3
50% 4
55% 5
65% Exemplary performance
Note: for some building types an alternative approach to compliance must be used to award credits (for further information
please refer to the Methodology section, below, and the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator)
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable All criteria

assessment Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable
criteria Option 2 - Shell and core: This issue is applicable subject to CN1.1 below
options.
CN1.1 Shell and core Option 2 - Shell and core

assessments Compliance for this issue must be assessed on the basis of all water-consuming
components and greywater and/or rainwater systems specified and installed by the
developer. Components or systems listed in the criteria and sited within tenant areas
that are not being specified by the developer, but will be specified by the tenant, do
not need to be assessed for a shell and core project.
CN1.2 Minimum Option 1-Shell only: the minimum standard will not be applied to shell only
standard not met assessments.
Option 2 -Shell and core: where components are not being specified and installed by
the developer but will be specified by the tenant, the minimum standard for this issue
will not prevent the assessment from achieving a BREEAM rating.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 No fittings Where a project under assessment contains none of the specified components, the
present performance specification for components provided in facilities in an adjacent and
accessible building must be used in the calculation, i.e. those facilities most likely to be
used by the occupants and visitors of the assessed building.
This rule also applies where a project under assessment consists solely of an extension
to an existing building, i.e. where the extended building contains no new sanitary
facilities because there are facilities present within the existing building.
Building specific
CN4 Healthcare In addition to meeting the criteria defined above, the flushing control for each WC or
Components in urinal in a healthcare facility must be suitable for operation by patients with frail or
healthcare infirm hands or activated by electronic sensors.
facilities Components in clinical areas may be omitted from the calculation. For the purpose of
See criterion 6. this compliance note ‘clinical areas’ refers to all areas where a scrub-up trough, clinical
sink or clinical basin is installed. This is not an exhaustive list and guidance should always
be sought from the appropriate professional, such as a health authorities Infection
control officer or a client infection control representative or equivalent, to ascertain
areas of exemption specific to infection control and other considerations.
Although exempt, HTM07-04 contains guidance on water savings from medical-
related activities. Furthermore, in some cases, the use of water efficient fittings and
appliances may not be appropriate to the needs of the patient, and inappropriate
specification may adversely affect the incidence and propagation of infections. In such
instances, the assessor will need to confirm with BRE Global whether components
from the relevant building areas are exempt. The design team should also consult NHS
guidelines concerning appropriate selection of sanitary fittings and fixtures and the
control of Legionella.
CN4.1 Prisons In addition to meeting the criteria defined above, the following requirements apply:
Components in Where sanitary components are specified within a prison cell, a volume controller must
prison cells on HM be specified on the individual fittings or water supply to each cell. A volume controller
Prison is an automatic control device to turn off the water supply once the maximum pre-set
developments volume is reached within a defined period.
See criterion 6.
Methodology
A non-domestic building’s water efficient performance is determined using the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator in one of two ways,
using either the standard approach (common building types) or alternative (other building type) approach. Each approach is
summarised below.
Standard Wat01 method

The standard BREEAM method determines water efficiency (measured in L/person/day and m3 /person/yr) for a building
based on the buildings actual component specification and default usage patterns for the building type and its activity areas.
This modelled output is compared with the same output for a baseline component specification and the percentage
improvement used to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved.
The baseline component specification is equivalent to the water efficiency of industry standard components (see Table 36 ),
steered by the minimum levels required by the Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations. The BREEAM percentage
improvement benchmarks have then been determined based on progressively more efficient standards for water-
consuming components and, for the higher levels of performance, the specification of greywater and rainwater systems.
The standard approach is the default method for calculating water efficiency of a BREEAM-assessed building and is that used
for most of the common building types, where usage data are available. For buildings types where usage data are not
available, and therefore the standard approach of determining performance cannot be used, an alternative approach to
compliance must be used (described below). Refer to the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for the current list of building types which
can be assessed using the standard approach.
Alternative Wat01 method

Where it is not possible to use the standard approach to determine the buildings water consumption total (L/person/day) the
assessment can be completed on an elemental basis, as follows:
1. Using the list of applicable domestic scale water-consuming components (see criterion 3), determine those that are
specified/present in the assessed building.
2. Compare the actual specification for each component type with the table of water efficient consumption levels by
component type (Table 36 ) to determine the level of performance for each type. Note that the volumes quoted are
maximums for that level and the % WC or urinal flushing demand is a minimum for that level.
3. Define each component’s level of performance in the 'Other building type calculator' worksheet of the BREEAM Wat 01
calculator.
a. For the alternative approach, the calculator applies a building type specific weighting to each component level to
reflect its ‘in-use’ consumption relative to the other components present. A component with high ‘in-use’ water
consumption therefore has a larger weighting than one with lower ‘in-use’ consumption and contributes relatively
more to the building’s overall level of performance under this BREEAM issue.
b. The weightings are derived from data on actual water consumption per day from non-domestic buildings, sourced
from BNWAT22 3. They can be found in the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator.
4. Based upon the performance categorisation of each component type and the component weighting, the calculator will
determine an overall level of performance and award the relevant number of BREEAM credits as follows:
Greywater/rainwater level achieved
Overall component level _ 4 5
Baseline 0 credits 1 credit 2 credits
Level 1 1 credit 2 credits 3 credits
Level 2 2 credits 3 credits 4 credits
Level 3 or 4 3 credits 4 credits 5 credits
Level 5 4 credits 5 credits 5 credits
Note:
1. An innovation credit for exemplary level performance can be awarded where the component
specification achieves level 5 and > 95% of WC or urinal flushing demand is met using recycled non-
potable water.
2. Due to the use of the weightings, the overall component level achieved will not necessarily be a whole
number, e.g component level 4. Where this is the case the methodology will always round down to the
nearest component level and therefore BREEAM credit(s) level, e.g. if the component specification
achieved is 3.6 credits, the actual number of credits awarded is 3 credits (the methodology will not
round up to 4 credits because the performance specification for 4 credits has not been achieved).
3. Where the assessed building development has multiple specifications for the same water-consuming
component type, the number of fittings and component level achieved for each specification can be
entered in the 'Other building type calculator'. Using this information, the calculator will determine the
building’s aggregated performance level for that component type.
Please note: while attempts have been made to align the benchmarking of both methodologies described above, they do
determine performance in different ways. The number of BREEAM credits awarded by each method could therefore differ for
the same water component specification. This could lead to variation in the credits achieved when applying BREEAM New
Construction to a number of different building types that form a part of the same overall development.
Component type
Table 36 outlines the standards, by component type, used to define the performance levels set in BREEAM. These defined
levels of efficiency have been steered by a range of published sources of information (see references4) and therefore reflect
robust levels of typical, good, best and exemplary practice.
Table 36 Water efficient consumption levels by component type
Component Performance levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level)
Base 1 2 3 4 5 Unit
WC 6 5 4.5 4 3.75 3 Effective flush volume (litres)
Wash hand basin 12 9 7.50 4.50 3.75 3 litres/min

taps
Showers 14 10 8 6 4 3.50 litres/min
Baths 200 180 160 140 120 100 litres
Urinal 7.50 6 3 1.50 0.75 0 litres/bowl/hour

(2 or more urinals)
Urinal 10 8 4 2 1 0 litres/bowl/hour
(1 urinal only)
Greywater/ 0% 0% 0% 25% 50% 75% % of WC/urinal flushing demand met

rainwater system using recycled non-potable water
Kitchen tap: 12 10 7.50 5 5 5 litres/min

kitchenette
Component Performance levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level)
Base 1 2 3 4 5 Unit
Kitchen taps: 10.30 9 8.30 7.30 6.30 6 litres/min

restaurant (pre-
rinse nozzles only)
Domestic sized 17 13 13 12 11 10 litres/cycle

dishwashers
Domestic sized 90 60 50 40 35 30 litres/use

washing machines
Waste disposal unit 17 17 0 0 0 0 litres/min
Commercial sized 8 7 6 5 4 3 litres/rack

dishwashers
Commercial/ 14 12 10 7.50 5 4.50 litres/kg

Industrial sized
washing machines
Please note that specifying components for a building in accordance with the above levels will result, in most cases, in the
corresponding number of BREEAM credits being achieved. However, please bear in mind that the component specifications
above are akin to thresholds between each level. Therefore caution should be taken when defining a component specification
for a BREEAM-assessed building using exactly the same levels as the threshold levels. It is recommended that, where Wat 01
BREEAM credits are being targeted, the performance of a particular building’s component specification is verified using the
BREEAM Wat 01 calculator before committing to a particular specification and ordering/installing components. This will
provide greater assurance that the component specification achieves the targeted number of BREEAM credits.
Water-consuming components - data requirements

Table 37 defines for each component type the appropriate data that will need to be collected from manufacturers’ product
information to complete the assessment
Domestic Data requirements

component
WCs Actual maximum or, where dual flush, effective flush volume in litres/use.
Urinals Flush volume in litres/use for single use flush urinals. For cistern fed systems, the flushing
frequency/hour and cistern capacity in litres.
Taps Flow rate of each tap, at full flow rate in litres per minute measured at a dynamic pressure:
For high pressure (Type 1) taps - 3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) OR
For low pressure (Type 2) taps - 0.1 ± 0.02 bar (0.01 ± 0.002 MPa)
(BS EN 200:2008, sanitary tapware, single taps and combination taps for supply systems of type
1 and 2. General technical specifications)
This includes any reductions achieved with flow restrictions.
Showers Flow rate of each shower at the outlet using cold water (T 30˚C), in litres per minute measured at
a dynamic pressure
3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) for high pressure (Type 1) supply systems
OR
0.1 ± 0.05 bar (0.01 ± 0.005 MPa) for low pressure (Type 2) supply systems
(BS EN 1112:2008, Sanitary tapware. Shower outlets for sanitary tapware for water supply
systems type 1 and 2. General technical specifications).
Kitchen taps Maximum flow rate litres/minute.
Baths Capacity to overflow in litres. Taps on baths should not be included in the calculation, as the water
consumption from bath taps is taken account of in the use factor for baths. The calculation of
water consumption for baths will assume 40% of the capacity to the overflow. This is to reflect
that:
a. Users tend not to fill the bath to overflow; and
b. The displacement effect the user has on the actual volume of water required for a bath.
Dishwasher Litres/cycle for domestic applications and/or appliances or litres/rack for commercial applications
and/or appliances.
Washing machine Litres/use for domestic applications (for a typical wash cycle) and/or appliances or litres/kg for
commercial applications and/or appliances, e.g. in hotels.
Waste disposal unit Flow rate in litres/minute.
Unspecified water-consuming components

As the methodology and BREEAM credits for water efficiency compare the buildings modelled water consumption
performance against the performance of a baseline specification for the same component types, where a component type is
not specified it is not accounted for in the methodology, i.e. the component is excluded from both the proposed and baseline
building. Therefore no benefit is gained in terms of BREEAM performance, by deciding not to specify a particular component.
However, the methodology will reflect the reduction in overall water consumption (litres/person/day) for the building, as a
result of not specifying a particular component.
Buildings with a greywater and rainwater system(s)

The following information is required where a greywater and/or rainwater system is specified:
Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 ‘intermediate approach’:
1. Collection area (m²)

2. Yield co-efficient (%)
3. Hydraulic filter efficiency (%)
4. Rainfall (average mm/year).
Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 ‘detailed approach’:
1. Daily rainfall collection (litres)
Greywater: in accordance with BS 8525 :
1. Manufacturer or system designer details.

2. The percentage volume of waste water collected (and reused) from the following (where relevant); wash hand basins,
showers, kitchen basins, dishwashers, baths, washing machines and sources of waste water from non-domestic
components.
Where greywater and/or rainwater systems are specified, a minimum level of component efficiency must be achieved to
award 4 or 5 BREEAM credits and the exemplary level credit. This is to avoid awarding a higher number of BREEAM credits
where performance from less efficient fittings is off-set by the specification of a greywater and/or rainwater collection
system.
The intention behind this is to ensure demand reduction is prioritised before offsetting consumption. Where a
greywater/rainwater system is specified/installed, the component specification must achieve a percentage reduction in water
consumption (over the baseline specification) equivalent to that required for 2 credits, i.e. a 25% improvement. Where this
level is achieved, all of the total water demand met by greywater/rainwater sources can contribute to the overall percentage
improvement required to achieve BREEAM credits. If it is not achieved, the percentage of greywater/rainwater allowable will
be equivalent to the percentage improvement in water consumption achieved for the component specification, i.e.
percentage improvement on baseline performance.
For example, if a 20% improvement only is achieved, and therefore the building is not meeting the 25% requirement, only
20% of the water demand met via greywater/rainwater sources can be used to off-set water consumption from the micro
components. This minimum requirement does not apply where only 1, 2 or 3 credits are sought or where no
greywater/rainwater system is specified, i.e. percentage improvement is based solely on the water efficiency of the micro-
component specification.
BRE Global may allow some exemptions to this rule in instances where a particular fitting type requires a high flow rate due to
specialised end user requirements, and its specification prevents compliance with 25% improvement.
Buildings with a mixture of different functional areas

For the majority of buildings using the standard Wat 01 method, the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building type and
range of different water-consuming activity areas within that building; for example, a retail development with sales area and
goods storage or an office that includes a canteen and gym. However, where carrying out a single assessment of a
building/development which consists of a diverse mix of activity areas/building types, all of which can be assessed separately
within the calculator, the following applies:
Determine the building’s total water consumption performance by carrying out separate assessments for each relevant
activity area/building type. On completion of each assessment, the assessor will need to determine the percentage
improvement as follows:
I = 100 × 1 − 1Act 1Occ

(T × T ) + ... + (T nAct × T nOcc) 
 (T1Base × T1Occ) + ... + (T nBase × T nOcc) 

Where:
I = Overall improvement (%)

TnAct = the modelled net water consumption (L/person/day) for each building type
TnBase = the modelled baseline water consumption for the corresponding building type
TnOcc = the total default occupancy rate for the corresponding building type.
Where greywater/rainwater systems are specified, the assessor should take care to avoid unintended double counting of the
yield from such systems and using it to off-set demand for each activity area/building type.
Fixed water use

The BREEAM water efficiency calculation includes an allowance for fixed water use. This includes water consumption for vessel
filling (for building users drinking water), cleaning in kitchens and food preparation in buildings with a catering facility. Fixed
uses are included to provide greater accuracy in reporting of the building’s overall estimated water consumption. As these
uses are fixed for both actual and baseline building models, their totals do not influence the achievement of BREEAM credits.
Other permissible component demand for non-potable water

The focus of this BREEAM issue is the performance of the building's permanent domestic scale water-consuming
components. Where a grey water or rainwater system is specified, the yield from the system should be prioritised for such
uses, i.e. WC or urinal flushing. However, where the building demonstrates that it has other consistent (i.e. daily) and equivalent
levels of non-potable water demand, and such demands are intrinsic to the building’s operation, then it is permissible for the
demand from these non-domestic uses to be counted, i.e. the demand for rainwater/greywater yield from such
systems/components can be used as well as, or instead of non-potable water demand from the building's WC/urinal
components. Examples of consistent and intrinsic demands could include laundry use in hotels/multi-residential developments
or horticultural uses in garden centres, botanical gardens and golf courses. Demand for general landscaping and ornamental
planting irrigation are not considered as equivalent/intrinsic by BREEAM.
Other permissible sources of non-potable water

The methodology allows for the collection and recycling of non-potable water from the relevant components listed in the
criteria i.e. taps, showers, baths and dishwashers or washing machines. In addition, where non-potable water is collected from
a non domestic component or source that is intrinsic to the building, then the amount collected can be accounted for in the
methodology. This could include for example wastewater from active hygiene flushing, i.e. a regular hygiene flushing
programme to minimise poor water quality in a potable cold or hot water system. In order for the method to account for this
total, the design team will need to confirm to the assessor the yield from the component/system (in litres) and the frequency
of that yield (in days), i.e. if once a week, the frequency would be seven days.
Evidence
1 A completed copy of the BREEAM Wat 01 As per interim design stage

calculator
1 Documentary evidence supporting the As per interim design stage

BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for New Non-Domestic Buildings

The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator is a method for the assessment of water efficiency in most common types of new
non-domestic buildings. The calculator assesses the contribution that each internal domestic scale water-consuming
component (as listed in the criteria) has on whole building water consumption. The calculator and accompanying
guidance on its application is available separately from this Scheme Document.
Please note; the calculator is a compliance tool and not a design tool for water demand and drainage systems. The
tool uses default usage and occupancy rates to provide a benchmark of the typical consumption given the specified
fittings (in L/person/day and m3 /person/year) and their impact on the building's overall water efficiency. Due to the
impacts and differences of actual user behaviour and occupancy rates the results of the method will not reflect
directly the actual water use during building operation. The results from the methodology should, therefore, not be
used for the purpose of comparison with or prediction of actual water consumption from a non-domestic building.
Domestic scale components

Domestic scale components include water consumed (potable and non-potable) by internal building components
including kitchen taps, wash hand basin taps, baths, showers and dishwashers, WCs, urinals, washing machines and
waste disposal units.
Effective flush volume

The effective flush volume of a single flush WC is the volume of water used for one flush.
The effective flush volume of a dual flush WC is the ratio of full flush to reduced flush. This is taken to be one full flush
for every three reduced flushes for non-domestic buildings and one full flush for every two reduced flushes in
domestic (residential) buildings/areas. The effective flush volume can therefore be calculated as follows, using a 6/4
litre dual flush volume WC as an example:
Non-domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 3)}/4 = 4.5 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC)
Domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 2)}/3 = 4.67 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC)
The differing ratio between non-domestic and domestic buildings reflects the different patterns of user behaviour
between these building types.
Greywater recycling
The appropriate collection, treatment and storage of domestic wastewater (which is defined as that discharged
from kitchens, baths or showers, laundry rooms and similar) to meet a non-potable water demand in the building e.g.
WC flushing, or other permissible non-potable use on the site of the assessed building.
Potable water
Water suitable for human consumption that meets the requirements of Section 67 (Standards of Wholesomeness) of
the Water Industry Act 1991 5 is referred to as 'wholesome water'.
Non-potable water
Any water other than potable water, also referred to as unwholesome water (BS 8525, see references).
Rainwater recycling
The appropriate collection and storage of rainwater run-off from hard outdoor surfaces to meet a non-potable
water demand in the building e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non-potable use on the site of the assessed
building.
Clinical areas
Other Information
None
1BS 8525-1:2010, Greywater systems – Part 1 code of practice, BSi, 2010.
2BS 8515:2009+A1:2013, Rainwater harvesting systems – Code of practice, BSi, 2009.
3BNWAT22: Domestic water consumption in domestic and non-domestic properties (version 1.1). Market Transformation
Programme, 2007.
4AECB Water Standards: Delivering buildings with excellent water and energy performance, vol 2 The water standards,
technical background report (version 1), Grant, Thorton, AECB, 2009.
BNWAT22: Domestic water consumption in domestic and non-domestic properties (version 1.1). Market Transformation
Programme, 2007.
BNWAT07: Baths - water efficiency performance tests (version 2.0). Market Transformation Programme, 2007.
BNWAT23: Reliability of information on water consumption of appliances (version 1), Market Transformation Programme,
2007.
BS6465-3:2006, Sanitary installations – Part 3: Code of practice for the selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary and
associated appliances.
BSi, 2006.CIRIA W10, Key Performance Indicators for water use in hotels, Rachel Waggett and Catherine Arotsky, CIRIA, 2006.
CIRIA W11, Key Performance Indicators for water use in offices, Waggett, Arotsky, CIRIA, 2006.
Conserving water in buildings, a practical guide. Environment Agency, 2007.
Enhanced Capital Allowance Water Technology List criteria: www.eca-water.gov.uk
Report by Entec UK Ltd for CLG: Research to Assess the Costs and Benefits of Improvements to the Water Efficiency of New
Non-household Buildings, Final Report, Oct 2009.
SD129: Certification and Listing of Low Flush WC appliances. BRE Global, 2008
SD174: Certification and Listing of Water Efficient Terminal Fittings. BRE Global, 2008.
SD175: Certification and Listing of Water Efficient Baths. BRE Global, 2008.
The Building Regulations 2000, Part G: Sanitation, hot water safety and water efficiency (2010 edition). HM Government.
Waterwise: www.waterwise.org.uk
Water Efficiency Calculator for New Dwellings. Communities and Local Government, 2009.
Water efficient product labelling scheme: www.water-efficiencylabel.org.uk
Water Supply (water fittings) Regulations 1999, DEFRA.
Sustainable Products 2006: Policy Analysis and Projections, Market Transformation Programme, Defra, 2006.
Water UK - Macerators, the impact on sewers: www.water.org.uk/home/policy/positions/waste-macerators-position-paper
Water Efficient Buildings, water and planning, guidance for planners http://www.water efficient-buildings.org.uk/
5Great Britain, The Water Industry Act 1991. London: The Stationery Office
■ Wat 02 Water monitoring Water
Wat 02 Water monitoring

1 Yes (criterion 1 only)
Aim
To ensure water consumption can be monitored and managed, and therefore encourage reductions.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. The specification of a water meter on the mains water supply to each building; this includes instances where water is
supplied via a borehole or other private source.
2. Water-consuming plant or building areas, consuming 10% or more of the building’s total water demand, are either
fitted with easily accessible sub-meters or have water monitoring equipment integral to the plant or area (see
Compliance notes).
3. Each meter (main and sub) has a pulsed or other open protocol communication output to enable connection to an
appropriate utility monitoring and management system, e.g. a building management system (BMS), for the monitoring
of water consumption (see Relevant definitions).
4. If the site on which the building is located has an existing BMS, managed by the same occupier/owner (as the new
building), the pulsed/digital water meter(s) for the new building must be connected to the existing BMS.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Criteria 1, 3 and 4

assessment Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
criteria
Criterion 2
Option 1 - Shell only: This criterion is not applicable.
Option 2 - Shell and core: This criterion is applicable.
options.
CN1.1 Shell and core Option 2 - Shell and core

assessments Compliance with criterion 2 must be demonstrated for water-consuming
plant/building areas identifiable by the developer (also see Relevant definitions).
Water-consuming plant/building areas to be added/installed by the tenant do not
need to be assessed for this issue.
CN1.2 Minimum Option 1 - Shell only: the minimum standard will not be applied to shell only
standard for this assessments.
issue Option 2 - Shell and core: the minimum standard is applicable, however the assessor
may, subject to their justification and evidence from the design team, seek for this to
be reviewed on a ‘case by case’ basis.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Criterion 4 is not applicable. All other criteria relevant to the building type and function
assessment apply.
criteria
General
■ Wat 02 Water monitoring Water
CN3 Water-consuming As a minimum, this includes the following (where present):

plant or building 1. Buildings with a swimming pool and its associated changing facilities (toilets,
area showers etc.).
See criterion 2. 2. On sites with multiple units or buildings, e.g. shopping centres, industrial units,
retail parks etc. separate sub meters are fitted on the water supply to the
following areas (where present):
Each individual unit supplied with water
Common areas (covering the supply to toilet blocks)
Service areas (covering the supply to outlets within storage, delivery,
waste disposal areas etc.)
Ancillary/separate buildings to the main development with water
supply.
3. Laboratory: in any building with a laboratory or containing laboratories, a
separate water meter is fitted on the water supply to any process or cooling
loop for ‘plumbed-in’ laboratory process equipment.
4. Healthcare: for sites with multiple departments, e.g. large health centres or acute
hospitals, separate sub-meters are fitted on the supply to the following areas
where present:
Staff and public areas
Clinical areas and wards
Letting areas: on the water supply to each tenant unit
Laundries
Main production kitchen
Hydrotherapy pools
Laboratories
CSSD/HSDU, pathology, pharmacy, mortuary and any other major
process water use
Supplementary supply of water from a cold water tank .
CN3.1 10% of water The sub-meter requirement does not necessarily apply in the following cases, where
demand the assessor confirms there will be no additional monitoring benefit resulting from
See criterion 2. their installation:
1. Where a building has only one or two small sources of water demand (e.g. an
office with sanitary fittings and a small kitchen)
2. Where the building has two sources of water demand, one significantly larger
than the other, and the water consumption for the larger demand is likely to
mask the smaller demand.
CN3.2 Extensions to If no new water supply is being installed because the occupants of the extended
existing buildings building will use the facilities in, and therefore water supply to the existing building,
See criterion 4. then the following must be provided in the existing building;
1. A water meter for the mains water supply
2. Sub-meters for large water-consuming plant or facilities, e.g. evaporative
cooling, swimming pool etc. (where present).
The meters provided must have a pulsed output or connection to existing BMS in
accordance with the assessment criteria.
CN3.3 No water supply If there is no installed water supply to the assessed building because there will be no
to the building or water-consuming fittings in the building, then in such instances the guidance given in
unit the above Compliance note for extensions to existing building applies.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Staff areas
Clinical areas
Patient areas
CSSD
Central Sterile Supply Department
HSDU
Hospital Sterilisation and Disinfection Unit
Meter outputs
Examples include pulsed outputs and other open protocol communication outputs, such as Modbus.
Utility monitoring and management system

Examples include automatic meter reading systems (AMR) and building energy management systems (BEMS).
Automatic monitoring and targeting (aM&T) is an example of a management tool that includes automatic meter
reading and data management.
Other information
None.
■ Wat 03 Water leak detection Water
Wat 03 Water leak detection

2 No
Aim
To reduce the impact of water leaks that may otherwise go undetected.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Leak detection system

1. A leak detection system which is capable of detecting a major water leak on the mains water supply within the building
and between the building and the utilities water meter is installed. The leak detection system must be:
a. A permanent automated water leak detection system that alerts the building occupants to the leak OR an inbuilt
automated diagnostic procedure for detecting leaks is installed.
b. Activated when the flow of water passing through the water meter/data logger is at a flow rate above a pre-set
maximum for a pre-set period of time.
c. Able to identify different flow and therefore leakage rates, e.g. continuous, high and/or low level, over set time
periods.
d. Programmable to suit the owner/occupiers’ water consumption criteria.
e. Where applicable, designed to avoid false alarms caused by normal operation of large water-consuming plant such
as chillers.
One credit - Flow control devices

2. Flow control devices that regulate the supply of water to each WC area/facility according to demand are installed (and
therefore minimise water leaks and wastage from sanitary fittings).

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Leak detection system, criterion 1

criteria
Flow control devices, criterion 2
Option 1 - Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment
option.
options.
CN1.1 WC Areas or Option 2 - Shell and core:

facilities The water supplies to WC areas or facilities must be assessed as per criterion 2
regardless of whether or not the WC areas or facilities are fitted out.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Leak detection systems (1 credit)

assessment 1. Criterion 1 is applicable.
criteria OR
2. Install automatic excess flow valves at relevant locations to protect property
from damage caused by leaking pipes or tanks.
Flow control devices (1 credit)
3. Criterion 2 is applicable.
CN2.1 Automatic excess An automatic excess flow valve acts as a flow switch (‘fuse’) to automatically stop the
flow valve flow of water and prevent uncontrolled release when the flow of water exceeds a
See point 2. predetermined rate (such as may occur in the event of failure of water supply pipes
and tanks).
General
CN3 Leakage rates This issue does not specify what the high and low level leakage rates should be,
See criterion 1. however the leak detection equipment installed must have the flexibility to distinguish
between different flow rates to enable it to be programmed to suit the building type
and owner/occupier’s usage patterns.
CN3.1 System criteria It is anticipated that the leak detection credit will usually be achieved by installing a
See criterion 1. system which detects higher than normal flow rates at meters and/or sub-meters. It
does not necessarily require a system that directly detects water leakage along part or
the whole length of the water supply system.
CN3.2 Water utilities Where there is a water utilities meter at the site/building boundary, it may be necessary
meters to install a separate flow meter (or alternative measurement system) just after the
See criterion 1. utility meter to detect leaks; however, if the water utility company agrees to some
form of leak detection being installed on their meter, this would also be acceptable.
■ Wat 03 Water leak detection Water
CN3.3 Flow control The following could be considered as types of flow control devices:
devices
See criterion 2. A time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch off the water
supply after a predetermined interval
A programmed time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch
water on and/or off at predetermined times.
A volume controller, i.e. an automatic control device to turn off the water
supply once the maximum pre-set volume is reached
A presence detector and controller, i.e. an automatic device detecting
occupancy or movement in an area to switch water on and turn it off when
the presence is removed
A central control unit, i.e. a dedicated computer-based control unit for an
overall managed water control system, utilising some or all of the types of
control elements listed above.
CN3.4 Flow control Flow control systems may control combined WC areas, such as male and female
systems toilets within a core; they are not required for each individual sanitary appliance. The
See criterion 2. criteria are set to encourage the isolation of the water supply to each WC block when it
is not being used.
CN3.5 Single WCs The flow control criteria for this issue do apply to facilities which have only a single WC
See criterion 2. (potentially within smaller or low occupancy buildings). In these instances shut-off
could be provided via the same switch that controls the lighting (whether proximity
detection or a manual switch).
CN3.6 No water supply These credits are still assessed where there are no installed fittings and therefore no
to the building water supply to the building. In these instances the facilities likely to be used by the
or/unit future occupants of the assessed building must meet the criteria, e.g. those facilities
See criteria 1 and within the nearest accessible building.
2.
CN3.7 Extensions to If the water supply to the new extension is via the existing building then the water
existing buildings supply to the existing building must be assessed against the criteria of this issue.
See criteria 1 and
2.
CN4 Clinical areas in The criteria for this issue do not apply to toilet facilities in clinical areas.
healthcare
buildings
CN4.1 Multi-residential The credit for the specification of flow control devices in WC areas/facilities does not
buildings and apply to ensuite facilities in residential areas e.g. ensuite in individual private bedrooms
guest and a single bathroom for a collection of individual private bedrooms in halls of
accommodation: residence, key worker accommodation or sheltered accommodation. Where only
flow control ensuite facilities are provided, the credit can be awarded by default. The credit and
specification. See criteria are however applicable to buildings with guest bedrooms with ensuite
criterion 2. facilities, e.g. hotel rooms, and communal WC areas/facilities, e.g. communal WC
facilities in hotels/hostels and care homes.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the ‘BREEAM Evidential Requirements’
section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria
Clinical areas
Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort.
Other information
None.
■ Wat 04 Water efficient equipment Water
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment

1 No
Aim
To reduce unregulated water consumption by encouraging specification of water efficient equipment.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. The design team has identified all unregulated water demands that could be realistically mitigated or reduced.
2. System(s) or processes have been identified to reduce the unregulated water demand, and demonstrate, through
either good practice design or specification, a meaningful reduction in the total water demand of the building.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Criteria 1 and 2

options.
CN1.1 Only irrigation Where the only unregulated water demand comes from an irrigation system
systems present specified/installed by the developer, then this system must be used for the purpose
See criterion 1. of assessing compliance.
CN1.2 No irrigation Where no irrigation systems are specified, and therefore there are no unregulated
systems present water demands for the building, this issue can be awarded by default for these shell
See criterion 1. and core assessment options.
Simple buildings

assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Reducing BREEAM does not prescriptively define all potential means or solutions for reducing
unregulated water unregulated water consumption. The design team needs to demonstrate to the
consumption assessor that they have identified key areas of water consumption in the building and
See criterion 2. that a reduction in unregulated water consumption has been achieved using existing
'tried and tested' solutions or new innovative solutions relevant to the building and its
functional requirements. The following are some examples of solutions deemed to
satisfy compliance for a number of different building types or functions (where the
unregulated water demand for that function is one of/the significant contributor in
the building):
1. Drip-fed subsurface irrigation incorporating soil moisture sensors. The irrigation
control should be zoned to permit variable irrigation to different planting
assemblages.
2. Reclaimed/recovered water from a rainwater collection or waste water
recovery system, with appropriate storage, i.e. greywater collection from
building functions or processes that use potable water, e.g. vehicle wash,
training water in fire stations, sanitary facilities, irrigation etc. This should take
into account the Government Buying Standards1 where appropriate to the
building type.
3. External landscaping and planting that relies solely on precipitation, during all
seasons of the year.
4. All planting specified is restricted to contextually appropriate species that thrive
without irrigation and will continue to do so in those conditions likely as a result
of climate change, i.e. typically warmer and drier conditions.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
■ Wat 04 Water efficient equipment Water
Unregulated water
For the purposes of this BREEAM Issue, unregulated water is water not used for domestic purposes and is therefore
not regulated by Building Regulations or other relevant legislation. This includes, but is not limited to, equipment used
for irrigation and, for the relevant building types, vehicle wash plant/equipment.
Other information
None.
1http://sd.defra.gov.uk/advice/public/buying/products/water-using-products/
Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Materials
Category overview
Fully fitted 13.5% Shell only 17.5% Shell and core 14.5% Mat 03
Summary
This category encourages steps taken to reduce the impact of construction materials through design, construction,
maintenance and repair. Issues in this section focus on the procurement of materials that are sourced in a responsible way and
have a low embodied impact over their life including extraction, processing and manufacture and recycling.

Mat 01 Life cycle Up to 6 Reductions in the building’s environmental life cycle impacts through
impacts assessment of the main building elements.
Mat 02 Hard 1 Reductions in the environmental life cycle impacts through assessment
landscaping of the hard landscaping and boundary protection elements.
and
boundary
protection
Mat 03 Responsible 4 Materials sourced in accordance with a sustainable procurement plan.

sourcing of Key building materials are responsibly sourced to reduce
materials environmental and socio-economic impacts.
Mat 04 Insulation 1 Recognition of the use of thermal insulation which has a low
embodied environmental impact relative to its thermal properties.
Mat 05 Designing for 1 The building incorporates measures to reduce impacts associated
durability and with damage and wear-and-tear.
resilience Relevant building elements incorporate appropriate design and
specification measures to limit material degradation due to
environmental factors.
Mat 06 Material 1 Opportunities and measures have been identified and taken to
efficiency optimise the use of materials.
■ Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of construction materials with a low environmental impact (including embodied carbon)
over the full life cycle of the building.
Assessment criteria
Up to six credits
1. BREEAM awards credits on the basis of the building’s quantified environmental life cycle impact through assessment of
the main building elements, as set out in Table 38 :
Table 38 Elements assessed by building type
Building type Element type assessed
External Windows Roof Upper Internal Floor

walls floor slab walls finishes/
coverings
Office ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Retail ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Industrial ✔ ✔
Education ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Healthcare ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Prisons ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Courts ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Multi-residential ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Other buildings ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
2. Credits are awarded on the basis of the total number of points achieved, as set out in Table 39 , and calculated using the
BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. This point’s score is based on the Green Guide rating(s) achieved for the specifications that
make-up the main building elements (as in Table 38 ).
Note: Where an independently verified third party Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), covering part of or the
whole life cycle, is available for a material or product that forms part of an assessed building element, this can be used to
increase the contribution of that element to the building’s Mat 01 performance. (Refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impactsin the
Methodology section for more details.)
Table 39 Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points
Building type Total Mat 01 points achieved 1 and 2
≥2 ≥4 ≥5 ≥8 ≥ 10 ≥ 12 ≥ 14
Available BREEAM credits
Office 1 1 2 3 4 5 -
Retail 1 1 2 3 4 5 -
Industrial 1 2 - - - - -
Education 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Healthcare 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Prisons 1 1 2 3 4 - -
Courts 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Multi-residential 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
Other buildings 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Please refer to the Methodology section for a description of the methodology used to determine the number of
points and BREEAM credits achieved.
2. Where the total points achieved exceeds the level required for maximum credits see the exemplary level criteria as
the building may be eligible for an additional innovation credit.
3. Life cycle greenhouse gas emissions (kgCO eq.) for each element are also required to be reported based on a 60-year
2
building life. Where specific data is not available for a product or element, generic data should be used. Generic data can
be obtained from the online Green Guide for each element and must be entered in to the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator.

The following outlines the two exemplary level routes available to achieve up to three innovation credits for this BREEAM issue.
Route 1: Using the Green Guide to Specification (elemental approach) - one credit
4. Where assessing four or more applicable building elements, the building achieves at least two points in addition to the
total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria (as outlined in the table above) OR
5. Where assessing fewer than four applicable building elements, the building achieves at least one point in addition to the
total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria.
Where the assessed building does not specify an element listed above, see the compliance note CN3 regarding the exemplary
level benchmark.
Route 2: Using compliant life cycle assessment software tools (whole building approach) - two credits
6. Where the design team has used an IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) to measure the environmental
impact of the building.
7. Where the design team can demonstrate how the use of an IMPACT compliant software (or equivalent) has benefited
the building in terms of measuring and reducing its environmental impact. See CN3.13
8. Where the design team submit the building information model (BIM) from the IMPACT compliant software tool (or
equivalent) for the assessed building to BRE Global (via the project’s appointed BREEAM assessor). See compliance note
CN3.14.
Further information about IMPACT is provided in the Other information section of this BREEAM issue.
Please note a project can achieve all three innovation credits where it is complying with exemplary level criteria 4 to 8, i.e. one
route is not necessarily exclusive of the other: a project can comply with both routes 1 and 2 or choose to comply with only
route 1 or only route 2.

None
Compliance notes
Shell and core
options.
CN1.1 Floor finishes and Where floor finishes and internal walls are applicable to the building type being
internal walls assessed, the following applies to both the options.
See criterion 1. In addition to the main building elements, all building areas where floor finishes and/or
internal walls are being specified/installed by the developer must be accounted for in
the assessment of this issue (including those in common areas, show areas and other
fitted out areas).
Office buildings: If the developer has specified floor finishes in a show area only (for
compliance with BREEAM issue Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes), the area
and Green Guide rating of the floor finishes in the show area must be accounted for in
the assessment of Mat 01.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Element not Where the building does not contain an element listed above, for example there are
specified no upper floors in a single storey building, the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator allows the
See criteria 1, 2, 4 BREEAM assessor to exclude the element from the assessment. In such instances the
and 5. BREEAM Mat 01 calculator will recalculate the standard and exemplary level
benchmarks on the basis of the remaining applicable elements.
CN3.1 Element Where more than one specification is present for a given element, the Green Guide
consisting of rating and area for each specification should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 01
more than one calculator. The calculator will then determine the total points on the basis of each
specification specification rating and area as a proportion of the whole element.
See criterion 2.
CN3.2 Finding exact While exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to
Green Guide identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment (also
Ratings. see compliance note CN3.3 ‘No Green Guide rating match’).
See criterion 2.
CN3.3 No Green Guide Where a generic Green Guide rating cannot be found for a specification, the BREEAM
rating match. assessor can use the online Green Guide Calculator to determine a bespoke Green
See criterion 2. Guide rating for the specification (for any elements except floor finishes and
windows). Licensed BREEAM assessors can access the calculator via
www.thegreenguide.org.uk. If a required component is not present via the online
Green Guide Calculator, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green
Guide Query proforma detailing the specification details. BRE Global will respond to
the query with a solution and/or guidance to enable completion of a specification.
Refer to the Green Guide Calculator online tool guidance for more information.
CN3.4 Environmental Products with certified Environmental Profiles can be used to demonstrate
Profile compliance with this BREEAM issue. Products are certified with a “product specific”
Certification of Green Guide rating as part of a relevant elemental specification, e.g. a manufacturer’s
products concrete block as part of an external wall specification. This rating can be used in the
See criterion 2. same way as a generic Green Guide rating for this BREEAM issue. (See the Additional
information section for a screenshot example of a product listing from Green Book
Live.)
Where a certified product forms part of a different specification, for the same or
different element type (i.e. different to that described on the Environmental Profile
certificate), the guidance within the Methodology section concerning Environmental
Product Declaration types should be followed. This procedure outlines how BREEAM
gives additional recognition for materials with robust Environmental Product
Declaration types.
Refer to the BRE Environmental Profile Methodology under the Additional information
section for more information on where to source an Environmental Profile Certificate.
CN3.5 Self-generated A company self-generated Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) that has been
Environmental independently verified would be acceptable, where evidence is provided to
Product demonstrate that the EPD is produced in accordance with requirements of ISO 14020
Declaration series.
CN3.6 Reporting life Where the data is available, it is a requirement that the life cycle greenhouse gas (GHG)
cycle GHG emissions (kgCO eq.) for each specification are gathered and reported, via the
2
emissions BREEAM scoring and reporting tool. BREEAM assessors can source this information as
See criterion 3. follows:
For generic Green Guide ratings the kgCO2eq. is reported via the online Green Guide
www.thegreenguide.org.uk. Simply click on the relevant specification type (having
already defined the building, category and element type) and the kgCO2eq. are
reported along with the individual category ratings for that element, at the bottom of
the page (see screen shot in the Additional information section). The information is
not available at present for bespoke Green Guide ratings.
For Green Guide ratings based on a product manufacturer’s certified Environmental
Profile, Assessors will find the kgCO2eq. in the product’s Environmental Profile
Certificate appendix, in the ‘Characterised data’ section (against the ‘Climate Change’
issue).
CN3.7 New elements If a new element is specified, e.g. an external wall, and part of that element includes a
containing reused reused material e.g. reclaimed bricks, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a
materials Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and
See criterion 2. confirm the result to the Assessor.
CN3.8 Existing elements Only new elements need to be assessed. Existing in situ elements adjoining a new
reused in the new construction, e.g. an existing building façade, do not require assessment. If this
construction BREEAM scheme is being used to assess a major refurbishment project, where the
assessed building is reusing existing in situ elements as part of its structure, those
elements can be allocated an A+ Green Guide rating. If the existing element will
contain substantial new materials, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a Bespoke
Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and confirm the
result to the assessor.
CN3.9 Partial Where the assessment covers only some of the floors in the building, the roof must
assessments still be assessed as it is protecting the assessed building below. If the roof is directly
See criterion 1. above domestic accommodation (e.g. flats), the equivalent domestic Green Guide
rating for the roof must be used as opposed to the ratings for non-domestic roofs.
Roof areas not protecting parts of the assessed building or space can be omitted
from the assessment.
CN3.10 Specialist floor Specialist floor finishes (see definition) in operational areas of buildings fall outside the
finishes in scope of the Green Guide. In such instances, only non-specialist floor finishes and
operational areas those in non-operational areas of the building should be included in the assessment
See criterion 1. of this BREEAM issue. See also the guidance in the Additional information section on
floor finishes.
CN3.11 Roof lights, patio For the purpose of this issue any doors with a large expanse of glazing, such as patio
doors and glazed doors, should be assessed as windows. Similarly, glazed areas of conservatories and
conservatories roof lights should be assessed as windows.
See criterion 1.
CN3.12 Where integral For insulated cold storage units forming an integral part of the building fabric the
insulated cold following must be followed
storage units 1. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to the external wall
form a part of the element:
building fabric As an external wall type the insulated units will be assessed in the Green Guide on
the basis that it is a normal temperature building without the extra insulation, so
a standard thickness of insulation will be considered. As such, the walls of the
insulated unit should be treated as part of the external wall element for the
assessment of this BREEAM issue.
2. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to a ceiling element:
As a roof element of the insulated unit, suspended ceilings are not included
within the Green Guide. Therefore, the roof of the insulated unit will be assessed
as a standard construction from the deck upwards, assuming a standard
thickness of insulation. As such, the roof of the insulated unit should be treated
as part of the ceiling element for the assessment of this BREEAM issue.
3. Where the cold storage unit forms part of an internal wall element:
The insulated unit will be treated as meeting a very specific functional unit
outside the scope of the internal wall elements listed in the Green Guide. The wall
to the insulated unit should therefore be excluded from the assessment of the
internal wall element.
CN3.13 Demonstrating This should take the form of a short qualitative statement from the design team
benefit providing comments on the following:
See criterion 7. 1. How and at what stages of the design the tool was utilised.
2. How the tool helped (or did not help) steer the design process to optimise cost
and mitigate environmental impacts, giving examples of specific changes to the
building design/specification that resulted.
CN3.14 Scope of IMPACT Guidance note GN08: Scope of IMPACT Compliant (or equivalent) Tools and Data
Compliant (or Submission Requirements, available via the Assessor Extranet, outlines in detail the
equivalent) Tools requirements for submitting the BIM from IMPACT compliant (or equivalent) software
and Data tools. The Guidance Note also contains instructions on how tools other than IMPACT
Submission compliant software tools can demonstrate equivalency for the purpose of this
Requirements assessment issue. Assessors should review Guidance note GN08 and ensure that
See criterion 8. submissions meet the criteria relevant to demonstrate compliance.
Methodology
Determining the number of BREEAM credits achieved as a result of each element’s Green Guide
rating
The Green Guide uses an A+ to E rating system, whereby the rating relates to the relative life cycle performance of a
specification in comparison with other types of specifications available for a particular building element type e.g. external wall.
Three steps are undertaken to translate the performance of all the separate individual elemental specifications and their
Green Guide ratings into an overall building performance score for life cycle impact, against which BREEAM credits can be
awarded. Each of these steps is undertaken using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator and the information collated by the BREEAM
assessor. The steps in this process are as follows:
Step 1: Translating the Green Guide rating into points

The first step in the calculation procedure is translating a specification’s Green Guide rating into a number of points. The table
below illustrates the points available by Green Guide rating.
Green Guide rating Mat 01 points
A+ 3
A 2
B 1
C 0.5
D 0.25
E 0
The maximum number of points available for an assessed building is a product of the number of elements assessed
multiplied by three. For example, for an office building five elements are assessed so there are a maximum of 15 points
available; furthermore 12 of those 15 points must be achieved to award all five BREEAM credits.
While it may appear that three points are available for each element assessed, and in many assessments this may be the case,
the actual maximum number of points available for a particular element will depend on the impact of the element type
compared with the other elements present and assessed (refer to step 3 below). This is because this issue assesses the life
cycle impact of the whole building, taking into account the relative performance and therefore contribution of the main
building elements towards the building’s overall performance.
Step 2: Weighting the performance of individual specifications within an elemental category

Where an element consists of several different specifications, the overall points achieved for that element are weighted
according to the relative area and Green Guide rating of each of the individual specifications.
An example of this is provided below for an external wall element consisting of three different types of external wall
specification.
Element type Specification Area % of Generic Green Points Area

(m²) element Guide rating weighted
type points
External wall External wall type 1 280 26% A+ 3 0.78
External wall type 2 350 33% C 0.5 0.17
External wall type 3 435 41% B 1 0.41
Element total 1065 100% - - 1.36
This adjustment is made to ensure the contribution of points is balanced in accordance with the life cycle performance of each
specification.
Step 3: Weighting the performance of individual elements relative to all elements assessed
Step three is completed in two parts:
Part 1: This weights the performance of the building elements based on its area relative to the overall area of the different
elements. This is calculated by multiplying the area of each element by the weighted Green Guide score, adding the total for all
elements and then dividing by the total area of the assessed elements.
For example, a 20-storey office block will have a smaller roof area than external wall area, and so the area weighting will take
this into account by giving a smaller weighting to the points score for the roof in comparison to the external walls.
Part 2: The range of impacts, measured using Ecopoints, for each of the elements will differ and therefore, so will the
increments between each Green Guide rating level. For example, the external walls have a larger Ecopoints range than the
internal walls, therefore, if both elements achieve the same Green Guide rating, the rating of the external walls achieves a
higher proportion of the overall points than the rating for the internal walls, thus recognising the relatively higher reduction
possible in the environmental impact of the external walls, due to the larger Ecopoints range for that element.
Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) is available for a
material
The online Green Guide provides users (design teams and clients) with information on the relative life cycle environmental
impacts for a range of different building elemental specifications, e.g. external wall, roof, windows etc. Each specification’s
online Green Guide rating is based on verified LCA data for generic construction products assessed according to BRE’s
Environmental Profiles Methodology.
There are many different schemes producing EPDs for products or services complying with BS ISO 14025 using life cycle
analysis (LCA) according to the BS ISO 14040 series. There is a specific construction product and service variant of BS ISO
14025; BS ISO 21930.
Where a third party verified EPD is available for a product that forms part of an assessed element, for example a concrete
block used in an external wall, the EPD can potentially be used to uplift the element’s BREEAM performance, i.e. points and
therefore credits achieved. The degree of uplift available in such instances depends on three factors:
1. The assessed element’s existing Green Guide rating

2. The proportion of the total environmental mass of the element that the material with the EPD contributes
3. The manufacturer’s Environmental Product Declaration type for the relevant product/material(s).
Using this information, the points achieved for the existing Green Guide rating of the element is adjusted as follows (using the
BREEAM Mat 01 calculator):
1. The proportion of the total mass of the assessed element that the material with the EPD contributes is determined using
the Responsible Sourcing of Materials search tool, available on the assessor extranet. The Responsible Sourcing of
Materials search tool will list the relative mass of each constituent material of a defined element as a percentage. Select
the percentage for the relevant material and enter this into the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. If an element cannot be found
using the Responsible Sourcing of Materials search tool, the Assessor will need to complete a Bespoke Green Guide
Query Proforma and submit it to BRE Global with a notification that mass proportions are required for the EPD uplift
calculations. BRE Global will then confirm the relevant proportional mass of the material(s) in question. This will also be
required for a material with a BRE Environmental Profile, which is specified as part of an element that differs from the
elemental description on which that profile is based (See compliance note CN3.3).
2. Define the Environmental Product Declaration type and tier level (see Table 40 below) for the material(s) in question.
Table 40 The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking
EPD tier level EPD description
1 A third party, independently verified EPD (See also CN3.5)

covering the whole life cycle (i.e. cradle-to-grave).
EPD tier level EPD description
2 A third party, independently verified EPD (See also CN3.5)

covering the partial life cycle (i.e. cradle-to-gate or cradle-to-
gate with options*).
*Partial life cycle EPD can cover:

1. The product stage only: such an EPD covers raw material supply, transport, manufacturing and associated
processes; this EPD is said to be “cradle- to-gate”;
2. The product stage and selected further life cycle stages: such an EPD is said to be “cradle-to-gate with options”.
In both cases, the EPD must be produced in accordance with the requirements of the ISO 14020 series, particularly ISO
14025 and ISO 21930 1 (concerning environmental labels and declarations) and ISO 14040 2 and 14044 3 (concerning life
cycle assessment).
3. Once the element’s Green Guide rating and the relevant material(s) proportional mass and EPD type and tier level have
been defined, the points uplift can be calculated (see Table 41 below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator does this by
multiplying the material’s proportional mass by the maximum points uplift available for the Green Guide rating achieved
for the element. The points uplift is then added to the points already achieved for that element’s generic Green Guide
rating (see worked example below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator then continues its calculation procedure, as outlined
in steps 2 and 3 above, to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved.
Table 41 Green Guide points uplift by EPD type
Existing Green Guide rating Generic Green Guide rating points EPD tier 1 EPD tier 2
Max. points uplift Max. points uplift
A+ 3 1 0.75
A 2 1 0.75
B 1 1 0.50
C 0.50 0.50 0.25
D 0.25 0.25 0.125
E 0 0 0
The points uplift for tier 1 has been linked to the points available for achieving generic Green Guide ratings. An element whose
constituent materials have each had their life cycle masses quantified and independently verified i.e. tier 1 EPD, will achieve a
points uplift to the next level above that achieved for the elements generic Green Guide rating. The tier 2 points uplift is set
relative to tier 1, based on the fact that a tier 2 EPD covers only part of the material/element life cycle, i.e. cradle-to-gate and
not the full life cycle, i.e. cradle-to-grave.
Example: The following is an example of the above calculation for a theoretical external wall specification with a generic Green
Guide B rating (which equates to one point).
External wall specification Proportion of element mass EPD tier Points uplift
Load bearing concrete cladding 65% 1 0.65 x 1.0 = 0.65
Limestone finish 17% None 0
Medium density solid block 10% 1 0.1 x 1.0 = 0.1
Plasterboard and paint 5% 2 0.05 x 0.5 = 0.025
Insulation 3% None 0
Total points uplift 0.78
Total points achieved for element 1.78
In the above example therefore, having product specific Environmental Product Declarations for 80% (by mass) of the Green
Guide B rated element’s materials results in a points uplift of 0.78 (a 78% uplift on the element’s BREEAM performance in this
instance). This uplift could make a difference in the number of BREEAM credits achieved for the building.
Evidence
1-5 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements
1-5 A copy of the output from the BREEAM Mat 01 Calculator As per interim design stage
tool, including the Green Guide rating and element number
for each specification assessed 1 .
The online Green Guide Calculator output (where relevant).
1-5 Documentary evidence detailing how the Calculator tool has As per interim design stage
been completed.
6-8 A copy of the statement demonstrating benefit of using As per interim design stage
IMPACT compliant software (or equivalent) AND
A completed copy of BREEAM UK Mat 01 IMPACT
compliant (or equivalent) tool form AND
A BRE Global email confirmation for receipt of the model.
1. Element numbers are unique but the available specifications may change. As a result assessors should keep a note
of the element numbers they use to give Green Guide rating advice on BREEAM assessments for auditing purposes.
BREEAM Mat 01 calculator

A spreadsheet-based calculator required to determine the number of credits achieved for this BREEAM issue, based
on each applicable element’s Green Guide rating. See Calculation procedures below for a description of how BREEAM
determines the number of credits achieved for the life cycle impact of the building’s main material elements.
Ecopoint
The Ecopoint used in the online Green Guide is a single score that measures the total environmental impact of a
product or process as a proportion of overall impact occurring in Europe. The annual environmental impact caused
by a typical European citizen therefore creates 100 Ecopoints. Green Guide ratings are derived by sub-dividing the
range of Ecopoints/m²achieved by all specifications considered within a building element.
Environmental Product Declaration

BS EN ISO 14025:2010 4 defines an environmental label or environmental declaration as a claim which indicates the
environmental aspects of a product or service. BS EN ISO 14020:2001 5 goes on to state that environmental labels
and declarations provide information about a product or service in terms of its overall environmental character, a
specific environmental aspect, or any number of aspects. The BRE’s Environmental Profile Methodology and the Green
Guide to Specification are both examples of EPDs. Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) is the tool underpinning EPD and the
LCA should conform to the requirements of the BS ISO 14040 series.
BRE Environmental Profile Methodology
BRE Environmental Profile Methodology and subsequent product certification involves calculating the ‘cradle-to-
grave' environmental profile of a building material, product or system, and services. This is a measure of all key
environmental impacts, during extraction, processing/manufacture, use (including maintenance and refurbishment)
and disposal, over a 60-year study period. Once certified, environmental profiles are reviewed on an annual basis to
ensure they remain valid, and are recalculated every three years.
Frequently updated lists of building materials, products and systems assessed and certified under the Environmental
Profiles Certification Scheme can be viewed at www.greenbooklive.com. The listing also includes the Green Guide
rating for the approved products.
Where a product specified is claiming certification against the BRE Environmental Profiles Methodology, the BREEAM
assessor should ask for a copy of the certificate and its appendix (which contains characterised data, normalised data
and the Ecopoints score) or the certificate number and certifying body from the relevant manufacturer or,
alternatively, they can verify the claim via Green Book Live listings. The BREEAM assessor should include a reference to
the BRE Global Approved certificate number in their assessment report. An example screenshot of a product specific
Environmental Profile listing on Green Book Live is provided in the Other information section of this issue.
Green Guide to Specification

The Green Guide to Specification is an easy-to-use, comprehensive reference website and electronic tool, providing
guidance for specifiers, designers and their clients on the relative environmental impacts for a range of different
building elemental specifications. The generic elemental ratings within the online Guide are based on LCA data
generated using the BRE Environmental Profiles Methodology. The Environmental Profiles Methodology has been
peer reviewed to comply with BS ISO 14040 and represents the Product Category Rules for BRE Global’s
environmental labelling scheme (EPD - ISO 14025, Type III) for construction products and elements.
www.thegreenguide.org.uk
Green Guide element number

A unique BRE Global reference number given to a Green Guide rating for any particular building element type
specification. Both standard Green Guide ratings and those calculated using the online Green Guide Calculator will
have an element number.
Online Green Guide Calculator

BRE Global have developed the online Green Guide Calculator to enable BREEAM and CSH assessors to quickly and
efficiently generate Green Guide ratings for a significant proportion of specifications not listed in the online Green
Guide. The Green Guide Calculator database is based on the components currently used to create specifications
within the online Green Guide. These components can be selected and combined to generate instant Green Guide
ratings for a multitude of different specifications.
To access the Green Guide Calculator, you must be a licensed BREEAM/EcoHomes/Code for Sustainable Homes
Assessor. Please note that, at the time of writing, the Green Guide Calculator is not yet available for public use.
Reused materials
Reused materials are materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further
processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing to
other materials).
Specialist floor finishes

For the purpose of BREEAM specialist floor finishes are defined as those which have been designed to meet specific
high performance requirement such as chemical resistance, temperature resistance, impact resistance, thermal shock
protection, electrical resistivity, anti-microbial and easy decontamination.
Other information
Using the online Green Guide to Specification

The Green Guide categorises ratings by building type and element. When using the online Green Guide,
(www.thegreenguide.org.uk), the main page asks the user to select a building type from the following options:
1. Domestic
2. Commercial (offices)
3. Health
4. Retail
5. Industrial
6. Education
To obtain the appropriate Green Guide ratings for the assessed building elements, select the category that corresponds to
the assessed building type. See below for guidance on which category to select for building types not listed above.
Please note there are a number of common building elements (see below) and therefore Green Guide ratings. As these
elements are common, any building type can be selected to determine the appropriate rating (regardless of the actual non-
domestic building type being assessed).
Table 42 Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings
Building type Green Guide ratings
Further or Higher Education When carrying out a BREEAM assessment of a Further or Higher Education building, in
buildings most cases the Green Guide ratings listed under the ‘Education’ category can be used.
Alternatively, if the elemental specification of the building/space is more akin to a
commercial, retail, industrial or health specification in terms of its Green Guide
functional unit, then select and use the Green Guide ratings from the relevant the
building type.
Prison buildings To obtain appropriate ratings for elements that are not common (upper floors, roofs
and floor finishes), select the ‘healthcare’ category. For prison building types that are
more akin to commercial buildings in their construction e.g. visitors’ centres, catering
buildings, sports halls select the commercial category. These categories include
ratings that are most appropriate to the elemental specifications used for these
types of prison buildings.
Law court buildings To obtain appropriate Green Guide ratings for elements that are not common
(internal walls, roof, upper floor slab and floor finishes) select the ‘schools’ category
for court buildings. This category includes ratings that are most appropriate to the
elemental specifications used for this building type. For floor finishes, it is permissible
to select flooring from another building type other than schools, if the function/use in
the assessed building is more appropriate to that type.
Other buildings For many other building types assessed it may be clear which category of building
type to select for Green Guide purposes (for elements that are not common). If it is
not clear the BREEAM assessor will need to contact BRE Global for advice, supplying a
description of the building including the relevant function(s). BRE Global will then
confirm to the BREEAM assessor the appropriate category to select.
Common elements The following elements, for the purpose of non-domestic buildings, have common
Green Guide ratings irrespective of the building type:
1. External walls
2. Landscaping
3. Windows - commercial
The user can therefore search for ratings for the above elements under any building
category.
Guidance for the assessment of floor finishes

The online Green Guide, under each building type, has categories of flooring specifications commonly used for the key floor
areas for that building type. For example, the Retail category contains ratings for hard and soft floor finish specifications for
public access areas based on the functional unit for that type of space.
However, any given building will normally contain several different floor areas with different wear requirements. Therefore,
the BREEAM assessor will need to refer to floor finishes under other building type categories to find the relevant specification
and Green Guide rating for the building (if floor finishes are one of the applicable elements). For example, for ‘back of house’
office and corridor areas in a retail development, it will be necessary to search the floor finishes specifications and ratings
under the ‘commercial’ category of the online Green Guide. To aid users of the online Green Guide, there is a diagram that will
direct you to the appropriate ratings to be used for other floor areas. The diagram is found in the guidance under the Floor
Finishes category.
Specialist floor finishes in operational areas of buildings fall outside the scope of the Green Guide. This is due to the specific
high performance requirements of the specifications, such as chemical, temperature and/or impact resistance etc., all of which
limit the options available for specification. For this reason such floor finishes can be omitted from the assessment.
IMPACT (Integrated Material Profile And Costing Tool)

IMPACT is a specification and database for software developers to incorporate into their tools to enable consistent Life Cycle
Assessment (LCA) and Life Cycle Costing (LCC). IMPACT compliant tools work by allowing the user to attribute environmental
and cost information to drawn or scheduled items in the BIM. IMPACT takes quantity information from the BIM and multiplies
this by environmental impact and/or cost ‘rates’ to produce an overall impact and cost for the whole (or a selected part) of the
design. The results generated by IMPACT allow the user to:
analyse the design to optimise cost and environmental impacts.

compare whole building results to a suitable benchmark to assess performance, which can be linked to building
assessment schemes.
The benefit of BIM enabled whole building assessment is that the calculations are based on real design data and accurate
quantities, rather than generic specifications for particular building elements. IMPACT compliant tools also allow users to
accurately model the life cycle performance of primary structures and substructures, which are not covered by the Green
Guide to Specification.
IMPACT was developed by an industry consortium led by BRE. The work was funded by the UK’s Technology Strategy Board.
Further information about IMPACT and IMPACT compliant software tools (identified by the IMPACT compliant logo) is
available from www.impactwba.com
Submission of an IMPACT (or equivalent) BIM

BRE Global requires the submission of the Building Information Model (BIM) from the IMPACT compliant software tool (or
equivalent) in order to:
Facilitate the establishment of robust building level life cycle performance benchmarks in BREEAM. This will enable
future BREEAM versions to recognise and reward those designs which achieve above average performance.
Fulfil BREEAM Quality Assurance requirements
Conduct further research using data from real life projects.
Any data supplied to BRE Global will be treated in confidence and the use of BIM data for research purposes will ensure
individual projects are unidentifiable.
Tools equivalent to but not compliant with IMPACT

Tools that are considered by BRE Global to be equivalent to an IMPACT Compliant tool will be eligible for the same Exemplary
credits. Equivalence will be judged by BRE Global based on the following:
Suitability of the BIM content for refining benchmarks

Format in which the BIM is transmitted.
Please contact BRE Global at the earliest opportunity to establish equivalence status of a non-IMPACT compliant software
tool.
Indoor Air Quality and the Green Guide flooring category ratings
The online Green Guide does not cover the potential health and wellbeing issues associated with flooring materials and
indoor air quality, this impact is covered in BREEAM issue Hea 02 Indoor air quality.
Screenshot of a specification from the BRE online Green Guide
Screenshot of a product specific Environmental Profile listing on Green Book Live
1BS EN ISO 21930:2007 Sustainability in building construction. Environmental declaration of building products. BSi, 2007
2BS EN ISO 14040:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Principles and framework. BSi, 2006
3BS EN ISO 14044:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Requirements and guidelines. BSi, 2006
4BS EN ISO 14025:2010, Environmental labels and declarations - Type III environmental declarations, Principles and
procedures. BSi, 2010
5BS EN ISO 14020, Environmental labels and declarations - General principles. BSi, 2001
■ Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection Materials
Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection

1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification of materials for boundary protection and external hard surfaces that have a
low environmental impact, taking into account of the full life cycle of materials used.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. Where at least 80% of all external hard landscaping and 80% of all boundary protection (by area) in the construction
zone achieves an A or A+ rating, as defined in the Green Guide to Specification. Green Guide ratings for the specification
(s) of each element can be found at www.thegreenguide.org.uk

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
options.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Green Guide When using the Green Guide for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, ratings
online for landscaping elements are common across all building types. The rating will
therefore be the same irrespective of the building type selected via the Green Guide
online.
CN3.1 Finding exact While exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to
Green Guide identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment.
ratings Where no similar specification can be found, seek guidance from BRE for the
appropriate rating.
CN3.2 Green Guide Where applicable, products with Environmental Profiles Certification can be used to
rating via demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Products are certified with a product
Environmental specific Green Guide rating and this rating can be used in the same way as a generic
Profile Green Guide rating. See Mat 01 Life cycle impacts – Methodology for more
Certification information.
CN3.3 Minor alteration Where there is hard landscaping or boundary protection which is to remain as existing,
of existing then, provided no more than 20% of the total area of the existing hard landscaping
elements and boundary protection elements are subject to minor alterations, repair or
maintenance, these elements can be awarded an A+ rating for the purposes of
determining compliance with this issue.
CN3.4 No hard If one of the elements is not present, e.g. boundary protection, then the credit must be
landscaping or assessed on the basis of the specification of the single element, e.g. hard landscaping.
boundary Where the development has neither element, the credit can be awarded.
protection
CN3.5 Building façade Any part of an external building façade (of either the assessed building or any other
forming neighbouring building) that forms a part of the site boundary should be excluded
boundary from the assessment of this credit.
CN3.6 Existing natural Any existing or specified natural boundary protection (such as hedging or other living
features barrier) should be awarded with an A+ rating for the purposes of this analysis.
CN4 Prison buildings - The criteria for hard surfaces are applicable only to those areas outside of the secure
secure perimeter perimeter zone, but within the overall curtilage of the site. The criteria for boundary
zones/areas protection apply to all specifications within the secure perimeter zone and external
zone, including its borders and curtilage, i.e. the whole site. The criteria DO NOT apply
to the secure perimeter fence, wall or any other fencing subject to security standards.
Methodology
None.
■ Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection Materials
Evidence
All The Green Guide rating and element number As per interim design stage
for the assessed specifications.
Construction zone
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site and its boundary which is being
developed for the BREEAM-assessed building and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works.
Green Guide
Refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impacts
Green Guide Element Number

Scope of hard landscaping

For the purpose of assessment, hard landscaping includes (but is not limited to) parking areas (including manoeuvring
areas, lanes, roads within the parking area), pedestrian walkways, paths, patios. The definition excludes basement
parking, access or approach roads and designated vehicle manoeuvring areas, balconies, roof terraces, specialist
sports areas (running tracks, netball areas etc.) and retaining walls.
Other information
None.
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

4 Yes (criterion 1 only)
Aim
To recognise and encourage the specification and procurement of responsibly sourced materials for key building elements.
Assessment criteria
Pre-requisite
1. All timber and timber-based products used on the project is Legally harvested and traded timber (see Relevant
definitions).
Note:
a. It is a minimum requirement for achieving a BREEAM rating (for any rating level) that compliance with criterion 1 is
confirmed.
b. For other materials there are no pre-requisite requirements at this stage.
One credit - Sustainable procurement plan

3. The principal contractor sources materials for the project in accordance with a documented sustainable procurement
plan (see the Relevant definitions in the Additional information section).
Up to 3 credits - Responsible sourcing of materials (RSM)

4. The available RSM credits (refer to Table 43 ) can be awarded where the applicable building materials (refer to Mat 03
Responsible sourcing of materials) are responsibly sourced in accordance with the BREEAM methodology, as defined in
steps 1 to 2 in the Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials section below.
Table 43 The number of BREEAM credits achieved is determined as follows
RSM credits % of available RSM points achieved
3 ≥ 54%
2 ≥ 36%
1 ≥ 18%

5. Where at least 70% of the available RSM points are achieved.
■ Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials Materials

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
criteria Assessments of this Scheme Document for further description of the above options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable All criteria relevant to building type and function apply.
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 A government A government licence, e.g. a UK Forestry Commission felling licence certificate, can be
licence used to provide evidence of legally sourced timber but does not meet the definition of
See criterion 1. a third party timber certification scheme and so does not comply with the responsible
sourcing requirements of this issue.
CN3.1 Sustainable For design stage assessments where the principal contractor has not yet been
procurement plan appointed, a specification or a letter of intent from the party responsible for
See criterion 2. appointing the principal contractor must be provided confirming a requirement for
the principal contractor to have in place a sustainable procurement plan. Refer to The
BREEAM evidential requirements section for more guidance on providing letters of
commitment.
CN3.2 BREEAM Guidance Note 18 available in the Resources section of the BREEAM website, provides
recognised a table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised under BREEAM, their
responsible scope and associated point scores.
sourcing This table is reviewed on a regular basis and BREEAM assessors must ensure they use
certification the current table.
schemes and their
point scores
See criterion 3.
CN3.3 Checking Confirmation of manufacturers and suppliers claims should be sought from the
responsible relevant responsible sourcing scheme provider. Many of the organisations who
sourcing claims administer RSM certification schemes will, via their website, list companies and
See criterion 3. products that have been certified against their standards, including the scope of any
such certification. Some schemes, including BES 6001 via www.greenbooklive.com, will
provide downloadable copies of the relevant certificate, which can in turn be used as
evidence of compliance for this BREEAM issue.
CN3.4 Specified reused Where reused materials are specified for the project, these can be allocated ten points.
materials
See criterion 3.
CN3.5 Specified recycled Where evidence can be provided that certified products used in the building contain a
materials high proportion (≥ 90%) repurposed or recycled content , these can be allocated
See criterion 3. points as per Table -1 in Guidance Note 18.
CN3.6 Route 1 Any material type within a location/use category, other than ceiling and internal
Cut- off partitions/internal walls (see Table 44 ), which clearly accounts for less than 1m³per
See step 1 in the 1000 m²of gross internal floor area, can be excluded from assessment. Fixings,
Methodology adhesives, many finishing materials (but not all) and ironmongery would normally fall
section. below this threshold.
Material types within Ceiling and Internal partitions/internal walls location/use
categories, which clearly account for less than 0.33m³per 1000 m²of gross internal
floor area, can be excluded from assessment.
Calculations will not normally be required to justify such exclusions.
Methodology
There are two routes to demonstrate compliance with this issue. Either of the routes or a combination may be followed for
any situation:
Route 1 is intended for use in the majority of situations where detailed information on quantities of materials is not
readily available.
Route 2 is intended for situations where a more detailed analysis is possible due to the availability of sufficient detail
on material quantities and associated supply chains.
Route 3 (a combination of routes 1 and 2) is intended for situations where details on material quantities are only
available for some of the materials.
Route 1: Lowest responsible sourcing certification scheme point score

The following steps outline the methodology to be followed for this route to determine the number of credits achieved for
responsible sourcing. The calculations outlined below are undertaken using the BREEAM Mat 03 calculator and the relevant
project information, collated by the project team.
Step 1: Confirm the presence of 'Location/use categories' and materials

Identify from 'Location/use categories' list under Table 44 all location/use categories present in the building. Allocate from
'material category' list all materials that make-up each location/use category identified. Exclude all materials within a
location/use category that meet the cut-off criteria set out in Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials.
Note:
The most appropriate category for each particular material type must be selected. Where none of the categories are
appropriate use ‘other’.
Products made up of constituent materials (such as windows, doors, etc.) must be broken down into constituent materials
and assessed separately following the category allocation process described above. As before, any material that falls below
the cut-off threshold (see CN3.6) should be excluded from the assessment.
Table 44 Location and use and material categories.
Location table and use categories
1. Ceiling (including ceiling finishes)

2. Door/window
3. Floor (including floor finishes)
4. Insulation
5. Internal partition/internal walls (including finishes)
6. Roof (including roof finishes)
7. Structure, primary and secondary (e.g. Structural frame, foundation/substructure)
8. External wall ( e.g cladding, lining, render, including finishes)
9. Building service
10. Hard landscaping
11. Other
Material categories
1. Timber/ timber-based products (TBP)

2. Concrete/ cementitious (plaster, mortar, screed etc.)
3. Metal
4. Stone/ aggregate
5. Clay-based (pavers, blocks, bricks, roof tiles, etc.)
6. Gypsum
7. Glass
8. Plastic, polymer, resin, paint, chemicals and bituminous
9. Animal fibre/skin, cellulose fibre
10. Other
Step 2: Confirm the responsible sourcing certification scheme point score achieved for each applicable
material
For each material type identified as applicable in step 1, determine whether or not it is covered by a BREEAM-recognised
Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme certificate (see Additional information section).
Refer to Guidance Note 18 available in the Resources section of the BREEAM website for the most up to date list of BREEAM
recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Schemes, their scope and corresponding point score.
Note:
1. The responsible sourcing certification scheme (RSCS) point score is determined based on the rigour of responsible
sourcing demonstrated by the supplier(s) or manufacturer(s) of that material through the use of recognised
responsible sourcing certification schemes.
Step 3: Point allocation and award of credits

The data entered in steps 1 and 2 is used by the BREEAM Mat 03 tool to calculate the number of RSM points achieved and
award credits accordingly. This award of credits is determined as follows:
For materials that have been given the same material category (timber/timber-based product has been used to illustrate), the
tool:
1. First finds the average responsible sourcing certification scheme (RSCS) point score for timber/timber-based products
that have the same 'location/use' category. This is repeated for every 'location/use' category present,
2. Then selects the location/use category with the lowest average RSM point score,
The above process is repeated for each material category. The results for all material categories are summed and the
difference between the total and the maximum total possible expressed as a percentage. The percentage is then converted
to a credit score according to the Table 43
An example calculation for route 1 is provided in Table 45 .
Table 45 Example calculation for route 1
Location/ Material category RSCS point Average point RSM point score
use category score score* allocation**
Door/ Timber/timber-based 4 5 4
window product 1
Timber/timber-based 6
product 2
Floor Timber/timber-based 3 4
product 1
product 2
External wall Timber/timber-based 6 6.5

product 1
product 2
Door/ Metal product 1 5 5 2

window
Ceiling Metal product 1 3 2.5
Metal product 2 2
Location/ Material category RSCS point Average point RSM point score
use category score score* allocation**
Structure primary and Concrete/cementitious 3 2 2

secondary product 1
Concrete/cementitious 2
product 2
product 3
Internal partition Concrete/cementitious 4 5.5

product 1
product 2
Structure primary and Clay-based product 1 3 4 4

secondary
Clay-based product 2 5
Roof Clay-based product 1 8 8
* Average point scores for a given material in that location/use category.
** The point score allocation is the lowest point score, rounded, in the previous column, for a given material category.
Table 46 Example point allocation and award of credits
Material category Point scores Maximum point % available points Credits

achieved score achieved achieved
Timber/ timber-based product 4 10 30% 1
Metal 2 10
Concrete/ cementitious 2 10
Clay-based 4 10
Total score 12 40
Route 2: Proportion of materials responsibly sourced

This route allows for a more detailed calculation of the responsibly sourced materials in a building where information on
material quantities are available. It follows a similar methodology to that set out for route 1 above but allows for a detailed
calculation, based on the relative quantity of each material to weight the point scores, thus influencing the final result.
Following route 2 leads to a more accurate final result and typically leads to a higher score. The required calculations are
performed by the Mat 03 Calculator tool.

An example calculation for route 2 is provided in Table 47 . The example illustrates the calculation for a single material
category (timber/ timber-based products (TBP)). This process is repeated for each material category present in the building to
determine the final RSM score.
Table 47 Example calculation for single material category
Material RSCS point Quantity Point score Max. point % total

category score (m³ weighted score score
, IKg)
(A) (B) (C) (D) (G)
Door/ window
Timber/ TBP 1 4 100 400 1000
Timber/ TBP 2 6 50 300 500
Total Scores (E)700 (F)1500 46.7%
Floor
Timber/ TBP 1 3 100 300 1000
Timber/ TBP 2 5 200 1000 2000
Total Scores (E)1300 (F)3000 43.3%
External wall
Timber/ TBP 1 6 300 1800 3000
Timber/ TBP 2 7 200 1400 2000
Total Scores (E)3200 (F)5000 64%
Average % total score (H) 51.3%
RSM score (I) 5.13
Description of columns shown in the example

Responsible sourcing certification scheme (RSCS) point score achieved, A
Quantity (m³, Kg), B
Point score weighted by quantity, C = responsible sourcing certification scheme (RSCS) point score achieved x quantity
C=AxB
Maximum point score weighted by quantity, D = 10 x quantity
D = 10 x B
Total score achieved, E = sum of point scores weighted by quantity
E = sum of C scores
Total maximum score, F = sum of maximum scores weighted by quantity
F = sum of D scores
Total score achieved, G = sum of point scores weighted by quantity/ sum of maximum scores weighted by quantity
G = E/ F
Average percentage, H = average of total scores achieved
H = average of G scores
RSM score achieved, I =10 x average percentage
I =10 x H
Route 3: Combination of routes

Table 48 illustrates the awarding of credits where a combination of routes is used.
In the example below route 2 has been used to calculate the points for timber/ timber-based products. For all other materials
present, route 1 has been used to allocate points. The figures shown have been taken from the relevant tables under route 1
and 2 example calculations provided above.
Note: Only one route can be selected per material category.
Table 48 Example credit calculation for where a combination of routes are used
Material category RSCS point Maximum point Percentage of available Credits

score score points achieved
Timber/ 5.13 10 32.83% 1

timber-based product (using
route 2)
Metal (using route 1) 2 10
Concrete/ cementitious (using 2 10

route 1)
Clay-based (using route 1) 4 10
Total score 13.13 40
Evidence
All See The BREEAM evidential requirements section for a list of general evidence types that can be
used to demonstrate compliance with the relevant criteria for this issue.
All Completed copy of the Mat 03 Calculator As per interim design stage.
tool
All Documentary evidence detailing how the As per interim design stage.
Calculator tool has been completed.

A Calculator tool used by the BREEAM assessor to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved for BREEAM
issue Mat 03.
BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification schemes

These are third party schemes evaluated and approved by BRE Global for recognition under BREEAM. Refer to
Guidance Note (TBC) available in the Resources section of the BREEAM website for information on the evaluation
criteria and the process for the evaluation and acceptance of schemes, including application and appeals.
Building Services
For the purpose of this issue this refers to the equipment and distribution systems specified for providing heating,
power, ventilation, lighting, air-conditioning and domestic water services in a building. As a minimum, this should
include the equipment and controls specified for the building services.
Chain of custody (CoC)

This is a process used to maintain and document the chronological history of the evidence/path for products from
forests to consumers. Timber must be tracked from the certified forest to the finished product. All the steps, from
the transportation of timber from the forest to a sawmill until it reaches the customer, must maintain adequate
inventory control systems that allow for separation and identification of the certified product. Chain of custody
certification ensures that a facility has procedures in place to track timber from certified forests and avoid confusion
with non-certified timber. Chain of custody is established and audited according to the rules of relevant forest
certification systems. See also definition of CITES below.
Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES)

The Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna and flora (CITES) works by subjecting
international trade in specimens of selected species to certain controls. All import, export, re-export and introduction
from the sea of species covered by the Convention has to be authorised through a licensing system. Each Party to the
Convention must designate one or more Management Authorities in charge of administering that licensing system
and one or more Scientific Authorities to advise them on the effects of trade on the status of the species. The species
covered by CITES are listed in three Appendices, according to the degree of protection they need.
1. Appendix I includes species threatened with extinction. Trade in specimens of these species is permitted only in
exceptional circumstances.
2. Appendix II includes species not necessarily threatened with extinction but in which trade must be controlled in
order to avoid utilisation incompatible with their survival.
3. Appendix III contains species that are protected in at least one country, which has asked other CITES Parties for
assistance in controlling the trade.
Appendices I and II of the CITES list illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES list
illustrates species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the project is on Appendix III it
can be included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the country/countries seeking to
protect this species.
Composite material
Composite material can be defined as an engineered material made from two or more constituent materials with
significantly different physical or chemical properties and which remain separate and distinct on a macroscopic level
within the finished structure. Resin based composites such as glass reinforced plastic and polymeric render and
timber composites such as chipboard or particleboard, MDF, OSB, plywood, hardboard, laminated veneered lumber,
glulam and cement bonded particleboard are all required to be assessed for responsible sourcing.
Legally harvested and traded timber

BREEAM follows the UK government's definition of legally sourced timber, as outlined in the Central Point of Expertise
on Timber (CPET) 5th Edition report on the UK Government Timber Procurement Policy, which states that legal timber
and wood-derived products are those that originate from a forest where the following criteria are met:
1. The forest owner/manager holds legal use rights to the forest.
2. There is compliance by both the forest management organisation and any contractors with local and national
legal criteria including those relevant to:
a. Forest management
b. Environment
c. Labour and welfare
d. Health and safety
e. Other parties’ tenure and use rights
f. All relevant royalties and taxes are paid.
3. There is full compliance with the criteria of CITES.
Relevant documentation demonstrating the above must be provided or made available on request subject to the
availability of such materials in the country concerned. The policy requires all timber and wood-derived products to be
from only:
1. Independently verifiable legal and sustainable sources OR
2. Forest Law Enforcement, Governance and Trade (FLEGT) - licensed timber or equivalent sources.
Further information on the UK Government's Timber Procurement Policy and compliant responsible sourcing
certification schemes is available from the CPET (Central Point of Expertise on Timber) website www.cpet.org.uk/.
Pre-consumer waste stream

Waste material generated during manufacturing processes; this excludes reuse of materials such as rework, regrind
or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.
Post-consumer waste stream

Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as end
users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the
distribution chain.
Responsible sourcing
The management and implementation of sustainable development principles in the provision, procurement and
traceability of construction materials and components.
In BREEAM, this is demonstrated through auditable third party certification schemes.
Refer to Guidance Note 18 available in the Resources section of the BREEAM website for an up to date table of
responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised by BRE Global Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment.
Reused materials
Materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor
processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing to other materials).
Recycled material
Materials diverted from the pre-consumer and/or post-consumer waste streams that require significant processing
before they can be used again. For further information please see Calculating and declaring recycled content in
construction products, 'Rules of Thumb' Guide (WRAP, 2008) www.wrap.org.uk.
Sustainable procurement plan
A plan that sets out a clear framework for the responsible sourcing of materials to guide procurement throughout a
project and by all involved in the specification and procurement of construction materials. The plan may be prepared
and adopted at an organisational level or be site/project specific, and for the purposes of BREEAM compliance, will
cover the following as a minimum:
1. Risks and opportunities are identified against a broad range of social, environmental and economic issues. BS
8902:2009 Responsible sourcing sector certification schemes for construction products- Specification can be
used as a guide to identify these issues.
2. Aims, objectives and targets to guide sustainable procurement activities.
3. The strategic assessment of sustainably sourced materials available locally and nationally. There should be a policy
to procure materials locally where possible.
4. Procedures are in place to check and verify that the sustainable procurement plan is being implemented/adhered
to on individual projects. These could include setting out measurement criteria, methodology and performance
indicators to assess progress and demonstrate success.
Responsible sourcing certification scheme point scores

A graded scale to reflect the rigour of the certification scheme used to demonstrate responsible sourcing, forming
the basis for awarding credits in the BREEAM issue Mat 03. Refer to Guidance Note 18 available in the Resources
section of the BREEAM website for an up to date table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised by
BRE Global Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment.
Other information
BES 6001:2008 Framework Standard for Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products

This is a BRE Global standard that provides a framework for the assessment and certification of the responsible sourcing of
construction products. The Standard has been structured so that compliance can be demonstrated through a combination of
meeting the requirements of other recognised certification schemes, establishing written policies, setting objectives and
targets and engaging with relevant stakeholders.
To comply with the standard a product must meet a number of mandatory criteria. Where a product demonstrates
compliance beyond the mandatory levels, higher levels of performance can be achieved. The standard's performance ratings
range from Pass to Good, Very Good and Excellent.
The development of this standard and subsequent certification schemes will, it is envisaged, provide construction products,
not wholly covered under current recognised standards, a means for demonstrating their responsibly sourced credentials. In
turn this will allow clients, developers and design teams to specify responsibly sourced construction products with greater
assurance and provide a means of demonstrating compliance with the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue.
To view a list of products approved to BES 6001 and additional information about the standard visit:
www.greenbooklive.com.
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC)
validity
A CPET document may be helpful to assessors with respect to determining the validity of FSC and PEFC certificates. See
www.cpet.org.uk.
■ Mat 04 Insulation Materials
Mat 04 Insulation
1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of thermal insulation which has a low embodied environmental impact relative to its
thermal properties.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Embodied impact

1. Any new insulation specified for use within the following building elements must be assessed:
a. External walls
b. Ground floor
c. Roof
d. Building services.
2. The Insulation Index for the building fabric and services insulation is the same as or greater than 2.5. See the Mat 04
Insulation section for a description of calculating the Insulation Index.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Embodied impact - criteria 1 to 2

assessment Both options: All new insulating products being specified or installed by the developer
criteria must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue.
options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable All criteria relevant to building type and function apply.
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Insulation If the insulation is incorporated as a component of an element that has been
incorporated as manufactured off-site (in order to maximise material optimisation), e.g. a wall or roof,
part of an off-site and that element has been assessed as part of Mat 01, then for the purpose of
manufactured assessing the insulation for this BREEAM issue, a Green Guide rating of A+ should be
element used. The same rule applies to insulation that has a significant additional function, such
as providing supporting structure, e.g. structural insulated panels (SIPS). In the Green
Guide, the actual insulation will be listed within the element title, rather than under the
generic insulation category.
Methodology
Insulation Index calculation
The Insulation Index is calculated using the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator which uses the following calculation methodology:
For each type of thermal insulation used in the relevant building elements, the volume weighted thermal resistance provided
by each type of insulation is calculated as follows:
1. (Area of insulation (m²) x thickness (m))/thermal conductivity (W/m.K) OR

2. Total volume of insulation used (m³)/thermal conductivity (W/m.K)
The volume weighted thermal resistance for each insulation material is then multiplied by the relevant Green Guide point(s)
from the following table to give the Green Guide rating corrected value:
Table 49 Green Guide rating points/element
Green Guide rating Points/element
A+ 3
A 2
B 1
C 0.5
D 0.25
E 0
To calculate the Insulation Index, the sum of the Green Guide rating corrected values for all insulating elements is divided by the
sum of the volume weighted thermal resistance values. See example calculation below.
■ Mat 04 Insulation Materials
Note
a. Where more than one insulation type is present for a given element, the rating, area and conductivity
for each insulation type should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator and an average is
calculated (by volume).
b. Where no similar insulation can be found assessors should seek guidance from BRE on the appropriate
rating.
c. Where an independently verified third party Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), covering part of
or the whole life cycle, is available for an insulating material/product, this can be used to increase the
contribution of that material/product to the building’s Mat 04 performance. See below for more
details.
Example calculation as carried out by the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator

The Insulation Index is calculated for a building using the following types of insulation:
Type 1 Walls
Area = 450m²
Thermal insulation thickness = 100mm
Thermal conductivity = 0.023W/mK
Green Guide rating = A (2 points)
Volume weighted thermal resistance: ((450 x 0.100)/ 0.023) = 1956
Green Guide rating correction: 1956 x 2 = 3912
Type 2 Building services
Volume of insulation used = 21m³

Green Guide rating = C (0.5 points)
Volume weighted thermal resistance: (21/0.022) = 955
Green Guide rating correction: 955 x 0.5 = 477
Type 3 Roof
Area = 210m²
Green Guide rating = A+ (3 points)
Type 4 Ground floor
Area = 210m²
Green Guide rating = B (1 point)
Total volume weighted thermal resistance = 1956 + 955 + 933 + 933 = 4777
Green Guide rating correction = 3912 + 477 + 2799 + 933 = 8121
Insulation Index: Green Guide Rating Correction/Total volume weighted thermal resistance = 8121/ 4777 = 1.7 (credit not
achieved)
Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material
Please refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impacts – Methodology
Note: Step 1 of the methodology outlined in BREEAM issue Mat 01 (the proportion of the total environmental impact
of the assessed element) is not applicable for this issue as the insulation is assessed as a single material in BREEAM issue
Mat 04 and not as part of a larger building element containing other materials (as in BREEAM issue Mat 01).
Evidence
All A completed copy of the Mat 04 As per interim design stage

Calculator tool
Environmental Product Declaration

Green Guide
Green Guide element number

Insulation index
A measure of performance used in BREEAM that seeks to assess the thermal properties of insulation products used in
the building relevant to the embodied impact of that insulating material.

A spreadsheet-based tool used by the BREEAM assessor to determine the Insulation Index and therefore, whether
the BREEAM credit is achieved.
Materials optimisation
Material optimisation means adopting a resource-efficient approach to design which results in less material being
used in the design (i.e. lean design), and/or less waste is produced in the construction process, without compromising
the design concept. While this assessment issue is focused on the embodied impact of the insulation material
specified, the design team should consider solutions that optimise the use of the material and therefore minimise
construction waste. See Mat 06 Material efficiency for more information.
Other information
None.
■ Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience Materials
Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience

1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage adequate protection of exposed elements of the building and landscape, therefore minimising
the frequency of replacement and maximising materials optimisation.
Assessment criteria
One credit
Protecting vulnerable parts of the building from damage

1. The building incorporates suitable durability and protection measures or designed features/solutions to prevent
damage to vulnerable parts of the internal and external building and landscaping elements. This must include, but is not
necessarily limited to:
a. Protection from the effects of high pedestrian traffic in main entrances, public areas and thoroughfares (corridors,
lifts, stairs, doors etc.).
b. Protection against any internal vehicular/trolley movement within 1m of the internal building fabric in storage,
delivery, corridor and kitchen areas.
c. Protection against, or prevention from, any potential vehicular collision where vehicular parking and manoeuvring
occurs within 1m of the external building façade for all car parking areas and within 2m for all delivery areas.
Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation

2. The relevant building elements incorporate appropriate design and specification measures to limit material
degradation due to environmental factors. (See Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience for the process to assess
this criterion).
See Table 50 in the Checklists and tablessection for a list of applicable elements, environmental factors and material
degradation effects to consider.

Table 50 Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradation effects to consider
Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradation effects
Applicable building elements
Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradation effects
1. Foundation/substructure/lowest floor/retaining walls

2. External walls
3. Roof/balconies
4. Glazing: windows, skylight
5. External doors
6. Railings/balusters (where exposed to external environment)
7. Cladding (where exposed to external environment)
8. Staircase/ramps (where exposed to external environment)
9. Hard landscaping
Environmental factors
1. Environmental agents, including:

a. Solar radiation
b. Temperature variation
c. Water/moisture
d. Wind
e. Precipitation, e.g. rain and snow
f. Extreme weather conditions: high wind speeds, flooding, driving rain, snow
2. Biological agents, including:
a. Vegetation
b. Pests, insects
3. Pollutants, including:
a. Air contaminants
b. Ground contaminants
Material degradation effects (includes, but not necessarily limited to the following)
1. Corrosion
2. Dimensional change, e.g. swelling or shrinkage
3. Fading/discolouration
4. Rotting
5. Leaching
6. Blistering
7. Melting
8. Salt crystallisation
9. Abrasion
Compliance notes
Shell and core
■ Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience Materials
CN1 Applicable Protecting vulnerable parts of the building from damage - criterion 1
assessment Where vulnerable elements identified form part of the shell and core developer’s
criteria remit:
Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply
and must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue.
Where vulnerable elements identified are internal and do not form a part of the shell
and core developer's remit, i.e. they are in speculative areas and compliance is subject
to the tenants/future occupiers fit-out specification:
Both options: These areas can be excluded from assessment.
Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation - criterion 2
options.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Suitable durability Suitable durability and protection measures to vulnerable parts of the building can
measures include:
See criterion 1. 1. Bollards/barriers/raised kerbs to delivery and vehicle drop-off areas
2. Robust external wall construction, up to 2m high
3. Corridor walls specified to Severe Duty (SD) as per BS 5234-2 1and, for
Healthcare buildings, Health Technical Memorandum 56 - Partitions2.
4. Protection rails to walls of corridors
5. Kick plates/impact protection (from trolleys etc.) on doors
6. Hard-wearing and easily washable floor finishes in heavily used circulation areas
(i.e. main entrance, corridors, public areas etc.)
7. Designing out the risk without the need for additional materials specification to
protect vulnerable areas.
CN3.1 Vehicle impact Any vehicle impact protection measures specified must be positioned at an adequate
protection distance from the building to protect the fabric from impact from any vehicle with a
See criterion 1c. measurable overhang of the body from the wheel track, in particular for any goods
delivery areas.
In vehicle movement areas only; where the specification of external robust wall
construction is specified to comply with the credit, additional protection must be
provided to ensure against potential damage to the robust façade from vehicle
movement, i.e. specifying bollards or protection rails.
CN3.2 Preventing The specification or design measures chosen should reflect the need to balance the
excessive material additional specification of materials with the need to protect building elements to
use minimise their replacement, insuring against excessive material use and promoting
materials optimisation.
CN3.3 Public/common Consideration should be given to materials specification in public/common areas

areas (especially public waiting areas and toilet areas) to provide protection against
potential malicious or physical abuse, as far as possible.
Methodology
Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation
The following outlines the process to assess criterion 2.
1. Identify from the list of ‘applicable building elements’ under Table 50 the elements that are appropriate to the building
being assessed.
2. Establish from the ‘environmental factors’ list those factors that are likely to cause material degradation effects in the
identified applicable building elements.
3. Confirm the design and specification measures in place to limit these degradation effects.
4. The assessor should use their professional judgement in determining whether the design team have adequately
demonstrated that they have designed and specified materials and/or measures which will be effective in preventing
unnecessary deterioration, so reducing frequent replacements, repairs and maintenance through the life cycle of the
building.
5. At post construction stage, where the design and specification measures installed differ from those proposed at
design stage, the assessor must ensure that these measures still meet the aims of the criterion as detailed in point 4
above.
Evidence
Materials efficiency
Refer to BREEAM issue Mat 04 Insulation
Other information
None.
1BS 5234-2: Partitions (including matching linings) – Specification for performance criteria for strength and robustness
including methods of test, BSI 1992.
2HTM 56 Partitions, 3rd Edition, Department of Health, 2005.
■ Mat 06 Material efficiency Materials
Mat 06 Material efficiency

1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage measures to optimise material efficiency in order to minimise environmental impact of material
use and waste.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to show compliance for:
One credit
1. Opportunities have been identified, and appropriate measures investigated and implemented, to optimise the use of
materials in building design, procurement, construction, maintenance and end of life ,
2. The above is carried out by the design/construction team in consultation with the relevant parties (see CN3) at each of
the following RIBA stages:
a. Preparation and Brief
b. Concept Design
c. Developed Design
d. Technical Design
e. Construction.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
options.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Relevant parties All parties (as relevant to the project stage) involved in the design, specification and/or
construction of the building should be consulted. This includes but is not limited to, the
following:
1. Client/developer
2. Cost consultant
3. Architect
4. Structural/civil engineers
5. Building services engineers - mechanical, electrical
6. Principal contractor
7. Demolition/strip-out contractor
8. Environmental consultant
9. Project management consultant
10. Materials/component manufacturers/suppliers.
CN3.1 Evidence BRE has avoided being overly prescriptive with the evidence requirements for this
requirements issue, recognising that this is a complex environmental and design issue, where
solutions and approaches are largely influenced by building specific factors. The
evidence required to demonstrate compliance will vary according to RIBA stage. A
few examples have been provided below:
reports (at Preparation and Brief stage) outlining the activity relating to
material efficiency ( ideas discussed, analysis and decisions taken)
drawings or building information model (BIM), calculations showing reduction
of material use through design (Concept Design/Developed Design stages)
meeting notes, construction program, responsibilities schedule (indicating
parties consulted).
The BREEAM assessor should use their judgement in determining whether the aim and
intent of the credit has been met using appropriate project information to back their
judgement. BRE Global will endorse the BREEAM assessor's judgement through the
Quality Assurance audit where a reasonable justification to award the credit on the
basis of project team actions and proposed design solutions is evident.
Methodology
None.
■ Mat 06 Material efficiency Materials
Evidence
Material efficiency
The process of undertaking a building project to enable the most efficient use of materials over the life cycle of the
building and its components. This includes using fewer materials, reusing existing demolition/strip-out materials and,
where appropriate, procuring materials with higher levels of recycled content. It may also include the adoption of
alternative means of design/construction that result in lower materials usage and lower wastage levels including off-
site manufacture and use of pre-assembled service pods.
Other information
Optimising material use

The construction industry accounts for approximately 55% of the total annual materials consumption and buildings
contribute 50% of total emissions of CO2e. They are also responsible for 30% of total UK water use and 35% of arising
waste. The breakdown of global industrial carbon emissions shows that 55% comes from the manufacture and processing
of five stock materials- steel (25%), cement (19%), paper (4%), plastic and aluminium (3%).
Optimising material use is one the key resource efficiency goals for any sustainability strategy. This involves various
components to ensure efficient use of materials, waste prevention and reduction, minimal damage to the environment and
depletion of natural resources. This new BREEAM issue aims to encourage and support efforts to reduce the amount of
materials use in building design without compromising on the structural stability. BRE intends to further develop the
assessment criteria for this issue in future updates of BREEAM and as such BRE would welcome any feedback on the
application of this assessment issue to assist with the evolution of the criteria and inclusion of additional guidance on
compliance in future BREEAM versions.
Tools to guide material efficiency strategies

The following provide frameworks for the consideration and review of resource efficiency in design and construction:
BS 8895 Designing for material efficiency in building projects

The standard outlines specific material efficiency processes, key tasks, team members and their responsibilities and outputs
specific to each work stage, along with supporting guidance and tools. This serves as a useful tool to assist the design team in
developing and implementing material efficiency strategies for their developments.
The standard is comprised of the following four parts:
Part 1: Code of practice for Strategic Definition and Preparation and Brief 1 (published)
Part 2: Code of practice for concept and developed design2 (published)
Part 3: Code of practice for technical design (planned for development)
Part 4: Code of practice for operation, refurbishment (planned for development)
WRAP
Designing out Waste: A design team guide for Buildings3. This document outlines five principles of designing out waste and
can be applied during design development, and serve as prompts for investigating opportunities for material efficiency in
design.
1BS 8895: Designing for material efficiency in building projects - Part1: Code of practice for Strategic Definition and
Preparation and Brief. BSI, 2013
2BS8895-2:2015 Designing for material efficiency in building projects- Part 2: Code of practice for concept design and
developed design. BSI, 2015
3 Designing out Waste: A design team guide for Buildings, WRAP.
Waste ■ Waste
Waste
Category overview
Fully fitted 8.5% Shell only 11.0% Shell and core 9.5% Wst 01, Wst 03
Summary
This category encourages the sustainable management (and reuse where feasible) of construction, operational waste and
waste through future maintenance and repairs associated with the building structure. By encouraging good design and
construction practices, issues in this section aim to reduce the waste arising from the construction and operation of the
building, encouraging its diversion from landfill. It includes recognition of measures to reduce future waste as a result of the
need to alter the building in the light of future changes to climate.

ID
Wst 01 Construction 4 Development of a construction resource management plan.

waste Reducing construction waste related to on-site construction and off-
management site manufacture/fabrication.
Diverting non-hazardous construction (on-site and dedicated off-site
manufacture/fabrication), demolition and excavation waste (where
applicable) generated by the project from landfill.
Wst 02 Recycled 1 Percentage levels of recycled or secondary aggregate specified

aggregates against set targets.
Wst 03 Operational 1 Provision of suitable space and facilities to allow for segregation and
waste storage of operational recyclable waste volumes generated by the
assessed building/unit, its occupant(s) and activities.
Wst 04 Speculative 1 Specification of floor and ceiling finishes only where agreed with the
floor and occupant or for tenanted areas where the future occupant is not
ceiling finishes known, carpets, other floor finishes and ceiling finishes are installed in a
show area only to reduce wastage.
Wst 05 Adaptation to 1 Encourage consideration and implementation of measures to

climate mitigate the impact of more extreme weather conditions arising from
change climate change over the lifespan of the building.
Wst 06 Functional 1 Encourage consideration and implementation of measures to

adaptability accommodate future changes to the use of the building and its
systems over its lifespan.
Waste BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Wst 01 Construction waste management

4 Yes
Aim
To promote resource efficiency via the effective management and reduction of construction waste.
Assessment criteria
Construction resource efficiency (3 credits)

Diversion of resources from landfill (1 credit).
Up to three credits - Construction resource efficiency

1. Where a Resource Management Plan (RMP) has been developed covering the non-hazardous waste related to on-site
construction and dedicated off-site manufacture or fabrication (including demolition and excavation waste) generated
by the building’s design and construction (see CN3).
2. Where construction waste related to on-site construction and dedicated off-site manufacture/fabrication (excluding
demolition and excavation waste) meets or is lower than the following (Table 51 :
Table 51 Construction waste resource efficiency benchmarks
BREEAM credits Amount of waste generated per 100m²(gross internal floor area)
m³ tonnes
One credit ≤ 13.3 ≤ 11.1
Two credits ≤ 7.5 ≤ 6.5
Three credits ≤ 3.4 ≤ 3.2
Exemplary level ≤ 1.6 ≤ 1.9
Note - Volume (m³) is actual volume of waste (not bulk volume).
3. Where existing buildings on the site will be demolished a pre-demolition audit of any existing buildings, structures or
hard surfaces is completed to determine if, in the case of demolition, refurbishment/reuse is feasible and, if not, to
maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent high grade/value applications. The audit must be
referenced in the RMP and cover:
a. Identification of the key refurbishment/demolition materials.
b. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition
materials in accordance with the waste hierarchy.
■ Wst 01 Construction waste management Waste
One credit - Diversion of resources from landfill

4. The following percentages of non-hazardous construction (on-site and off-site manufacture/fabrication in a dedicated
facility), demolition and excavation waste (where applicable) generated by the project have been diverted from landfill:
Table 52 Diversion from landfill benchmarks
BREEAM credits Type of waste Volume Tonnage
One credit Non demolition 70% 80%
Demolition 80% 90%
Excavation N/A N/A
Exemplary level Non demolition 85% 90%
Demolition 85% 95%
Excavation 95% 95%
5. Waste materials will be sorted into separate key waste groups as per Table 53 (according to the waste streams
generated by the scope of the works) either on-site or through a licensed contractor for recovery.

The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue:
6. Non-hazardous construction waste generated by the building’s design and on-site construction and off-site
manufacture or fabrication (excluding demolition and excavation waste) is no greater than the exemplary level resource
efficiency benchmark (outlined in Table 51 ).
7. The percentage of non-hazardous construction (on-site and dedicated off-site manufacture/fabrication), demolition
and excavation waste (if relevant) diverted from landfill meets or exceeds the exemplary level percentage benchmark
(outlined in Table 52 ).
8. All key waste groups are identified for diversion from landfill in the RMP.
One credit - Construction resource efficiency - simple buildings

9. Where projects have a Resource Management Plan (RMP) with the aim of minimising and monitoring waste.
Two credits - RMP measurements and reporting - simple buildings

10. Where criterion 9 above has been met.
11. The developed and implemented waste management procedures recorded in the RMP ensure that the following are
measured and reported on :
a. Construction waste generated by the project in m³or tonnes per 100m²gross internal floor area (excluding
demolition and excavation waste).
b. The proportion of this construction waste diverted from landfill, i.e. reused/recycled/recovered.
This data must be reported at the final post construction stage of the BREEAM assessment, via the BREEAM assessment
and reporting process (in addition to any other internal or external reporting of the data that may occur). Note: where
existing buildings on the site will be demolished, a pre-demolition audit of any existing buildings, structures or hard
surfaces must be completed to determine if, in the case of demolition, refurbishment/reuse is feasible. If the audit finds
that this is not feasible, then its purpose is to maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent high
grade/value applications. The audit must be referenced and cover:
c. Identification of the key refurbishment/demolition materials.

d. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition
materials.
Exemplary level criteria - simple buildings

12. The first three construction resource efficiency credits have been achieved.
13. Non-hazardous construction waste measurement/monitoring records details of the source of the waste arisings, by
associating the waste with project work packages (see Methodology).
14. Where the project meets or improves on the BREEAM exemplary level benchmark (Table 52 ) for the diversion from
landfill of non-hazardous construction and demolition waste (where generated).

None
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Option 1 – Shell only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment Option 2 – Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Construction resource efficiency (3 credits)

assessment One credit
criteria 1. Criterion 9.
Two credits
2. Criteria 10 and 11.
Diversion from landfill (1 credit)
3. Criteria 4 and 5.
Exemplary level credit
4. Criteria 12 to 14.
General
CN3 Resource The project waste arisings should be recorded and include construction, demolition
Management Plan and excavation waste. Note that the performance benchmarks for the award of
records credits do not include demolition and excavation waste.
CN3.1 Limited site space Where space on site is too limited to allow materials to be segregated, a waste
for segregation contractor may be used to separate and process recyclable materials off-site.
and storage Similarly, manufacturers’ take-back schemes could also be used. Where this is the case,
See criterion 5. evidence must be produced which demonstrates that segregation of materials is
carried out to the agreed levels and that materials are reused/recycled as appropriate.
Such evidence could be Environment Agency/Scottish Environment Protection
Agency/Environment Agency Wales/Northern Ireland Environment Agency Waste
Return Forms.
CN3.2 Waste from Any waste generated on-site for the purposes of the development (excluding
temporary demolition and excavation waste) must be taken account of in the assessment of this
support issue. If temporary support structures, or any other materials/system brought on-site
structures to facilitate construction of a building, enter the waste stream (albeit for recycling),
then they will need to be classified as construction waste and therefore contribute to
the construction waste benchmark necessary to facilitate assessment with this issue.
If the support structure is reused by the contractor (or by another contractor) on other
sites, then it hasn’t been discarded and therefore doesn’t enter the waste stream.
Thus it wouldn’t be included in the waste generated and hence the benchmark figures
for this issue. The same would apply to timber formwork where reused.
Methodology
Work packages
For the simple building exemplary criteria, the waste arisings need to be associated with the source of waste by project work
packages. These work packages could include:
1. Asbestos removal
2. External and site works
3. Fixtures and fittings
4. Groundworks and excavation
5. Refurbishment
6. Remediation
7. Re-roofing
8. Services
9. Soft strip
10. Substructure
11. Superstructure.
Evidence
All A copy of the Resource Management plan As per interim design stage
and, where relevant, pre-demolition audit.
Best practice construction waste management plan (see RMP and SWMP)
Best practice is a combination of commitments to:
1. Design out waste (materials optimisation)
2. Reduce waste generated on-site
3. Develop and implement procedures to sort and reuse/recycle construction and demolition waste on-site and off-
site (as applicable)
4. Follow guidance from:
Defra (Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs)
BRE (Building Research Establishment Ltd)
WRAP (Waste and Resources Action Programme)
Welsh Government.
Dedicated off-site manufacturing or fabrication

Refer to definition under Man 03 Responsible construction practices.
Diversion from landfill

Actions to avoid waste being disposed of in landfill include:
Reusing the material on-site (in situ or for new applications)
Reusing the material on other sites
Community reuse and recycling
Salvaging or reclaiming the material for reuse
Returning material to the supplier via a ‘take-back’ scheme
Recovery of the material from site by an approved waste management contractor and recycled or sent for
energy recovery.
Resource Management Plan (RMP)

The aim of the RMP is to promote resource efficiency and to prevent illegal waste activities. Resource efficiency
includes minimising waste at source and ensuring that clients, designers and principal contractors assess the use,
reuse and recycling of materials and products on and off the site.
A compliant RMP is one that defines:
1. A target benchmark for resource efficiency, i.e. m³of waste per 100m²or tonnes of waste per 100m²
2. Procedures and commitments for minimising non-hazardous waste in line with the target benchmark
3. Procedures for minimising hazardous waste
4. A waste minimisation target and details of waste minimisation actions to be undertaken
5. Procedures for estimating, monitoring, measuring and reporting hazardous and non-hazardous site waste. If
waste data is obtained from licensed external waste contractors, the data needs to be reliable and verifiable, e.g.
by using data from EA/SEPA/EA Wales/NIEA Waste Return Forms
6. Procedures for sorting, reusing and recycling construction waste into defined waste groups (see additional
guidance section), either on-site or through a licensed external contractor
7. Procedures for reviewing and updating the plan
8. The name or job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above.
A Site Waste Management Plan is a form of Resource Management Plan and for BREEAM should be written in line
with best practice (see definition of Best practice construction waste management plan)
Site Waste Management Plans

Some locations may have a legal requirement, due to government requirements, to produce a Site Waste
Management Plan (SWMP) containing prescribed details. This should be complied with as necessary. To achieve any of
the construction waste management credits the assessed development, regardless of value or locality, must have a
BREEAM compliant Resource Management Plan that should be written in line with best practice (see definition of Best
practice construction waste management plan).
Waste hierarchy
The order of priority for the management of waste where waste generation could or does occur. This is listed in
descending order of environmental preference in The Waste (England and Wales) Regulation 2011 1 as:
Prevention
Reuse
Recycle
Recover
Dispose.
Waste minimisation
This term encompasses two elements of the waste hierarchy:
Waste reduction/prevention = using less material in design, manufacture and installation, keeping products for
longer, using no hazardous materials
Reuse = using products again for the same purpose for which they were conceived, which may require checking,
cleaning or repairing (preparing for reuse).
Types of waste minimisation actions include:
1. Set and report against waste reduction targets
2. Design for standardisation of components
3. Avoid waste from excavation/groundworks and consider opportunities for zero cut and fill
4. Return packaging for reuse
5. Consider community reuse of surplus/offcuts
6. Include waste minimisation initiatives and targets in tenders/contracts and engage with the supply chain
7. Consider use of BIM (Building Information Modelling)
8. Design for off-site/modular build
9. Design for flexibility, adaptability and future deconstruction
10. Design to use fewer materials
11. Use of reusable temporary elements such as shuttering and protection.
This list is not exhaustive and other waste minimisation actions can be taken.
Construction waste groups

Table 53 Construction waste groups
European Waste Key group Examples

Catalogue
170102 Bricks Bricks
170101 Concrete Pipes, kerb stones, paving slabs, concrete rubble, precast and in situ
170604 Insulation Glass fibre, mineral wool, foamed plastic
1501 Packaging Paint pots, pallets, cardboard, cable drums, wrapping bands,
polythene sheets
170201 Timber Softwood, hardwood, board products such as plywood, chipboard,

medium density fibreboard (MDF)
1602 Electrical and electronic Electrical and electronic TVs, fridges, air-conditioning units, lamps
equipment equipment
200301 Canteen/office Office waste, canteen waste, vegetation
European Waste Key group Examples

Catalogue
1301 Oils Hydraulic oil, engine oil, lubricating oil
1703 Asphalt and tar Bitumen, coal tars, asphalt
170103 Tiles and ceramics Ceramic tiles, clay roof tiles, ceramic, sanitary ware
1701 Inert Mixed rubble/excavation material, glass
1704 Metals Radiators, cables, wires, bars, sheet
170802 Gypsum Plasterboard, plaster, fibre cement sheets
170101 Binders Render, cement, mortar
170203 Plastics Pipes, cladding, frames, non-packaging sheet
200307 Furniture Tables, chairs, desks, sofas
1705 Soils Soils, clays, sand, gravel, natural stone
Most relevant Liquids Non-hazardous paints, thinners, timber treatments

EWC
Most relevant Hazardous Defined in the Hazardous Waste List (HWL) of the European Waste
EWC Catalogue (EWC)
Most relevant Floor coverings (soft) Carpets, vinyl flooring

EWC
Most relevant Architectural features Roof tiles, reclaimed bricks, fireplaces

EWC
170904 (Mixed) Mixed/other Efforts should be made to categorise waste into the above categories
wherever possible.
Other information
BREEAM construction resource efficiency benchmarks

The resource efficiency benchmarks used in BREEAM have been derived using data collected from hundreds of real life
projects using BRE's SMARTWaste system, from July 2008 to March 2013. The BREEAM credits are aligned to the benchmarks
as follows:
1. One credit: Performance in the top 50% of projects (better than standard practice)
2. Two credits: Performance in the top 25% of projects (good practice)
3. Three credits: Performance in the top 10% of projects (best practice)
4. Exemplary level: Performance in the top 5% of projects (exemplary practice).
For more information please see www.smartwaste.co.uk
Why does BREEAM exclude demolition and excavation waste from the resource efficiency benchmarks?
BREEAM does not include demolition and excavation (D&E) waste in its resource efficiency benchmark, despite it often being
the largest tonnage of waste on-site, because the amount of D&E waste produced is site-dependant. Furthermore, it is not
necessarily possible to reduce the amount of demolition waste (unless a decision is taken not to demolish in the first place).
Including D&E waste in an overall construction resource efficiency benchmark would:
1. Not encourage sites with unavoidably large amounts of D&E waste to focus on reducing waste arising from
construction materials (which would have further knock-on environmental impacts); and
2. Mean that sites with little or no D&E waste would find compliance with the benchmark more straight forward, which
would weaken the drivers for reducing construction waste resulting from the specification and use of new building
materials.
BREEAM aims to ensure that, where D&E waste is generated, it is diverted from landfill and where possible reused for high
grade use on-site to reduce the volume of new materials produced/required in the supply chain (which themselves may go on
to generate additional waste). One credit and an exemplary level credit are available where it can be demonstrated that D&E
waste has been diverted from landfill.
Tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a RMP

SMARTWaste® is a web-based membership tool allowing users to measure and monitor construction-site impacts..
The tool can be used for:
Preparing, implementing and reviewing SWMPs or RMPs

Online measuring and reporting on
Waste (aligned to defined waste groups)
Site energy, fuel and water use
CO2 production from energy usage
Procurement of certified/sustainable timber
Industry waste benchmarks

Links to BREMAP.
This membership tool is frequently updated and offers the user flexibility, reporting and support. Templates are available to
meet the latest BREEAM credits and can also be downloaded. More information is available at www.smartwaste.co.uk.
Other tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a RMP are available from the Waste and Resources Action
Programme (WRAP) www.wrap.org.uk.
WRAP and UKCG waste reporting guidelines

WRAP have guidelines for measuring and reporting construction, demolition and excavation waste which have been
developed with the United Kingdom Contractors Group (UKCG). This differs from SMARTWaste in a number of ways.
For the WRAP/UKCG method, only materials taken off-site as waste are to be recorded as waste. It is optional to record data
for materials that are reused on-site but these should not be reported.
The WRAP/UKCG method also has default diversion from landfill rates for waste sent off-site to waste destinations. For
example, it is assumed that 50% of inert soil and stones (EWC 17 05 04) and brick, concrete, tiles and ceramics (EWC 17 01 01,
EWC 17 01 02, EWC 17 01 03, and EWC 17 01 07) sent to landfill will go to beneficial reuse (e.g. landfill engineering and
restoration). SMARTWaste and BREEAM do not make this assumption.
1The Waste (England and Wales) Regulations 2011, Environmental Protection, England and Wales, Statutory Instrument No.
988.
Wst 02 Recycled aggregates

1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage the use of recycled and secondary aggregates, thereby reducing the demand for virgin material
and optimising material efficiency in construction.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Recycled aggregates

1. The percentage of high grade aggregate that is recycled or secondary aggregate, specified in each application
(present) must meet the following minimum % levels (by weight or volume) to contribute to the total amount of recycled
or secondary aggregate, as specified in Table 54 .
2. The total amount of recycled or secondary aggregate specified, and meeting criterion 1, is greater than 25% (by weight
or volume) of the total high grade aggregate specified for the project. Where the minimum level in criterion 1 is not met
for an application, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the
total high grade aggregate specified.
3. The recycled or secondary aggregates are EITHER:
a. Construction, demolition and excavation waste obtained on-site or off-site; OR
b. Secondary aggregates obtained from a non-construction post-consumer industrial by product source (see Relevant
definitions section).

The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue.
4. The percentage of high grade aggregate that is recycled or secondary aggregate, specified in each application
(present) must meet the exemplary minimum levels (by weight or volume), as defined in Table 54 . Where this minimum
level is not met, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the total
high grade aggregate specified.
5. Where the total amount of recycled or secondary aggregate specified is greater than 35% (by weight or volume) of the
total high grade aggregate specified for the project. Where the minimum level in criterion 4 is not met for an application,
all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the total high grade
aggregate specified.
6. The contributing recycled or secondary aggregate must not be transported more than 30 km by road transport.
■ Wst 02 Recycled aggregates Waste

Table 54 Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high grade aggregate specified per application (where present) that is
recycled or secondary aggregate
Application Min. % Min. %

One Exemplary
credit performance
Bound
Structural frame 15% 30%
Bitumen or hydraulically bound base, binder, and surface courses for paved areas 30% 75%
and roads
Building foundations 20% 35%
Concrete road surfaces 15% 45%
Unbound
Pipe bedding 100% 100%
Granular fill and capping (see Relevant definitions section) 100% 100%
Compliance notes
Shell and core
options.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Off-site recycled Where off-site recycled aggregates from construction, demolition and excavation
aggregates waste are used, they should be produced according to the relevant Quality Protocol
or comply with the relevant BS/EN standards for aggregates.
CN3.1 Aggregates in off- Where any of the listed applications have been manufactured off-site, the aggregate
site manufactured present in these applications should be included in the assessment of this issue.
applications
Methodology
None.
Evidence
2 Calculation confirming the amount of Calculation confirming the amount of

recycled or secondary aggregate to be used. recycled or secondary aggregate used.
Air cooled blast furnace slag

Air cooled blast furnace slag is classified as a by product (rather than a waste) and can therefore be used as an
aggregate without the need for a quality protocol. The slag used must meet the requirements of the European and
BS Aggregates Standards that apply to the end use application (e.g. bitumen bound, unbound etc.)
Granular fill and capping (as high grade aggregate)

For granular fill to be considered a ‘high grade aggregate’, it must conform to one of the following classes under the
Specification for Highway Works (SHW) Series 600 Earthworks:
1. Class 6A, 6I and 6N - Selected well graded granular material
2. Class 6B - Selected coarse granular material
3. Class 6C, 6D, 6J and 6L - Selected uniformly graded granular material
4. Class 6E, 6G, 6H, 6K, 6M, 6P and 6R - Selected granular material
5. Class 6F (and the various sub classes) - Selected coarse and fine graded material
6. Class 6Q - Well graded, uniformly graded or coarse graded material.
If the application is capping, then granular materials should conform to one of the following classes under the
1. Class 6F - Selected coarse and fine graded material
2. Class 6S - Selected well graded granular material.
If the application is capping, then stabilised materials should conform to one of the following classes under the
■ Wst 02 Recycled aggregates Waste

1. Class 9A - Cement stabilised well graded granular material
2. Class 9B - Cement stabilised silty cohesive material
3. Class 9C - Cement stabilised conditioned pulverised fuel ash cohesive material
4. Class 9D - Lime stabilised cohesive material
5. Class 9E - Lime and cement stabilised cohesive material
6. Class 9F - Lime and cement stabilised well graded material.
Low grade aggregate uses

Crushed masonry used as fill material for general landscaping is not considered to be high grade. This practice is now
common place on construction sites due to increased landfill costs.
Materials optimisation
Refer to Mat 04 Insulation
Post-consumer waste stream

Waste materials generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as end
users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the
distribution chain.
Waste materials generated during manufacturing processes are pre-consumer waste streams and are excluded.
These streams include re-utilisation of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable
of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.
Quality Protocol
The purpose of a Quality Protocol is to provide a uniform control process for producers, from which they can
reasonably state and demonstrate that their product has been fully recovered and is no longer a waste. It also
provides purchasers with a product quality managed to common standards, which increases confidence in
performance. Aggregates that do not meet the requirements of a Quality Protocol and/or relevant aggregate
standards will still be considered waste.
Protocols exists for:
Aggregates produced from inert waste
Use of pulverised fuel ash (PFA) and furnace bottom ash (FBA) in bound applications.
Recycled aggregates
Recycled aggregates are those derived from reprocessing materials previously used in construction, e.g. crushed
concrete or masonry from construction and demolition waste material.
Secondary aggregates
By products of industrial processes that can be processed to produce secondary aggregates. Secondary aggregates
are subdivided into manufactured and natural, depending on their source.
Recognised non-construction post-consumer or post-industrial by products include:
1. China clay waste
2. Slate overburden
3. Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA)
4. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS)
5. Air cooled blast furnace slag
6. Steel slag
7. Furnace Bottom Ash (FBA)
8. Incinerator bottom ash
9. Foundry sands
10. Recycled glass
11. Recycled plastic
12. Spent oil shale
13. Colliery spoil
14. Municipal solid waste treatment residues.
Other information
Further guidance
The Environment Agency publishes and updates Quality Protocols:
http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/business/sectors/142481.aspx.
Current guidance:
The Quality Protocol for production of aggregates from inert waste.

https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/quality-protocol-production-of-aggregates-from-inert-waste
Steel slag, incinerator bottom ash aggregates and furnace bottom ash (from coal fired power generation) are not
covered by the above Quality Protocol but are/will be covered by their own quality protocols.
■ Wst 03 Operational waste Waste
Wst 03 Operational waste

1 Yes
Aim
To recognise and encourage the provision of dedicated storage facilities for a building’s operational-related recyclable waste
streams, so that this waste is diverted from landfill or incineration.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Operational waste

1. Dedicated space(s) is provided for the segregation and storage of operational recyclable waste volumes generated by
the assessed building/unit, its occupant(s) and activities. This space must be:
a. Clearly labelled, to assist with segregation, storage and collection of the recyclable waste streams
b. Accessible to building occupants or facilities operators for the deposit of materials and collections by waste
management contractors
c. Of a capacity appropriate to the building type, size, number of units (if relevant) and predicted volumes of waste that
will arise from daily/weekly operational activities and occupancy rates.
2. Where the consistent generation in volume of the appropriate operational waste streams is likely to exist, e.g. large
amounts of packaging or compostable waste generated by the building’s use and operation, the following facilities are
provided:
a. Static waste compactor(s) or baler(s); situated in a service area or dedicated waste management space.
b. Vessel(s) for composting suitable organic waste resulting from the building’s daily operation and use; OR adequate
space(s) for storing segregated food waste and compostable organic material prior to collection and delivery to an
alternative composting facility.
c. Where organic waste is to be stored/composted on-site, a water outlet is provided adjacent to or within the facility
for cleaning and hygiene purposes.
Additionally for healthcare buildings only

3. The specified/installed operational waste facilities are compliant with the relevant NHS guidelines for that part of the UK
(see Compliance Note Wst 03 Operational waste
Additionally for multi-residential buildings with self-contained dwellings/bedsits only

4. Each dwelling/bedsit has a provision of three internal storage containers, as follows:
a. A minimum total capacity of 30 litres
b. No individual container smaller than 7 litres
c. All containers in a dedicated non-obstructive position
d. The storage containers for recycling are provided in addition to non-recyclable waste storage.
Additionally for multi-residential buildings with individual bedrooms and communal facilities only
5. The above storage requirements (criterion 4) for self-contained dwellings/bedsits are met for every six bedrooms.
6. The recyclable storage is located in a dedicated non-obstructive position in either:
a. Communal kitchens; OR
b. Where there are no communal kitchens present, in a communal space such as communal lounges or utility areas.
7. Home composting facilities and a home composting information leaflet is provided within the kitchen area or
communal space for each self-contained dwelling, bedsit or communal kitchen.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Criteria 1 and 2

criteria Criteria 3 to 7
options.
CN1.1 End-occupier not If the end-occupier is not known but the function/areas of the assessed building
known suggest that large amounts of packaging or compostable waste is likely to be
See criterion 2. generated during the building’s operation, e.g. it is a retail or industrial project or
contains a large catering facility, then an appropriately sized space and
services/infrastructure to accommodate the relevant facilities must be provided. The
facilities themselves do not necessarily need to be provided/installed to demonstrate
compliance.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Determining if the The design team demonstrates that the provision of waste management facilities for
dedicated space the assessed building is adequate given the building type, occupier (if known),
complies operational function and likely waste streams and volumes to be generated.
See criteria 1 and Where it is not possible to determine what provision should be made, the following
2. guide for minimum storage space provision should be used:
1. At least 2m²per 1000m²of net floor area for buildings < 5000m²
2. A minimum of 10m²for buildings ≥ 5000m²
3. An additional 2m²per 1000m²of net floor area where catering is provided (with
an additional minimum of 10m²for buildings ≥ 5000m²).
The net floor area should be rounded up to the nearest 1000m².
CN3.1 Extensions to Where there are facilities within the existing building, these can be used to assess
existing buildings compliance. The scope of these facilities must be adequate to cater for the total
volume of predicted recyclable waste arising from the new and existing buildings.
CN3.2 Multiple building Where the assessment applies to one or more buildings/units that are part of a wider
assessments and estate or campus, the design team can choose to demonstrate compliance through
buildings that the provision of dedicated centralised storage space and waste management facilities
form part of a with the capacity to accommodate the recyclable waste material generated from all
wider estate buildings and their activities.
See criterion 1c.
CN3.3 Limited space or For sites that have limited space for static installations, compliance can be assessed on
vehicle access for the basis of the provision of adequate space for a smaller portable compactor or
a baler.
compactor/baler
See criterion 2.
CN3.4 Internal storage Where the facilities are situated internally, vehicular gate heights/widths and
areas manoeuvring and loading space must be sized to ensure ease of access for vehicles
collecting recyclable materials.
CN3.5 General waste The area for storage of recyclable materials must be provided in addition to areas and
facilities provided for dealing with general waste and other waste management
facilities, e.g. compactors, balers and composters.
CN3.6 Small industrial For an industrial building or development/site consisting of a number of smaller units,
units each ≤ 200m²floor area, shared facilities that meet the above criteria for the
See criterion 1. building/site as a whole are sufficient to achieve this credit.
CN3.7 Shopping centres For shopping centres and retail parks there must be adequate space to cater for each
and retail parks tenant and their potential recyclable waste volumes. Tenants that occupy a large
See criterion 1. proportion of the centre, i.e. ‘flagship tenants’, must have their own dedicated
compliant facilities. For smaller non-flagship tenant units, compliant central or common
facilities on-site or dedicated spaces for individual units will meet the assessment
criteria for this BREEAM issue.
Building specific
CN4 Home The leaflet must provide information on:

composting
How composting works and why it is important;
information
The materials that can be composted (e.g. raw vegetable peelings and fruit,
leaflet (multi-
shredded paper, tea bags, etc.); and
residential
Details of the operation and management plan for the communal
buildings)
composting scheme.
See criteria 4, 5, 6
and 7. Where a green/kitchen waste collection scheme is in operation, the information leaflet
provided by the Local Authority is sufficient to meet the information leaflet criteria.
CN4.1 Multi-residential: Where it is not possible to locate the recycling bins within a communal area, which is
supported living accessible to residents, for safety reasons (e.g. where the residents have mental health
facility problems and free access to these facilities would pose significant risk of self-harm or
harm to others) it is acceptable to locate them within a dedicated non-obtrusive
position accessible to staff only, but in close proximity to the areas where recyclable
waste material is generated.
Country specific
CN5 Country specific The following Standards or Building Regulations etc. are relevant for the assessment of
guidance the issue:
See criterion 3. England
For Healthcare assessments, where the criterion refers to the use of relevant NHS
guidelines for the country, use HTM 07-01 (England version).
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Accessible space
Accessible space is typically within 20m of a building entrance. Depending on the size of the building, site restrictions
or tenancy arrangements, it may not be possible for the facilities to be within 20m of a building entrance. In such
circumstances, judgement on whether the space is ‘accessible’ to the building occupants and vehicle collection must
be made.
Clinical waste
Waste derived from medical practices and defined as bodily fluids and wastes, drugs and medical equipment; and
other waste which, unless rendered safe, may prove hazardous or infectious to persons coming into contact with it.
Dedicated non-obstructive position

An easily accessible cupboard under the sink or any other cupboard in the kitchen, next to the storage or likely area for
storing non-recyclable waste, where practical. Where a kitchen cupboard location is not possible the bins can be
located near to the kitchen, in a utility room or connected garage, for example.
Flagship or anchor tenant

The largest and primary tenant within a retail development, typically department store-type retailers.
Waste compactor or baler

A machine that is designed to compress waste streams in order to improve storage and transport efficiency.
Other information
Recyclable storage
The following footprint dimensions (informed by the Metric handbook, Planning and design data) can act as a guide when
determining size and accessibility criteria for the recyclable storage space:
1. Compactor dimensions: about the size of one car parking bay; 4.8 x 2.4m
2. Skip: the footprint of an 8 and 12 cubic yard skip measures 3.4m x 1.8m, therefore allow a minimum of 2.0m width and
4.0m length or 8m²area for the storage and access of such containers
3. Wheeled bins: 360 litre = 0.86m x 0.62/660 L= 1.2m x 0.7m/1100 L = 1.28m x 0.98m
4. Roll-on-roll-off containers: allow a minimum of 6.1m x 2.4m
5. Vehicle access: the following are dimensions for lorry types that are typically used to collect waste. Therefore gate
height/widths should not be smaller than these measurements:
a. Dustcart: medium capacity; length = 7.4m Height = 4m width 3.1m
b. Skip lorry: length = 7m Height = 3.35m width 3.1m.
Consideration must also be given to any other types of vehicle requiring access to this area, e.g. lorries for roll on/off
containers.
Recycling bins
Individual recycling bins located at convenient locations throughout the building are necessary to maximise recycling rates.
Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes

1 No
Aim
To encourage the specification and fitting of floor and ceiling finishes selected by the building occupant and therefore avoid
unnecessary waste of materials.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Speculative floor and ceiling finishes
Office building types only

1. For tenanted areas (where the future occupant is not known), prior to full fit-out works, carpets, other floor finishes and
ceiling finishes have been installed in a show area only.
2. In a building developed for a specific occupant, that occupant has selected (or agreed to) the specified floor and ceiling
finishes.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Option 1- Shell only: This issue is not applicable.

assessment Option 2- Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
options.
Simple buildings
■ Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes Waste
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 General None.
Building specific
CN4 Office: Show area A show area could be either a floor plate or an individual office. However, to award
See criterion 1. this credit it must be less than 25% of the net lettable floor area.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
None.
Other information
None.
Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change

1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage measures taken to mitigate the impact of extreme weather conditions arising from climate
change over the lifespan of the building.
Assessment criteria
A number of BREEAM issues within the New Construction scheme contain assessment criteria which aim to support mitigation
of the impacts of extreme weather events arising from climate change. The main credit in this issue focuses on structural and
fabric resilience not covered in other issues. An Exemplary credit is awarded where a holistic approach on adaptation to
climate change has been covered, demonstrated by achieving credits in other issues.
One credit - Structural and fabric resilience

1. Conduct a climate change adaptation strategy appraisal for structural and fabric resilience by the end of Concept
Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), in accordance with the following approach:
a. Carry out a systematic (structural and fabric resilience specific) risk assessment to identify and evaluate the impact on
the building over its projected life cycle from expected extreme weather conditions arising from climate change and,
where feasible, mitigate against these impacts. The assessment should cover the following stages:
i. Hazard identification
ii. Hazard assessment
iii. Risk estimation
iv. Risk evaluation
v. Risk management.
Exemplary level criteria – Responding to climate change

A holistic approach to the design and construction of the current building's life cycle, to mitigate against the impacts of climate
change, is represented by the achievement of these criteria.
The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue:
2. Achievement of criterion 1, the structural and fabric resilience criterion in this issue, and the following criteria points or
credits:
Hea 04 Thermal comfort

(Link to Wst 05 issue: to prevent increasing risks of overheating)
Criterion 6 in the second credit of the Hea 04 issue has been achieved.
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

(Link to Wst 05 issue: to maximise energy efficiency contributing to low carbon emissions resulting from increasing energy
demands)
At least eight credits in this issue have been achieved.
■ Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change Waste
Ene 04 Low carbon design

(Link to Wst 05 issue: to maximise opportunities to avoid unnecessary carbon emissions)
The Passive design analysis credit in this issue has been achieved.
Wat 01 Water consumption

(Link to Wst 05: to minimise water demands in periods of drought)
A minimum of three credits in this issue have been achieved.
Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience

(Link to Wst 05 issue: to avoid increased risks of deterioration and higher maintenance demands)
Criterion 2 relating to material degradation in this issue has been achieved.
Pol 03 Surface water run-off

(Link to Pol 03: to minimise the risks of increased flood risk and surface water run-off affecting the site or others)
Flood risk – a minimum of one credit has been achieved.

Surface water run-off – two credits have been achieved.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Adaptation to climate change – structural fabric and resilience
Both options: Criterion 1 is applicable

Option 1 - Shell only: Criterion 2 is not applicable.
Option 2 - Shell and core: Criterion 2 is applicable
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable assessment criteria All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
General
CN3 Relevant bodies This includes but is not limited to the following:
See hazard identification item 1
Local authorities
under Methodology.
Statutory bodies e.g. Defra, EA, NIEA, SEPA etc
Technical bodies e.g. CIBSE, UKCIP.
Methodology
Hazard identification
1. Review the evidence/information from relevant bodies to identify and understand the expected impacts of increased
extreme weather events for climate change on the building.
2. Identify likely hazards (see Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change).
Hazard assessment
1. Identify the scale of the hazards identified.
Risk estimation
1. Identify the risk presented by these hazards to the building and the likely impact of the hazards taking into account the
following aspects as a minimum:
a. Structural stability
b. Structural robustness
c. Weather proofing and detailing
d. Material durability
e. Health and safety of building occupants and others
f. Impacts on building contents and business continuity.
Risk evaluation
1. Evaluate the potential impact of these risks on the building.
2. Determine the tolerable risk threshold.
3. Check the sensitivity of the risk assessment.
4. Identify areas where the risks are unacceptable in health and safety, life cycle assessment and financial terms.
Risk management
1. Identify risk reduction measures.
2. Mitigate the hazards as far as is practically feasible.
3. Adapt the design/specification to incorporate the measures identified by the risk assessment in the final design.
Evidence
Durability
The ability to withstand wear, pressure, or damage.
Hazard
A hazard is a situation or event which has the potential to cause harm. It may be an accidental or a malicious action,
insufficient strength or resistance, or excessive deviation from intended limits.
Resilience
■ Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change Waste
The ability of a building or structural system or material to withstand an accidental or exceptional loading or other
incident without experiencing an undue degree of damage or decrease in performance, such that progressive
collapse, loss of performance or disproportionate degree of damage occurs.
Structural and fabric resilience

BREEAM defines this as the ability of a structure to withstand an increased burden of weather/increase
pressure/hazards associated with climate change. Examples of increased pressures/hazards include:
Solar radiation
Temperature variation
Water/moisture
Wind
Precipitation e.g. rain and snow
Extreme weather conditions: high wind speeds, flooding, driving rain, snow, rainwater ponding
Subsidence/ground movement.
Systematic risk assessment

A structured approach to help professionals identify, evaluate and manage risk, where the reduction of the risks
identified is integral to the process.
It includes:
1. Identifying the hazards
2. Eliminating the hazards, as far as reasonably practicable
3. Reducing the risks from each hazard, as far as reasonably practicable
4. Developing the building design to be robust.
Other information
This new BREEAM issue aims to encourage and support efforts to mitigate the future impacts of climate change on the
building by considering a number of relevant factors during the design stages. BRE have avoided being overly prescriptive
with the assessment criteria in order to allow a degree of flexibility in its application and demonstrating compliance,
recognising that this is a complex environmental and design issue where solutions and approaches are largely influenced by
site location and building specific factors. This places a greater emphasis on the BREEAM assessor to use their judgement in
determining whether the project team and the building design has met the aim and intent of the credit and its criteria, using
appropriate project information to back their judgement. BRE will endorse the BREEAM assessor's judgement through the
Quality Assurance audit where a reasonable justification to award the credit on the basis of project team actions and
proposed design solutions is evident. BRE would welcome any feedback on the application of this assessment issue to assist
with the evolution of the criteria and inclusion of additional guidance on compliance in future BREEAM versions.
The National Adaptation Programme1 report has been drawn up by the government, industry and other non-government
organisations working together. It contains a mix of policies and actions to help the UK to adapt successfully to future
weather conditions, by dealing with the risks and making the most of the opportunities.
The book "Design for climate change"2 describes buildings and issues as part of the Design for Future Climate, Adapting
Buildings programme, the largest programme focusing on the climate change adaptation of buildings in the UK. This
programme from the Technology Strategy Board (TSB) aims to improve the climate resilience of building projects. The book
has guidance on construction, including structural stability.
The BRE report 3, Potential implications of climate change in the built environment, discusses climate change adaptation
strategies, including some for structural resilience.
1National Adaptation Programme: Making the country resilient to a changing climate. Defra; 2013
2Gething B, Puckett K, Design for climate change. RIBA; 2013
3Graves HM, Phillipson MC, Potential implications of climate change in the built environment. BRE Centre for Environmental
Engineering: BRE East Kilbride; 2000
Wst 06 Functional adaptability

1 No
Aim
To recognise and encourage measures taken to accommodate future changes of use of the building over its lifespan.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Functional adaptability

1. A building-specific functional adaptation strategy study has been undertaken by the client and design team by Concept
Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), which includes recommendations for measures to be incorporated to facilitate
future adaptation.
2. Functional adaptation measures have been adopted in the design by Technical Design stage (RIBA Stage 4 or equivalent)
in accordance with the functional adaptation strategy recommendations, where practical and cost effective. Omissions
have been justified in writing to the assessor.

None
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment
criteria
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
■ Wst 06 Functional adaptability Waste
CN3 Functional This should consider:

adaptation 1. The potential for major refurbishment, including replacing the façade.
strategy study 2. Design aspects that facilitate the replacement of all major plant within the life of
the building, e.g. panels in floors/walls that can be removed without affecting
the structure, providing lifting beams and hoists.
3. The degree of adaptability of the internal environment to accommodate
changes in working practices.
4. The degree of adaptability of the internal physical space and external shell to
accommodate change in-use.
5. The extent of accessibility to local services, such as local power, data
infrastructure etc.
CN3.1 Functional The implementation will be specific to the building and scope of the project, but
adaptation information should be made available to the assessor covering:
implementation 1. The feasibility for multiple/alternative building uses and area functions, e.g.
related to structural design of the building.
2. Options for multiple building uses and area functions based on design details,
e.g. modularity.
3. Routes and methods for major plant replacement, e.g. networks and
connections have flexibility and capacity for expansion.
4. Accessibility for local plant and service distribution routes, e.g. detailed
information on building conduits and connections infrastructure.
5. The potential for the building to be extended, horizontally and/or vertically.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Ref Interim design stage Final post construction stage
All Functional adaptation strategy and As per interim design stage.

implementation plan report.
Building functional adaptation
Work to an existing building that responds to a required change of use or requirements and goes beyond
maintenance and repairs. These changes solve functional problems and could provide significant improvements. The
functional adaptation works could include alterations, conversions and/or extensions.
Functional adaptability
The ability of a building to be adapted for a change in operational requirements within the same building type or for
use as a different building type.
Other information
The Health Technical Memorandum 07-07 1 includes guidance on future-proofing healthcare buildings.
1Health Technical Memorandum 07-07: Sustainable health and social care buildings. Department of Health; 2013
Land Use and Ecology ■ Land Use & Ecology
Land Use and Ecology
Category overview
Fully fitted 10% Shell only 13% Shell and core 11% LE 03
Summary
This category encourages sustainable land use, habitat protection and creation, and improvement of long term biodiversity
for the building’s site and surrounding land. Issues in this section relate to the reuse of brownfield sites or those of low
ecological value, mitigation and enhancement of ecology and long term biodiversity management.

LE 01 Site selection 2 Recognition of the reuse of previously developed and

contaminated land where appropriate remediation has taken
place.
LE 02 Ecological 2 Recognition of the use of sites of ‘low ecological value’, and the
value of site protection of existing features prior to and during site operations.
and protection
of ecological
features
LE 03 Minimising 2 Recognition of steps taken to avoid impacts on existing site

impact on ecology.
existing site
ecology
LE 04 Enhancing site 2 Recognition of steps taken to enhance site ecology through the
ecology advice of a suitably qualified ecologist.
LE 05 Long term 2 The production of a long term landscape and habitat management
impact on plan to encourage measures that improve the sites long term
biodiversity biodiversity.
Land Use & BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Ecology
LE 01 Site selection
2 No
Aim
To encourage the use of previously occupied and/or contaminated land and avoid land which has not been previously
disturbed.
Assessment criteria
Previously occupied land (1 credit)

Contaminated land (1 credit)
One credit - Previously occupied land

1. At least 75% of the proposed development’s footprint is on an area of land which has previously been occupied (see
definition in the Additional information section).
One credit - Contaminated land

2. A contaminated land professional's site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal has deemed land within the site to
be affected by contamination. The site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal have identified:
a. The degree of contamination
b. The contaminant sources/types
c. The options for remediating sources of contamination which present an unacceptable risk.
3. The client or principal contractor confirms that remediation of the site will be carried out in accordance with the
remediation strategy and its implementation plan as recommended by the contaminated land professional.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
■ LE 01 Site selection Land Use & Ecology
options.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Temporary works Undeveloped areas of the site to be used for temporary works (e.g. temporary
See criterion 1. offices/parking, material/machinery storage) must be considered as development on
undeveloped land and therefore included in the calculations unless they have been
defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ (LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection
of ecological features).
CN3.1 Infill development New buildings developed within the boundary of existing sites do not automatically
See criterion 1. comply with the reuse of land criteria. At least 75% of the land on which the new
building will be sited must meet the definition of 'previously occupied' (for prisons,
refer to the building type specific compliance note below).
CN3.2 Prior The credit for use of contaminated land can only be awarded where remediation has
decontamination taken place to enable development of the site for the assessed building, or a larger
See criteria 2 and phased development that includes the assessed building (see below). The credit is not
3. achievable for instances where historical remediation and development of the site has
occurred outside the scope of the current development proposals.
CN3.3 Large sites split Where contamination of a large site has been remediated and has then been
into smaller plots packaged up into smaller plots of land for individual buildings (possibly as part of a
See criteria 2 and phased development strategy), the credit can be awarded regardless of the plot
3. location of the assessed building within the wider development plan. This is on the
condition that the site could not have been developed without remediation work
taking place.
CN3.4 Health and safety Contaminated land that has been decontaminated solely for health and safety
related reasons (rather than for the specific purpose of re-development) does not comply.
decontamination
See criteria 2 and
3.
CN3.5 Asbestos Where the only remediation required is the removal of asbestos within an existing
See criteria 2 and building fabric, the site cannot be classified as contaminated land. However, where
3. asbestos is found to be present in the ground this will be classed as contamination for
the purposes of assessing this issue.
Ecology
Building specific
CN4 Education Development of a playing field within the construction zone can be counted as
(schools only) development on previously occupied land only if an equivalent area of playing field is
Playing fields reinstated within one year of the completed construction works; and where such
See criterion 1. reinstatement will not encroach on land of high ecological value as defined in BREEAM
issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features
CN4.1 Prisons All land within a secure perimeter fence on an existing prison sites can be classified as
See criterion 1. previously occupied land. Therefore assessments of buildings located within this area
will achieve the credit.
If the secure perimeter fence of a prison is being extended to accommodate the
proposed building, or the proposed building is located on a completely new site, then
the building must comply with the assessment criteria defined above.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
3 A copy of the remediation strategy and As per interim design stage

implementation plan
Construction zone
Refer to BREEAM issue Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection
Contaminated land professional

An individual that holds a degree or equivalent qualification in chemistry, environmental science/management, earth
sciences, civil engineering or a related subject, and has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last
five years) in site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal. Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical
knowledge of site investigation methodologies and understanding of remediation techniques and national
legislation on the subject; as well as acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for remediation.
Land affected by contamination
■ LE 01 Site selection Land Use & Ecology
Land that could not be legally or safely developed/built on to the proposed end use without the remediation of
contamination. Contamination is defined as any substance or agent in, or on the ground within the construction zone,
which presents an unacceptable risk to human health, property and/or the environment. For the purposes of BREEAM,
substances or agents that could present unacceptable contamination risks are defined as those that act as a barrier
to the development of land, which could include certain plant species such as, but not limited to, Japanese knotweed
and giant hogweed.
Previously occupied land

For the purposes of this issue BREEAM defines previously occupied land as that which is or was occupied by a
permanent structure, including any associated fixed surface infrastructure (the definition is based on the National
Planning Policy Framework1 definition of Previously Developed Land).
The definition excludes:
1. Land that is or has been occupied by agricultural or forestry buildings.
2. Land that has been developed for minerals extraction or waste disposal by landfill purposes where provision for
restoration has been made through development control procedures.
3. Land inbuilt-up areas such as parks, recreation grounds and allotments which, although they may feature paths,
pavilions and other buildings, have not been previously occupied.
4. Land that was previously occupied but where the remains of the permanent structure or fixed surface structure
have blended into the landscape in the process of time (to the extent that it can reasonably be considered as part
of the natural surroundings), typically over a period of more than fifty years.
Proposed development
Any development (building, hard landscaping, car park and access roads) that falls within the boundary of the
assessed site.
Remediation
Any activity undertaken to prevent, minimise, remedy or mitigate the risk caused by contaminated land to human
health, the environment or local resources such as sources of potable water.
Other information
None.
1National Planning Policy Framework. www.gov.uk/government/publications/national-planning-policy-framework--2
Ecology
LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of
ecological features
2 No
Aim
To encourage development on land that already has limited value to wildlife and to protect existing ecological features from
substantial damage during site preparation and completion of construction works.
Assessment criteria
Ecological value of site (1 credit)

Protection of ecological features (1 credit)
One credit - Ecological value of site

1. Land within the assessment zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ using either:
a. The BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value (see Checklists and tables below);
OR
b. A Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) who has identified the land as being of ‘low ecological value’ within an ecological
assessment report, based on a site survey.
One credit - Protection of ecological features

2. All existing features of ecological value (see Relevant definitions) within the assessmentzone are adequately protected
from damage during clearance, site preparation and construction activities in line with BS42020: 2013 1.
3. In all cases, the principal contractor is required to construct ecological protection recommended by the Suitably Qualified
Ecologist (SQE), prior to any preliminary site construction or preparation works (e.g. clearing of the site or erection of
temporary site facilities).

BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value
If the answer to all questions in the checklist is ‘no’, the land can be defined as having a low ecological value and the credit
awarded. Should any of the questions be answered ‘yes’, the credit can only be awarded on confirmation from a Suitably
Qualified Ecologist that the site is of low ecological value.
The checklist should be completed by either the BREEAM assessor, using appropriate evidence submitted by the design team
or completed by the design team and submitted to the assessor along with appropriate supporting evidence. The answers
to the checklist must be based on an evaluation of the site prior to any site clearance or construction activities (refer to LE 02
Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features for further details).
■ LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features Land Use & Ecology
Table 55 BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value
ID Question Yes No
Q1 Has the Planning Authority required that an ecological survey or statement be ❑ ❑

prepared?
Q2 Is the development within 2km of a Special Area of Conservation (SAC), Special ❑ ❑

Protection Area (SPA) or Ramsar site?
1. www.natureonthemap.org.uk
2. www.magic.gov.uk
3. Local Plan Proposals Map.
Q3 Is the development within 500m of a Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) ❑ ❑

1. www.natureonthemap.org.uk
2. www.magic.gov.uk
3. Local Plan Proposals Map.
Q4 Are any of the following habitats present on, or within 100m of the assessment ❑ ❑
zone?
1. Broad-leaved woodland*
2. Water courses (rivers, streams or canals)**
3. Wetlands (ponds, lakes, marshland, fenland, reed bed)
4. Flower-rich meadow/grassland
5. Heathland (habitat/plants that thrive on acidic soils, such as heather and
gorse).
Q5 Are any of the following features present within the assessment zone? ❑ ❑
1. Trees of ecological value (see definition of 'Features of ecological value')
2. Mature hedgerow (field hedgerows over 1m tall and 0.5m wide)***
3. Existing buildings (occupied or derelict) with either pitched tile, slate or
shingle roofs, lofts, wall hanging tiles, weatherboarding or dense climbing
plants, soffits and cellars, basements, ice houses etc.
Notes:
* The Countryside Survey defines woodland as ‘having over 25% canopy cover of trees and shrubs, over a metre high’.
Broad-leaved woodland should be taken to mean broad-leaved, mixed and Yew woodland.
** The Countryside Survey defines the broad habitats of rivers and streams as running watercourses ranging from small
headwater streams to large rivers. This broad habitat, along with wetlands, includes the open water itself and the
vegetation along the water’s edge.
*** The Countryside Survey defines a hedge as ‘a line of woody vegetation that has been subject to management so that
trees no longer take their natural shape.’
http://www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk
Compliance notes
Shell and core
Ecology
options.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 No features of Where there are no features of ecological value, the credit for the protection of
ecological value ecological features can only be awarded if the assessment zone is defined as ‘land of
See criterion 2. low ecological value’.
CN3.1 Use of a Suitably Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) is employed and has, using their
Qualified Ecologist professional judgement, defined the site as land of low ecological value, this
See criterion 1. assessment/judgement overrides any assessment determined using the BREEAM
checklist for defining land of low ecological value. The Suitably Qualified Ecologist must
base their findings on data collected from a site visit conducted at appropriate time(s)
of the year, when different plant and animal species are evident. The content of the
Ecology Report is to be representative of the existing site’s ecology prior to the
commencement of initial site preparation works (i.e. before RIBA Stage 5
Construction). Where the ecologist has not visited the site at the appropriate times
the credit cannot be awarded (except in the circumstances indicated below in the
Compliance note 'Site clearance prior to purchase of the site'). See Additional
information for the BREEAM definition of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE).
CN3.2 Features of little or If a Suitably Qualified Ecologist has confirmed that a feature present on the site has
no ecological little or no ecological value (see Relevant Definitions), or where a tree is deemed to
value create a significant danger to the public or occupants by a statutory body or qualified
See criterion 2. arboriculturalist, then that feature may be exempt from the 'protection of ecological
features' requirement of this issue.
CN3.3 Prior removal of If features of ecological value have been removed as part of the site clearance
features of activities then the development cannot achieve the credits, even if they are to be
ecological value replaced as part of a new soft landscape strategy.
CN3.4 Site clearance For sites cleared prior to purchase of the site and less than five years before
prior to purchase assessment, a Suitably Qualified Ecologist should estimate the site’s ecological value
of the site immediately prior to clearance using available desktop information (including aerial
See criterion 1. photography) and the landscape type/area surrounding the site. Where it is not
possible for the ecologists to determine that the site was of low ecological value prior
to the site clearance then the credits must be withheld, i.e. where there is no evidence
and therefore justification for awarding the credits. For sites cleared more than five
years ago, the ecological value of the site is to be based on the current situation on the
basis that within five years, ecological features would have started to re-establish
themselves and therefore act as an indicator of the site’s ecological value.
CN3.5 Verification of a Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is verifying an Ecology Report produced by
report written by another ecologist who does not meet the SQE criteria, they must, as a minimum,
an ecologist not review the report and confirm in writing that they have found it to:
meeting the 1. Represent sound industry practice.
BREEAM SQE 2. Report and recommend correctly, truthfully and objectively.
criteria 3. Be appropriate given the local site conditions and scope of works proposed.
See criterion 1b. 4. Avoid invalid, biased and exaggerated statements.
Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with
the definition of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is required.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
1 Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is not As per interim design stage.

employed:
BREEAM checklist for defining land of low
ecological value.
Assessment zone
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the assessment zone is defined as any land on the site which is being developed
(and therefore disturbed) for buildings, hard standing, soft landscaping, site access, plus a 3m wide zone measured
outward from the boundary around these areas irrespective of site boundary. It also includes any areas used for
Ecology
temporary site storage and buildings.

If it is not known exactly where buildings, hardstanding, site access and temporary storage will be located it must be
assumed that the construction zone is the entire site.
Ecology related subject

Depending on the ecological content (minimum 60%), the following degrees might be considered relevant: Ecology,
Biological Sciences, Zoology, Botany, Countryside Management, Environmental Sciences, Marine and Freshwater
Management, Earth Sciences, Agriculture, Forestry, Geography, Landscape Management.
Features of ecological value

Features requiring protection during site clearance and construction in accordance with BS 42020: 2013 to maintain
their presence and ecological value, which include as a minimum:
1. Trees determined to be of value using one of the following measures:
a. More than 10 years old (or where age is unknown where the trunk diameter is over 100mm).
b. Tree of significant ecological value (as defined by BS 5837: 2012 2 and confirmed by the Suitably Qualified
Ecologist or qualified arboriculturalist).
2. Hedges and natural areas requiring protection.
3. Watercourses and wetland areas.
Note: Where a tree is deemed to create a significant danger to the public or occupants by a statutory body or
qualified arboriculturalist, then that feature may be exempt from the 'protection of ecological features' requirement
of this issue.
Peer review
A peer review is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current
full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of
conduct and professional ethics.
Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE)

An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of
compliance with BREEAM:
1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification (e.g. N/SVQ level 5) in ecology or a related subject.
2. Is a practising ecologist, with a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such
experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting ecology in relation to
construction and the built environment including; acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for
ecological protection, enhancement and mitigation measures. Examples of relevant experience are: ecological
impact assessments; Preliminary Ecological Appraisals (PEA); Phase 2 habitat and fauna surveys; and habitat
creation.
3. Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review. Full members of the following
organisations, who meet the above criteria, are deemed Suitably Qualified Ecologists for the purposes of BREEAM:
a. Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM)
b. Chartered Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (CIEEM)
c. Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA)
d. Landscape Institute (LI)
e. The Institution of Environmental Sciences (IES).
Other information
Very often there is the potential for a site to increase its biodiversity value through appropriate design and management,
regardless of whether enhancing biodiversity is required to gain planning consent. This BREEAM assessment issue provides
the opportunity to reward those projects that contribute to protecting and enhancing biodiversity, improve living
environments and meet environmental objectives.
While not mandatory, BREEAM recommends that a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is appointed to ensure that a project maximises
biodiversity gains. Although a large number of developments are not required to undertake formal ecological assessments
as part of the planning process because of the nature of the existing site, they may have potential to be of biodiversity value.
Verification of this is best achieved by the appointment of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
The Suitably Qualified Ecologist’s recommendations may impact on specifications worked-up by other design team
members, such as landscape architects or drainage engineers. BREEAM recommends that collaborative input between the
ecologist and relevant professionals is sought from the concept stage of the development to highlight opportunities and
constraints and allow effective integration of these aspects into the ecologist’s recommendations.
Organisations and institutes, including the Chartered Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (CIEEM) and the
Association of Wildlife Trust Consultancies (AWTC), provide lists of ecologists working within a particular region that may
meet the SQE requirements.
Relating Ecology Reports to BREEAM

Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM is provided in Guidance Note GN13.
1BS 42020: 2013: Biodiversity - Code of Practice for Planning and Development, BSI 2013.
2BS 5837: 2012: Trees in relation to design, demolition and construction - Recommendations, BSI 2012.
Ecology
LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology

2 Yes
Aim
To minimise the impact of a building development on existing site ecology.
Assessment criteria
Two credits - Change in ecological value 1

1. The change in ecological value of the site is equal to or greater than zero plant species, i.e. no negative change, using the
methods outlined in either (a) or (b) below:
a. Determine the following information and input this data in to the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator:
i. The broad habitat type(s) that define the landscape of the assessed site in its existing pre-developed state and
proposed state (see Table 56 ).
ii. Area (m²) of the existing and proposed broad habitat types.
OR
b. Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) has been appointed and, based on their site survey, they confirm the
following and either the assessor or ecologist inputs this data in to the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator:
i. The broad habitat types that define the landscape of the assessed site in its existing pre-developed state and
proposed state.
ii. Area (m²) of the existing and proposed broad habitat plot types.
iii. Average total taxon (plant species) richness within each habitat type.
One credit - Change in ecological value 2

2. Where the change in ecological value of the site is less than zero but equal to or greater than minus nine plant species i.e.
a minimal change, use the methods outlined in either 1(a) or (b) above.

Table 56 Broad habitat types (Source: Countryside Survey 2007)
Broad habitat type Description
Acid grassland Vegetation dominated by grasses and herbs on a range of lime-deficient soils which
have been derived from acidic bedrock or from superficial deposits such as sands
and gravels. They characteristically include a range of calcifuge or ‘lime-avoiding’
plants.
■ LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology Land Use & Ecology
Arable and horticultural Includes all arable crops such as different types of cereal and vegetable crops,
together with orchards and more specialist operations such as market gardening
and commercial flower growing. Freshly ploughed land, fallow areas, short term set-
aside and annual grass leys are also included in this category.
Boundary and linear features This habitat includes a diverse range of linearly arranged landscape features such as
hedgerows, lines of trees (whether they are part of a hedgerow or not), walls, stone
and earth banks, grass strips and dry ditches. These features may occur separately or
in combinations forming multi-element boundaries. This habitat type also includes
some of the built components of the rural landscape, including roads, tracks and
railways. The narrow strips of semi-natural vegetation along verges or cuttings are
also included.
Bracken Stands of vegetation greater than 0.25ha in extent which are dominated by a
continuous canopy cover (> 95% cover) of bracken (Pteridium aquilinum) at the
height of the growing season.
Built-up and gardens Covers urban and rural settlements, farm buildings, caravan parks and other man-
made built structures such as industrial estates, retail parks, waste and derelict
ground, urban parkland and urban transport infrastructure. It also includes domestic
gardens and allotments.
This category has been split in to three individual broad habitat categories for the
purpose of BREEAM:
1. Gardens, allotments and urban parkland
2. Built-up (maintained buildings and infrastructure)
3. Derelict land (where the land was previously used for major historical industrial
use or development).
This split is to reflect the differing impact of development in these types of habitats.
Broad-leaved, mixed and yew This form of woodland is dominated by trees that are more than 5m high when
woodland mature, which form a distinct, although sometimes open, canopy with a cover of
greater than 20%. It includes stands of native broad-leaved trees (such as oak, ash
and beech), non-native broad-leaved trees (such as sycamore and horse chestnut),
and yew trees, where the percentage cover of these trees in the stand exceeds 20%
of the total cover of the trees present. Scrub vegetation, where the woody
component tends to be mainly shrubs (usually less than 5m high), is included if the
cover of woody species is greater than 30%.
Calcareous grassland Vegetation dominated by grasses and herbs on shallow, well-drained soils, which are
alkaline, as a result of the weathering of chalk, limestone or other types of base-rich
rock. They characteristically include a range of calcicoles or ‘lime-loving’ plants.
Coniferous woodland Dominated by trees that are more than 5m high when mature, which form a distinct,
although sometimes open, canopy which has a cover of greater than 20%. It includes
stands of both native conifers (Scots pine but not yew) and non-native conifers (such
as larch and Sitka spruce) where the percentage cover of these trees in the stand
exceeds 80% of the total cover of the trees present.
Ecology
Mixed woodland This is not a category in its own right, but has been included separately by BRE Global
for clarification.
Many areas of woodland contain both broad-leaved and coniferous trees. There is
not a separate Broad habitat type for mixed woodland. Instead where mixtures occur
they are assigned to the broad-leaved, mixed and yew woodland habitat type if the
proportion of conifers is less than 80%.
The separation of coniferous from broad-leaved, mixed and yew habitat is applied at
a stand or sub-compartment level within large woodlands to avoid areas that are
predominantly coniferous being treated as mixed because they are part of a larger
wood, of which 20% consists of pure broad-leaved trees. Therefore, most areas of
mixed woodland that are assigned to the broad-leaved, mixed and yew woodland
habitat type would normally have much more than 20% broad-leaved or yew trees.
Dwarf shrub heath Vegetation that has a greater than 25% cover of plant species from the heath family
or dwarf gorse species. It generally occurs on well-drained, nutrient-poor, acid soils.
Improved grassland Occurs on fertile soils and is characterised by the dominance of a few fast-growing
species, such as rye grass and white clover. These grasslands are typically used for
grazing and silage, but they can also be managed for recreational purposes. They are
often intensively managed using fertiliser and weed control treatments, and may also
be ploughed as part of the normal rotation of arable crops but if so, they are only
included in this Broad habitat type if they are more than one year old.
Inland rock Habitat types that occur on both natural and artificial exposed rock surfaces, such as
inland cliffs, caves, screes and limestone pavements, as well as various forms of
excavations and waste tips, such as quarries and quarry waste.
Neutral grassland Found on soils that are neither very acid nor alkaline. They support different types of
vegetation communities compared to acid and calcareous grasslands in that they do
not contain calcifuge (‘lime-avoiding’) plants which are found on acid soils, or calcicole
(lime-loving) plants which are found on calcareous soils. Unimproved or semi-
improved Neutral grasslands may be managed as hay meadows, pastures or for
silage. They differ from Improved grassland in that they are less fertile and contain a
wider range of herb and grass species. Usually the cover of rye grass is less than
about 25%.
Table 57 Inclusive analysis of average total taxon richness by broad habitat in Fields and Other Main Land Cover Parcels plots
in Great Britain.
Broad habitat type Previously Previously developed land (within broad habitat type)** & ****
undeveloped (Time period that the site has been unoccupied/unmaintained and
land therefore derelict)
Average total taxon (plant species) richness*
< 5 Years 5-10 Years 10 - 20 Years 20 -

30+Years
Broad habitat type Previously Previously developed land (within broad habitat type)** & ****
undeveloped (Time period that the site has been unoccupied/unmaintained and
land therefore derelict)
Average total taxon (plant species) richness*
Acid grassland 19.58 0 5.87 14.69 19.58
Arable and horticultural land 10.25 - - - -
Boundary and linear features 15.42 - - - -
Bracken 19.29 - - - -
Built-up (buildings and - 0 - - -

infrastructure)**&***
Calcareous grassland 43.02 0 12.91 32.27 43.02
Coniferous woodland 14.05 - - - -
Derelict land** - 0 6.00 14.99 19.99
Gardens, allotments and 19.99 0 6.00 14.99 19.99

urban parkland***
Dwarf shrub heath 15.87 0 4.76 11.90 15.87
Improved grassland 14.28 0 4.28 10.71 14.28
Inland rock 16.74 - - - -
Mixed, broad-leaved and yew 20.91 - - - -

woodland
Neutral grassland 20.44 0 6.13 15.33 20.44
Source: Acknowledgement - Countryside Survey data owned by NERC – Centre for Ecology and Hydrology. Countryside
Survey © Database Right/Copyright NERC– Centre for Ecology and Hydrology. All rights reserved.
*Total taxon richness is higher plant species only, no bryophytes (non flowering plants). Figures are based on the average
species richness per 200m²plot.
**The derelict land and built-up figures are not from the Countryside Survey data (see Additional information).
***BRE Global has split the 'Built-up and gardens' Countryside Survey category into these headings to reflect the differing
impact of building on these types of land.
****The ecological value of derelict sites is time dependent; a linear scale has been used to determine intermediate values
between zero ecological value, where development occurs within 5 years from the end of occupation and maintenance
works, and the value at 30 years based on the full species richness for the relevant broad habitat. This presents a
minimum figure which can be amended on the advice of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist and their site survey.
Ecology
Compliance notes
Shell and core
options.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Assessment of a Where the assessment is of a single building that forms part of a larger development
single and the soft landscape and ecological features form a common part of the whole site,
development on a for the purpose of assessing this issue the broad habitat types for the entire site must
larger site be used.
CN3.1 Infill Where a new building is an infill on an existing occupied site, then the construction zone
developments on for the new building would be the area of site assessed for the purposes of this issue.
existing occupied
site
CN3.2 Site clearance Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological
prior to purchase features – Compliance notes
of the site
CN3.3 Green roofs/walls The contribution of plant species on a green roof can only be incorporated within the
See criterion 1b. calculation where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist has been appointed to advise on
suitable plant species for the roof.
Presently green walls cannot be considered compliant within this BREEAM issue due to
concerns over high maintenance requirements which are often not self-
supporting/sustainable, resulting in deterioration of these plants. If the assessor feels
that the green wall specified meets the aims of this issue and will be self-sustaining,
details can be sent to BRE Global for consideration. Ground planted plants trained up a
framework supported by the building would be acceptable (confirmed by the SQE) as
these are not so dependent on systems and maintenance.
Methodology
Calculating the change in ecological value for a site
The change in ecological value is determined by measuring the diversity (species richness and cover) of plants on the site
immediately before site clearance/preparation and after construction of the assessed development. The ecological value is
expressed as an area-weighted average of plant species richness for the site’s broad habitat types. This enables BREEAM to
use plant species as an indicator of the development’s impact on the site’s existing ecological value.
A simple example of the calculation is outlined below.
1. Calculate the ecological value of a previously developed existing site:
A 2065m²existing site consists of the following types of land and, using data from the table above, plant species richness:
1. a. 1865m²hard landscape = 0 species

b. 200m²urban parkland = 19.99 species
The ecological value of the site in its existing condition is calculated as follows, for each broad habitat type;
Number of species on broad habitat type x broad habitat type area as % of total area.
Therefore, for the example site:
1. a. Hard landscape: {(0 species x (1865m²/2065m²)} = 0

b. Urban parkland: {(19.99 species x (200m²/2065m²)} = 1.94
c. Ecological value of the existing site = 0 + 1.94 = 1.94
Calculate the ecological value of the site in its proposed, post-developed state
The 2065m²post construction-site consists of the following types of land:
a. 1375m²of building = 0 species.

b. 550m²of hard landscape = 0 species
c. 140m²has remained as urban parkland = 19.99 species
The ecological value of the proposed site is as follows:
a. Building: {(0 species x (1375m²/2065m²)} = 0

b. Hard landscape: {(0 species x (550m²/2065m²)} = 0
c. Urban parkland: {(19.99 species x (140m²/2065m²)} = 1.36
d. Ecological value of the proposed site = 0 + 0 + 1.36 = 1.36
The ecological impact is the difference between the two ecological values:
a. Change in ecological value: 1.36 (after) – 1.94 (before) = - 0.58
Therefore, as the ecological value has decreased by no less than minus nine, for this example one credit can be awarded.
Evidence
Ecology
1, 2 Where relevant: As per interim design stage.

A completed copy of the For large mixed use/multi-building developments, where the whole site has not
BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 been completed and ecological enhancements have not yet been added, or
calculator where features are being added at a later date in an appropriate planting
season:
Evidence from the client or principal contractor confirming planting will be
completed within 18 months from completion of the development.
1, 2 Documentary evidence As per interim design stage

supporting the data
used to complete the
Calculator tool.
Average total taxon (plant species richness)

The ecological value of a site expressed as an area weighted average of plant species richness for a site's broad
habitat types.
Note: BREEAM uses plant species richness as an indicative measure of ecological value of the assessed site and
therefore an indication of ecological impact resulting from its development.
Assessment zone
Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features.

Other information
See LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features ‘Other information’ for information that also applies to
LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology.
Where green roofs are specified The GRO Green Roof Code1 provides guidance on green roof design, installation and
maintenance and maximising their environmental benefits.
Countryside Survey (2007) data

The data used in this BREEAM issue has been obtained from the Countryside Survey 2007 tables;
www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk
Broad habitat definitions have been sourced from: www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk
Some of the Countryside Survey broad habitat data have not been used within this BREEAM issue either because the broad
habitat supports no taxon richness or because it is unlikely that buildings will be constructed within these habitat types e.g.
bog, fen etc.
BREEAM assumptions
In order to use the Countryside Survey data within BREEAM, BRE Global has made the following assumptions:
1. Built-up (maintained buildings and hard landscaping) have a plant species richness of zero.
2. The previously developed land category is relevant for derelict sites within a broad habitat type where plant species
found in that habitat are likely to reclaim the site if left to do so over a defined period of time. BRE Global has assumed
this is the case for land found within the grassland, heath, derelict, gardens, allotments and urban parkland habitats. It
has not been assumed for other categories as BRE Global is unable to confirm an appropriate period over which
planting will re-establish itself on derelict land within these other broad habitat types.
3. A period of 5 to 10, 10 to 20 and 20 to 30 year’s dereliction is used; the species richness figures against each period for
a particular habitat type are based on a re-establishment rate of 30% of richness, 75% and 100% respectively.
4. BRE Global has split the ‘Built-up and gardens’ category from the Countryside Survey into ‘Gardens, allotments and urban
parkland’, ‘Derelict’ and ‘Built-up’ habitat types. This split is to reflect the differing impact of building on this type of land.
1The GRO Green Roof Code: Green Roof Code of Practice for the UK 2014, Groundwork Sheffield.
Ecology
LE 04 Enhancing site ecology

Aim
To encourage actions taken to enhance the ecological value of the site as a result of development.
Assessment criteria
Ecologist's report and recommendations (1 credit)

Increase in ecological value (1 credit)
Simple buildings specific (1 credit)
One credit - Ecologist's report and recommendations

(Except buildings on HM Prison sites where two credits are available for compliance with criteria 1, 2 and 3)
1. A suitably qualified ecologist (SQE) has been appointed by the client or their project representative by the end of the
Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to advise on enhancing the ecology of the site at an early stage.
2. The SQE has provided an Ecology Report with appropriate recommendations for the enhancement of the site’s ecology
at Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). The report is based on a site visit/survey by the SQE (see also
CN3.1).
3. The early stage advice and recommendations of the Ecology Report for the enhancement of site ecology have been, or
will be, implemented in the final design and build.
One credit - Increase in ecological value

(All building types except those on HM prison sites)
4. The criteria of the first credit are met.

5. The recommendations of the Ecology Report for the enhancement of site ecology have been implemented in the final
design and build, and the SQE confirms that this will result in an increase in ecological value of the site, with an increase of
six plant species or greater (refer also to Compliance note CN3.5 for alternative means of compliance).
6. The increase in plant species has been calculated using the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator, using actual plant species
numbers.
One credit - Simple buildings only (see also CN2)

7. The project team has sought recommendations from recognised ‘local’ ecological expertise and generic guidance in the
form of published guidance documents, information leaflets to inform the adoption of locally relevant ecological
measures that enhance the ecological value of the site. These measures may include:
a. Planting of native species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife
b. Adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no or low use of residual pesticides)
c. Installation of bird, bat and/or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site.
Only native floral species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife can be considered for the purpose
of enhancing the ecological value of the site.
■ LE 04 Enhancing site ecology Land Use & Ecology

None.
Compliance notes
Applicable assessment criteria
Shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Criteria 1 to 6 are applicable (2 credits)

assessment criteria OR
Criterion 7 is applicable (1 credit)
CN2.1 Local expertise The following clarifies the requirement for criterion 7.
See criterion 7. Guidance may be sought from bodies such as The Wildlife Trusts, the Royal
Horticultural Society, etc. to inform the adoption of locally relevant ecological
measures that enhance the ecological value of the site.
General
CN3 Early stage The role of the SQE during the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or
involvement from equivalent) will be to advise on early stage site layout and development density
the SQE decisions so that opportunities to enhance site ecology are maximised. SQE
See criterion 1. involvement at the Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent) will be
necessary to provide more detailed ecological recommendations (see Relevant
definitions) based on the outline design.
CN3.1 Timing of ecologist's The suitably qualified ecologist must carry out site surveys of existing site ecology,
survey and report on which their report is based (or to provide verification where the report is
See criterion 2. prepared by others) at the Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent) in
order to facilitate and maximise potential ecological enhancement.
Ecology
CN3.2 Appropriate Appropriate recommendations for enhancing the ecological value of the site are to
recommendations include, and go beyond, compliance criteria for all current EU and UK legislation
See criterion 2. relating to protected species and habitats.
These recommendations may include ecological recommendations as detailed in
the Relevant Definitions.
CN3.3 Guidance for Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New
ecologists and Construction 2011 Appendix F. This information will be available in a Guidance Note
assessors to be provided on the BREEAM website.
CN3.4 Plant species Native floral or plant species contributing to local, regional and/or UK Priority
See criterion 5. Species/Habitats, or those species specified by the SQE with a known attraction or
benefit to local wildlife can be considered for the purpose of increasing the number
of species on-site, as well as general enhancement. The planting area, density and
mixture of different species must be specified with input from both the SQE and the
landscape architect (where employed), to address the following three points:
The enhancement of the ecological value of the site

The best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of the
species within the habitat
Links to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary.
CN3.5 Increase in BREEAM uses plant species richness as an indicative measure of ecological value of
ecological value the assessed site. The second credit is achieved on the basis that an increase in
See criterion 5. ecological value post development is achieved, compared to the value of the site
pre-development. Where the SQE identifies that an increase in the ecological value of
the site can be achieved without meeting the target of an increase of six plant
species the credit can be awarded if there is clear justification which addresses the
following three points:
The enhancement of the ecological value of the site

The best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of the
species within the habitat
Links to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary.
The BREEAM assessor must rely on the professional judgement of the SQE when
determining compliance on this issue.
CN3.6 Infill construction on Where it is not possible to implement ecological enhancements within the
existing sites with construction zone due to overriding security issues, or where space for ecological
limited space for enhancements within the zone is severely limited, ecological enhancements made to
ecological other areas of the site can be taken into account and used to determine the number
enhancements or of BREEAM credits achieved. These enhancements must be made within the
overriding security boundary of the wider existing development and be planned and commissioned on
requirements a similar timescale to the assessed development. Examples of instances where this
See criterion 1. Compliance note may apply include new ‘infill’ building developments within existing
HM prison sites, further and higher education campuses, mental health
establishments, retail or business parks.
■ LE 04 Enhancing site ecology Land Use & Ecology
Methodology
For the methodology used to calculate the increase in plant species refer to the Methodology section in BREEAM issue LE 03
Minimising impact on existing site ecology – Methodology
Evidence
Criteria Interim design Final post construction stage

stage
6 A completed As per interim design stage.

copy of the For large mixed use or multi-building developments, where the whole site
BREEAM LE has not been completed and ecological enhancements have not yet been
03/LE 04 added, or where features are being added at a later date in an appropriate
calculator planting season: evidence from the client or principal contractor confirming
any planting will be completed within 18 months from completion of the
development.
6 Documentary As per interim design stage.

evidence
supporting the
data used to
complete the
Calculator tool.
7 Refer to generic For large mixed use or multi-building developments, where the whole site
evidence has not been completed and ecological enhancements have not yet been
requirement added, or where features are being added at a later date in an appropriate
above planting season: evidence from the client or principal contractor confirming
any planting will be completed within 18 months from completion of the
development.
Ecological recommendations
Ecological recommendations are defined as measures adopted to enhance the ecology of the site. Measures may
include but are not limited to:
1. The planting of locally appropriate native species or non-native species with a known attraction or benefit to local
wildlife.
2. The adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no, or low, use of residual pesticides).
3. The installation of bird, bat and/or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site.
Ecology
4. Development of a full Biodiversity Management Plan including avoiding clearance/works at key times of the year
(e.g. breeding seasons).
5. The proper integration, design and maintenance of Sustainable Drainage systems (SuDS) (such as rain gardens),
green roofs, green walls, community orchards, community allotments etc.

Other information
Flora Locale (www.floralocale.org) may be a useful site for finding suppliers of British flora.
Biological Records Centres and the National Biological Network collate data on species findings for the UK. Design teams,
assessors and ecologists can support the collation of species data by providing survey records from the assessed
development to the local Biological Records Centre (www.brc.ac.uk/irecord) or nationally to the National Biological Network.
■ LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity Land Use & Ecology
LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity

2 No
Aim
To minimise the long term impact of the development on the site and the surrounding area’s biodiversity.
Assessment criteria
Up to two credits
1. Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) is appointed prior to commencement of activities on-site and they confirm
that all relevant UK and EU legislation relating to the protection and enhancement of ecology has been complied with
during the design and construction process.
2. Where a landscape and habitat management plan, appropriate to the site, is produced covering at least the first five
years after project completion in accordance with BS 42020:2013 1 Section 11.1. This is to be handed over to the
building owner/occupants for use by the grounds maintenance staff.
3. Where additional measures to improve the assessed site's long term biodiversity are adopted, according to Table 58 .
Where criteria 1 to 3 are met credits can be awarded as follows:
No. of credits No. of additional measures
1 2
2 4
Where the Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) confirms that some of the additional measures listed in Table 58 are not
applicable to the assessed development, the credits can be awarded as follows:
Applicable additional measures
All 4 3 2 1
Credits Number of additional measures to assess
1 2 2 2 N/A N/A
2 4 4 3 2 1
Ecology

Table 58 Additional measures for the improvement of long term biodiversity
Ref Additional measure for the improvement of long term biodiversity
1 The principal contractor nominates a Biodiversity Champion with the authority to influence site activities and
ensure that detrimental impacts on site biodiversity are minimised in line with the recommendations of a
Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
2 The principal contractor trains the site workforce on how to protect site ecology during the project. Specific
training must be carried out for the entire site workforce to ensure they are aware of how to avoid damaging
site ecology during operations on-site. Training should be based on the findings and recommendations for
protection of ecological features highlighted within a report prepared by a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
3 The principal contractor records actions taken to protect biodiversity and monitor their effectiveness
throughout key stages of the construction process. The requirement commits the principal contractor to
make such records available where publicly requested.
4 Where a new ecologically valuable habitat appropriate to the local area is created. This includes a habitat that
supports nationally, regionally or locally important biodiversity, and/or which is nationally, regionally or locally
important itself; including any UK Biodiversity Action Plan (UK BAP) priority habitats2, Local Biodiversity Action
Plan (LBAP) habitats, those protected within statutory sites (e.g. SSSIs), or those within non-statutory sites
identified in local plans. Local biodiversity expertise should be sought during the Preparation and Brief (RIBA
Stage 1 or equivalent) to help identify species of local biodiversity importance on-site and ensure that the
proposals support local priorities.
5 Where flora and/or fauna habitats exist on-site, the contractor programmes site works to minimise
disturbance to wildlife. For example, site preparation, ground works, and soft landscape works have been, or
will be, scheduled at an appropriate time of year to minimise disturbance to wildlife. Timing of works may
have a significant impact on, for example, breeding birds, flowering plants, seed germination, amphibians etc.
Actions such as phased clearance of vegetation may help to mitigate ecological impacts. This additional
requirement will be achieved where a clear plan has been produced detailing how activities will be timed to
avoid any impact on site biodiversity in line with the recommendations of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.
6 Education buildings (pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges only)

A partnership has been set up by the design team with a local group that has wildlife expertise (e.g. local
Wildlife Trust or similar local body) and the group has:
a. Provided advice early in the design process regarding protecting and/or providing habitat for species
of local importance on the site.
b. Provided advice to ensure the design is in keeping with the local environment. In particular this should
draw on their local knowledge of any features or species of ecological interest on or near the site.
c. Provided, or will continue to provide, ongoing support and advice to the educational establishment to
help them manage, maintain and develop the outdoor space in the longer term.
A suitable starting point for discussion with the local wildlife group would be to ask for advice on how to take
account of the Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP) in the school/college landscape design.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
options.
Simple buildings

assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Where additional In all cases it is necessary to employ a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) to achieve
measures are not credits for this BREEAM issue. As a minimum the SQE must provide the following in
applicable writing:
See criterion 3. 1. Confirmation that criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved
2. Clarification of how many of the additional measures for criterion 3 are
applicable and have been achieved
3. Guidance on how to achieve Additional measure 4 (where possible).
Where the Suitably Qualified Ecologist confirms that none of the additional measures
are applicable (due to the nature of the site and its surroundings) full credits can be
awarded for demonstrating compliance with criteria 1 and 2.
Building specific
CN4 Education (pre- This could take the form of meetings several times a year with staff/pupils/students
school, school and working party to help them plan conservation and ecological enhancement work, or
sixth form college activities relating the ecology in or near the school or college grounds.
buildings only)
Additional
measure 6:
Ongoing support
and advice
CN4.1 Prisons The Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plan (PSBAP)3 should be referred to for prison
Additional buildings where Additional measure 4 is being assessed. For habitats that are not
measure 4 listed in the PSBAP guidance on appropriate habitat creation should be sought from
the National Biodiversity Network and the UKBAP.
Ecology
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Biodiversity
Biodiversity is defined as the variety of life on earth. It includes all species, animal, plants, fungi, algae, bacteria and the
habitats that they depend upon.
Biodiversity Action Plan

A plan which sets specific, measurable, achievable, realistic and time bound conservation targets for species and
habitats. The JNCC (Joint Nature Conservation Committee) website www.jncc.defra.gov.uk provides information on
Biodiversity Action Plans and the UK Post-2010 Biodiversity Framework.
Biodiversity Champion
An individual formally tasked by the principal contractor with the responsibility for monitoring and influencing site
activities and minimising detrimental impact on biodiversity. The individual must have sufficient authority and time on-
site and knowledge of ecology and construction to carry out the role. The Biodiversity Champion need not be an
ecologist or ecological expert. This may be the same person as the Sustainability Champion in Man 03 Responsible
construction practices.
Local group with wildlife expertise

A local group with wildlife expertise could be the local Wildlife Trust or an alternative group that has been involved in
local wildlife conservation/enhancement projects.
Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plans (BAPs)

A Biodiversity Action Plan that is produced in compliance with Prison Service requirements as set out in the Strategy
Statement of Action for a Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plan. The Prison Service BAP comprises three stages, the
first of which involves managing SSSI sites. The second stage addresses the management of sites that are not
designated, but which may have land which has local, county or regional importance on biodiversity. The third stage
addresses the rest of the prison estate, principally comprising urban prisons. The PSBAP falls under the Ministry of
Justice (MOJ) Statement for Biodiversity, the MOJ’s commitment to supporting its diverse biological estate.

Refer to LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features
Other information
Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New Construction 2011 Appendix F. This
information will be available in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website.
BS 42020: 2013 Section 11.1 states that the following should be included in long term management plans for habitats,
species and biodiversity features:
a. Description and evaluation of features to be managed

b. Ecological trends and constraints on-site that could influence management
c. Aims and objectives of management
d. Appropriate management options for achieving aims and objectives
e. Prescriptions for management actions
f. Preparation of a work schedule (including an annual work plan capable of being rolled forward over a five year period)
g. Body or organisation personnel responsible for implementation of the plan
h. Monitoring and remedial measures (see 11.2)
i. Funding resources and mechanisms to ensure sustainable long term delivery of the proposed management.
BS 42020: 2013 also states that the level of detail required for any given site should be that which is necessary to ensure the
effective management of the biodiversity features present.
1 BS 42020: 2013 Biodiversity - Code of Practice for Planning Development, BSI 2013
2 For information on UK BAP Priority Habitats refer to Joint Nature Conservation Committee: www.jncc.defra.gov.uk,
3 Statement of Action and Strategy for a Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plan, HMPS, 2003.
Pollution BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Pollution
Category overview
Fully fitted 10% Shell only 6% Shell and core 11% None
Summary
This category addresses the prevention and control of pollution and surface water run-off associated with the building's
location and use. Issues in this section aim to reduce the buildings impact on surrounding communities and environments
arising from light-pollution, noise, flooding and emissions to air, land and water.

Pol 01 Impact of 3 Avoidance or reduction of the impact of refrigerants through

refrigerants specification and leak prevention/detection.
Pol 02 NO Up to 3 Reduction in emissions of Nitrous-oxides (NO ) arising from the

x x
emissions building's space and water heating systems.
Pol 03 Surface 5 Development of sites with a low probability of flooding where the
water run-off design minimises the impact of flooding through careful
masterplanning.
Surface water run-off is managed to be no worse than the pre-

development scenario.
Watercourse pollution prevention systems are in place.
Pol 04 Reduction of 1 External light pollution is eliminated through effective design or the
night time removal of the need for unnecessary external lighting.
light pollution
Pol 05 Reduction of 1 Measures to reduce the likelihood of disturbance arising as a result of

noise noise from fixed installations on the development.
pollution
■ Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants Pollution
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants

3 No
Aim
To reduce the level of greenhouse gas emissions arising from the leakage of refrigerants from building systems.
Assessment criteria
Buildings that use no refrigerants (3 credits)
OR for buildings that use refrigerants
Pre-requisite
Impact of refrigerant (1 to 2 credits)
Leak detection (1 credit).
Three credits - No refrigerant use

1. Where the building does not require the use of refrigerants within its installed plant/systems.
OR alternatively, where the building does require the use of refrigerants, the three credits can be awarded as follows:
Pre-requisite
2. All systems (with electric compressors) must comply with the requirements of BS EN 378:2008 1 (parts 2 and 3) and
where refrigeration systems containing ammonia are installed, the Institute of Refrigeration Ammonia Refrigeration
Systems Code of Practice2.
Two credits - Impact of refrigerant

3. Where the systems using refrigerants have Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2 equivalent emissions (DELC CO2e) of ≤ 100
kgCO2e/kW cooling/heating capacity. To calculate the DELC CO2e please refer to the Relevant definitions in the Additional
information section and the Methodology section.
OR
4. Where air-conditioning or refrigeration systems are installed the refrigerants used have a Global Warming Potential
(GWP) ≤ 10.
OR
One credit - Impact of refrigerant

5. Where the systems using refrigerants have Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2 equivalent emissions (DELC CO2e) of ≤ 1000
kgCO2e/kW cooling/heating capacity.
One credit - Leak detection

6. Where systems using refrigerants have a permanent automated refrigerant leak detection system installed; OR where
an inbuilt automated diagnostic procedure for detecting leakage is installed. In all instances a robust and tested
refrigerant leak detection system must be installed and must be capable of continuously monitoring for leaks.
7. The system must be capable of automatically isolating and containing the remaining refrigerant(s) charge in response to
a leak detection incident (see Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants).

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable.

assessment Option 2 - Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
options.
CN1.1 Avoiding the need Option 2 - Shell and core

for refrigerants If the building is designed in such a way that it avoids the need for refrigerant
containing building services, and therefore no 'refrigerant-using' building services or
systems will be specified for the fit-out, then the available credits can be awarded by
default.
Simple buildings

assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Refrigerant charge For installations of small multiple hermetic systems only where the refrigerant charge
of less than 6kg in each unit is less than 6kg, the credit for leak detection and containment can be
awarded by default. This is on the basis that the risk of a large refrigerant leak due to
system failure is minimised, as individual leaks from each system will be small where
leakage occurs, and therefore there is little life cycle benefit of requiring leak detection
equipment on each small system.
Note: solutions such as this may be less energy efficient and as such may impact on the
achievement of credits under Ene 01.
CN3.1 Specification of Where more than one air-conditioning/refrigeration system is installed in the building,
multiple systems the assessor must source the relevant technical data for each system and enter it into
the Pol 01 calculator. The calculator will then determine the weighted average DELC
for the multiple installation and the BREEAM credits can be awarded or withheld
accordingly.
CN3.2 Leak detection The refrigerant leak detection criteria are still applicable in instances where any type of
See criteria 6 and non-solid refrigerant is present, i.e. even if the refrigerant meets BREEAM's DELC CO2e
7. benchmark(s). Exceptions to this are systems that use natural and environmentally
benign refrigerants, such as air and water (for example lithium bromide/water
absorption chillers) and installations of small multiple hermetic systems, where CN3
applies. These types of system/refrigerants will achieve the leak detection credit by
default.
Methodology
The number of Pol 01 BREEAM credits achieved is determined by the assessor using the BREEAM Pol 01 calculator.
The Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2e emissions (DELC) per kW of cooling/heating capacity are calculated using the following
equation:
[Refrigerant loss operational + refrigerant loss system retirement] x GWP
Cooling Capacity (kW)
Where:
Refrigerant loss operational: (Ref charge x Sys op-life x (L1 + L2 + S1 + S2))/100
Refrigerant loss system retirement = Ref charge x (1 - (Ref RecEff /100))
Where:
1. Ref charge: Refrigerant charge (kg)

2. Sysop-life: System operational lifetime (years)
3. Ref RecEff : Refrigerant Recovery Efficiency factor (%)
4. L1: Annual Leakage Rate (units: % Refrigerant charge)
5. L2: Annual Purge Release factor (% Refrigerant charge)
6. S1: Annual Service Release (% Refrigerant charge)
7. S2: Probability factor for catastrophic failure (% refrigerant charge loss/year)
8. GWP: Global Warming Potential of refrigerant
9. Cooling/heating capacity (kW).
The following default values must be used, where system specific data is not available:
Sysop-life: System operational design life (years): see Table 59
Ref RecEff : Refrigerant recovery efficiency factor (%): 95
L1: Annual leakage rates (% refrigerant charge): see Table 60 .
L2: Annual purge release factor (% refrigerant charge): 0.5 (if the system does not require an annual purge, zero should be
used).
S1: Annual service release (% refrigerant charge): 0.25 (this applies where the system requires opening up to carry out the
annual service. For systems which do not require opening up, there will be no associated annual release of refrigerant,
therefore a default of zero should be used).
S2: Probability factor for catastrophic failure (% refrigerant charge loss/year): 1 (based on a failure rate of 1 in 100 systems).
The following information must be sourced from the design team's mechanical and electrical engineer and/or system
manufacturer:
System type
Ref charge: Refrigerant charge (kg)
GWP: Global Warming Potential of refrigerant(s)
Cooling/heating capacity (kW).
Table 59 Default system operational design life values
System type Default system operational design life values (years)
Small/medium capacity chillers 15
Large capacity chillers 20
Unitary split 15
Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) system 15
All other systems 10
These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for air-conditioning units and the British Refrigeration Association's
(BRA) Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI (2006)3.
Note: The following should be considered when determining whether the system specified is defined as
small/medium/large:
Large capacity chiller: centrifugal compressor

Medium capacity chiller: scroll/screw compressor
Small capacity chiller: scroll compressor.
Table 60 Average annual leakage rates for the UK
System type Annual leakage rate

(% of charge per annum)
Cold storage and display systems
Integral cabinets 3%
Split/condensing units 18%
Centralised 19%
Air-conditioning systems
Unitary split 15%
Small-scale chillers 10%
Medium/large chillers 5%
Heat pumps 6%
System type Annual leakage rate

(% of charge per annum)
These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for air-conditioning units and also Table 2 of the Market
Transformation Programmes Briefing Note for Commercial Refrigeration no. 36, 'Direct Emission of Refrigerant Gases'
(version 1.2). The figures are based on the average of the leakage rates from the four separate studies reported in Table
2 (where a range is reported, the higher value was used).
Evidence
3, 5 Completed copy of the Pol 01 Calculator As per interim design stage

tool
3, 5 Documentary evidence supporting the As per interim design stage

Direct effect life cycle (DELC) carbon dioxide equivalent

A measure of the effect on global warming arising from emissions of refrigerant (in the case of this BREEAM
assessment issue) from the equipment to the atmosphere over its lifetime (units: kgCO2eq.). The calculation involves
estimating the total refrigerant release over the period of operation and subsequent conversion to an equivalent
mass of carbon dioxide. Should the system use several different refrigerants, e.g. a primary refrigerant and a
secondary coolant, or a cascade system, individual calculations are made for all refrigerants which contribute to the
direct effect (see Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants section for a description of how DELC is calculated).
Moderately airtight enclosure

This can be defined as an enclosure that does not produce a draught or significant fresh air ingress that would dilute
any leaked refrigerant gas (dilution may prevent detection).
Refrigerant leak detection

An automated permanently installed multi-point sensing system, designed to continuously monitor the atmosphere
in the vicinity of refrigeration equipment and, in the event of detection, raise an alarm. The system may be aspirated or
have multiple sensor heads linked to a central alarm unit or BMS. Various sensor types are available including infra-red,
semi-conductor or electro-chemical.
Refrigerant recovery
The process of removing refrigerant from a system and storing it in an airtight container.
Refrigerant pump down

The specification of automatic refrigerant pump down can further limit potential losses and damage to the
environment and have subsequent economic benefits to the building owner. Under the United Kingdom
Environmental Protection Act 1990 unwanted refrigerant and refrigerating system oil are classified as either
controlled or hazardous waste. Not only is it an offence to discharge them to the environment, but there are
procedures regarding transport, storage, transfer of ownership and ultimate disposal. Article 16 of EC Regulation
2037/2000 specifies that used CFCs and HCFCs must be recovered for destruction or recycling/reclamation.
Robust and tested refrigerant leak detection system

This is normally defined as that included on the Enhanced Capital Allowance (ECA) Energy Technology Product List 4 (or
an equivalent list). Where the system does not fall within the scope of the ECA energy technology product list or an
equivalent list, the design team must demonstrate to the assessor that the system specified meets the principles of
the scheme as far as is applicable.
Small-scale white goods

These should be defined as domestic scale white goods and would also include small individual display cabinets, for
example drinks cabinets in small retail shops.
Systems using refrigerants

The criteria of this issue apply to air-conditioning and refrigeration systems installed in the building for the following
uses, regardless of the systems refrigerant charge (kg), including:
Comfort cooling and/or space heating (including assessment of refrigerants in heat pumps)
Cold storage, including commercial food/drink display cabinets but excluding small scale white goods (see
definition above)
Process-based cooling loads e.g. servers/IT equipment.
Global Warming Potential (GWP)

GWP is defined as the potential for global warming that a chemical has relative to 1 unit of carbon dioxide, the
primary greenhouse gas. In determining the GWP of the refrigerant, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
(IPCC) methodology using a 100-year Integrated Time Horizon (or ITH) should be applied.
Refrigerant
There are three main make-ups of refrigerants:
1. Hydrogenated Fluorocarbon Refrigerants (HFCs) are made up of hydrogen, fluorine, and carbon. Because they do
not use a chlorine atom (which is used in most refrigerants) they are known to be one of the least damaging to the
earth's ozone layer.
2. Hydrogenated Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (HCFCs) are made up of hydrogen, chlorine, fluorine, and carbon.
These refrigerants contain minimal amounts of chlorine; they are not as detrimental to the environment as some
other refrigerants.
3. Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (CFCs) contain chlorine, fluorine and carbon. These refrigerants carry high
amounts of chlorine so they are known to be the most hazardous to the ozone layer.
The use of CFCs and HCFCs as refrigerants has been addressed under the Montreal protocol. Phase-out
programmes have been agreed resulting in these substances no longer being used as refrigerants in all new
installations and most existing situations. The industry's favoured replacements are currently HFCs which are often
potent global warming contributors. Hydrocarbons and ammonia-based refrigerants have low or zero GWP and are
therefore preferred long term options. These are now widely available and are valid alternatives to HFCs in all
buildings, provided health and safety issues are fully addressed.
The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) hosts a HCFC Help Centre which contains information about the
management and phase out of HCFCs and alternatives to HCFCs in the refrigeration and air-conditioning sector
http://www.uneptie.org/ozonaction/topics/hcfc.asp.
Other information
Automatic isolation and containment of refrigerant

An example of a system which would meet criterion 7 could be one which initiates an automated shut down and pump down
of the refrigerant into a separate storage tank.
Common refrigerants
Table 61 List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP
R-Number Chemical name GWP

100-yr
R-30 Dichloromethane 9
R-170 Ethane 3
R-290 Propane 3
R-600 Butane 3
R-600a Isobutane 3
R-702 Hydrogen 5.8
R-717 Ammonia 0
R-718 Water 0.2 - 0.2
R-729 Air (nitrogen, oxygen, argon) 1
R-744 Carbon dioxide 1
R1150 Ethylene 3
R-1234yf 2,3,3,3-Tetrafluoropropene 4
R-1270 Propylene 3
Sources: The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) '2010 Report of the Refrigeration, Air-conditioning and
Heat Pumps Technical Options Committee'
EN 378-1:2008+A2:2012 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements. Part 1: Basic
requirements, definitions, classification and selection criteria - Annex E.
The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change' 5th Assessment Report, Chapter 8, 'Anthropogenic and Natural
Radiative Forcing', 2013
'Global environmental impacts of the hydrogen economy', Derwent et al, Int. J. Nuclear Hydrogen Production and
Application, Vol. 1, No. 1, 2006
The formula used to calculate the Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2e emissions in BREEAM is based on the Total Equivalent Warming
Impact (TEWI) calculation method for new stationary refrigeration and air-conditioning systems. TEWI is a measure of the
global warming impact of equipment that takes into account both direct emissions (as assessed in this BREEAM issue) and
indirect emissions produced through the energy consumed in operating the equipment (which is assessed in the BREEAM
energy section).
Refer to BS EN 378-1 5 and the British Refrigeration Association's (BRA) Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI for further
details. The BRA publication also includes sectorial release factors for new systems designed to best practice standards.
REAL Zero
The refrigeration and air-conditioning sector supported by the Carbon Trust is working across all sectors of business and
industry, to help achieve significant reductions in carbon emissions due to refrigerant leakage from installed systems. The
Institute of Refrigeration led initiative, Real Zero, is building a clearer understanding of where and why leakage occurs as well as
how to prevent it.
For further information including guidance notes, calculators/tools and case study information visit: http://www.ior.org.uk/real
zero.
1BS EN 378 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements, BSI, 2008
2Ammonia Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice, Institute of Refrigeration, 2009
3Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI Issue 2, (2006), BRA Specification.
4www.etl.decc.gov.uk.
5BS EN 378-1 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements Part 1: Basic requirements,
definitions, classification and selection criteria. BSI, 2008
■ Pol 02 NOx emissions Pollution
Pol 02 NO emissions
x
Aim
To contribute to a reduction in national NO emission levels through the use of low emission heat sources in the building.
x
Assessment criteria
Up to three credits (all building types except Industrial)

1. Where the plant installed to meet the building’s delivered heating and hot water demand has, under normal operating
conditions, a NO emission level (measured on a dry basis at 0% excessO2) as follows:
x
NO Emission levels for heating and hot water (mg/kWh) Credits
x
≤ 100 mg/kWh 1 credit
≤ 70 mg/kWh 2 credits
≤ 40 mg/kWh 3 credits
Two credits (Industrial building types only)

NO Emission levels for heating and hot water (mg/kWh) Credits
x
Office and associated areas ≤ 70 mg/kWh 1 credit
Operational areas ≤ 70 mg/kWh 1 credit
2. Report via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool the direct and indirect NO emissions in mg/kWh and energy
x
consumption in kWh/m²/yr arising from systems installed to meet the building's space heating, cooling and hot water
demands.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable.

assessment criteria Option 2 – Shell and core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
assessment options.
Simple buildings
assessment criteria
General
CN3 New build If the heating/hot water demand for the new extension is being met by an existing
extensions to system, then the NO emission level for the existing system must be assessed
x
existing buildings against the criteria of this issue.
CN3.1 Highly insulated Where the heating load for a highly insulated building is less than or equal to 7% of
building the heat load for a Building Regulations compliant building of the same size and
type, one credit can be awarded regardless of the NO emission level. Figures used
x
for calculations of the percentage of total heat demand must be based on the
output from approved building energy calculation software.
CN3.2 NO data provided Where NO data is provided in different units or at a level of excess oxygen greater
x x
in different units than zero, the manufacturer/supplier must be asked to convert this to comply with
the BREEAM criteria. Alternatively, the assessor may adjust the figure using the
relevant correction factors provided in the Pol 02 NOx emissions section. Note that
the conversion factors provided do not apply where combined heat and power
(CHP) systems are being assessed. Where CHP systems are used, the information
must be obtained from the system manufacturer.
CN3.3 Grid electricity Where grid electricity is used to supply a heating system, the NO emissions should
x
be assumed to be 617 mg/kWh for the purpose of BREEAM. This is to reflect the
likely NO emissions from grid electricity over the next 10 years based on the
x
predicted generation mix in the UK.
CN3.4 Heat recovery Heat recovery can be considered as having zero NO emissions for the purpose of
x
this issue.
CN3.5 Open flues No credits may be awarded for open flue heating or hot water systems.
CN3.6 Water heating Where the water heating can be demonstrated to be less than 10% of the building's
benchmark and total energy consumption, these credits can be awarded based solely on the NO
x
point of use heaters emissions from space heating.
CN3.7 Assessment and At present the Pol 02 issue does not benchmark and award credits for NO
x
reporting of a emission levels associated with a building's cooling demands. To facilitate possible
building's NO future benchmarking of this kind and alignment with European Standards on the
x
emissions from Sustainability of Construction Works, BREEAM does require, as a condition of
cooling achieving any credits for this issue, the reporting of both direct and indirect NO
x
emissions resulting from meeting the building's heating, cooling and hot water
demands.
In the case of indirect emissions, this refers primarily to emissions associated with
grid electricity, where grid electricity is a/the source of energy for the building's
heating, cooling and/or hot water demands. Direct NO emissions are those
x
resulting from the burning of fuel on-site or in the assessed building to meet
heating, cooling and/or hot water demands, for example via a gas/oil-fired/biomass
boiler.
CN4 Industrial First credit: Where the assessed building is designed without an office area, the first
Office/operational credit does not apply. One credit is therefore available where compliance with the
areas not present operational area benchmark is met.
Second credit: Where the operational area of the assessed building is designed to
be untreated, the second credit does not apply. One credit is therefore available
where compliance with the office area benchmark is met.
Where there is no office area and no heating in the operational area, this issue is not
assessed.
Methodology
Conversion factors
Manufacturers should be asked to supply NO emissions data in mg/kWh, measured on a dry basis. Where this is not possible
x
the assessor may use the following conversion factors to convert figures in parts per million (ppm), mg/MJ, mg/m³or wet
NO .
x
It should be noted that these conversion factors assume worst case efficiencies and are likely to give conservative answers.
This could have the effect of lowering the number of credits achieved. Note that these conversion factors are not applicable
where combined heat and power (CHP) systems are being used. Please see the calculation procedures below for further
details on assessing CHP systems for this issue.
1. Figures in mg/m³should be multiplied by 0.859 in order to convert emissions into mg/kWh1. A conversion may also be
necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below).
2. Figures in ppm should be multiplied by 1.76 in order to convert emissions into mg/kWh. A conversion may also be
necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below).
3. Figures in mg/MJ should be multiplied by 3.6 in order to convert emissions into mg/kWh (1 kWh = 3.6 MJ). A conversion
may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below).
Wet NO conversion factor

x
This issue’s criteria are based on dry NO values – almost all manufacturers will quote emissions measured on a dry basis.
x
However, if wet NO figures are supplied, these will need to be converted to dry. The following formula should be used to
x
determine the wet NO conversion factor 2:
x
Conversion factor c = 100/(100-y)
Where y is the % water vapour content measured in the gas. This figure should be obtained from the manufacturer.
Excess oxygen correction

If a NO emission rate is quoted by the manufacturer in mg/m³or ppm, then it should be established at what percentage
x
excess oxygen this emission was measured. The greater the amount of excess oxygen in the flue gases at the time of
measurement, the more 'diluted' the NO emissions. It is therefore important to convert any emission rate back to 0% excess
x
oxygen. For the purpose of BREEAM, the following conversion factors can be used for the most frequently used rates supplied
by manufacturers:
Table 62 Excess oxygen conversion factors
% Excess O 2 Conversion (c)
3% x 1.17
6% x 1.40
15% x 3.54
Conversion factor c = 20.9/(20.9 – x)
Where x = % excess O2 (NOT excess air) and 20.9 is the percentage of O2 in the air.
Calculating NO emission levels from combined heat and power (CHP) systems
x
Where CHP systems are specified, it is only necessary to consider the heat-related NO emissions for the assessment of this
x
issue.
NO emissions are allocated to heat and electricity in line with the electrical output and the relationship between the heat input
x
and the heat output. A NO emission rate equivalent to the current rate for grid electricity should be assumed for the electrical
x
output (i.e. 617 mg/kWh supplied), and the remaining NO should be allocated to the heat input. Only the heat-related
x
component is then compared with the benchmark scale. The following formula should be used to determine this:
X = (A - B)/(C/D)
Where:
Term Description
X NO emissions per unit of heat supplied (mg/kWh heat).

x
A NO emissions per unit of electricity generated (mg/kWhelec), i.e. the NO emitted by the CHP system per unit of
x x
electricity generated. It is essential that this figure is obtained from the installer/supplier of the system and
should be based on the system when operating at full load.
Term Description
B NO emissions per unit of electricity supplied from the grid (mg/kWhelec) this should be assumed to be 617
x
mg/kWh.
C Heat to Electricity Ratio of the CHP scheme.
D Overall system efficiency (%). When carrying out the calculation, enter the figure as a decimal, e.g. if the efficiency
is 80%, then enter 0.8 into the calculation.
The above methodology determines the net NO emissions from CHP-generated electricity compared with central
x
generation of electricity and allocates this amount to the heat production. Where x is calculated to be negative, it should be
assumed to be zero.
Calculating the average NO emission levels from multiple systems

x
Where the CHP or other heating system type operates in conjunction with another system, an average NO emission rate
x
should be used based on the ratio of power output from each source, i.e. multiply the emissions of each system by the
percentage of heat demand it supplies and total these values.
This is likely to be the case where a CHP system has been sized on the base power demand rather than the heat demand and
therefore a secondary heating system is required.
The following formula can be used for such cases:
( ( )
Average NOX = N 1× H 1 / HT + N 2 × (H 2 / HT ) … + Nn × (Hn / HT )) ( )
Where:
Term Description
N1 NO emissions rate for source 1

x
N2 NO emissions rate for source 2

x
Nn NO emissions rate for source n

x
HT Total heat output from all sources
H1 Heat output from source 1
H2 Heat output from source 2
Hn Heat output from source n
Calculating NO emission levels from heat pumps

x
For the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, either of the formulas below can be used to determine the contributing NO
x
emissions from a heat pump:
M Elec ×WElec M Elec
MHeat = OR MHeat =
WHeat EER
Where:
Term Description
MHeat NO emissions per unit of heat generated in mg/kWhHeat

x
MElec NO emissions from UK grid electricity mg/kWh, this should be assumed to be 617 mg/kWhElec
x
WElect Total quantity of electricity consumed by heat pump kWhElec
WHeat Total quantity of heat produced by heat pump kWhHeat
EER Energy Efficiency Ratio (also referred to as Co-efficient of Performance)
Evidence
1, 2 Calculations showing the average NO As per interim design stage

x
emissions for the building where multiple
systems are present.
Approved building energy calculation software

Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions
NO emissions
x
NO emissions are pollutant gases produced by the combustion of fossil fuels. NO reacts with heat and sunlight to
x x
produce ozone that can cause serious respiratory problems. It also reacts with water to produce acid rain which has a
detrimental effect on ecosystems. For the purposes of BREEAM, NO emission levels are required in units of mg/kWh,
x
measured on a dry basis at 0% excess oxygen levels.
Other information
Some systems may find it difficult to achieve credits in this issue, including:
Heat pumps
Heat pumps powered by grid electricity are likely to indirectly produce emission rates higher than those required by BREEAM
and are therefore typically unable to achieve credits under this issue. However, there is a formula for determining NO
x
emissions from heat pumps in the Pol 02 NOx emissions section. Please note, the energy saved by using certain types of heat
pumps is recognised in the energy section of BREEAM.
District heating
District heating systems that incinerate waste usually have NO emission rates higher than the levels set to achieve any BREEAM
x
credits.
Biomass
Biomass systems are recognised as reducing the impact of fossil fuel depletion by employing a renewable fuel source
(provided it is sustainably sourced). However, biomass can produce a significant amount of NO and so may not achieve this
x
credit. They may, however, gain recognition in the energy section of BREEAM.
1BS EN 15502-1:2012 Gas-fired heating boilers Part 1: General requirements and tests.
2BS EN 14792:2005 Stationary Source emissions - Determination of mass concentration of nitrogen oxides (NO ) - Reference
x
method: Chemiluminescence.
Pol 03 Surface water run-off

5 No
Aim
To avoid, reduce and delay the discharge of rainfall to public sewers and watercourses, thereby minimising the risk and impact
of localised flooding on and off-site, watercourse pollution and other environmental damage.
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into three parts;
Flood risk (1 to 2 credits)

Surface water run-off (2 credits)
Minimising water course pollution (1 credit).
Up to two credits - Flood resilience
Two credits - Low flood risk

1. Where a site-specific flood risk assessment (FRA) confirms the development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as
having a low annual probability of flooding (in accordance with current best practice national planning guidance (refer to
Pol 03 Surface water run-off ). The FRA must take all current and future sources of flooding into consideration (see
CN3.2).
One credit - Medium/high flood risk

2. Where a site-specific FRA confirms the development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a medium or
high annual probability of flooding and is not in a functional floodplain (in accordance with current best practice national
planning guidance (refer to Pol 03 Surface water run-off ). The FRA must take all current and future sources of flooding
into consideration (see CN3.2).
3. To increase the resilience and resistance of the development to flooding, one of the following must be achieved:
a. The ground level of the building and access to both the building and the site, are designed (or zoned) so they are at
least 600mm above the design flood level of the flood zone in which the assessed development is located (see
CN3.5);
OR
b. The final design of the building and the wider site reflects the recommendations made by an appropriate consultant
in accordance with the hierarchy approach outlined in section 5 of BS 8533:2011 1.
Two credits - Surface water run-off
Pre-requisite
4. An Appropriate Consultant is appointed to carry out, demonstrate and/or confirm the development's compliance with
the following criteria:
One credit
5. Where drainage measures are specified to ensure that the peak rate of run-off from the site to the watercourses
(natural or municipal) is no greater for the developed site than it was for the pre-development site. This should comply at
the 1-year and 100-year return period events.
6. Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS are in
■ Pol 03 Surface water run-off Pollution
place.
7. Calculations include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance with current best practice
planning guidance (see definitions).
One credit
8. Where flooding of property will not occur in the event of local drainage system failure (caused either by extreme rainfall
or a lack of maintenance); AND
EITHER
9. Drainage design measures are specified to ensure that the post development run-off volume, over the development
lifetime, is no greater than it would have been prior to the assessed site’s development for the 100-year 6-hour event,
including an allowance for climate change (see criterion 14).
10. Any additional predicted volume of run-off for this event is prevented from leaving the site by using infiltration or other
Sustainable Drainage System (SuDS) techniques.
OR (only where criteria 9 and 10 for this credit cannot be achieved):
11. Justification from the Appropriate Consultant indicating why the above criteria cannot be achieved, i.e. where infiltration
or other SuDS techniques are not technically viable options.
12. Drainage design measures are specified to ensure that the post development peak rate of run-off is reduced to the
limiting discharge. The limiting discharge is defined as the highest flow rate from the following options:
a. The pre-development 1-year peak flow rate; OR
b. The mean annual flow rate Qbar; OR
c. 2L/s/ha.
Note that for the 1-year peak flow rate the 1-year return period event criterion applies (as described in the peak run-off
criteria above).
13. Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS are in
place.
14. For either option, above calculations must include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance
with current best practice planning guidance.
One credit - Minimising watercourse pollution

15. There is no discharge from the developed site for rainfall up to 5mm (confirmed by the Appropriate Consultant).
16. In areas with a low risk source of watercourse pollution, an appropriate level of pollution prevention treatment is
provided, using appropriate SuDS techniques.
17. Where there is a high risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil (see Compliance notes for a
list of areas), separators (or an equivalent system) are installed in surface water drainage systems.
18. Where the building has chemical/liquid gas storage areas, a means of containment is fitted to the site drainage system
(i.e. shut-off valves) to prevent the escape of chemicals to natural watercourses (in the event of a spillage or bunding
failure).
19. All water pollution prevention systems have been designed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of
documents such as Pollution Prevention Guideline 3 (PPG 3) 2 and/or where applicable the SuDS manual 3. For areas
where vehicle washing will be taking place, pollution prevention systems must be in accordance with Pollution Prevention
Guidelines 13 4.
20. A comprehensive and up to date drainage plan of the site will be made available for the building/site occupiers.
21. Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS must
be in place.
22. Where present, all external storage and delivery areas designed and detailed in accordance with the current best
practice planning guidance (see Pol 03 Surface water run-off for further information).
Two credits - Surface water run-off - Simple buildings

For 'simple buildings', the below criteria should be applied in place of the surface water run-off criteria above (please see CN2
for more information).
23. Either of the following criteria is met:
a. There is a decrease in the impermeable area by 50% or more, from the pre-existing impermeable hard surfaces; OR
b. Where all run-off from the roof for rainfall depths up to 5mm from all new and existing parts of the building have
been managed on-site using source control methods
OR
One credit - Surface water run-off - Simple buildings

24. Either of the following criteria is met:
a. There is no increase in the impermeable surfaces as a result of the new construction; OR
b. If there is an increase in the impermeable surface as a result of the new construction then the following must be met:
i. Hard standing areas - where there is an extension or increase in the hardstanding areas and hence an increase in
the total impermeable area as a result of the new construction, the hardstanding area must be permeable or be
provided with on-site SuDS to allow full infiltration of the additional volume, to achieve the same end result. The
permeable hardstanding must include all pavements and public rights of way, car parks, driveways and non-
adoptable roads, but can exclude small garden paths which will drain onto a naturally permeable surface.
ii. Building (new build/extension) - where there is an increase in building footprint, extending onto any previously
permeable surfaces, the additional run-off caused by the area of the new build/extension must be managed on-
site using an appropriate SuDS technique for rainfall depths up to 5 mm.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
assessment options.
Simple buildings
CN2 Applicable Flood risk (1 or 2 credits)

assessment criteria
1. Criterion 1 (2 credits)
OR
2. Criteria 2 and 3 (1 credit)
Surface water run-off (1 or 2 credits)
3. Criterion 23 (2 credits)
OR
4. Criterion 24 (1 credit)
Minimising water course pollution (1 credit)
5. Criteria 15 to 22
Exemplary level credit (1 credit)
6. Criteria 4 to 14
General
CN3 Alternative None of the credits can be awarded where the assessed development has
standards and proceeded against the recommendation of the statutory body on the basis that
recommendations the flooding implications are too great (this includes a recommendation given by
from an the statutory body even where such a recommendation cannot or is not statutorily
appropriate enforced).
statutory body See Where the local authority (or other statutory body) has set more rigorous criteria
criteria 1 and 2. than those above these must be met in order to achieve the relevant credit(s).
CN3.1 Contaminated sites Drainage designs for sites must take into account legislation relating to
See criteria 5-22 contaminated sites, however in many circumstances even on contaminated sites
there may be opportunities for the installation of some SuDS techniques. Please see
the Pol 03 Surface water run-off section for more details.
Flood resilience
CN3.2 Sources of flooding The Flood Risk Assessment (FRA) must detail the risk of flooding from the following
See criteria 1 and 2. sources:
1. Fluvial (rivers)
2. Tidal
3. Surface water: sheet run-off from adjacent land (urban or rural)
4. Groundwater: most common in low-lying areas underlain by permeable rock
(aquifers)
5. Sewers: combined, foul or surface water sewers
6. Reservoirs, canals and other artificial sources.
Please see Pol 03 Surface water run-off section which provides more detail on the
above sources of flooding.
The content of the FRA should be based on historic trends, but should also account
for predicted changes to the climate which may impact on the flood risk to the site
in future.
CN3.3 Functional flood The BREEAM credit for locating in a flood zone of ‘medium or high annual
plain probability’ cannot be awarded where the building is located in the functional flood
See criterion 3. plain. This is defined in the current best practice national planning guidance for each
country’. If the building assessed is or has been defined as ‘water-compatible
development’, confirmation should be provided from the local planning authority
that they are satisfied with the proposals.
CN3.4 Flood defences Third party defences

See criteria 1, 2 and There are many landscape feature defences, owned by third parties, which due to
3. their location act as a flood defence by default, e.g. motorway, railway
embankments, walls etc. It can be assumed that such embankments will remain in
place for the lifetime of the development, unless the assessor or project team have
reason to believe otherwise. For walls, assurance must be sought that the wall is
likely to remain for the design life of the building.
Pre-existing flood defences
In an area protected by existing flood defences (designed to withstand a certain
magnitude of flooding) the appropriate number of flood risk credits can be
awarded where the defences reduce the risk to ‘low’ or ‘medium’ and the following
conditions are met:
1. The development is not located in an area where new flood defences have to
be, or have been, constructed to minimise the risk of flooding to the site and
its locality purely for the purpose of the development and/or its wider master
plan.
2. The development is located on previously developed land (as defined by the
criteria in BREEAM issue LE 01 Site selection.
3. The relevant agency confirms that, as a result of such defences, the risk of a
flood event occurring is reduced to low or medium risk. If firm confirmation is
not provided then the credit cannot be awarded.
A statutory body’s local/regional office may be able to provide more information
on existing defences in the area in which the assessed development is located.
CN3.5 600mm threshold It is accepted that, for buildings located in medium and high risk flood zones, areas
See criterion 3a. of the car park and site access may be allowed to flood and therefore fall below the
600mm threshold. In such cases the credit is still achievable provided safe access to
the site, and the ground floor of the building can be maintained (i.e. they are
600mm above the design flood level) to ensure the building and site do not
become an ‘island’ in the event of a flood.
Where the development has been permitted and the ground levels of the
topography/infrastructure immediately adjacent to the site fall below the 600mm
threshold, the credit can still be awarded, provided there are no other practical
solutions for access to the site above this level and the assessed building, and access
to it, meet the assessment criteria. As much of the external site area as possible (or
as required by an appropriate statutory body) should be designed at or above the
threshold.
For buildings located in medium or high flood risk zones, any areas used to store
sensitive, historical, hazardous, valuable and perishable materials, e.g. radioactive
materials, microbiological facilities, server rooms, libraries, etc., must be located
above the 600mm threshold.
CN3.6 Level of detail For smaller sites, e.g. less than 1 ha (10,000 m²), the level of detail required in an
required in the FRA acceptable FRA will depend on the size of the site and the arrangement of buildings
for smaller sites on that site. For a small site with a relatively simple arrangement of buildings this
See criteria 1 and 2. might consist of a brief report. For larger sites with a higher density of buildings a
more detailed assessment would be appropriate.
For small simple sites (2000 m²and less), an acceptable FRA could be a brief report
carried out by the contractor’s engineer confirming the risk of flooding from all
sources of flooding, including information obtained from the Environment Agency,
water company/sewerage undertaker, other relevant statutory authorities, site
investigation and local knowledge.
CN3.7 Sites with many Where the assessed building is part of a larger development of buildings, there are
buildings a number of options for assessment of the surface water run-off credits:
1. The individual building and its associated hardstanding areas can be assessed
independently where the run-off is being dealt with on a building-by-building
basis (i.e. each building has its own dedicated sub-catchment that serves only
that building).
2. When assessing the run-off from a number of buildings (including domestic
and non-domestic buildings) the assessment must take into account the
drainage from the local sub-catchment serving all those dwellings/buildings.
Note that proportioning cannot be used to calculate the percentage of run-
off discharging into the local sub-catchment resulting from just the assessed
building.
3. The whole development can be assessed for compliance.
Whichever approach is taken to demonstrate compliance, it must be consistent
when completing both the rate of run-off and volume of run-off calculations.
CN3.8 Discharge to the sea The peak rate of run-off and volume run-off criteria can be deemed to be met by
or tidal estuaries default if the site discharges rainwater directly to a tidal estuary or the sea.
The site must discharge run-off directly into the tidal estuary or the sea, if these
criteria are to be awarded by default. Typically, this would mean that drainage pipes
would only carry run-off from the site and that they would not need to cross
privately owned land outside the boundary of the development before reaching
the sea. Please see Pol 03 Surface water run-off section for a definition of tidal
estuary.
CN3.9 No change in Where the man-made impermeable area draining to the watercourse (natural or
impermeable area municipal) has decreased or remains unchanged post development, the peak and
volume rate of run-off requirements for the surface water run-off credits will be
met by default.
Flow rate calculations will not need to be provided. Instead, drawings clearly
showing the impermeable areas of the site draining to the watercourse should be
provided for the pre- and post development scenarios. Figures must also be given
(ideally on the drawings) to show a comparison between the areas of drained
impermeable surfaces pre- and post development.
In this instance a flood risk assessment must be carried out and any opportunities
identified to reduce surface water run-off are implemented.
CN3.10 Limiting discharge For the surface water run-off credits, where the limiting discharge flow rate would
flow rate require a flow rate of less than 5 l/s at a discharge point, a flow rate of up to 5 l/s
See criterion 12. may be used where required to reduce the risk of blockage.
CN3.11 Highways and Where new non-adoptable highways are built, including those for developments
impermeable areas with a mixture of buildings, all of the new impermeable surfaces must be included in
calculations to demonstrate compliance with the peak rate of run-off and volume
of run-off criteria. Where buildings are built beside existing highways or where
adoptable highways are built, the impermeable area of the highway does not need
to be included in the calculations.
CN3.12 Derelict sites. If the site has been derelict for over five years, the Appropriate Consultant must
See criteria 5,7, assess the previous drainage network and make reasonable assumptions to
11,12 and 14. establish probable flow rates and volumes. To do this they should use best practice
simulation modelling, to determine the 1 year and 100 year peak flow rates at the
relevant discharge points. To complete the calculations, a site visit prior to
development will be required unless accurate data already exists from a previous
survey. The resultant professional report can then be used to determine the pre-
development volumes and rates of run-off. Without this professional input, the site
must be deemed greenfield pre-development, assuming Soil type 5 for the
calculation of the pre development site run-off.
CN3.13 Rainwater BS 8515 Rainwater harvesting systems: Code of Practice, Annex A 5 must be
harvesting followed where rainwater harvesting systems are specified for storm water control.
To ensure flood risk is not increased if the rainwater harvesting system is, for some
reason, unavailable, the exceedance flow route capacity provided in accordance
with CIRIA report C635 should ignore the beneficial effect of the rainwater
harvesting system.
Minimising watercourse pollution
CN3.14 5mm discharge for In a small number of sites it may not be possible for the first 5mm of rainfall to be
minimising prevented from leaving site completely. Where this is the case, an appropriately
watercourse qualified professional must design the system to ensure that the intent of this
pollution criterion has been met as far as possible and provide justifications to explain why
See criterion 15. the criterion could not be fully achieved on the site. Where this can be justified, the
awarding of the water quality credit would not be affected, provided all other
relevant criteria have been achieved.
CN3.15 5mm requirement - End-of-pipe solutions, such as ponds and basins, will only be deemed to comply
end-of-pipe with the 5mm criteria where the principal run-off control to prevent discharge from
solutions the first 5mm of a rainfall event, is achieved using source control and site control
See criterion 15. methods.
CN3.16 5mm requirement - Green roofs can be deemed to comply with this requirement for the rain that falls
green roofs onto their surface. However evidence is still required to demonstrate that the 5mm
See criterion 15. rainfall from all other hard surfaces on-site is being dealt with, to allow this credit to
be awarded.
CN3.17 Areas that are a For the purpose of assessing the watercourse pollution credit, an area that presents
source of pollution a risk of watercourse pollution includes vehicle manoeuvring areas, car parks, waste
See criteria 17, 18 disposal facilities, delivery and storage facilities or plant areas.
and 19.
CN3.18 Extension or infill Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site, i.e. infill
building on existing development, the watercourse pollution criteria apply to areas within the
site construction zone that present a risk of pollution, as well as any areas external to the
construction zone that are affected by the new works, i.e. drainage onto or from the
proposed development.
CN3.19 Suitable level of In all cases the Appropriate Consultant should use their professional judgement to
treatment determine the most appropriate strategy for minimising watercourse pollution.
See criteria 16 to
22.
CN3.20 Roof plant Roof-top plant space must be considered where there is a risk from polluting
See criteria 18,19, substances such as petrol or oil. Refrigerants are not assessed under the pollution
21 and 22. aspect of this issue, as the main risk of pollution is to air and not the watercourse.
Methodology
Calculating peak rate of run-off
Key publications that should be referred to for guidance on calculating the peak rate of run-off include:
1. The SuDS Manual 6.

2. Preliminary rainfall run-off management for developments 7.
3. National planning policy guidance/statement for the specific country.
4. IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994) 8.
5. Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999) 9.
Greenfield sites of less than 50 ha

The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments
(Marshall and Bayliss, 1994). The pro-rata method on the size of catchment detailed in Table 4.2 in The SuDS Manual, CIRIA
C697 (2007) must be followed.
Greenfield sites of 50 ha to 200 ha

The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments
(Marshall and Bayliss, 1994). Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999) can be used for these
sites as an alternative, where there is a preference to do so, but only if the catchment is considered to be suitable for its
application.
Greenfield sites of more than 200 ha

The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with the Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology
and Hydrology, 1999) and any subsequent updates. Where the Flood Estimation Handbook is not considered appropriate
for the development, IH Report 124 can be used.
Brownfield sites
The calculation of brownfield run-off rates should be as follows:
If the existing drainage is known then it should be modelled using best practice simulation modelling, to determine
the 1-year and 100-year peak flow rates at discharge points (without allowing surcharge of the system above cover
levels to drive greater flow rates through the discharge points).
If the system is not known, then the brownfield run-off should be calculated using the greenfield run-off models
described above but with a Soil Type 5.
Limiting discharge rate

The limiting discharge for each discharge point should be calculated as the flow rates from the pre-developed site. The
calculation should include the total flow rate from the total area of the site feeding into the discharge point (this should include
both BREEAM-assessed and non BREEAM-assessed parts of the development, if applicable). The discharge point is defined as
the point of discharge into the watercourse/sewers (including rivers, streams, ditches, drains, cuts, culverts, dykes, sluices,
public sewers and passages through which water flows, see Relevant definitions in the Pol 03 Surface water run-off section).
Where this calculation results in a peak flow rate of less than 5 l/s, the limiting discharge rate may be increased up to a level of
no more than 5 l/s at the point of discharge from the site to reduce the risk of blockage.
For example, if the flow rate for the 1 year and 100 year events were 4 l/s and 7 l/s respectively, then the limiting discharges
would be 5 l/s and 7 l/s. Similarly, if it was calculated to be 2 l/s and 4 l/s, then a maximum of 5 l/s limiting discharge rate could
be applied to both discharge points.
Sites should not be subdivided to enable higher overall limiting discharge rates to be claimed. It is, however, recognised that
some sites may require more than one discharge point as a result of the local topography or existing surrounding drainage
infrastructure, and in such cases, the limiting discharge flow rate may be increased to a level no more than 5 l/s at each
discharge point. The assessor should seek evidence that the number of discharge points is necessary due to topography
and/or infrastructure limitations. Evidence may be in the form of a topographical map and an explanation from the
Appropriate Consultant as to why multiple discharge points are required, stating that it is not feasible to have fewer
discharge points.
100-year peak rate event: excess volume of run-off

The storage of excess flows from the 100-year event does not necessarily have to be contained within the drainage system
or SuDS features (the features designed solely for the purpose of drainage). Where appropriate, storage of some or all of this
volume can be achieved using temporary surface flooding of areas such as a playing field. Specific consideration should be
given to overland flow routing. Overland flood flows and temporary storage of flood water on the surface must not be so
frequent as to unreasonably inconvenience residents and other users.
Designing for exceedance guidance

CIRIA publication C635 (2006) Designing for exceedance in urban drainage – good practice 10 should be referred to for
guidance.
Evidence
5 Calculation results for the pre and post Refer to generic evidence requirement above
development peak rate of run-off
8 Information showing the proposed As per interim design stage

drainage solution, system failure flood flow
routes, potential flood ponding levels and
ground floor levels
9, 10, 11, 12 Calculation results for the pre and post Refer to generic evidence requirement above
development volume of run-off
12 Calculation results for the limiting discharge As per interim design stage.
6, 13, 21 No 'specific' evidence applies at Design Relevant maintenance agreements for the
Stage ownership, long term operation and
maintenance of all specified SuDS.
23b, 24b.ii). Calculation of the 5mm rainfall event from Refer to generic evidence requirement above
the relevant areas
Please note this section will be revised when the National Standards for Sustainable Drainage and associated regulations
come into force.
Adoptable highways
For the purposes of BREEAM, an ‘adoptable’ highway is a highway that is the responsibility of the highways authority
in terms of installation and maintenance of surface water drainage which only carries run-off from the highway itself.
This means that to fall under the definition of an ‘adoptable highway’ the drainage network must not be directly
connected to any other upstream drainage network (e.g. from a private development) and only handle run-off from
the adoptable highway. Where drainage within the highway will carry run-off from both the highway and housing, it is
not regarded as an 'adoptable' highway. In this instance the drainage design must take account of the highway run-
off.
Appropriate consultant
A consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to designing SuDS and flood prevention measures and
completing peak rate of run-off calculations. Where complex flooding calculations and prevention measures are
required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer.
Appropriate statutory body

This refers to either the appropriate national body (i.e. The Environment Agency in England and Wales, the Rivers
Agency in Northern Ireland and the Scottish Environment Protection Agency in Scotland) or the relevant local
authority/internal drainage board.
Catchment
The area contributing surface water flow to a point on a drainage or water course. It can be divided into sub-
catchments.
Control devices
Any drainage structure or unit designed to control the run-off of storm water. Examples of SuDS control devices are
check dams within swales and basins, and combined weir/orifice controls for ponds. Examples of traditional control
devices are throttles constructed with pipes and vortex controls. The control devices must be capable of regular
inspection and maintenance, and the system should be fail-safe so that upstream flooding does not result from
blockage or other malfunction. For guidance on control devices, refer to The SuDS manual (CIRIA C697, 2007) and
other best practice guidelines.
Current best practice national planning guidance

These are current at the time of publication: Planning Practice Guidance - Flood Risk and Coastal Changes– England;
Planning Policy Statement 15 – Northern Ireland; Scottish Planning Policy 7 - Scotland; Technical Advice Note - Wales.
Design flood level

The maximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design flood level for a site can be
determined through either known historical data or modelled for the specific site.
Design flood event

An historic or notional flood event of a given annual flood probability, against which the suitability of a proposed
development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed.
Design storm event

Historic or notional weather conditions of a given annual probability, against which the suitability of a proposed
development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed.
Discharge point
The discharge point(s) is the point at which the run-off from the site leaves the site boundary and enters a
watercourse.
Flood defences
Flood defences do not completely remove the risk of flooding, but they do reduce it. Building in areas where flood
defences are present (and appropriately designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) is therefore
preferable to those built in medium/high risk areas without defences. However, for the purpose of this issue, it is still
preferable to build in areas of low risk than encourage development of new flood defences in areas with a higher risk
of flooding purely for the sake of new development.
Flood event
A flooding incident characterised by its peak level or flow, or by its level or flow hydrograph.
Flood probability
The estimated probability of a flood of given magnitude occurring or being exceeded in any specified time period.
For example, the 100-year flood has a 1% chance of occurring in any given year.
Flood risk
The combination of the flood probability and the magnitude of the potential consequences of the flood event.
Flood risk assessment

A study to assess the risk of a site flooding, and to assess the impact that any changes or development on the site will
have on flood risk to the site and elsewhere. A Flood Risk Assessment (FRA) should be prepared according to relevant
planning policy and technical guidance documents. The FRA must account for future climate change and detail any
necessary adaptation measures where/if required. Where more than five years have passed since the FRA was carried
out, evidence would be required to demonstrate that the basis of the FRA has not changed in that time.
Flood storage
The temporary storage of excess run-off or river flow in ponds, basins, reservoirs or on the flood plain during a flood
event.
Flood zones
Flood zones are defined in the relevant planning, policy and technical guidance documents for each country in the UK:
Planning Practice Guidance - Flood Risk and Coastal Changes (England), TAN15 (Wales), SPP7 (Scotland), PPS15
(Northern Ireland). Please note, PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available
flood maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in Northern Ireland will therefore need to rely on-site-specific
flood risk assessments, or other relevant date/surveys, to determine the extent of flood risk for a specific
development, and use the same definitions as those outlined for England ( Table 63 ). The Northern Ireland
Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer further advice or recommendations in this respect
http://www.doeni.gov.uk/ and http://www.dardni.gov.uk/
While the definitions of flood zones and probabilities of flooding are generally the same throughout the UK, there
are some differences. The definitions are outlined in Table 63 .
Greenfield
A site which has either never been built on, or one which has remained undisturbed for five years or more.
Greenfield run-off rate

The rate of run-off that would occur from the site in its undeveloped and therefore undisturbed state.
Hard surfaces
These include roofs, car parks, access roads, pavements, delivery/service yards and external hard landscaping.
Footpaths less than 1.5 m wide which have free drainage to soft landscaped areas on both sides may be excluded.
Infiltration
The passage of water into a permeable surface, such as soil, permeable paving, soakaways and so on.
Limiting discharge
The limiting discharge is based upon the calculated pre-development flow rate at a discharge point.
Level of pollution prevention treatment

When used in the context of one, two or three levels of treatment for surface water, the treatment level should be
regarded as the number of SuDS components in series through which run-off passes from the originating surface on
which rainfall fell to the site discharge point. Where a SuDS component has more than one treatment process, it might
be considered to provide more than one level of treatment. In these circumstances advice should be sought from the
BREEAM office.
Low risk areas (with respect to watercourse pollution)

Low risk areas can be defined as areas where the risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil
is reduced. For the purpose of this credit, roofs and small car parks may be considered as low risk areas.
Peak run-off rate (referred to as Qp [m 3/sec])

This is the highest rate of flow from a defined catchment area assuming that rainfall is uniformly distributed over the
drainage area, considering the entire drainage area as a single unit and estimation of flow at the most downstream
point only.
Pre-development
The state of the site under assessment immediately prior to purchase of the site by the client/developer (or, where
the client has owned/occupied the site for a number of years, its current state).
Qbar
An estimation of the mean annual flood flow rate from a catchment (see Report IH124 Flood estimations for small
catchments).
Rainwater discharge
Rainwater discharge is the rainwater which flows from the development site to watercourses and sewers. It is also
referred to as run-off.
Run-off
This is usually rainwater, but can also be groundwater or overspill from sewers and other sources.
Sewerage undertaker
This is a Body, typically a water company, with statutory responsibility for sewerage and sewerage disposal and also
surface water from roofs and yards of premises.
Soakaways
A subsurface structure designed to promote the infiltration of surface water into the ground. As a general point,
soakaways may be shallow and broad – as in a blanket under permeable paving, or deeper structures. Deeper, point
source soakaways should be avoided for road and car park drainage, but shallow structures providing infiltration in
an extensive way (infiltration trenches and permeable paving) do not need oil separators.
SuDS management train

An approach to drainage design that combines a sequence of appropriate surface water drainage structures using
SuDS systems for management of the run-off to treat the flow, reduce run-off volume and restrain the run-off rate in
order to minimise man’s impact on the environment. Additional benefits associated with operation and maintenance,
ecology and amenity are aspects which are considered when designing a management system. The management
train incorporates a hierarchy of techniques:
1. Source control. Examples of SuDS techniques include:
Soakaways
Porous/pervious paving
Roof water directed to garden (rather than piped drains)
Rainwater reuse/harvesting
Green roofs
Other surface infiltration, attenuation and conveyance techniques that deal with run-off at source.
2. Site/local control. Examples of SuDS techniques include:
Swales
Pond
Infiltration basins
Detention basin
Larger soakaways
Pervious (porous or permeable) paving.
3. Regional control. Examples of techniques include:
Balancing ponds
Wetlands
Large detention basin.
SuDS techniques
One or more components built to manage surface water run-off to prevent flooding and pollution, including for
example: wet ponds, infiltration basins, detention basins, swales, reed beds, pervious (porous or permeable) paving,
soakaways, rainwater harvesting, filter strips, filter drains and trenches with or without perforates pipes, green roofs
and underground attenuation storage. For more information refer to The SuDS manual (CIRIA C697, 2007).

Water flow over the ground surface to a drainage system. This occurs if the ground is impermeable, is saturated or if
the rainfall is particularly intense.
Tidal estuary
A tidal estuary is defined as a semi-enclosed coastal body of water which has a free connection with the open sea and
within which seawater is measurably diluted with fresh water derived from land drainage. An estuary should be
unconstrained tidal waters, i.e. there should be no barriers or constricted shorelines that would restrict the free flow
of water into the open sea in any conditions. The impact on the total volume of run-off from the site (and other sites
which may in future discharge into the estuary) should be insignificant in terms of the overall water levels in the estuary.
Tidal rivers (i.e. where no or limited measurable seawater content is present during normal tidal movements) cannot
be included as part of the estuary for the purposes of BREEAM.
Treatment
Improving the quality of water by physical, chemical and/or biological means.
Types of oil separator

Class 1 Separators:
These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 5 mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They should be
used when the separator is required to remove very small oil droplets, such as those arising from car park run-off.
Class 2 Separators:
These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 100 mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They are
suitable for dealing with discharges where a lower quality requirement applies and/or for trapping large spillages.
Both classes can be produced as ‘full retention’ or ‘by pass’ separators:
Full retention separators:
These treat the flow that can be delivered by the drainage system, which is normally equivalent to the flow generated
by a rainfall intensity of 50mm/hr.
Bypass separators:
These fully treat all flows generated by rainfall rates of up to 5mm/hr. Flows above this rate are allowed to bypass
the separator. These separators are used when it is an acceptable risk not to provide full treatment for high flows.
Pollution Prevention Guideline 3 contains more detailed guidance on the selection and sizing of an appropriate type
of separator.
Volume of run-off
The volume of run-off that is generated by rainfall occurring on the site. This is typically measured in cubic metres.
Additional predicted volume of run-off is the difference between the volumes of run-off pre- and post development.
Watercourses and sewers

A term that includes rivers, streams, ditches, drains, culverts, dykes, sluices, sewers and passages through which water
flows.
Other information
Definition of flood zones by country

Table 63 Definition of flood zones by country
Definition England Wales Scotland
Low annual probability of Zone 1 Zone A Little or no risk area

flooding Less than 1 in 1000 chance Considered to be at little As defined for England.
of river and sea flooding (< or no risk.
0.1%). Zone B
If site levels are greater
than the flood levels used
to define adjacent
extreme flood outline.
Definition England Wales Scotland
Medium annual Zone 2 Zone B Low to medium risk area

probability of flooding Between 1 in 100 and 1 in If site levels are not Watercourse, tidal or
1000 chance of river greater than the flood coastal flooding in the
flooding (1% – 0.1%) and levels used to define range 0.1% – 0.5%
between a 1 in 200 and 1 in adjacent extreme flood (1:1000 – 1:200).
1000 chance of sea outline.
flooding (0.5% – 0.1%). Zone C
Equal to or greater* than
0.1% (river, tidal or coastal
flooding).
* For the purposes of
BREEAM assume upper
probability of flooding no
greater than that
specified for England.
High annual probability of Zone 3a High Probability Zone C1 and C2 Medium to high risk areas
flooding 1 in 100 or greater chance * For the purposes of Annual probability of
of river flooding (>1%) and BREEAM assume the same watercourse, tidal or
a 1 in 200 or greater lower and upper coastal flooding: greater
chance of flooding from probability of flooding as than 0.5% (1:200).
the sea (>0.5%). that specified for England.
Zone 3b The Functional
Floodplain
Land where water has to
flow or be stored in times
of flood.
Please note: Northern Ireland PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood
maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in NI will therefore need to rely on-site-specific flood risk assessments, or
other relevant data/surveys, to determine the extent of flood risk for a specific development, and use the same
definitions as those outlined for England. The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer
further advice or recommendations in this respect www.doeni.gov.uk and www.riversagencyni.gov.uk
Sources of flooding and flood risk

1. Streams and Rivers: Flooding that can take place from flows that are not contained within the channel due to high levels
of rainfall in the catchment.
2. Coastal or Estuarine: Flooding that can occur from the sea due to a particularly high tide or surge, or a combination of
both.
3. Groundwater: Where the water table rises to such a height where flooding occurs. Most common in low-lying areas
underlain by permeable rock (aquifers), usually due to extended periods of wet weather.
4. Sewers and highway drains: Combined, foul or surface water sewers and highway drains that are temporarily over-
loaded due to excessive rainfall or due to blockage.
5. Surface water: The net rainfall falling on a surface (on or off the site) which acts as run-off which has not infiltrated into
the ground or entered into a drainage system.
6. Infrastructure failure: Canals, reservoirs, industrial processes, burst water mains, blocked sewers or failed pumping
stations.
SuDS - sustainable drainage systems

A sequence of management practices and control structures designed to drain surface water in a more sustainable fashion
than some conventional techniques. Examples of SuDS devices include:
Holding ponds
Swales
Reed beds
Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. block paved
surface on permeable sub-base over gravel bed to store the water and allow it to seep into the soil. For less
permeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and the water taken to a soakaway although this is not an option in
some areas
Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as ‘overflow’ or ‘holding’ systems, in areas where local
geological and hydrological conditions allow them to function
Run-off from roofs collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system
Run-off from roofs directed to a local soakaway or other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc.
Green roofs.
For more information refer to The SuDS Manual (CIRIA C697, 2007).
External storage and delivery areas guidance documents

Wales and England
For assessment in Wales and England, the recommendations of the Environment Agency’s publication Pollution Prevention
Pays Guidance, 2013 11 should be followed.
Specification of oil/petrol interceptors

For the purpose of assessing the watercourse pollution credit, Pollution Prevention Guide 3 Use and design of oil separators
in surface water drainage systems (2006) defines the type of areas on a development where separators are required.
PPG3 is produced on behalf of the Environment and Heritage Service (Northern Ireland), Scottish Environment Protection
Agency and Environment Agency (England and Wales).
In some instances, where the risk of contamination is infrequent and potential spills will be small, oil interceptors may not be
required if appropriately designed sustainable urban drainage systems are specified. Refer to PPG3 for additional guidance.
Contaminated sites
Examples of contamination legislation that should be considered includes: the Water Resources Act 1991, the Environmental
Protection Act 1990, the Groundwater Directive (2006/118/EC) and, more recently the Groundwater (England and Wales)
Regulations 2009. Where the site risk assessment confirms that infiltration SuDS techniques are not appropriate, SuDS
techniques that do not allow infiltration, such as swales lined with an impermeable membrane, can be used. It may be the case
that only some areas of the site are contaminated and therefore infiltration SuDS techniques can be used elsewhere on the
site. There may also be a requirement to remediate the contaminated soils, creating opportunities for the use of infiltration
SuDS post-remediation.
1BS 8533:2011 Assessing and managing flood risk in development - Code of Practice, 2011
2Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 3 Use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems, Environment
Agency/SEPA/Environment and Heritage Service, 2006.
3C697 The SuDS Manual, CIRIA 2007.
4Pollution Prevention Guidelines (PPG) 13 Vehicle washing and cleaning, Environment Agency/SEPA/Environment and Heritage
Service, 2007
5BS 8515:2009 Rainwater harvesting systems - Code of Practice, (Annex A1:2013)
6C697 The SuDS Manual, CIRIA 2007.
7 Preliminary rainfall run-off management for developments, W5-074/A/TR/1 Revision E, EA/DEFRA (January 2012) Useful
Link: http://www.uksuds.com/sudsguidancedocument.htm
8IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994)
9Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999)
10CIRIA publication C635 (2006) Designing for exceedance in urban drainage – good practice
11Pollution Prevention Pays, Environment Agency, 2013.
■ Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution Pollution
Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution

1 No
Aim
To ensure that external lighting is concentrated in the appropriate areas and that upward lighting is minimised, reducing
unnecessary light pollution, energy consumption and nuisance to neighbouring properties.
Assessment criteria
One credit
1. Where external lighting pollution has been eliminated through effective design that removes the need for external
lighting without adversely affecting the safety and security of the site and its users.
OR alternatively, where the building does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows:
2. The external lighting strategy has been designed in compliance with Table 2 (and its accompanying notes) of the ILP
Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, 2011 1.
3. All external lighting (except for safety and security lighting) can be automatically switched off between 23:00 and 07:00.
4. If safety or security lighting is provided and will be used between 23:00 and 07:00, this part of the lighting system
complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended during these hours in Table 2 of the ILP’s Guidance notes.
5. Illuminated advertisements, where specified, must be designed in compliance with ILP PLG 05 The Brightness of
Illuminated Advertisements . 2.

None.
Compliance notes
Shell and core
options.
Simple buildings
assessment
criteria
General
CN3 General None.
Methodology
The following provides guidance on when and how to apply the criteria to the external lighting associated with a building
being assessed:
1. Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site then only those areas affected by the works, i.e.
within the construction zone, need to be assessed. Where the assessment is of a building that forms part of an entire
new development, the criteria apply site-wide.
2. If the scope of the assessment covers a new extension only, then only new lighting specified as part of the extended
works need to be assessed.
3. Flush stud lights used for safety purposes in vehicle manoeuvring areas may be excluded from the assessment.
4. Where light fittings are specified to comply with specific security standards and these conflict with the BREEAM criteria,
they can be excluded from the assessment of this issue. In these circumstances the assessor must obtain evidence
confirming the specific security standards and that they are applicable to the assessed development.
Evidence
Construction zone
For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM-
assessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works.
Other information
The ILP Guidance notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light, 2011 are available free of charge from the ILP website
www.theilp.org.uk.
Table 2 of the ILP guidance and its accompanying notes outlines four sets of recommendations:
■ Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution Pollution
1. Limits to the average upward light ratio of the luminaires, to restrict sky glow.
2. Limiting illuminance at the windows of nearby properties for which light trespass might be an issue.
3. Limiting the intensity of each light source in potentially obtrusive directions beyond the site boundaries.
4. Limiting the average luminance of the building, if it is floodlit.
In each case the limiting values depend on the location of the site of the building (for example rural, urban or city centre). A
calculation of illuminance (b) or intensity (c) is not required if all luminaires are cut-off types and angled so that light in
potentially obtrusive directions is blocked.
1GN01 Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, Institution of Lighting Professionals(ILP), 2011. www.theilp.org.uk
2Professional Lighting Guide 05 The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements. 2015.

https://www.theilp.org.uk/resources/ilp-technical-reports/plg05-the-brightness-of-illuminated-advertisements/
Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution

1 No
Aim
To reduce the likelihood of noise arising from fixed installations on the new development affecting nearby noise-sensitive
buildings.
Assessment criteria
Applicability:
One credit
1. Where there are, or will be, no noise-sensitive areas or buildings within 800m radius of the assessed site.
OR
2. Alternatively, where the building does have noise-sensitive areas or buildings within 800m radius of the site, one credit
can be awarded as follows:
a. Where a noise impact assessment in compliance with BS 7445 1 has been carried out and the following noise levels
measured/determined:
i. Existing background noise levels at the nearest or most exposed noise-sensitive development to the proposed
development or at a location where background conditions can be argued to be similar.
ii. The rating noise level resulting from the new noise source (see CN4).
3. The noise impact assessment must be carried out by a suitably qualified acoustic consultant holding a recognised
acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body (see Relevant definitions in the Additional
information section).
4. The noise level from the proposed site/building, as measured in the locality of the nearest or most exposed noise-
sensitive development, is a difference no greater than +5dB during the day (07:00 to 23:00) and +3dB at night (23:00
to 07:00) compared to the background noise level.
5. Where the noise source(s) from the proposed site/building is greater than the levels described in criterion 4, measures
have been installed to attenuate the noise at its source to a level where it will comply with criterion 4.

None.
■ Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution Pollution
Compliance notes
Shell and core
CN1 Applicable Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable.

assessment Option 2 – Shell and Core: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
options.
Simple buildings

assessment
criteria
General
CN3 Attenuating noise BS 8233:1999 2 gives recommendations for the control of noise in and around
at its source buildings. Confirming the specification of attenuation measures in accordance with
See criteria 4 and this Code of Practice can be used as a method of demonstrating compliance with
5. criterion 4.
CN4 Compliance at the At the design stage of assessment, where noise-sensitive areas or buildings are
design stage present, actual measurement is unlikely to be possible due to the planned but non-
See criterion 2. existent installation. In such situations compliance can be demonstrated through the
use of acousticians’ calculations or by scale model investigations. For such cases BS
7445-2 states that 'as universally agreed prediction models do not exist, the method
adopted should be carefully described in the acoustician’s report' and that 'when
available, prediction models accepted by relevant authorities should be used'.
Where prediction through these methods is not possible, measurement will be
necessary using either a noise source similar to that proposed or, alternatively,
measurement of the actual noise from the installation (once installed); compliance
with the latter approach requires a written commitment to appoint a suitably
qualified acoustician to carry out the required measurements post-installation, and a
further commitment to attenuate the noise source in compliance with criteria 4 and 5
of BREEAM (if proved necessary by the measurements).
CN5 Untreated This assessment issue does not apply to buildings designed to be untreated, i.e.
buildings where internal spaces will not be serviced by heating, ventilation or air-conditioning
systems and therefore have no noise generating plant. Examples of such building
types could include industrial warehouse storage.
Methodology
None.
Evidence
Noise-sensitive area
Landscapes or buildings where the occupiers are likely to be sensitive to noise created by the new plant installed in the
assessed building, including:
1. Residential areas
2. Hospitals, health centres, care homes, doctor’s surgeries etc.
3. Schools, colleges and other teaching establishments
4. Libraries
5. Places of worship
6. Wildlife areas, historic landscapes, parks and gardens
7. Located in an Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB) or near a Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI)
8. Any other development that can be considered noise-sensitive.
Suitably qualified acoustician

An individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body.
The primary professional body for acousticians in the UK is the Institute of Acoustics.
Other information
None.
1BS 7445:1 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 1: Guide to quantities and procedures, British
Standards Institute, 2003.
BS 7445:2 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 2: Guide to the acquisition of data pertinent to land
use, British Standards Institute, 1991.
BS 7445:3 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 3: Guide to application to noise limits, British Standards
Institute, 1991.
2BS 8233 Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings, Code of practice, British Standards Institute, 1999.
Innovation ■ Innovation
Innovation
Category overview
Fully fitted 10% Shell only 10% Shell and core 10%
Summary
The innovation category provides opportunities for exemplary performance and innovation to be recognised that are not
included within, or go beyond the requirements of the credit criteria. This includes exemplary performance credits, for where
the building meets the exemplary performance levels of a particular issue. It also includes innovative products and processes
for which an innovation credit can be claimed, where they have been approved by BRE Global Ltd.
The cost-saving benefits of innovation are fostered and facilitated by helping encourage, drive and publicise accelerated
uptake of innovative measures.
Innovation BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Inn 01 Innovation
10 No
Aim
To support innovation within the construction industry through the recognition of sustainability related benefits which are not
rewarded by standard BREEAM issues.
Assessment criteria
The following is required to demonstrate compliance;
Up to a maximum of 10 credits are available in aggregate from a combination of the following:
Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues

1. Where the building demonstrates exemplary performance by meeting defined exemplary level performance criteria in
one or more of following BREEAM assessment issues:
a. Man 01 Project brief and design (Simple buildings only)
b. Man 03 Responsible construction practices
c. Man 05 Aftercare
d. Hea 01 Visual comfort
e. Hea 02 Indoor air quality
f. Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions
g. Wat 01 Water consumption
h. Mat 01 Life cycle impacts
i. Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials
j. Wst 01 Construction-site waste management
k. Wst 02 Recycled aggregates
l. Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change
m. Pol 03 Surface water run-off (Simple buildings only).
Please refer to the relevant BREEAM issue within this scheme document for details of the exemplary level performance
assessment criteria.
Approved innovations
2. One innovation credit can be awarded for each innovation application approved by BRE Global, where the building
complies with the criteria defined within an Approved Innovation Application Form.

None
■ Inn 01 Innovation Innovation
Compliance notes
General
CN1 Exemplary level of Refer to the compliance notes within the individual assessment issues that contain
performance exemplary performance levels.
Methodology
Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues
For information on the methodology for exemplary level credits refer to the 'Methodology' section of the relevant BREEAM
issues.
Approved innovations
Innovation applications can be submitted to BRE Global by a licensed BREEAM assessor using the formal Approved Innovation
Application Form (available from the BREEAM Assessor extranet).
Evidence
1 As defined within existing BREEAM As defined within existing BREEAM issues.

issues.
2 A copy of the Approved Innovation As per interim design stage

Application Form AND
AND Relevant documentary evidence confirming that the
A copy of the Innovation project has achieved or installed the approved
Application Report stating the innovation as described and quantified within the
application outcome as ‘approved’ approved innovation application form.
AND
Relevant documentary evidence
demonstrating specification of the
approved innovation.
Innovation BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Approved innovation
Any new technology, design, construction, operation, maintenance or demolition method or process that can be
shown to improve the sustainability performance of a building and is of demonstrable benefit to the wider industry in
a manner that is not covered elsewhere in BREEAM. In addition the innovation has been approved by BRE Global in
accordance with its published BREEAM Innovation credit procedures.
Other information
Applying for innovation credits

Refer to the BREEAM Innovation section documents available from the BREEAM assessor Extranet for more information on
BREEAM Innovation credit eligibility criteria, application process, application fees and previously approved innovations.
Appendices ■ Appendix
Appendices
Appendix BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope
and Healthcare building types

BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been tailored specifically for the assessment of the following healthcare
establishments:
1. Teaching/specialist hospitals
2. General acute hospitals
3. Community and mental health hospitals
4. GP surgeries
5. Health centres and clinics
The table below provides a description of the typical facilities and services offered by and forming a part of one of the above
healthcare buildings. Where a healthcare development does not fit one of the building type descriptions below, BREEAM New
Construction can still be used to assess that building type provided it falls within the building type category descriptions
outlined in the scope section of this document. Where it does not fall in to one of these categories, the project will require the
development of bespoke assessment criteria.
Typical facilities and services
Typical Facility Service

descriptions
Teaching In patient Diagnostic and treatment services for physical

hospital High concentration of energy- intensive healthcare together with specialist services
Specialist engineering services and specialist equipment Consultant-led
acute
hospital
General In patient Diagnostic and treatment services for physical

acute Medium concentration of energy- intensive healthcare
hospital engineering services and specialist equipment Consultant-led
Community In patient Limited diagnostic and treatment services for

hospital Basic engineering services and equipment physical healthcare
Cottage Nurse- or GP-led
hospital Care services for physical healthcare
Mental Nurse- or GP-led
health Mental health and learning disability services
hospital/unit Consultant- or nurse-led
Learning
disability unit
GP surgery Non in patient Primary care consultation

Use typically 50-65 hours/week GP-led
Basic engineering services and equipment
Health Non in patient Primary care and mental health

centre/clinic Use typically 35-45 hours/week Nurse/dental/visiting consultant or specialist
Basic engineering services and equipment
■ Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types Appendix
Other ‘Healthcare’ associated building types

BREEAM New Construction can also be used to assess the following:
1. Ambulance trust buildings (‘Other buildings’ type)

2. Residential care homes and staff residential accommodation (Multi-residential accommodation building type)
3. Non-patient building types e.g. offices, laboratories, storage buildings (as listed in the table of building types in the
scope section).
Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope
and Education buildings

BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been tailored specifically for the assessment of the following educational
establishments:
1. Pre-school, including;
a. Nursery schools1
b. Children’s centres2
2. Schools, including;
a. Primary schools
b. Secondary schools (including those containing sixth form colleges)
c. All age range schools (including education or teaching buildings at boarding schools)
d. Academies
e. Non-acute special educational needs (SEN) schools
3. Sixth form colleges
4. Further and higher education or vocational colleges and Institutions, including;
a. Teaching facility
b. Learning Resource Centre
c. Laboratory/workshop/studio
d. Student union
e. Or a mixture of the above types.
All age range schools and academies

All age range schools and academies can typically be assessed using the guidance/criteria applicable to secondary schools. In
some cases, for these types of education establishments, it may be more appropriate to use the assessment criteria for
further education colleges or primary schools. For example, where an all age range school or academy will contain functional
or operational areas more akin to further or higher education buildings or where the needs of the accommodation and
occupiers are similar to those of primary or early years pupils. Based on the information received about the proposed
building, the BREEAM assessor should determine the most appropriate BREEAM criteria to apply in the assessment of the
building.
Acute special educational needs (SEN) schools

Acute special educational needs (SEN) refers to children with severe disabilities/learning difficulties that prevent them from
interpreting their surroundings without feeling anxious or distressed. These children can become easily distracted and/or
over-stimulated. This group of pupils mainly include children with a behavioural, emotional or social difficulties (BEDS) and
children with communication and interaction disability (autistic spectrum disorder (ASD)).
This BREEAM scheme has not been specifically tailored to assess acute SEN schools. However assessment using the
methodology is still possible, except where highly specialised accommodation is provided. Acute SEN schools are therefore
defined as an 'Other' building type and BREEAM assessors carrying out assessments on schools for pupils with such needs will
need to consider carefully all the BREEAM issues that might be affected by the need to provide special facilities for such
building users, e.g. View out, Cyclist facilities, etc. Where it is not explicit within this scheme document for this building type, the
assessor will need to decide which, if any, building type assessment criteria is appropriate and apply accordingly, seeking
confirmation from BRE Global Ltd. on the application of alternative building criteria where appropriate to do so.
For more information on SEN please refer to Building Bulletin 102 Designing for disabled children with special educational
needs, published by the Department for Children Schools and Families (available from www.education.gov.uk)
■ Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings Appendix
Student residential accommodation

BREEAM New Construction can be used to assess boarding school residential and halls of residence accommodation
buildings. These types of building are classified as a multi-residential accommodation building type for the purpose of a
BREEAM assessment.
1Nursery school/education means full-time or part-time education suitable for children who have not attained compulsory
school age (whether provided at schools or elsewhere), i.e. facilities/buildings for the teaching of children who are between
the ages of two or three to five years old.
2Children’s centres are multi-agency service hubs where young children and their families can receive early education, full day
childcare, parental support and child and family health services, such as access to health visitors and health screening.
Children’s centres will often be allied to a local primary school, on or adjacent to the school site.
Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope
and Multi-residential buildings

BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 can be used to assess multi-occupancy residential buildings that are not suitable for
assessment under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH) in England, Wales and Northern Ireland, or under EcoHomes in
Scotland. The UK New Construction scheme provides a whole building assessment methodology which can also be applied to
buildings which contain dwellings assessed under the CSH, but also communal facilities within the same building, to allow
assessment of the whole building.
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 can be used to assess the following types of multi-residential buildings:
1. Student halls of residence

2. Key worker accommodation
3. Care homes that do not contain extensive or specialist medical facilities (limited consulting rooms and medical rooms
are acceptable)
4. Sheltered housing
5. Other multi-residential buildings which contain a mix of residential accommodation with communal areas such as some
military accommodation.
BREEAM Multi-residential and the Code for Sustainable Homes

BREEAM New Construction for non domestic buildings provides a whole building assessment methodology which can also be
applied to a building containing self-contained dwellings and communal facilities.
Where both a Code for Sustainable Homes and a BREEAM assessment are required, to avoid duplication of effort, evidence
collected for the purpose of a CSH assessment can be used toward demonstrating compliance with the equivalent BREEAM
assessment criteria and vice versa.
■ Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments Appendix
Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and
Shell and Core Project Assessments

Non-fitted, speculative new buildings (often referred to as shell only or shell and core buildings) can be assessed using the
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme.
The BREEAM New Construction version can be applied to fully fitted, shell only and shell and core building projects. This section
provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the application of BREEAM to shell only and shell and core projects.
A shell only or shell and core building project is defined as one where the developer’s scope of works is the design and
construction of the base building only, leaving a range of construction and fit-out works to be completed before the building
is able to be occupied. This may include some or all of the following elements: the structure, building envelope, core building
systems including building servicing strategy and installations (such as HVAC) or plant support for installation of such systems
and where present, fit-out of common areas. Often, shell and core projects will also be fitted out to a 'Category A' standard,
the scope of which varies between different developers, but often includes in addition the shell and core of the building the
provision of raised floors, suspended ceilings, extension of core services above ceilings across the lettable space, finishes to
the internal face of external and core walls and blinds. Upon completion, the whole building or space within the building is sold
or let to be fitted out as appropriate for occupation. The new owner(s) or tenant(s) will fit-out the building’s accommodation
in accordance with their corporate and operational needs, often referred to as a 'Category B' fit-out. These terms, while they
are widely used in the property sector, are not used within BREEAM as the scope of works that they refer to varies significantly
between developers making them not comparable.
In these projects, where areas of the development are not fully fitted, performance of the building and compliance with
BREEAM is verified based on the developer’s scope of works. This is measured using two standard project type options that in
turn define appropriate assessment criteria applicable to that project type. While some projects will differ to some extent
from the scope of these standard options, for the purpose of BREEAM, issues not included within the chosen option will be
excluded from the assessment, even where they are within the developer’s scope of works. This approach is necessary to
ensure clarity, consistency and comparability within the property market. A fully filterable list of criteria/issues based on each
individual projects scope would not enable comparability between BREEAM ratings, either in terms of performance
benchmarking or promotional/publicity purposes.
Defining the shell and core project type

For the purpose of defining the scope of assessment and BREEAM certification labelling, a new construction project that is not
fully fitted out can be categorised in to one of the following types:
Option 1: Shell Only Assessment and certification

Option 2: Shell and Core Assessment and certification
Option 1: Shell Only Assessment

This assessment and certification option is available where the developer’s scope of works covers new build works to the
fabric, sub and superstructure of the building only, including:
External walls, windows, doors (external), roof, core internal walls, structural floors
Hard and soft landscaping areas (where present and within scope of works)
Option 2: Shell and Core Assessment

This option is available where the developer's scope of works covers shell works, as described in Option 1, plus core building
services. Core building services relates to the installation of central or communal transportation systems, water systems, fit-
out of common areas, central mechanical and electrical systems including HVAC, but without local fitting of systems within
tenant areas. The systems will typically be centralised with capped off distribution to each tenanted area (for future
connection as part of a tenant’s fit-out works). This does not include the full scope of a typical Category A fit-out, due to the
fact that the specification of items such as ceiling finishes, raised floors and the zoning of local services above the lettable floor
area and other Category A works are not typically finalised until the space undergoes final fit-out according to the tenant's
specification and are liable to change. These items are, therefore, excluded from a shell and core assessment.
The Shell Only (option 1) and Shell and Core (option 2) Assessment options are available for all building types
For these assessments, the scope of works being undertaken must be specified clearly and provided for the accurate
certification of the project.
Assessing new build shell and core projects

In the main, the assessment process and application of a majority of the BREEAM assessment issues will be unaffected by the
scope of new build shell only or shell and core works. This is because most of the BREEAM criteria are concerned with impacts,
processes and management procedures that occur with any new build development, regardless of whether it is a shell and
core or fully fitted project. However, several BREEAM issues and criterion are tailored for the assessment of fitted out buildings
such as acoustic performance. Therefore, additional guidance is given within the assessment issues in the form of a
compliance note. These shell and core compliance notes confirm whether the assessment issue applies to a shell only and/or
shell and core project and, where it does apply, how to assess it for the options/project types defined above.
summarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues and their applicability to shell only and shell and core
projects.
Shell and Core Building Assessments and minimum BREEAM standards

All minimum BREEAM standards remain applicable to Shell and Core Building Assessments for the developers scope of works.
The only exception is minimum standards for BREEAM issues/credits/criteria which are not assessed in a shell only or shell and
core project (confirmed by the shell and core Compliance Note in each relevant issue).
Applicability of the Shell and Core Assessment type to Simple

Buildings Assessments
Shell only and shell and core assessment criteria cannot be applied to Simple Building Assessments. For a project to be
assessed as a Simple Building, it must be clear that the building can be classified as a ‘simple’. At the shell only or shell and core
stage, it is not possible to determine whether a building will be ‘simple’ therefore these assessment options are not applicable
to Simple Building Assessments.
BREEAM UK New Construction and the BREEAM UK Refurbishment

and Fit-out scheme
At the time of writing, BRE Global Ltd are developing a standalone BREEAM scheme to cover the refurbishment and fit-out
stages of the life cycle for non-domestic buildings. Under this scheme, only criteria that fall within the scope of the tenant's fit-
out works would be assessed.
The BREEAM UK New Construction and BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes have been designed to work together
to allow shell and core projects assessed under the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme that undergo first fit-out, to then
seek fully fitted status by seeking an assessment under the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme. The diagram
below outlines the relationship between UK New Construction and Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes.
When launched, certified assessments of New Construction shell only or shell and core projects can choose to assess fit–out
related issues under the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme to gain a fully fitted out rating status under BREEAM
UK New Construction 2014.
By having a two part assessment for the shell and core projects, where the shell and core parts and the fit–out parts are
assessed separately, BREEAM provides a flexible yet robust way of assessing shell and core projects.
The diagram in Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and Shell and Core Project Assessments outlines the relationship
between the UK New Construction and the UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes and the assessment options that should
be sought to seek fully fitted status.
Figure 3 UK New Construction and the UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes and the assessment options
The scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction - options 1 and 2 - and BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes have
been defined using recognised industry definitions, such as the British Council for Offices definition of Category A and B fit-out
as far as possible. However, in practice, there is no fixed industry standard definition of refurbishment and fit-out works, with
a large degree of variability from project to project. Due to this variety and also the need to ensure a consistent definition is
used for assessment comparability purposes, the BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme has defined a number of
optional assessment 'parts'. The scope for each of these assessment parts have largely been based upon setting boundaries
around the key physical parameters of the building. Under that scheme, clients are able to seek assessment certification
against any combination of parts according to the scope of their refurbishment and fit-out works, therefore providing a
highly flexible scheme.
The scope of Part 1 of the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme aligns with option 1, the shell only option of the
BREEAM UK New Construction scheme. Parts 1 and 2 combined align with option 2, the shell and core option of the BREEAM
UK New Construction scheme. Parts 3 and 4 then cover the scope of work that is covered under the tenants fit-out works and
would, therefore, be used to 'top up' a Shell and Core Assessment post fit-out.
Assessment types BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme:
Part 1 - Fabric and structure: external envelope including walls, roof, windows and floor
Part 2 - Core services: centralised mechanical and electrical plant including heating, cooling and ventilation
Part 3 - Local services: localised services including lighting, local heating, cooling and ventilation
Part 4 - Interior design: interior finishes, furniture, fittings and equipment
Further information on the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme can be found at www.breeam.com.
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues: shell only and shell and core project applicability
Ref Issue Applicable to shell and core option type
Option 1: Shell Option 2: Shell and

only core
Management
Man 01 Project brief Y Y
Man 02 Life cycle costing and service life planning Y Y
Man 03 Responsible construction practices Y Y
Man 04 Commissioning and handover N Y
Man 05 Aftercare N N
Hea 01 Visual comfort Y Y
Hea 02 Indoor air quality Y Y
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories N N
Hea 04 Thermal comfort N Y
Hea 05 Acoustic performance Y Y
Hea 06 Safety and security Y Y
Energy
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Y Y
Ene 02 Energy monitoring N Y
Ene 03 Energy efficient external lighting Y Y
Ene 04 Low carbon design Y Y
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage systems N Y
Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems N Y
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems N N

only core
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment N N
Ene 09 Drying space N N
Transport
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Y Y
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Y Y
Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Y Y
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Y Y
Tra 05 Travel plan Y Y
Water
Wat 01 Water consumption N Y
Wat 02 Water monitoring Y Y
Wat 03 Water leak detection and prevention Y Y
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment (process) Y Y
Materials
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Y Y
Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection Y Y
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials Y Y
Mat 04 Insulation Y Y
Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience Y Y
Mat 06 Material efficiency Y Y
Waste

only core
Wst 01 Construction waste management Y Y
Wst 02 Recycled aggregates Y Y
Wst 03 Operational waste Y Y
Wst 04 Speculative floor finishes N Y
Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change Y Y
Wst 06 Functional adaptability Y Y
LE 01 Site selection Y Y
LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological Y Y

features
LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology Y Y
LE 04 Enhancing site ecology Y Y
LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity Y Y
Pollution
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants N Y
Pol 02 NO emissions from heating source N Y

x
Pol 03 Surface water run-off Y Y
Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution Y Y
Pol 05 Noise attenuation N Y
Innovation Y Y
■ Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction Simple Building Appendix
Assessments
Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New
Construction Simple Building Assessments

The BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 version can be applied to both complex and less complex building projects. This
section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the application of BREEAM to less complex i.e. simple building
projects.
A Simple Building is defined as one where the building services are predominantly of limited capacity and local in their delivery,
largely independent of other systems in the building fabric and avoid complex control systems.
Where the building includes complex services, systems or functions/facilities including, but not limited to those listed below, it
cannot be defined or assessed as a Simple Building and a full BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment should be
carried out:
Air-conditioning (with the exception of local split cooling systems, see Building Services section).
Full mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, and complex passive ventilation (see Building Services section for
guidance on permitted systems).
Renewable energy sources, with the exception of on-site micro-generation technologies1 or connection to existing
community / district heating or cooling systems.
Laboratories and buildings that contain either fume cupboards and/or safety cabinets and/or containment areas.
Major water-consuming plant or functions such as swimming/hydrotherapy/research pools and/or vehicle
wash/irrigation systems.
Cold storage plant and enclosures, with the exception of domestic scale refrigeration
Escalators and/or travelling walkways.
The list above is not exhaustive, but serves to indicate the types of services and systems that describe a more complex
building solution and therefore would not be present within a simple building. Examples of buildings which could fall under the
BREEAM UK New Construction definition of Simple Building (depending on the remit of the works) include: offices, educational
and community buildings, GP surgeries, basic industrial units, and extensions to existing buildings.
The following section describes some of the additional features a Simple Building may have. These descriptions can be used
to support the classification of a building for the purpose of a BREEAM Simple Building Assessment.
Building type
The following building services and systems can be assessed under Simple Buildings:
Heating
Space and/or hot water heating is provided by simple systems only, e.g. systems with total capacity of less than 100kW.
Cooling
Small systems, such as local split cooling systems to service single rooms or areas for occasional or seasonal use, with a total
system capacity of less than 12kW2 and a total collective refrigerant charge of less than 5kg.
Ventilation
1. Single sided / cross ventilation using windows, rooflights and/or trickle vents
2. Simple ‘bespoke’ passive solutions utilising wind driven or stack ventilation where:
a. The system does not serve multiple rooms or levels
b. The system does not use multiple (more than one) control dampers to control air flow
c. The system uses local standalone controls only and is not linked to a building management system that controls the
whole building ventilation strategy
3. Standalone ‘off the shelf’ natural / assisted natural ventilation solutions where:
b. The system uses local standalone controls only and is not linked to a building management system that controls the
c. The system utilises only basic components e.g. low power fans, control dampers, filters
d. The product supplier/manufacturer does not recommend specialist commissioning i.e. no special training is required
to ensure the unit is commissioned correctly
4. Local mechanical ventilation where:
b. The system uses local standalone controls only and is not linked to a building management system that controls the
c. The central fan / air handling unit (AHU) utilises only basic components e.g. fan, filter, basic air to air heat recovery, and
only requires a single phase electrical supply
d. The system does provide any form of heating, cooling or humidification to the supply air (except via basic air to air
heat recovery)
e. The system does not comprise multiple duct work branches that require proportional balancing
f. The system is not a Variable Air Volume (VAV) system i.e. one which comprises variable performance fans and
complex control systems that would require specialist commissioning
g. The central fan/AHU supplier / manufacturer does not recommend specialist commissioning i.e. no special training is
required to ensure the unit is commissioned correctly
Additional Requirements
Domestic scale sanitary, kitchen and laundry facilities with only basic connections for hot and cold water provision and
drainage.
Building services commissioning required will be limited in complexity.3
Typical profile of a Simple Building

The cost and size of a Simple Building is likely to differ, so BREEAM uses the complexity of the building function and its services
to determine whether it can be assessed using the BREEAM Simple Buildings criteria.
If a particular building does not meet the profile described above, but exhibits features which suggest it could be classified as
a Simple Building, review your scheme against this guidance and highlight these areas for further consideration to BREEAM
Technical Support by contactingbreeamtechnicalcs@bre.co.uk for further advice and classification.
summarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues, credits and criteria applicable to an assessment of a
'simple building'.
BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 issue applicability for Simple Building Assessments
Issue ID Criteria applicability to Simple Buildings Credits available Exemplary credits

available
No Simplified N/A
change
Management
Man 01 ✔ 2 2
Man 02 ✔ 1 0
Assessments

available
No Simplified N/A
change
Man 03 ✔ 4 2
Man 04 ✔ 2 0
Man 05 ✔ 3 0
Hea 01 ✔ (3 to 6) building type dependent 1
Hea 02 ✔ (2 to- 3) building type dependent 2
Hea 03 ✔ N/A N/A
Hea 04 ✔ 3 0
Hea 05 ✔ N/A N/A
Hea 06 ✔ 2 0
Energy
Ene 01 ✔ 12 5
Ene 02 ✔ (1 to 2) building type dependent 0
Ene 03 ✔ 1 0
Ene 04 ✔ 3 0
Ene 05 ✔ N/A N/A
Ene 06 ✔ 2 0
Ene 07 ✔ N/A N/A
Ene 08 ✔ 2 0
Ene 09 ✔ 1 0
Transport

available
No Simplified N/A
change
Tra 01 ✔ (Up to 5) building type 0

dependent
Tra 02 ✔ (1 to- 2) building type dependent 0
Tra 03 ✔ (1 to- 3) building type dependent 0
Tra 04 ✔ N/A N/A
Tra 05 ✔ N/A N/A
Water
Wat 01 ✔ 5 1
Wat 02 ✔ 1 0
Wat 03 ✔ 2 0
Wat 04 ✔ N/A N/A
Materials
Mat 01 ✔ (Up to 6) building type 3

dependent
Mat 02 ✔ 1 0
Mat 03 ✔ 4 1
Mat 04 ✔ 1 0
Mat 05 ✔ 1 0
Mat 06 ✔ 1 0
Waste
Wst 01 ✔ 4 1
Wst 02 .✔ 1 1
Wst 03 ✔ 1 0
Assessments

available
No Simplified N/A
change
Wst 04 ✔ 1 0
Wst 05 ✔ 1 1
Wst 06 ✔ 1 0
LE 01 ✔ 2 0
LE 02 ✔ 2 0
LE 03 ✔ 2 0
LE 04 ✔ 2 0
LE 05 ✔ N/A N/A
Pollution
Pol 01 ✔ N/A N/A
Pol 02 ✔ (1 to 3) building type dependent 0
Pol 03 ✔ 5 1
Pol 04 ✔ 1 0
Pol 05 ✔ N/A N/A
1Micro-generation is defined under the Energy Act 2004 as < 45KWth (micro-heat) and <50KWe (micro-electricity). Micro-
generation can refer to community scale energy which may fall within these capacities
2To refer to the total for more than one unit where applicable. Multi-split cooling systems and VRF systems cannot be
assessed under the Simple Buildings criteria
3Typically, complex systems are systems that involve interaction between a number of components to ensure proper
operation. They will usually require specific knowledge and expertise to be designed and installed, and they may depend on
other systems such as control systems to work effectively
Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New
Construction certificates
Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates for the interim Design Stage and final Post Construction Stage are
provided in Figure 4 and Figure 5 respectively.
Figure 4 Example of Interim Certificate at Design Stage
■ Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates Appendix
Figure 5 Example of Final Certificate at Post Construction Stage
Changes BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014
BREEAM New Construction 2014 Technical Manual -
Schedule of Changes to the Scheme Document

The manual may, be revised and re-issued from time to time. A re-issue of a BREEAM scheme document (SD) version may be
required for the following reasons:
1. To clarify: criteria; compliance notes; or schedule of evidence requirements

2. To update a reference or relevant definition
3. To update or amend calculation procedures
4. To amend the scope to allow for the inclusion of additional building types.
This document provides details of any additions or changes made to the scheme that have resulted in a re-issue of the
Technical Manual. It is important to note that in general a re-issue does not result in changes, deletions or additions to the main
assessment criteria or assessment issues. Fundamental changes to assessment criteria are typically made as part of a formal
scheme update, resulting in a new BREEAM scheme version.

SD5076 5.0 (current) 23/08/2016
SD5076 4.1 09/03/2016
SD5076 4.0 15/10/2015
SD5076 3.0 26/01/2015
SD5076 2.0 07/08/2014
SD5076 1.0 27/05/2014
Where client or assessor has been referencing an issue of the Technical Manual that has subsequently been superseded, they
may either continue to use and reference the superseded issue of the Technical Manual or, if deemed appropriate by the
assessor, switch to the latest issue. When submitting their certification report the BREEAM assessor must clarify which issue of
the Technical Manual they have used to complete the formal assessment of the building. If two different issues were used
throughout the course of the assessment, reference the latest issue used.
The table below outlines changes and additions made to the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 Technical Manual. Changes
made to issue 5.0 are highlighted throughout the Scheme Document.
Key (Type of
Change)
A The 'A' signifies either: an addition, insertion, alteration or deletion to the scheme document which does
not directly affect the assessment criteria, calculation procedures or schedule of evidence (and therefore
assessment of a building).
C The 'C' signifies either: an addition, insertion, deletion or alteration to the scope, assessment criteria,
compliance note, evidential requirements or relevant definitions.
BREEAM New Construction 2014 Technical Manual - Schedule of Changes to the Scheme Changes
Document ■
Issue 5.0
Section Issue/section Identifier Type Specifics of change
Scope Types of buildings Bespoke A Updated reference to the BREEAM Bespoke

that can be Process Guidance Note.
assessed using the
BREEAM UK New
Construction 2014
scheme version
Scope Part new-build, Option 2 C Updated text explaining the Bespoke BREEAM
part refurbishment combined New Construction and Refurbishment
projects and Fit-out assessment.
Scoring Calculating a Process A Added text to clarify the maximum BREEAM score
building's BREEAM available.
rating
Scoring Calculating a Process A Updated example of scores and minimum

building's standards.
BREEAM rating
Evidence BREEAM Evidence Content A Updated the wording to describe the evidence
Principles principles.
Management Man 01 Evidence A Corrected criteria reference.
Management Man 04 Criteria C Wording clarification and additional text referring

to compliance notes.
Management Man 04 Compliance C New compliance note on alternatives to

Note Thermographic Survey.
Management Man 04 Compliance C CN3: Updated compliance note to include

Note additional standards.
Management Man 04 Compliance A CN3.3: Corrected the reference to CN3.4.

Note
Management Man 04 Additional A Added definition of Specialist Commissioning

Information Manager.
Health and Hea 01 Assessment C Updated wording to clarify the criteria.

wellbeing Criteria
Health and Hea 01 Assessment C Updated reference to the latest version of the
wellbeing Criteria relevant standard.
Health and Hea 02 Assessment A Corrected numbering within the criteria.

wellbeing Criteria
Health and Hea 02 Checklist and A Corrected typographical error.

wellbeing Tables
Health and Hea 04 Relevant A Removed duplicate definitions.

wellbeing Definitions
Health and Hea 05 Relevant A Updated definition of Acoustically Sensitive

wellbeing Definitions Rooms.
Health and Hea 06 Compliance C New compliance note for speculative projects.
wellbeing Note
Health and Hea 06 Relevant C Updated Relevant Definitions and Other

wellbeing Definitions Information.
Energy Ene 01 Compliance A Updated compliance notes relevant to Option 2 -

Notes Shell and Core.
Energy Ene 02 Assessment A Slight change to order of wording.

Criteria
Energy Ene 04 Assessment A Updated wording to clarify the criteria.

Criteria
Energy Ene 04 Methodology C Updated wording to clarify Passive Design

Methodology.
Energy Ene 06 Compliance A CN3.2: Updated wording to clarify the compliance

Notes note.
Energy Ene 08 Assessment A Updated wording to clarify Section F.

Criteria
Transport Tra 01 Assessment A Updated Default Hours of Operation.

Criteria
Transport Tra 03 Methodology C Updated wording to clarify the methodology.
Transport Tra 05 Compliance A CN3.2: Corrected typographical error.

Notes
Document ■
Water Wat 01 Compliance A CN2: Updated wording for consistency.

Notes
Water Wat 03 Compliance A CN3.2: Corrected typographical error.

Notes
Water Wat 03 Compliance A CN4.1: Updated wording

Notes
Materials Mat 01 Evidence C Updated evidential requirements.
Materials Mat 02 Evidence A Updated wording of evidential requirements.
Materials Mat 03 Assessment A Added examples to clarify Item 7 of Table 44.

Criteria
Materials Mat 03 Evidence A Corrected formatting of evidential requirements

table.
Materials Mat 06 Additional C Updated standard BS 8895.

Information
Waste Wst 02 Assessment A Corrected typographical error within Criterion 5.

Criteria
Waste Wst 02 Further A Updated guidance.

Guidance
Ecology LE 01 Relevant A Added text to the definition of Previously

Definitions occupied land.
Ecology LE 02 Other A Updated reference to Guidance Note GN 13.

Information
Pollution Pol 01 Other A Updated reference for Table 61.

Information
Pollution Pol 03 Assessment A Added hyperlinks to Table 63.

Criteria
Pollution Pol 05 Bookmark A Updated title of bookmark.
Schedule of Schedule of Highlighted A Updated text to clarify highlighted changes.

Changes Changes to the Changes
Scheme Document
Issue 4.1
Introduction Ensuring quality and Update A Replacement with new ISO standards.
consistency
Schedule of Issue 4.0 Several A Changes have been made to the 'schedule of
changes changes' for the version 4.0 reissue, which will
affect the following issues:
Man 02
Hea 03
Ene 04
Appendix D
Issue 4.0
Scope Scope of BREEAM Spelling A Minor corrections to text and format.

UK New
Construction 2014
scheme version.
Scope Types of buildings Part new- A Additional text regarding the rules for assessing
that can be build part part new-build, part refurbishment projects.
assessed using the refurbishment
BREEAM UK New projects
Construction 2014
scheme version.
Management Man 02 Criteria C Wording clarification to make the criteria easier to

interpret and apply correctly.
Management Man 02 Issue C Changes across the issue within criteria and
compliance notes.
Management Man 04 Compliance A CN1: Clarification of criteria applicability by

note assessment type.
Management Man 04 Compliance A CN3: Added standards references

note
Document ■
Health and Hea 01 Compliance C New compliance note on internal and external
wellbeing note lighting created from text moved from the
Additional information section.
Health and Hea 01 Checklists and C Table 10: Criteria for internal association or atrium
wellbeing tables reinstated.
Health and Hea 01 Criteria A Table 12: Criteria for 1 credit for Higher Education
wellbeing buildings reinstated.
Health and Hea 01 Criteria A Table 15: Criteria for minimum point daylight
wellbeing factor for retail sales areas clarified.
Health and Hea 01 Compliance C CN1.1: Glare control credit is not applicable to shell
wellbeing note only and shell and core assessments.
Health and Hea 01 Compliance C CN3.1: Clarification of issue criteria for retail sales
wellbeing note areas.
Health and Hea 02 Additional A Retail shop floors added to the list of excluded
wellbeing information areas for potential for natural ventilation.
Health and Hea 02 Assessment A Criteria 13: Clarification that CIBSE AM10 sets
wellbeing criteria requirements not recommendations.
Health and Hea 02 Assessment A Units for formaldehyde concentration corrected.

wellbeing criteria
Health and Hea 02 Compliance C New compliance note relating to guidance note:
wellbeing note GN22 BREEAM recognised alternative VOC testing
schemes.
Health and Hea 02 Checklists and C Amended compliant testing standard.

wellbeing tables
Health and Hea 03 Compliance C CN3: Updated reference to CLEAPPs publications.

wellbeing note
Health and Hea 04 Other A Hyperlink 'Prometheus research project' updated.

wellbeing information
Health and Hea 04 Compliance C CN1: This issue is not applicability for shell only
wellbeing note assessments.
Health and Hea 05 Compliance A CN1.1: Clarified requirements related to shell and
wellbeing note core assessments.
Health and Hea 05 Additional C Clarified the definition of a compliant test body.
wellbeing information
Health and Hea 05 Checklist and C Table 19: Criteria for sound insulation updated
wellbeing tables a with reference to BB93: Acoustic design of
schools.
Health and Hea 05 Compliance A CN4: Updated with reference to BB93: Acoustic
wellbeing note design of schools.
Health and Hea 05 Compliance C CN5: Clarified criteria applicable to multi-

wellbeing note residential assessments in Scotland.
Health and Hea 05 Additional C Additional text in order to clarify the definition of a
wellbeing information compliant test body.
Energy Ene 01 Assessment A Table 25: Removed misleading reference in

criteria minimum standard column referring to pass,
good and very good ratings.
Energy Ene 01 Compliance A CN1: Corrected reference to Table 25.

note
Energy Ene 01 Compliance A CN1.1: Clarified requirements for shell and core
note assessments.
Energy Ene 01 Compliance C CN5: Scotland regulations standard updated to

note add: Technical Handbook 2015 Non Domestic -
Energy, and note regarding using 2010 or 2015
building regulations were applicable.
Energy Ene 01 Additional A Minor edit to title of publication to align with CIBSE
information TM54 publication.
Energy Ene 01 Relevant A Hyperlinks update to align with new Scottish

definitions Government website.
Energy Ene 01 Additional A Changes to update text regarding the Scottish

information Technical Handbook 2015.
Energy Ene 04 Compliance A Clarification on Shell only requirements for criteria

Note 1 to 3.
Energy Ene 05 Compliance C CN3: Clarified criteria does not apply to are self
note contained units, that are not connected to building
cooling systems.
Document ■
Energy Ene 06 Assessment A Removed duplicated criteria: 'Where the use of

criteria regenerative drives is demonstrated to save
energy, they are specified."
Energy Ene 06 Other C Publication update regarding Energy performance

information for lifts, escalators and moving walks.
Deleted text regarding published, reviewed and
expected publication.
Energy Ene 07 Compliance C CN3: Publication updated from "Building Bulletin

note 88" to "G9 Fume Cupboards in Schools - Revision
of DfEE Building Bulletin 88" and clarified scope.
Energy Ene 08 Checklists and A Added reference to CN3 in Ref H

table
Energy Ene 08 Compliance C CN3: Corrected, Ref A changed to Ref H.

note
Transport Tra 01 Other A Table 30: Corrected default school hours from
information 7:30 to 22:00 to 07:30 to 10:00.
Transport Tra 03 Compliance A CN1.1: Clarified that it is applicable to both shell

note only and shell and core assessments.
Water Wat 01 Compliance C New CN1.2: added on minimum standard for shell
Water Wat 02 Compliance C New CN1.2: added on minimum standard for shell
Materials Mat 01 Methodology A Amended reference to 'Green Guide Calculator' to

'Responsible Sourcing of Materials' search tool and
text corrections changing 'impact' to 'mass'.
Materials Mat 06 Compliance A CN3.1: Corrected 'integrated' to 'information'.

note
Waste Wst 02 Assessment A Criterion 1: reinstated reference to Table 54'.

criteria
Waste Wst 05 Assessment A Exemplary level criteria Hea 04 Thermal comfort

criteria corrected reference to criterion 6.
Waste Wst 05 Assessment A Abbreviated titles.

criteria -Titles
Waste Wst 05 Compliance C CN1: Clarified criteria applicability for shell only'
note and shell and core' assessments.
Land Use and LE 01 Assessment C Criterion 1 clarified.

Ecology criteria
Land Use and LE 01 Relevant C Amended reference from contaminated land

Ecology definitions 'specialist' to: contaminated land 'professional'.
/References
Pollution Pol 01 Methodology A Added extra bracket to Refrigerant loss system

retirement formula. Removed extra % sign from
RefRecEff and S2 values (default values after
formulae).
Pollution Pol 04 Assessment C Publication updated from "ILE Technical Report 5 –

criteria The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements" to:
"PLG05 The brightness of Illuminated
Advertisements".
Appendix C BREEAM Multi-res Content A Typing error removed.

and the Code for
Sustainable
Homes.
Appendix D Table on shell only Content A Updated table.

and shell and core
project applicability
Appendix D BREEAM UK New Part new- A Inclusion of all building types for Shell Only and Shell
Construction and build part and Core buildings.
the BREEAM UK refurbishment
Refurbishment and projects
Fit-out scheme
Types of buildings
that can be
assessed using the
BREEAM UK New
Construction 2014
scheme version.
Document ■
Issue 3.0
All technical All Several A Minor corrections to text and formatting.

issues
All technical All Compliance A Numbering format redefined for 'General' and
issues note 'Building type specific' compliance notes.
numbering
Introduction About this scheme Category A Removal of third and fourth paragraphs which
document description refer to the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-
out 2014 Scheme.
Introduction About this scheme Category A Amendment of 'England technical manual' to

document description 'UK technical manual'.
Introduction When and how to Category A Replacement of 'Accredited Professional' with

engage with the description 'Sustainability Champion' in the first and last
BREEAM UK New paragraphs.
Construction scheme
Introduction How to use the Scheme A Addition of 'Introduction' as first part.

BREEAM UK New document
Construction Scheme parts
Scope Type of buildings Table 2 C Addition of Visitor Centres building type.
Scope Mixed use Category A Location of the Guidance Note GN10 'on the
developments/Similar description BREEAM Extranet' added.
building types
Scoring and Minimum standards Table 4 A Amendment of 'Criterion 9' to 'Criterion 10' for
rating the Man 04 Excellent and Outstanding rating
levels.
The BREEAM Evidence principles Category A Reference to Table 8 added.

evidential description
requirements
The BREEAM Robustness of Table 9 A Amendment of Table 9 title to 'General

evidential Evidence evidence types'.
requirements
Management Man 01 Compliance A CN3.1 Amendment of 'See criteria 9 to 13' to

note 'See criteria 9 to 12'.
Management Man 01 Relevant A Reworded the definition of 'Independent party'

definitions and clarification that AEDET is not the only tool
to use for Healthcare Buildings.
Management Man 01 Compliance A Rewording of CN3.2.

note
Management Man 03 Assessment A Amendment of reference to 'Criterion 7' in

Criteria criteria 9, 12 and 15 to 'Criterion 8'.
Management Man 03 Compliance C Criteria number references changed in CN2.

note
Management Man 03 Compliance C Removal of criteria number references in CN3.2.

note
Management Man 03 Relevant A Addition of 'Legally harvested and traded

definitions timber' definition and reference to the
definition located in Mat 03.
Management Man 03 Relevant A Amendment of 'a' to 'the' in the 'Dedicated off-

definitions site manufacturing or fabrication' definition.
Management Man 04 Compliance C Amendment of 'Testing and inspecting building

note fabric' in CN1 to 'Shell only' and 'Shell and core'
options.
Management Man 05 Assessment A Amendment of 'independent party' to

Criteria 'independent third party'.
Management Man 05 Assessment C Addition of missing criterion wording (4b)

Criteria under Criterion 4.
Health and Hea 01 Table 10 C For Courts, Industrial, Office, Prison buildings
wellbeing and all Other building types, removal of '(prison
buildings only)' from Internal association or
atrium area. .
Health and Hea 01 Table 12 C For Healthcare buildings, the Occupied patient's
wellbeing areas (dayrooms, wards) and consulting
rooms, Minimum daylight illuminance at worst
lit point lux level has been amended from '300'
to '90'. .
Document ■
Health and Hea 01 Table 12 A For 'Courts, Industrial, Office, Prison buildings
wellbeing and all Other building types, only 1 credit in total
is available. No additional credit is available for
meeting the 'All occupied spaces, unless
indicated in Relevant definitions' criteria.
Health and Hea 01 Table 15 C 'Table - 16' reference amended to 'Table - 10

wellbeing and Table - 11'.
Health and Hea 01 Compliance A Amendment of 'glare control criteria' to 'glare

wellbeing note control credit' in CN3.
Health and Hea 02 Compliance C Amendment of criteria references 'criteria 15

wellbeing note and 14' to 'criteria 13 and 14' in CN4.
Health and Hea 02 Relevant A Relevant definition for Containment Levels

wellbeing definitions added.
Health and Hea 04 Relevant A Replacement of 'TRY weather data files' with
wellbeing definitions 'DSY weather data files' in the definition of
'Projected climate change environment'.
Health and Hea 05 Table 23 A Removal of '(see Additional information

wellbeing section) from the 'Criteria' row.
Health and Hea 06 Relevant C Amendment of the definition of 'Suitably

wellbeing definitions Qualified Security Specialist (SQSS)'.
Energy Ene 01 Relevant C Addition of 'ground source heat pumps (GSHP)'

definitions in the definition of 'Low or zero carbon (LCZ)
technologies'.
Energy Ene 04 Compliance A Amendment of criteria references 'criteria 6 to

note 7' to 'criteria 7 and 8' in CN1 'LZC feasibility
study'.
Energy Ene 04 Compliance A Criteria references in CN1 amended. Free

note cooling, criteria ‘4 to 5’ changed to criteria ‘4 to
6’.
Energy Ene 06 Compliance C Amendment of CN 3.2 reference title and

note description.
Energy Ene 07 Compliance A Amendment of CN3 to clarify the building

note types that the issue is applicable.
Energy Ene 08 Compliance A CN4 text amended. Removed ‘including

note equipment used for medical purposes.’
Transport Tra 01 Relevant A Addition of '(Urban location)' to the definition

definitions title of 'Rural location'.
Transport Tra 03 Compliance C Addition of a new compliance note 'Phased

note developments'.
Transport Tra 03 Compliance A Amendment of 'Table - 33' to 'Table - 34' in CN

note 3.3.
Transport Tra 03 Methodology C Addition of a new section 'Provision of cycle

storage and facilities on site with multiple
buildings'.
Transport Tra 03 Relevant C Amendment of 'Compliant lockers' definition.

definitions
Water Wat 01 Relevant A Amendment to 'Effective flush volume'

definitions definition.
Water Wat 02 Compliance C CN2: Criterion 4 is not applicable to simple

note buildings.
Water Wat 03 Compliance A New text for last re-issue highlighted in CN4.2.
note
Materials Mat 03 Assessment A Correction of criteria numbering.

Criteria
Materials Mat 03 Assessment A Amendment of 'Table - 43' to 'Table - 44' in

Criteria Criterion 3.
Materials Mat 03 Compliance A Addition of Guidance Note number in CN3.5.

note
Materials Mat 03 Table 44 A Removal of two last sections of Table - 44

which refer to the Refurbishment and Fit-out
scheme.
Materials Mat 03 Relevant C Definition of 'Building Services' added.

definitions
Materials Mat 05 Table 50 A Amendment of numbering in 'Environmental

factors' section.
Waste Wst 02 Table 54 A Replacement of 'N/A' with '100%'.
Document ■
Land Use and LE 01 Relevant A 'Construction zone' definition amended to refer

Ecology definitions to Mat 02.
Land Use and LE 02 Assessment C Amendment of 'construction zone' to

Ecology Criteria, Table 'assessment zone'.
55,
Compliance
note
Land Use and LE 03 Relevant A Amendment of 'Assessment zone' definition to

Ecology definitions refer to LE 02.
Land Use and LE 03 Other A Updated reference 1 from 2011 to 2014

Ecology information edition.
Appendices Appendix D Category C Additional text to 'Defining the shell and core
description project type'
Appendices Appendix D Table C Amendment of 'Y' to 'N' in Wst 04 'Option 1:

Shell only'.
Appendices Appendix E Table 1 A Amendments to credits available and criteria

applicability.
Appendices All Several A Correction of numbering of Appendix tables

and update of the Table list.
Issue 2.0
All technical All Several A Minor corrections to text and formatting.

issues
Scope Types of Building Table 2 C Addition of Bespoke building type and

description.
Management Man 03 Assessment A Criteria numbering corrected.

criteria
Management Man 04 Assessment C Reworded criterion to clarify that criterion 2

criteria applies to the identification of a schedule of
appropriate standards for commissioning and
not conducting the commissioning. t
Management Man 04 Assessment C Added criterion 5 stating that first credit must be
criteria achieved for the second credit to be achieved.
Management Man 05 Assessment A Repeated criteria removed.

criteria
Health Category Overview Category A Number of credits available for Hea 05 corrected.
& Wellbeing summary
table
Health Hea 01 Table 15 and A Hyphen added to 'Single story.'

& Wellbeing 16
Health & Hea 01 Table 17 A Minor amendment to titles of columns.

Wellbeing
Health Hea 02 Table 18 A Amendment to formatting of table.

& Wellbeing
Health Hea 05 Table 19 A Capitalisation of 'Open Plan Teaching Spaces.'

& Wellbeing
Health Hea 05 Table 21 A Correction of 'BS 8233:20414' to 'BS

& Wellbeing 8233:2014.'
Health Hea 05 Table 22 A Amendment to capitalisation of 'First credit.''

& Wellbeing
Health Hea 06 Assessment A Capitalisation of official BREEAM terms in criteria

& Wellbeing criteria 11 - 13.
Health Hea 06 Assessment A Removal of abbreviated wording.

& Wellbeing criteria
Energy Ene 01 Compliance C CN1.2 wording amended for different countries.

note
Energy Ene 01 Compliance C Amending the word 'demand' to 'consumption.'

note
Energy Ene 01 Compliance A Amend capitalisation of 'installations', and 'off-

note set' to 'offset.'
Energy Ene 01 Compliance A Correction to the criteria referenced.

notes
Document ■
Energy Ene 01 Schedule of A Correction to the criteria referenced.

evidence
Energy Ene 01 Relevant C Definition for 'Minimum energy efficiency

definitions standards' included.
Energy Ene 01 Relevant A Tagging of text for Welsh version of guidance

definitions corrected. It was tagged for Northern Ireland.
Energy Ene 01 Relevant C Amendment of wording for 'Primary Energy' and

definitions 'Delivered Energy' definitions.
Energy Ene 07 Checklist and A Item A. Removed '1' from Table 27 to clarify that
tables compliance with criterion 5 does not enable
another credit to be awarded.
Energy Ene 08 Assessment C Amendment of the wording in criteria 2 and 3,

criteria replacing 'demand' with 'consumption.'
Transport Tra 04 Table 33 A Formatting of table amended.
Water Wat 03 Compliance C Compliance Note on multi-residential buildings

notes added.
Materials Mat 02 Compliance A Amendment of capitalisation of 'online.'

notes
Materials Mat 03 Methodology A Formatting of table in step 3 amended.
Materials Mat 03 Criteria A Correction to table references in criterion 3.
Materials Mat 03 Tables A Deletion of reference to table 45.
Materials Mat 06 Compliance C CN 4 added.

notes
Waste Wst 02 Exemplary C Criterion 6 amended.

criteria
Waste Wst 03 Compliance C CN3 country-specific wording amended.

notes
Appendices Appendix D Figure 3 C Amendment to Figure 3.
Appendices Appendix D Table C Amendment of table to show that Ene 02 is not

applicable to shell only buildings.
Appendices Appendix E Whole section C Rewording of Appendix.

NC 2014 Eng

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

NC 2014 Eng

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

blank page

Terms and conditions ■ Terms & conditions

Terms and conditions

Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only

© BRE Global Ltd 2014

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 5.0 – Issue Date: 23/08/2016 i

List of figures vii

About BRE Global Limited 1

About this Scheme Document 2

Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version 13

Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings 21

The BREEAM evidential requirements 29

Man 01 Project brief and design 38

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning 44

Man 03 Responsible construction practices 49

Man 04 Commissioning and handover 56

Health and Wellbeing 68

Hea 01 Visual comfort 70

Hea 02 Indoor air quality 87

Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories 101

Hea 04 Thermal comfort 104

Hea 05 Acoustic performance 111

Hea 06 Safety and security 125

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions 133

Ene 02 Energy monitoring 145

Ene 03 External lighting 152

Ene 04 Low carbon design 155

Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage 164

Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems 168

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems 172

Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment 178

Ene 09 Drying space 185

ii Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 5.0 – Issue Date: 23/08/2016

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility 189

Tra 02 Proximity to amenities 196

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities 200

Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity 209

Tra 05 Travel plan 216

Wat 01 Water consumption 220

Wat 02 Water monitoring 231

Wat 03 Water leak detection 235

Wat 04 Water efficient equipment 239

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts 243

Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection 259

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials 262

Mat 04 Insulation 273

Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience 277

Mat 06 Material efficiency 281

Wst 01 Construction waste management 286

Wst 02 Recycled aggregates 294

Wst 03 Operational waste 299

Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes 304

Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change 306

Wst 06 Functional adaptability 310

Land Use and Ecology 313

LE 01 Site selection 314

LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features 318

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology 324

LE 04 Enhancing site ecology 332

LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity 337

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants 343

Pol 02 NOx emissions 351

Pol 03 Surface water run-off 358